Vol.1 (CH 00 - CH 31)

737-600/700/800/900 TRAINING MANUAL
BQA
Buraq Air
YK791
Chapter
TABLE OF CONTENTS Section
Subject Subject Page
737 GENERAL -- INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 00-00-00 . . 2
RANGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
STRUCTURE DIMENSIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
FUSELAGE DIMENSIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
WING REFERENCE DIMENSIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
VERTICAL STABILIZER REFERENCE DIMENSIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
HORIZONTAL STABILIZER REFERENCE DIMENSIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
ZONE DIAGRAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
POWER PLANT INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
POWER PLANT ENGINE HAZARDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
FLIGHT CONTROL SURFACES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
DOORS INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
ENTRY DOOR EXTERIOR OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
ENTRY DOOR INTERIOR OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
FLIGHT COMPARTMENT PANELS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
MAIN INSTRUMENT PANELS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
GLARESHIELD PANELS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
P2 CENTER INSTRUMENT PANEL AND P9 FORWARD ELECTRONICS PANEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
CONTROL STAND . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
P8 AFT ELECTRONICS PANEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
P5 AFT OVERHEAD PANEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
P5 FORWARD OVERHEAD PANEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
AFT FLIGHT COMPARTMENT PANELS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
ELECTRONIC EQUIPMENT RACK - LOCATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
ELECTRONIC EQUIPMENT COMPARTMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
EE COMPARTMENT DOOR OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
ELECTRONIC EQUIPMENT RACK E1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
ELECTRONIC EQUIPMENT RACKS E2, E3, AND E4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
ELECTRONIC EQUIPMENT RACK E5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
ELECTRONIC EQUIPMENT RACK - E6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Page 1
ALTEON PROPRIETARY. Copyright. See title page for details
BQA
Buraq Air
YK791
Chapter
PROGRAM SWITCH MODULE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
LOADABLE SOFTWARE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
ANTENNA LOCATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
EXTERNAL POWER APPLICATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
APU FIRE PROTECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
APU OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
EQUIPMENT COOLING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
HYDRAULIC POWER OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
COMMUNICATION EQUIPMENT COMPONENT LOCATIONS - 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
COMMUNICATION EQUIPMENT COMPONENT LOCATIONS - 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
FLIGHT INTERPHONE SYSTEM OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
CREW CALL OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
SERVICE INTERPHONE SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
VHF COMMUNICATION SYSTEM OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
MAIN LANDING GEAR DOWNLOCK PIN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
NOSE LANDING GEAR DOWNLOCK PIN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
TOWING LEVER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
PARKING BRAKE SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
AIRPLANE TOWING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
TOWING OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
JACKING POINTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
FMCS CONTROL DISPLAY UNIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
ELECTRICAL POWER INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
ELECTRICAL POWER GENERAL DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
ELECTRICAL POWER COMPONENT LOCATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
ELECTRICAL METERS, BATTERY, AND GALLEY POWER MODULE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
GENERATOR DRIVE AND STANDBY POWER MODULE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
ELECTRICAL POWER - AC SYSTEMS, GENERATOR AND APU MODULE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
ELECTRICAL POWER DISTRIBUTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
ELECTRICAL POWER OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Page 2

BQA
Buraq Air
YK791
Chapter
MAINTENANCE DOCUMENTS -- INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-00-00 . 146

MAINTENANCE PLANNING DATA DOCUMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
FAULT REPORTING MANUAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
DISPATCH DEVIATION PROCEDURES GUIDE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
FIM - INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
FIM - OBSERVED FAULT LISTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
FIM - CABIN FAULT LIST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
FIM - CABIN FAULT CODE INDEX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
FIM - FAULT CODE INDEX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
FIM - MAINTENANCE MESSAGE INDEX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
FIM - FIM TASKS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
FIM - TASK SUPPORT PAGES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
HOW TO USE THE FIM - INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
HOW TO USE THE FIM - FIGURE 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
MAINTENANCE TIP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
AMM PART 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
AMM PART 2 - INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
AMM PART 2 - MAINTENANCE TASK STRUCTURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
AMM PART 2 - AMTOSS NUMBERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
SYSTEM SCHEMATIC MANUAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
WIRING DIAGRAM MANUAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
STANDARD WIRING PRACTICE MANUAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
PARTS CATALOG - INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
PARTS CATALOG - HOW TO LOCATE A PART . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
Page 3
BQA
Buraq Air
YK791
Chapter
PARTS CATALOG - EXPLANATION OF ILLUSTRATION TECHNIQUES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL - 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL - 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
SCENARIO 1 - LRU FAILURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
SCENARIO 2 - LOST INPUT TO LRU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
COMPUTER BASE TRAINING (CBT) -- CHECKLIST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-01-00 . 222
COMMON DISPLAY SYSTEM -- INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31-62-00 . 229

GENERAL DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
FLIGHT COMPARTMENT COMPONENT LOCATION - 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
EE COMPARTMENT COMPONENT LOCATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
POWER INTERFACES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
PROGRAM PINS INTERFACE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
DISPLAY ELECTRONICS UNIT INTERFACES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
BRIGHTNESS INTERFACES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
CONTROLS INTERFACES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
CROSS CHANNEL INTERFACES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
EXTERNAL INTERFACE INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
NAVIGATION INTERFACES - 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
INDICATING AND RECORDING INTERFACES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
AUTOFLIGHT INTERFACES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
HYDRAULIC AND LANDING GEAR INTERFACES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
AIR CONDITIONING AND PNEUMATIC INTERFACES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
Page 4

BQA
Buraq Air
YK791
Chapter
ICE AND RAIN PROTECTION INTERFACES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306
FUEL AND ELECTRICAL INTERFACES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308
APU INTERFACES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
FLIGHT CONTROL INTERFACES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
ENGINE INTERFACES - 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
COAX COUPLER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
REMOTE LIGHT SENSOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332
DISPLAY UNIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334
DU - FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337
BRIGHTNESS CONTROLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340
DISPLAY ELECTRONICS UNIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342
DEU - FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344
EFIS CONTROL PANEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348
EFIS - ENGINE DISPLAY CONTROL PANEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353
PRIMARY FLIGHT DISPLAY OVERVIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356
PFD - AIRSPEED INDICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359
PFD - ATTITUDE INDICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365
PFD - ALTITUDE INDICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368
PFD - VERTICAL SPEED INDICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372
PFD - HEADING INDICATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374
PFD - FLIGHT MODE ANNUNCIATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376
PFD - LANDING INDICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380
PFD - RADIO ALTITUDE AND RADIO MINIMUMS INDICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384
PFD - TIME CRITICAL ANNUNCIATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387
PFD - SYMBOLOGY - 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390
Page 5
BQA
Buraq Air
YK791
Chapter
PFD - SYMBOLOGY - 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392
PFD - SYMBOLOGY - 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394
PFD - SYMBOLOGY - 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396
PFD - SYMBOLOGY - 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398
PFD - SYMBOLOGY - 6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400
PFD - SYMBOLOGY - 7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 402
PFD - SYMBOLOGY - 8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404
PFD - SYMBOLOGY - 9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406
PFD - FAULT INDICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408
NAVIGATION DISPLAY OVERVIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 410
ND - EXPANDED APPROACH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 412
ND - CENTERED APPROACH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417
ND - EXPANDED VOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421
ND - CENTERED VOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425
ND - EXPANDED MAP MODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 428
ND - CENTERED MAP MODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 434
ND - SUPPLEMENTAL MAP MODE DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 441
ND - VSD INDICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 444
ND - VSD DISPLAY - MAP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 446
ND - VSD DISPLAY - VSD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 449
ND - VSD FAILURE FLAGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 454
ND - PLAN MODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 457
ND - NON NORMAL DISPLAYS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 460
ND - SYMBOLOGY - 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 462
ND - SYMBOLOGY - 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 464
ND - SYMBOLOGY - 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 466
ND - SYMBOLOGY - 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 468
ND - SYMBOLOGY - 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 470
ND - SYMBOLOGY - 6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 472
ND - SYMBOLOGY - 7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 474
Page 6

BQA
Buraq Air
YK791
Chapter
ND - SYMBOLOGY - 8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 476
ND - SYMBOLOGY - 9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 478
ND - SYMBOLOGY - 10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 480
ND - SYMBOLOGY - 11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 482
ND - APPROACH MODE FAILURE FLAGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 484
ND - VOR MODE FAILURE FLAGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 486
ND - MAP MODE FAILURE FLAGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 488
ND - PLAN MODE FAILURE FLAGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 490
ENGINE DISPLAY - INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 492
ENGINE DISPLAY - MISCELLANEOUS INDICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 494
ENGINE DISPLAY - CREW ALERT MESSAGES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 497
ENGINE DISPLAY - N1 INDICATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 501
ENGINE DISPLAY - EGT INDICATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 504
ENGINE DISPLAY - FUEL QUANTITY INDICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 506
ENGINE DISPLAY - N2 INDICATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 508
ENGINE DISPLAY - OIL INDICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 510
ENGINE DISPLAY - ENGINE VIBRATION INDICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 512
ENGINE DISPLAY - COMPACTED ENGINE DISPLAY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 514
SYSTEMS DISPLAY - INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 518
SYSTEMS DISPLAY - HYDRAULIC INDICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 520
SYSTEMS DISPLAY - BRAKE TEMPERATURE INDICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 522
SYSTEMS DISPLAY - FLIGHT CONTROL SURFACE POSITIONS INDICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 524
OPERATION - SWITCHING - NORM POSITION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 526
OPERATION - SWITCHING - OUTBD PFD POSITION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 528
OPERATION - SWITCHING - INBD ENG PRI POSITION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 530
OPERATION - SWITCHING - INBD PFD POSITION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 532
OPERATION - SWITCHING - INBD MFD POSITION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 534
OPERATION - SWITCHING - LOWER ENG POSITION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 536
OPERATION - SWITCHING - LOWER ND POSITION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 538
OPERATION - SWITCHING - AUTOMATIC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 540
Page 7
BQA
Buraq Air
YK791
Chapter
OPERATION - SWITCHING - ENGINE SWITCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 542
OPERATION - DISPLAY SOURCE SELECTOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 544
OPERATION - CONTROL PANEL SELECT SWITCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 546
TRAINING INFORMATION POINT - STATUS MESSAGES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 549
TRAINING INFORMATION POINT - SOFTWARE LOADING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 553
TRAINING INFORMATION POINT - CDU CDS BITE PAGES - CDS BITE MAIN MENU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 556
TRAINING INFORMATION POINT - CDU CDS BITE PAGES - CURRENT STATUS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 558
TRAINING INFORMATION POINT - CDU CDS BITE PAGES - INFLIGHT FAULTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 561
TRAINING INFORMATION POINT - CDU CDS BITE PAGES - INFLIGHT FAULTS BULK ERASE . . . . . . . . . . . . 564
TRAINING INFORMATION POINT - CDU CDS BITE PAGES - GROUND TESTS MENU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 566
TRAINING INFORMATION POINT - CDU CDS BITE PAGES - DEU SELF-TEST 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 568
TRAINING INFORMATION POINT - CDU CDS BITE PAGES - DEU SELF-TEST 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 570
TRAINING INFORMATION POINT - CDU CDS BITE PAGES - DU LOOP TEST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 573
TRAINING INFORMATION POINT - CDU CDS BITE PAGES - DU LOOP TEST 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 576
TRAINING INFORMATION POINT - CDU CDS BITE PAGES - DU OPTICAL TEST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 578
TRAINING INFORMATION POINT - CDU CDS BITE PAGES - WXR/TERR DISPLAY TEST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 580
TRAINING INFORMATION POINT - CDU CDS BITE PAGES - WXR/TERR DISPLAY TEST - TERR DISPLAY . . . . . . . . 582
TRAINING INFORMATION POINT - CDU CDS BITE PAGES - IDENT/CONFIG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 584
TRAINING INFORMATION POINT - CDU CDS BITE PAGES - INPUT MONITORING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 586
SYSTEM SUMMARY - 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 588
SYSTEM SUMMARY - 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 590
SYSTEM SUMMARY - 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 592
SYSTEM SUMMARY - 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 594
SYSTEM SUMMARY - 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 596
Page 8

737 GENERAL -- INTRODUCTION
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
00-00-00-001.fm
00-00-00
- 1 -

Introduction ADIRS - air data inertial reference system
AFCS - automatic flight control system
This section introduces you to the 737-800 airplane. AGCU - APU generator control unit
altn - alternate
You will see general information about these topics:
amp - amplifier
- Range APB - APU breaker
- Dimensions APU - auxiliary power unit
- Engines ATC - air traffic control
- Flight controls att - attendant
- Doors
auto - automatic
- Flight compartment panels
- Electronic equipment rack configuration bat - battery
- Electrical. bcn - beacon
BL - buttock line
This section also introduces you to these tasks: BPCU - bus power control unit
BTB - bus tie breaker
- Electrical power application
C/W - control wheel
- Hydraulic power application
- Equipment cooling operation capt - captain
- Radio and intercommunication system operation CDS - common display system
- Towing CDU - control display unit
- Control display unit (CDU) operation. chgr - charger
comm - communication
Abbreviations and Acronyms
comp - computer
A/P - autopilot conn - connected
A/S - airspeed cond - condition
ac - alternate current cntl - control
ACARS - aircraft communications addressing and det - detector
00-00-00-001.fm
reporting system DEU - display electronic unit
ACMS - airplane condition monitoring system dist - distribution
ADF - automatic direction finder DME - distance measuring equipment
00-00-00
- 2 -
DU - display unit MLG - main landing gear
ECU - electronic control unit MCP - mode control panel
EE - electronic equipment MPD - maintenance planning document
EEC - electronic engine control nav - navigation
elex - electronics NLG - nose landing gear
ELT - emergency locator transmitter ovht - overheat
EMDP - electric motor driven pump PA - passenger address
ESDS - electrostatic discharge sensitive PCU - power control unit
ext - external PDP - power distribution panel
F/O - first officer pnl - panel
FCC - flight control computer prox - proximity
FMC - flight management computer PSU - passenger service unit
FMCS - flight management computer system pwr - power
freq - frequency R - right
fwd - forward RBL - right buttock line
GCU - generator control unit REU - remote electronics unit
gnd - ground RLY - relay
GPS - global positioning system SATCOM - satellite communication
HF - high frequency S/B - speedbrake
HUD - heads up display sec - section
IDG - integrated drive generator sel - select
ILS - instrument landing system SCU - start converter unit
inv - inverter SPCU - standby power control unit
L - left SOV - shutoff valve
LBL - left buttock line stab - stabilizer
LE - leading edge STA - station
00-00-00-001.fm
LRRA - low range radio altimeter stdby - standby
LRU - line replaceable unit sw - switch
mod - module
00-00-00
- 3 -

TCAS - traffic alert and collision avoidance
system
TE - trailing edge
TRU - transformer rectifier unit
typ - typical
VHF - very high frequency
vlv - valve
VOR - VHF omni range
WL - water line
xfer - transfer
xfmr - transformer
00-00-00-001.fm
00-00-00
- 4 -
GENERAL INFORMATION TASK INTRODUCTION
- RANGE - ELECTRICAL POWER APPLICATION

- DIMENSIONS - HYDRAULIC POWER APPLICATION
- ENGINES - EQUIPMENT COOLING
- FLIGHT CONTROLS - COMMUNICATION
- DOORS - TOWING
- FLIGHT COMPARTMENT PANELS - CDU OPERATION
00-00-00-001.fm
- ELECTRONIC EQUIPMENT RACKS
- ELECTRICAL
737 GENERAL - INTRODUCTION
00-00-00
- 5 -
737 GENERAL -- RANGE
Introduction
The 737-800 is a two-engine airplane. It is for short

to medium range flights with a capacity of up to 189
passengers.
Features
There are many new features. These new features

increase the airplane payload, service ceiling, and
range.
The airplane has a design range of 2,900 nautical

miles.
00-00-00-002.fm
00-00-00
- 6 -

737-800 RANGE
(2,900 NM)
OSLO
LONDON
PARIS
KARACHI BEIJING
MUMBAI
SEATTLE
NEW YORK SINGAPORE
MEXICO CITY
PORT MORESBY
BOGOTA
PERTH
00-00-00-002.fm
737 GENERAL - RANGE
00-00-00
- 7 -
737 GENERAL -- STRUCTURE DIMENSIONS
General
These are the general dimensions of the airplane.
00-00-00-511.fm
00-00-00
- 8 -

117 FEET 5 INCHES

34.3 METERS
47 FEET 1 INCH
14.4 METERS
129 FEET 6 INCHES

39.5 METERS
41 FEET 2 INCHES
12.6 METERS
00-00-00-511.fm
737-800 DIMENSIONS
737 GENERAL - STRUCTURE DIMENSIONS
00-00-00
- 9 -
737 GENERAL -- FUSELAGE DIMENSIONS
General
Dimensions give locations on the fuselage. The scale

for each dimension is inches. You use these dimensions
to find components on the fuselage:
- Body station line

- Body buttock line
- Water line.
The body station line (STA) is a horizontal dimension.

It starts at station line zero. You measure the body
station line from a vertical reference plane that is
forward of the airplane.
The body buttock line (BL) is a lateral dimension. You

measure the buttock line to the left or right of the
airplane center line.
The water line (WL) is a height dimension. You measure

the water line from a horizontal reference plane below
the airplane.
00-00-00-530.fm
00-00-00
- 10 -

00-00-00-530.fm
130 130
178 178
196.5 196.5
211.8 211.8
224.8 224.8
243.7 243.7
259.5 259.5
277 277
294.5 294.5
312 312
328 328
344 344
360 360
380 380
400 400
420 420
440 440
460 460
480 480
198-IN STRETCH
500 500
500A 522
500B 544
500C 566
500D 588
500E 610
500F 632
500G 654
500H 676
FLOORBOARD
500I 698
WL AT TOP OF
520 718
LBL 73.75
540 738
559 757
578 776
597 795
616 814
STA 500
639 837
LBL 30
663.75 861.75
685 883
STATION LINES
706 904
727 925
BBL 0
727A 945
- 11 -
727B 965
727C 985
727D 1007
RBL 30
727E 1029
727F 1051
727G 1073
ALTEON PROPRIETARY. Copyright.
BODY BUTTOCK AND WATER LINES
727H 1095
727I 1117
727J 1137
FWD
747 1157
WL 208
737 GENERAL - FUSELAGE DIMENSIONS
767 1177
RBL 73.75
WL 148.5
WL 232.5
WL 306.5
787 1197
807 1217
827 1237
847 1257
867 1277
887 1297
907 1317
212-IN STRETCH
927 1337
See title page for details
947.5 1357.5
967 1377
986.5 1396.5
1016 1426
00-00-00
1040 1450
1064 1474
1088 1498
1112 1522
1129 1539
1156 1566
1217 1627
737 GENERAL -- WING REFERENCE DIMENSIONS
Wing Reference Dimensions
The wing has two reference dimensions. These reference

dimensions give wing locations in inches. Measure each
location from buttock line 0. These are the wing
reference dimensions:
- Wing station
- Wing buttock line.
You measure the wing station perpendicular to the wing

leading edge.
You measure the wing buttock line parallel to the

buttock line.
For more information, see the maintenance manual and

the maintenance planning data document.
00-00-00-531.fm
00-00-00
- 12 -

WING
STATION 0.0
WS 228.25
WS 253.00
FUSELAGE
BUTTOCK
LINE 0.0
WS 485.00
WING
WS 667.50 BUTTOCK
LINE 0.0
WBL 190.97 WBL 71.24
WING
STATION
00-00-00-531.fm
WBL 709.40
737 GENERAL - WING REFERENCE DIMENSIONS
00-00-00
- 13 -
737 GENERAL -- VERTICAL STABILIZER REFERENCE DIMENSIONS
Vertical Stabilizer Reference Dimensions
The vertical stabilizer has four reference dimensions.

These reference dimensions give vertical stabilizer
locations in inches. These are the vertical stabilizer
reference dimensions:
- Vertical stabilizer station

- Vertical stabilizer leading edge station
- Rudder station
- Vertical stabilizer waterline.
Measure the vertical stabilizer station perpendicular

to the vertical stabilizer rear spar. Vertical
stabilizer station 0 starts at the body crown line.
Measure the vertical stabilizer leading edge station

perpendicular to the vertical stabilizer leading edge.
Vertical stabilizer leading edge station 0 starts at
the body crown line.
Measure the rudder station perpendicular to the rudder

hinge centerline. Rudder station 0 starts at the body
crown line.
Measure the vertical stabilizer waterline parallel to

the body waterline.
For more information, refer to the maintenance manual

and the maintenance planning data document.
00-00-00-532.fm
00-00-00
- 14 -

VERTICAL STABILIZER
LEADING EDGE VERTICAL STABILIZER
STATION STATION
RUDDER STATION
VERTICAL
REAR SPAR STABILIZER
WATERLINE
LEADING EDGE RUDDER
VERTICAL STABILIZER
LEADING EDGE
STATION 0.0 VERTICAL STABILIZER
WATERLINE 0
BODY CROWN LINE
BODY CROWN LINE
VERTICAL RUDDER STATION 0.0
STABILIZER
00-00-00-532.fm
STATION 0.0
737 GENERAL - VERTICAL STABILIZER REFERENCE DIMENSIONS
00-00-00
- 15 -
737 GENERAL -- HORIZONTAL STABILIZER REFERENCE DIMENSIONS
Horizontal Stabilizer Reference Dimensions
The horizontal stabilizer has three reference

dimensions. These reference dimensions give horizontal
stabilizer locations in inches. Measure each location
from buttock line 0. These are the horizontal
stabilizer reference dimensions:
- Stabilizer station
- Stabilizer leading edge station
- Elevator station.
Measure stabilizer stations perpendicular to the

horizontal stabilizer rear spar.
Measure stabilizer leading edge stations perpendicular

to the horizontal stabilizer leading edge.
Measure elevator stations perpendicular to the elevator

hinge centerline.
For more information, refer to the maintenance manual

and the maintenance planning data document.
00-00-00-533.fm
00-00-00
- 16 -

STABILIZER STATION 0.00
STABILIZER LEADING
EDGE STATION 0.00
ELEVATOR STATION 0.00
LEADING EDGE
STABILIZER
STATION
310.54 REAR SPAR
STABILIZER LEADING
EDGE STATION
319.23
ELEVATOR HINGE
CENTERLINE
TAB
ELEVATOR
ELEVATOR STATION
24.90
ELEVATOR STATION
00-00-00-533.fm
265.45
BUTTOCK LINE 0
NOTE: LEFT HALF OF HORIZONTAL
STABILIZER IS SHOWN.
737 GENERAL - HORIZONTAL STABILIZER REFERENCE DIMENSIONS
00-00-00
- 17 -
737 GENERAL -- ZONE DIAGRAM
General
The airplane has eight major zones to help you find and
identify the airplane components and parts. The major
zones are divided into subzones and the subzones into
zones. These are the major zones:
- 100 - lower half of the fuselage

- 200 - upper half of the fuselage
- 300 - empennage
- 400 - powerplant and nacelle struts
- 500 - left wing
- 600 - right wing
- 700 - landing gear and landing gear doors
- 800 - doors.
00-00-00-535.fm
00-00-00
- 18 -

300
300 200 300
600 500
400 400
700 100 700
200 - UPPER FUSELAGE

800 - DOORS 500/600 - WINGS
300 - EMPENNAGE
100 - LOWER FUSELAGE
00-00-00-535.fm
400 - POWER PLANT/STRUT 700 - LANDING GEAR/LANDING
GEAR DOORS
737 GENERAL - ZONE DIAGRAM
00-00-00
- 19 -
737 GENERAL -- POWER PLANT INTRODUCTION
General
Two CFM56-7B engines supply thrust for the airplane.

The engines also supply power for these systems:
- Electric
- Hydraulic
- Pneumatic.
The CFM56-7B is a high bypass ratio, dual rotor, turbo

fan engine.
00-00-00-710.fm
00-00-00
- 20 -

00-00-00-710.fm
737 GENERAL - POWER PLANT INTRODUCTION
00-00-00
- 21 -
737 GENERAL -- POWER PLANT ENGINE HAZARDS
General Exhaust Velocity
It is dangerous to work around engines. Use the Exhaust velocity is very high for a long distance
entry/exit corridor when the engine is in operation. behind the engine. This can cause damage to personnel
Stay out of the inlet and exhaust areas when the engine and equipment.
is in operation.
Engine Noise
These are the hazards around an engine in operation:
Engine noise can cause temporary and permanent loss of
- Inlet suction your ability to hear. You must wear ear protection when
- Exhaust heat near an engine in operation.
- Exhaust velocity
- Engine noise. Engine Entry/Exit Corridor
Inlet Suction Engine entry corridors are between the inlet hazard
areas and the exhaust hazard areas. You should go near
Engine inlet suction can pull people and large objects an engine in operation only when:
into the engine. At idle power, the inlet hazard area
is a 10 ft (3.1 m) radius around the inlet. - The engine is at idle
- You can speak with people in the flight
WARNING: IF THE WIND IS OVER 25 KNOTS, INCREASE THE compartment.
INLET HAZARD AREA BY 20%.
For additional safety, wear a safety harness when the
Exhaust Heat engine is in operation.
The engine exhaust is very hot for a long distance Training Information Point
behind the engine. This can cause damage to personnel
and equipment. When the engine is in operation, the anti-collision
lights should be on.
00-00-00-711.fm
00-00-00
- 22 -

ANTI-COLLISION LIGHT
(TOP OF FUSELAGE)
ANTI-COLLISION LIGHT
(BOTTOM OF FUSELAGE) INLET HAZARD AREA
- IDLE - 10 FT (3.1 M)
- TAKEOFF - 14 FT (4.2 M)
IDLE - 4 FT (1.2 M)
TAKEOFF - 5 FT (1.5 M)
45 DEG
ENTRY/EXIT ENTRY/EXIT
CORRIDOR CORRIDOR
HEAT AND EXHAUST HEAT AND EXHAUST

VELOCITY VELOCITY
HAZARD AREAS HAZARD AREAS
00-00-00-711.fm
IDLE POWER
737 GENERAL - POWER PLANT ENGINE HAZARDS
00-00-00
- 23 -
737 GENERAL -- FLIGHT CONTROL SURFACES
General Power Source
The flight controls keep the airplane at the necessary Hydraulic actuators or electric motors move the
attitude during flight. They have movable surfaces on surfaces. You must be very careful when you work near
the wing and the empennage. These are the two types of flight control surfaces. When hydraulic power is on,
flight controls: make sure that all the flight control surfaces are
clear of personnel and equipment.
- Primary
- Secondary.
Primary Flight Controls
The primary flight controls has these subsystems:
- Aileron (2)
- Elevator (2)
- Rudder.
Secondary Flight Controls
The secondary flight control system has these

components:
- Leading edge flaps (4)

- Leading edge slats (8)
- Trailing edge flaps (4)
- Spoilers (12)
- Horizontal stabilizer.
The 12 spoilers consists of 4 ground and 8 flight
00-00-00-004.fm
spoilers. The spoilers are numbered 1 to 12, left to
right.
00-00-00
- 24 -

RUDDER
ELEVATORS
(2)
FLIGHT
SPOILERS (8)
HORIZONTAL
STABILIZER
TE FLAPS (4)
GROUND
SPOILERS (4)
AILERONS (2)
00-00-00-004.fm
LE FLAPS (4) LE SLATS (8)
737 GENERAL - FLIGHT CONTROL SURFACES
00-00-00
- 25 -
737 GENERAL -- DOORS INTRODUCTION
General Description Training Information Point
These are the types of doors on the airplane: You can open and close entry, galley service, and cargo
doors in winds up to 40 knots without structural
- Forward and aft entry doors damage. You can let these doors stay latched open in
- Forward and aft galley service doors winds up to 65 knots without structural damage.
- Overwing emergency exit doors (and pilot sliding
windows) If a door is left open for a long time, a protective
- Cargo doors cover should be put over the door frame. This prevents
- Interior doors (crew door and lavatory doors) bad weather damage to the airplane.
- Miscellaneous access doors.
Location
The entry doors are on the left side of the airplane.
The galley service doors are on the right side of the

airplane.
The overwing emergency exit doors are above the wings

on both sides of the airplane. The pilot sliding
windows are in the flight compartment.
The crew door and lavatory doors are inside the

airplane.
The cargo doors are on the right side of the airplane.
The miscellaneous access doors are near the systems

they serve.
00-00-00-520.fm
00-00-00
- 26 -

REFUELING STATION AIR CONDITIONING ENGINE OIL

ACCESS DOOR ACCESS DOOR TANK ACCESS DOOR
EXTERNAL POWER
RECEPTACLE DOOR
LOWER NOSE COMPARTMENT
ACCESS DOOR
RAM AIR
ACCESS PANEL EE COMPARTMENT
ACCESS DOOR
AFT CARGO FORWARD CARGO
COMPARTMENT COMPARTMENT DOOR
DOOR
GROUND AIR CONDITIONING
ACCESS DOOR
CENTER FUEL TANK
TAIL CONE HYDRAULIC SUMP ACCESS DOOR
ACCESS DOOR ACCUMULATOR
ACCESS DOOR
TOILET AFT ENTRY
APU SERVICE
ACCESS DOOR
DOOR
DOOR AFT GALLEY
WATER SERVICE DOOR
SERVICE
DOOR
EMERGENCY
EXIT DOORS SECTION 48
ACCESS AND
BLOWOUT DOOR
FORWARD GALLEY
SERVICE DOOR
00-00-00-520.fm
FORWARD IDG OIL
SLIDING ENTRY DOOR RESERVOIR
WINDOW AIRSTAIR ACCESS DOOR
DOOR
737 GENERAL - DOORS INTRODUCTION
00-00-00
- 27 -
737 GENERAL -- ENTRY DOOR EXTERIOR OPERATION
00-00-00-521.fm
00-00-00
- 28 -

General To complete the door opening operation, hold the aft
edge of the door and pull it open.
You open and close an entry door manually with the
control handle. While open, a hinge lock mechanism As the door opens, winds may push it. This can push the
holds the door in the open position. operator off balance. Keep a strong, secure stance to
prevent this.
The cabin crew puts the door slide warning pennant
across the door window if the slide is armed. As you pull the door open, the door turns. This moves
the door parallel to the airplane fuselage when the
Open the Door - Exterior Operation door is fully open.
An escape slide is on the inside, lower part of the Close the Door
entry door. If the slide girt bar is in the armed
position, the slide will deploy automatically as the Before you close the door, examine the escape slide.
door opens. Look to see if there is a door slide The escape slide girt strap and bar must be properly
warning pennant (orange) in the door window. The stowed. An incorrectly folded strap or improperly
pennant is across the window when the slide is armed. stowed bar will interfere with the door threshold
Make sure that the escape slide is not armed before you clearance. This will prevent the door from sealing and
open the door. latching, and may damage components.
The door swings out of the door frame when it opens. To close the door, first release the hinge lock. The
Make sure that the area outside of the door is clear. release mechanism is yellow. Operate the latch release
mechanism to unlock the hinge. This lets you to swing
You must pull the exterior door control handle from the the door back into the door frame.
recess position to engage the door drive mechanisms.
Turn the handle 180 degrees in the clockwise direction. Pull the door to the cocked position.
The door moves to the cocked open position.
Pull the exterior control handle out of the recess, and
At this point, any more effort on the door control turn it slightly until it engages the door drive
handle will not produce more door motion. The door mechanisms. Turn the door control handle
00-00-00-521.fm
control handle has gone through its full motion. counterclockwise 180 degrees to complete the action.
Release the control handle and allow it to return to
its recess by spring force.
00-00-00
- 29 -
When the control handle has gone through its full
motion, release it and allow it to return to the recess
by spring force.
Training Information Point
You can operate the forward entry door in winds up to

40 knots. You can let the door stay latched open in
winds up to 65 knots.
The force on the control handle to open and close the

door is not large. If a large force is required, there
is a fault with the door or the procedure.
If the door does not close and latch easily, there may
be a clearance problem. Make sure the door-to-frame
area is clear. An incorrectly stowed escape slide girt
strap may be caught between the door and the frame.
If the airplane is pressurized, a properly rigged door

will not unlatch. This is because the door gates must
open against cabin pressure during door unlatch.
Pressure on the door gates prevents this.
00-00-00-521.fm
00-00-00
- 30 -

PENNANT
PENNANT NOT ACROSS WINDOW:

- SLIDE IS NOT ARMED
- IT IS OK TO OPEN
THE DOOR
PENNANT ACROSS WINDOW:

- SLIDE IS ARMED
- IF YOU OPEN THE DOOR,
THE SLIDE WILL DEPLOY
LOOK FOR DOOR SLIDE PULL DOOR HANDLE

WARNING PENNANT FROM ITS RECESS
DOOR SLIDE
WARNING
PENNANT
HINGE LOCK
RELEASE
MECHANISM
00-00-00-521.fm DOOR FULLY OPEN AND

TURN HANDLE PULL DOOR OPEN UPPER HINGE LOCKED
737 GENERAL - ENTRY DOOR EXTERIOR OPERATION
00-00-00
- 31 -
737 GENERAL -- ENTRY DOOR INTERIOR OPERATION
General
You use an interior control handle to open and close an

entry door. The hinge lock mechanism holds the door in
the open position. You release this mechanism to close
the door.
Interior Operation
The escape slide is on the inside lower part of the

door. If the slide girt bar is in the armed position,
the slide will deploy as the door opens. Make sure the
slide girt bar is not armed and then remove the door
slide warning pennant (orange) in the door window.
To open the door from the interior, unlatch the door

with the control handle and turn the handle in the OPEN
direction. This puts the door in the cocked position.
Push the door through the door frame until it is fully
open. Use the assist handles for this operation.
A hinge lock mechanism in the upper hinge keeps the

door in the fully open position.
To close the door, first release the hinge lock. The

release mechanism is yellow. Operate the latch release
mechanism to unlock the hinge. This lets you swing the
door back into the door frame.
Pull the door to the cocked position and turn the
00-00-00-522.fm
control handle in the close direction.
00-00-00
- 32 -

DOOR SLIDE
WARNING
PENNANT
INTERIOR
CONTROL
HANDLE
HINGE LOCK
MECHANISM
ASSIST
HANDLES
EMERGENCY
ESCAPE
SLIDE
SLIDE GIRT
BAR
SLIDE GIRT BAR

BRACKET (2)
00-00-00-522.fm
FWD ENTRY DOOR
(INTERIOR VIEW - DOOR OPEN)
737 GENERAL - ENTRY DOOR INTERIOR OPERATION
00-00-00
- 33 -
737 GENERAL -- FLIGHT COMPARTMENT PANELS
Flight Compartment Panels
These are the major panels in the flight compartment:
- P1 captain instrument panel

- P2 center instrument panel
- P5 forward overhead panel
- P5 aft overhead panel
- P7 glareshield panel
- P3 first officer instrument panel
- P9 forward electronic panel
- Control stand
- P8 aft electronic panel.
00-00-00-007.fm
00-00-00
- 34 -

P5 AFT
OVERHEAD PANEL
P5 FORWARD
OVERHEAD PANEL
P7 GLARESHIELD PANEL
P2 CENTER
INSTRUMENT PANEL
P3 FIRST OFFICER
INSTRUMENT PANEL
P1 CAPTAIN
INSTRUMENT P9 FORWARD
PANEL ELECTRONIC PANEL
CONTROL STAND
P8 AFT ELECTRONIC
PANEL
00-00-00-007.fm
737 GENERAL - FLIGHT COMPARTMENT PANELS
00-00-00
- 35 -
737 GENERAL -- MAIN INSTRUMENT PANELS
General
The controls and displays on the main instrument panels

(P1 and P3) include these components:
- Clock (2)
- Display unit (4)
- Display select panel (2)
- Master dim and test switch
- Brake pressure indicator
- Autoflight status annunciator (2)
- GPWS control panel
- Lighting control (2)
- Conditioned air outlet control (2).
00-00-00-008.fm
00-00-00
- 36 -

P1 CAPT INSTRUMENT PANEL P3 F/O INSTRUMENT PANEL
00-00-00-008.fm
(TYPICAL P1 AND P3 PANELS)

737 GENERAL - MAIN INSTRUMENT PANELS
00-00-00
- 37 -
737 GENERAL -- GLARESHIELD PANELS
General
The controls and displays on the P7 glareshield include

these components:
- Master caution annunciator (2)

- System caution annunciator (2)
- Mode control panel (MCP)
- EFIS control panel (2)
- Fire warning light (2).
00-00-00-009.fm
00-00-00
- 38 -

COURSE A/T IAS/MACH HEADING ALTITUDE VERT SPEED A A/P ENGAGE B COURSE
ARM VNAV LNAV
g g
CMD CMD
w w g g
w w
C/O 10 30
MA VORLOC DN MA
OFF g CWS CWS
F/D w g g F/D
ON w w ON
N1 SPEED LVLCHG HDGSEL APP ALTHLD V/S DISENGAGE
g g g g g g g
OFF w w w w w w w UP OFF
00-00-00-009.fm
(TYPICAL GLARESHIELD PANELS)
737 GENERAL - GLARESHIELD PANELS
00-00-00
- 39 -
737 GENERAL -- P2 CENTER INSTRUMENT PANEL AND P9 FORWARD ELECTRONICS PANEL
General
The controls and displays on the P2 center instrument

panel include these components:
- Yaw damper indicator

- Standby instruments
- Engine display control panel
- Antiskid and autobrake switches and lights
- Flap position indicator
- Landing gear lever and position indicator
- Upper center display unit.
The controls and displays on the P9 forward electronics

- Lower center display unit

- Control display unit (CDU) (2).
00-00-00-010.fm
00-00-00
- 40 -

P9 FORWARD ELECTRONIC PANEL
P2 CENTER INSTRUMENT PANEL
APP HP/IN
80 APP 29.92 IN
400
60
200
10
40
30 0 000
10 -200
00-00-00-010.fm
15
ATT RST BARO
INT STANDBY FLIGHT DISPLAY (OPTIONAL) (TYPICAL P2 AND P9 PANELS)

737 GENERAL - P2 CENTER INSTRUMENT PANEL AND P9 FORWARD ELECTRONICS PANEL
00-00-00
- 41 -
737 GENERAL -- CONTROL STAND
General
The controls and indications on the control stand

include these components:
- Forward thrust lever (2)

- Reverse thrust lever (2)
- Speedbrake handle
- Horizontal stabilizer trim wheel and indicator(2)
- Parking brake lever and light
- Flap lever
- Stabilizer trim cutout switch (2)
- Start lever (2).
00-00-00-011.fm
00-00-00
- 42 -

IDLE
STAB TRIM
MAIN AUTO
ELECT NORMAL PILOT
CUT
OUT
CUTOFF
00-00-00-011.fm
737 GENERAL - CONTROL STAND
00-00-00
- 43 -
737 GENERAL -- P8 AFT ELECTRONICS PANEL
General
The P8 aft electronics panel has these components:
- Weather radar control panel

- Cargo fire control panel
- Aileron/rudder trim panel
- ATC/TCAS control panel
- Audio control panel
- Overheat/fire protection panel
- Navigation control panel
- Radio communication panel
- ADF control panel
- ACMS printer
- Lighting control.
00-00-00-100.fm
00-00-00
- 44 -

OPTIONAL:
RADIO COMM PANEL
VHF1 VHF2 VHF3 HF1 HF2 INT CABIN PA
Cw Cw Cw Cw Cw Cw Cw w
SAT1 SAT2
1-NAV-2 1-ADF-2 MKR Cw Cw

SPKR
V B R
RADIO ALT
CALL
INT NORM SAT1 CONTROL - SAT2
OPTIONAL:
AUDIO CONTROL PANEL
W/CALL LIGHTS
00-00-00-100.fm
(TYPICAL P8 PANEL)
737 GENERAL - P8 AFT ELECTRONICS PANEL
00-00-00
- 45 -
737 GENERAL -- P5 AFT OVERHEAD PANEL
General
The controls and displays on the P5 aft overhead panel

include these components:
- Inertial system display unit

- Engine panel
- Observer audio control panel
- Captain flight interphone speaker
- Oxygen panel
- Landing gear indicator lights
- White dome light switch
- Service interphone switch
- IRS mode select unit
- Flight recorder and Mach airspeed warning module
- Stall warning test module
- Proximity switch electronics unit light
- ELT control panel
- Leading edge devices annunciator panel.
00-00-00-101.fm
00-00-00
- 46 -

GPS
00-00-00-101.fm
(TYPICAL P5 AFT OVHD PANEL)
737 GENERAL - P5 AFT OVERHEAD PANEL
00-00-00
- 47 -
737 GENERAL -- P5 FORWARD OVERHEAD PANEL
General
The controls and displays on the P5 forward overhead

- APU control switch

- APU indicator panel
- Fuel control panel
- Ground power and bus switching panel
- Equipment cooling panel
- Generator drive and standby power panel
- AC and dc meter panel
- Flight control panel
- Air-conditioning/bleed air controls panel
- Hydraulic control panel
- Cabin altitude panel
- Cabin pressure control panel
- Cockpit voice recorder panel
- Engine start panel
- Passenger signs panel
- Source select panel
- Window/pitot heat module
- Instrument switching and VHF NAV and IRS panel
- Door warning panel
- Anti-ice panel
- Temperature control panel
- Light switches.
00-00-00-102.fm
00-00-00
- 48 -

(-800/-900)
00-00-00-102.fm
(TYPICAL P5 FWD OVHD PANEL)
737 GENERAL - P5 FORWARD OVERHEAD PANEL
00-00-00
- 49 -
737 GENERAL -- AFT FLIGHT COMPARTMENT PANELS
General
The main circuit breaker panels are behind the first

officer and captain seats. The P6 and P18 have the
component load circuit breakers. Circuit breaker
organization is by airplane systems.
The P61 panel has the data loader controls.
00-00-00-015.fm
00-00-00
- 50 -

P61
P6
P18
00-00-00-015.fm
FLIGHT COMPARTMENT
(LOOKING AFT)
737 GENERAL - AFT FLIGHT COMPARTMENT PANELS
00-00-00
- 51 -
737 GENERAL -- ELECTRONIC EQUIPMENT RACK - LOCATION
General
The airplane has equipment racks in these parts of the

airplane:
- Electronic equipment (EE) compartment

- Aft cargo compartment
00-00-00-038.fm
00-00-00
- 52 -

ELECTRONIC EQUIPMENT
(EE) COMPARTMENT
- E1 RACK
- E2 RACK
- E3 RACK
- E4 RACK
- E5 RACK
AFT CARGO
COMPARTMENT
- E6 RACK
00-00-00-038.fm
737 GENERAL - ELECTRONIC EQUIPMENT RACK - LOCATION
00-00-00
- 53 -
737 GENERAL -- ELECTRONIC EQUIPMENT COMPARTMENT
General
Most electronic equipment is in a compartment below the

main cabin floor, aft of the nose wheel well. On the
ground, you enter this electronic equipment (EE)
compartment through a door in the bottom of the
fuselage. The door is aft of the nose landing gear.
The airplane has these equipment racks in the EE

compartment:
- E1 - forward part of the compartment

- E2 - left aft part of the compartment
- E3 - center aft part of the compartment
- E4 - right aft part of the compartment
- E5 - right side of the compartment.
Shelf assemblies have equipment mounts, interconnected

wiring, and accessory boxes. Most equipment rack
shelves are cooled with air. Air is blown through or
drawn through the equipment racks.
There is a drip shield over the racks to protect the

equipment from moisture condensation.
The airplane has an E6 equipment rack (not shown) in

the aft cargo compartment on the right side, aft of the
cargo door. The rack does not have cooling air. The
equipment on this rack is passively cooled.
00-00-00-016.fm
00-00-00
- 54 -

E5
E4
E1
ACCESS DOOR E3
E2
00-00-00-016.fm
737 GENERAL - ELECTRONIC EQUIPMENT COMPARTMENT
00-00-00
- 55 -
737 GENERAL -- EE COMPARTMENT DOOR OPERATION
Operation Turn the handle counterclockwise to retract the latch
pins. If you do not do this, the door will not seat in
You manually operate an external access door to the the door frame.
electronic equipment (EE) compartment. You open and
close the door from outside the airplane. Pull the handle to the left and the door will come out
of the partially open detent. Then it slides down into
Open Door the door frame.
The handle on the door fairs in a recess. A push-button Turn the handle clockwise to latch the door. Then push
trigger releases the handle, and it comes out of fair the door handle back into its recess.
by spring force.
Turn the handle counterclockwise to disengage the latch

pins. When the latch pins are free you can push the
door upward and slightly to the right to the first
detent. Then push the door to the right to the fully
open detent.
When the door is fully open, the roller tracks can be

folded to improve access to the equipment racks. A
spring catch on the end of each roller track holds the
track in the folded or unfolded position.
Close Door
Before you close the door, release the spring catch and
extend the roller tracks. Make sure the door frame area
is clear.
Pull the door out of the fully open detent and then
00-00-00-523.fm
restrain it as gravity causes it to slide down the
tracks. When the door reaches the lower detent you can
release it.
00-00-00
- 56 -

DOOR
ROLLER TRACK
SPRING CATCH
ROLLER TRACK
(EXTENDED)
DOOR FRAME
LATCH
FITTING
HANDLE
RELEASE
TRIGGER
FWD FWD EE COMPARTMENT EXTERNAL ACCESS DOOR
00-00-00-523.fm
EE COMPARTMENT EXTERNAL ACCESS DOOR
(EXTERIOR VIEW - CLOSED)
737 GENERAL - EE COMPARTMENT DOOR OPERATION
00-00-00
- 57 -
737 GENERAL -- ELECTRONIC EQUIPMENT RACK E1
General The equipment on the E1-3 rack includes these line
replaceable units (LRUs):
The equipment on the E1 rack includes electronics for
these functions: - Anti-skid/autobrake controller
- PA amplifier
- Autothrottle - VHF communication transceiver 1.
- Autopilot
- Communication Blow through cooling cools the equipment on this rack.
- Navigation
- Flight control. The equipment on the E1-4 rack includes these line
Equipment
- VOR/marker beacon receiver 2
The equipment on the E1-1 rack includes these line - Multi-mode receiver 2
replaceable units (LRUs): - Flight control computer B
- Compartment overheat detector controller.
- Ground proximity warning computer (GPWC)
- Integrated flight systems accessory unit (IFSAU) Draw through cooling cools the equipment on this rack.
- Flap/slat electronics unit (FSEU)
- Flight control computer A (FCC A) The equipment on the E1-5 rack includes these line
- TCAS computer. replaceable units (LRUs):
Blow through cooling cools the equipment on this rack. - VHF communication transceiver 2
- ATC transponder 2
The equipment on the E1-2 rack includes these line - DME interrogator 2.
Draw through cooling cools the equipment on this rack.
- DME interrogator 1
- ATC transponder 1
- VOR/marker beacon receiver 1
00-00-00-017.fm
- Multi-mode receiver (MMR)1.
Blow through cooling cools the equipment on this rack.
00-00-00
- 58 -

G CAB
P PRES TCAS
IFSAU FSEU FCC A
W CONT COMPUTER PROGRAM SWITCH
C 2 MODULE (TYP)
ANTI
SKID VHF ATC VOR/ MMR
PA BTMU DME1
AUTO COM 1 MB 1 1
AMP (PROV)
BRAKE 1
CONT
OVER
VHF
ATC DME VOR MMR FCC HEAT
COM
2 2 2 2 B CONT
2
MOD
FWD
00-00-00-017.fm
ACCESS DOOR
(TYPICAL E-1 RACK)
737 GENERAL - ELECTRONIC EQUIPMENT RACK E1
00-00-00
- 59 -
737 GENERAL -- ELECTRONIC EQUIPMENT RACKS E2, E3, AND E4
General
The equipment in the E2, E3, and E4 racks include

electronics for these functions:
- Window heat
- Communications
- Electrical power
- Common display system (CDS)
- Flight control
- Fire detection
- APU.
The EE compartment light switch is on a panel

immediately aft of the access door opening.
Blow-through and draw-through cooling removes heat from

the equipment on the racks. E2-1 uses blow-through
cooling. E3-2, E3-3, E4-1, and E4-2 use draw-through
cooling.
E3-1 uses draw-through and blow-through cooling.
E2-2 does not have forced air cooling.
00-00-00-018.fm
00-00-00
- 60 -

E4 RACK E3 RACK E2 RACK
AIR AIR HUD-

ISFD CMU ADF WIND WIND PRI
CON CON SEL HGS CDS DEU CDS DEU ADF LRRA GCU TRU
REU BAT NO. 1 2 CONT CONT AGCU BAT
RLYS RLYS CAL COMP 2 1 1 1 1 1
(PROV)(PROV) (PROV) 2 1 CHGRR
1 2 (PROV)
AUDIO AUTO ENG AUDIO FIRE CAB

WIND WIND
ENT SPD TRU TRU GCU LRRA VIB ENG ENT SMYD SMYD DET PRESS APU STATIC APU
CONT CONT BPCU DFDAU
MUX BRK 3 2 2 2 SIG ACC PLAYER 2 1 CONT CONT SCU INV SPU
3 4
(PROV) ACC COND (PROV) MOD 1
ZONE ZONE VHF

TEMP TEMP AUX BAT
ACARS COMM
CONT CONT CHARGER
(PROV) 3
2 1 (PROV)
POWER DIST (PROV) POWER DIST
PANEL 2 PANEL 1
BATTERY
EE COMPARTMENT
00-00-00-018.fm
LIGHT SWITCH
AFT
ACCESS DOOR (TYPICAL E2, E3, AND E4 RACKS)
737 GENERAL - ELECTRONIC EQUIPMENT RACKS E2, E3, AND E4
00-00-00
- 61 -
737 GENERAL -- ELECTRONIC EQUIPMENT RACK E5
General
The equipment in the E5 rack includes electronics for

these functions:
- Air data inertial reference system (ADIRS)

- Flight management computer system (FMCS).
Equipment
The E5-2 shelf has these line replaceable units:
- Flight management computer 1 and 2

- Air data inertial reference unit 1 and 2.
Draw-through and blow-through cooling removes heat from

the equipment on the E5-2 shelf.
An optional E5-1 shelf has electronics for HF and the

passenger entertainment systems.
00-00-00-019.fm
00-00-00
- 62 -

E5-1 SHELF
(OPTIONAL)
ADIRU FMC FMC ADIRU

1 1 2 2
(PROV) E5-2 SHELF
PORTABLE CDU
CONNECTOR
FWD
00-00-00-019.fm
(TYPICAL E5-2 SHELF) ACCESS DOOR
737 GENERAL - ELECTRONIC EQUIPMENT RACK E5
00-00-00
- 63 -
737 GENERAL -- ELECTRONIC EQUIPMENT RACK - E6
Purpose
The E6 rack gives a place to mount electrical and

electronic equipment.
Location
The rack is in the aft cargo compartment on the right

side, aft of the cargo door.
Physical Description
The E6 rack has three shelves. The rack is sealed from

the cargo compartment with two panels and cargo
sidewall liner material. The panels have quick release
fasteners.
00-00-00-039.fm
00-00-00
- 64 -

E6-1
E6 RACK
(SIDE ACCESS PANEL REMOVED)
E6-2
00-00-00-039.fm
E6-3
E6 RACK
(FWD ACCESS PANEL REMOVED)
737 GENERAL - ELECTRONIC EQUIPMENT RACK - E6
00-00-00
- 65 -
737 GENERAL -- PROGRAM SWITCH MODULE
General See the Standard Wiring Practices Manual for more
information on the program switch module.
Many of the line replaceable units (LRUs) are
controlled by internal digital computers. These
computers follow instructions (or programs) to do a
certain task.
The program switch module gives an external method to

customize a computer's program.
The program switch module has these components:
- Switches
- Pin contacts
- Switch seal plug
- Security cover.
An LRU's programming pin inputs come in on the pin

contacts. The switches set the programming pins.
The security cover goes over the switch seal plug. The
security cover and the switch seal plug keeps the
switches stationary.
The program switch module gives this information to an

LRU:
- Equipment physical orientation

- Airplane type
- Number of units installed
00-00-00-036.fm
- Customer specific options.
00-00-00
- 66 -

SWITCH
(24)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 1112 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1011 12
O O
SECURITY N N
COVER
CTS 206-12 T047 S1 CTS 206-12 T047 S2
1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 21 23 25
2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26
PIN CONTACTS
(INSIDE CAVITY)
(26)
WIRES TO LRU
(TYPICAL)
PIN CONTACTS SWITCH SEAL

(INSIDE CAVITY) PLUG (2)
(26)
00-00-00-036.fm
737 GENERAL - PROGRAM SWITCH MODULE
00-00-00
- 67 -
737 GENERAL -- LOADABLE SOFTWARE
00-00-00-031.fm
00-00-00
- 68 -

General Except for the electronic engine control (EEC), you use
the airborne data loader on the P61 panel to load the
Some of the LRUs in the 737 need both hardware and software.
software. Without the software, the logic circuits in
the LRUs can not do their specified function. They must The EEC software is loaded at the engine with a
have the proper software load. portable data loader only.
You can load the software in the LRU at the shop or you Loadable Software Binder
can load it at the airplane.
A binder is in the book compartment at the bottom of
Systems the P61. The binder has all the software necessary to
load software at the airplane.
These LRUs have loadable software features:
Installation Procedure
- Flight management computer (FMC)
- Control display unit (CDU) The information below shows the steps to load an FMCS
- ARINC communications addressing and reporting navigation data base. The procedure to load the other
system (ACARS)/communication management unit (CMU) systems data is similar.
- Display electronic unit (DEU)
- Satellite communication (SATCOM) This is a summary of the steps to load data with an ADL:
- Flight control computer (FCC)
- APU engine control unit (ECU) - Airplane must be on the ground
- Passenger flight information distribution system - Apply electrical power to the airplane
(PFIDS) or AIRSHOW - Set the data loader 3-position switch to the FMC
- Digital flight data acquisition unit (DFDAU) you will load (the L position will load FMC 1 and
- Airplane condition monitoring system (ACMS). the R position will load FMC 2)
- Set the data load selector to the FMC position
NOTE: Some of the above units are for optional systems - Open the data loader access door
on the airplane. When the airplane does not have - Put the necessary diskette into the ADL.
the LRU for the optional system, the switch
00-00-00-031.fm
position for the optional system shows INOP.
00-00-00
- 69 -
NOTE: The FMC source select switch on the P5 panel must
be set in the BOTH ON L or NORMAL positions to
see the load progress on the MCDUs if FMC 1 is
loaded. If the 3-position switch is in the R
position, the FMC source select switch must be
set to BOTH ON R to see the load progress on the
MCDUs.
The data load process is automatic. When the data

loader 3-position switch is set to the L position, the
data loads into FMC 1. You then do a crossload and load
the data into FMC 2 via the FMCS inter system bus.
Return the data loader control panel to the NORM

position after the transfer is complete.
NOTE: Do not interrupt electrical power to the system

during software loading. If power is interrupted,
you will need to do the software load procedure
again.
00-00-00-031.fm
00-00-00
- 70 -

P61 PANEL
AIRBORNE DATA LOADER

(TYPICAL)
DATA LOAD SELECTOR

C
SINGLE SYS
L R
CAPT F/O
UPR LWR
FLIGHT COMPARTMENT
(LOOKING AFT)
SYSTEM SELECT
NORMAL
ACMS FMC
DFDAU CDU
PFIDS ACARS/CMU
LOADABLE
SOFTWARE INOP INOP
BINDER INOP INOP
APU DEU
INOP INOP
INOP SATCOM
FCC 1
00-00-00-031.fm
INOP
INOP
DATA LOADER CONTROL PANEL

1 OPTIONAL SYSTEMS NOT ACTIVE
ARE LABELED INOP.
737 GENERAL - LOADABLE SOFTWARE
00-00-00
- 71 -
737 GENERAL -- ANTENNA LOCATIONS
Antenna Location
These are the communication and navigation system

antennas:
- Weather radar
- Traffic alert and collision avoidance system
(TCAS)
- Air traffic control (ATC)
- Global positioning system (GPS)
- Very high frequency (VHF) communication
- Automatic direction finder (ADF)
- High frequency (HF) communication
- VHF omni range (VOR)
- Marker beacon
- Radio altimeter
- Distance measuring equipment (DME)
- Emergency locator transmitter (ELT)
- Localizer
- Glideslope.
00-00-00-006.004
00-00-00
- 72 -

VOR
TCAS GPS 2 VHF 1 ELT HF

ATC GPS 1 ADF (2)
GLIDE SLOPE
WEATHER RADAR
LOCALIZER
ATC VHF 3 DME (2) VHF 2

TCAS RADIO MARKER BEACON
ALTIMETER
(4)
00-00-00-006.004
737 GENERAL - ANTENNA LOCATIONS
00-00-00
- 73 -
737 GENERAL -- EXTERNAL POWER APPLICATION
00-00-00-026.fm
00-00-00
- 74 -

General P19 External Power Receptacle Panel
You use these panels to apply external electrical The external power receptacle panel has these two
power: sections:
- P5-13 electrical meters, battery and galley power - External power receptacle
module - Control and display section.
- P5-4 ac systems, generator, and APU module
- P19 external power receptacle panel. You connect the external power cable to the external
power receptacle.
P5-13 Electrical Meters, Battery, and Galley Power
Module The control and display section has the EXTERNAL POWER
CONN and the external power NOT IN USE indicators.
The BAT switch lets you energize these buses with
battery power: The amber EXTERNAL POWER CONN light comes on when the
ground power plug is connected and power is present.
- Switched hot battery bus
- Battery bus The white NOT IN USE indicator comes on when external
- AC and DC standby buses. power is present, but not in use.
The switch is guarded in the BAT ON position. External Power Application
P5-4 AC Systems, Generator and APU Module Before you supply external power to the airplane, make
sure that the external power supply operates correctly.
The ground power switch gives you manual control when
good quality ground power is available. The blue GRD WARNING: IF THE EXTERNAL POWER SUPPLY HAS AN EARTH
POWER AVAILABLE light above the switch shows if the GROUNDED NEUTRAL, THERE MUST NOT BE AN OPEN OR
ground source is connected and quality is good. FLOATING GROUND IN THE NEUTRAL CIRCUIT WIRING
OF THE SUPPLY OR THE AIRPLANE. IF AN OPEN OR
The ground power switch has three positions and is FLOATING GROUND IS PRESENT, THE AIRPLANE CAN
00-00-00-026.fm
spring loaded to the center (neutral) position. The ON
and OFF positions are momentary positions.
00-00-00
- 75 -
BE PUT AT AN ELECTRICAL POTENTIAL ABOVE EARTH - 1 TRANSFER BUS OFF
GROUND. THIS ELECTRICAL POTENTIAL CAN CAUSE - 2 TRANSFER BUS OFF.
ELECTRIC SHOCK WITH POSSIBLE SEVERE INJURY TO
PERSONNEL WHO TOUCH THE AIRPLANE. The NOT IN USE light on the P19 panel also goes off.
WARNING: REMOVE THE ELECTRICAL POWER FROM THE EXTERNAL External Power Removal
POWER CABLE BEFORE YOU CONNECT THE CABLE TO
THE AIRPLANE. INJURY TO PERSONS CAN BE CAUSED To remove external power from the airplane, put the GRD
BY AN ELECTRICAL SHOCK. PWR switch momentarily to the OFF position. Then put
the BAT switch to the OFF position. This removes the ac
To apply power, open the external power receptacle door power from the ac transfer buses and the battery power
and connect the power cable to the external power from the standby, switched hot battery and battery
receptacle. buses.
Energize the external power cable. The external power NOT IN USE light on the P19 panel
comes on.
These lights on the external power panel (P19) come on:
When you de-energize the external power cable, the
- EXTERNAL POWER CONN EXTERNAL POWER CONN and the NOT IN USE lights go off.
- NOT IN USE. You can then safely remove the cable from the external
power receptacle.
The GRD POWER AVAILABLE light on the P5-4 panel also
comes on.
To let the ground power go to the ac transfer buses,

put the BAT switch on the P5-13 module to ON. Then put
the GRD PWR switch on the P5-4 panel to ON.
These lights on the P5-4 panel go off when ground power

goes to the ac transfer buses:
00-00-00-026.fm
- 1 SOURCE OFF
- 2 SOURCE OFF
00-00-00
- 76 -

GROUND POWER
AVAILABLE LIGHT GRD POWER
BATTERY AVAILABLE
b
SWITCH GRD
PWR
OFF
GROUND POWER OFF
SWITCH
BAT
ON
ON
BUS TRANSFER
DC A
O U
TRANSFER F TRANSFER
P5-13 ELECTRICAL METERS BUS OFF a T BUS OFF a
F O
BATTERY AND GALLEY SOURCE SOURCE
OFF a OFF a
POWER MODULE
GEN OFF APU GEN GEN OFF
BUS b OFF BUS b BUS b
OFF OFF
ON ON
GEN 1 APU GEN GEN 2
APU
P5-4 AC SYSTEMS, GENERATOR, AND APU

MODULE
EXTERNAL
POWER
EXTERNAL POWER F
CONNECTED LIGHT CONN
PILO
00-00-00-026.fm
NOT CAL
NOT IN USE LIGHT IN USE
FWD
P19 EXTERNAL POWER PANEL
737 GENERAL - EXTERNAL POWER APPLICATION
00-00-00
- 77 -
737 GENERAL -- APU FIRE PROTECTION
00-00-00-025.fm
00-00-00
- 78 -

General Make sure the APU BOTTLE DISCHARGED light is off. This
light is normally off to show a charged APU fire
You use the overheat/fire protection panel to do the extinguishing bottle.
APU fire protection test and to extinguish an APU fire
from the flight compartment. To do a test of the APU squib, put the EXT TEST switch
to position 1 or 2. If the squib is good, the APU squib
You use the APU ground control panel on the main wheel light comes on.
well to turn off the APU and extinguish an APU fire
from outside the airplane. Flight Compartment Operation
Fire Protection System Test If the fire detection system detects an APU fire, these
are the results in the flight compartment:
Do a test of the APU fire protection system before you
start the APU. The controls to do the test are on the - APU fire handle light on the overheat/fire
overheat/fire protection panel. protection panel
- APU fire handle unlocks
Before you do the fire protection system test, alert - FIRE WARN lights on the glareshield
the ground crew. The APU fire warning horn comes on - Fire bell from the aural warning unit
during the test. - APU shuts down.
To start the test, momentarily put the TEST switch to To stop the fire bell, use the bell cutout switch or
FAULT/INOP. The FAULT and APU DET INOP lights come on. the master fire warning lights.
Momentarily put the TEST switch to OVHT/FIRE. Make sure To extinguish the fire, use the APU fire handle. Pull
these indications come on: up on the APU fire handle and then turn the handle to
discharge the APU fire bottle.
- APU fire handle light on the overheat/fire
protection panel Main Wheel Well Operation
- FIRE WARN lights on the glareshield
- Fire bell from the aural warning unit. In the main wheel well, you hear an intermittent horn
00-00-00-025.fm
if the fire protection system detects a fire. The APU
fire warning light on the APU ground control panel
flashes.
00-00-00
- 79 -
To stop the APU warning horn, use the HORN CUTOUT
switch.
To extinguish the fire, pull down the APU ground

control panel fire control handle to arm the
extinguisher. Use the BOTTLE DISCHARGE switch to
discharge the extinguisher.
00-00-00-025.fm
00-00-00
- 80 -

APU BOTTLE HORN

DISCHARGE CUTOUT
SWITCH SWITCH
APU
FIRE
CONTROL
1.PULL HANDLE DOWN
FLT CONT ELEC 2.DISCHARGE BOTTLE
FIRE MASTER BOTTLE DISCHARGE
WARN CAUTION IRS APU

a a
BELL CUTOUT PUSH TO RESET
r a
FUEL OVHT/DET
MASTER MASTER
FIRE CAUTION SYSTEM CAUTION
WARNING LIGHT (2) ANNUNCIATOR APU REMOTE FIRE HORN
LIGHT (2) SWITCH HANDLE BOTTLE

DISCHARGE CUTOUT
APU BOTTLE APU FIRE

FIRE PROTECTION DISCHARGE BELL CUTOUT WARNING LIGHT
TEST SWITCH INDICATOR SWITCH
OVHT DET WHEEL BELL CUTOUT

OVHT DET
a a
GROUND CONTROL
WELL r L BOTTLE R BOTTLE PANEL (P28)
DISCHARGED DISCHARGED
A B A B
DISCH ENGINES
DISCH FAULT DISCH
T
NORMAL a NORMAL E
L R L R
X E1 2
ENG 1 a ENG 2 a S
OVERHEAT APU DET OVERHEAT T
INOP a T R EXT TEST
F I TEST O F SWITCH
A FIRE SWITCHES L g g
N V I
00-00-00-025.fm
U O H R
APU BOTTLE (FUEL SHUTOFF)
DISCHARGED PULL WHEN ILLUMINATED
L P T E
a LOCK OVERRIDE: PRESS g
T r r BUTTON UNDER HANDLE r APU
APU
OVERHEAT/FIRE PROTECTION PANEL (P8) SQUIB
APU FIRE HANDLE LIGHT
737 GENERAL - APU FIRE PROTECTION
00-00-00
- 81 -
737 GENERAL -- APU OPERATION
00-00-00-496.fm
00-00-00
- 82 -

General The APU GEN OFF BUS light comes on when the APU is ready
to supply electrical power.
When you do maintenance, you start the APU to supply
electrical power and bleed air. The maintenance, fault, and overspeed lights normally
are off. If these lights come on, refer the problem to
The APU switch lets you control the APU. The APU a qualified APU technician.
electronic control unit (ECU) controls the system
operation. Shutdown
The APU indicator panel shows system status. The ECU also controls the APU shutdown. Normally, to
shutdown the APU, you put the APU switch to OFF. This
Start starts a cool down cycle. The cool down cycle time is
approximately 60 seconds. When the cool down cycle is
The battery switch must be ON before you can start and complete, the APU shuts down.
operate the APU.
The ECU can also automatically shutdown the APU. If the
If AC power is available, turn the aft number 1 fuel ECU finds a shutdown condition, the ECU does a
boost pump on. This gives pressurized fuel to the APU. protective shutdown. A protective shutdown causes one
Pressurized fuel makes the APU start better. of these indications on the APU indicator panel to come
on:
The ECU controls the APU start sequence.
- Fault light
When you move the APU switch to START and release it, - Overspeed light
the switch moves back to the ON position. The ECU goes - Low oil pressure light.
through the start sequence. The time for the start
sequence is about 60 seconds. Training Information Point
The low oil pressure light comes on and stays on for The BAT DISCHARGE light on the electrical meters,
approximately 30 seconds. The APU exhaust gas battery, and galley power module comes on when the APU
temperature (EGT) increases. start uses DC power. The BAT DISCHARGE light does not
00-00-00-496.fm
come on when the APU uses AC power to start.
See the APU chapter for more information on the
specific operating range of the APU. (AMM PART I 49)
00-00-00
- 83 -
The APU fuel shutoff valve and air inlet door will
close for a normal or protective shutdown. Wait 40
seconds after the EGT goes below 300 C for the inlet
door and fuel shutoff valve to close before you move
the battery switch to the OFF position.
Do not use the battery switch or fire switches to begin

a normal APU shutdown. The 60-second cool down is
required to prevent coke in the turbine bearing and
fuel nozzles.
If the fuel shutoff valve does not close in the

required time, the APU FAULT light comes on and stays
on until you start the APU again or you put the battery
switch in the OFF position.
See the engines controls section for more information

on APU faults.(AMM PART I 49-60)
00-00-00-496.fm
00-00-00
- 84 -

MAINT LOW OIL FAULT OVER APU GEN

PRESSURE SPEED OFF BUSb
APU GEN OFF BUS

10
EGT
LIGHT (ON P5-4)
8
6
CX100 0
4 2
APU INDICATOR PANEL APU
STBY TR3 OFF

PWR TEST
OFF ON
BAT START
ON
DC
BATTERY APU
SWITCH SWITCH
START OPERATION
- BATTERY SWITCH ON
- APU SWITCH TO THE START
POSITION & RELEASE TO ON
- LOW OIL PRESSURE LIGHT COMES
ON, THEN GOES OFF IN
APPROXIMATELY 30 SECONDS NORMAL SHUTDOWN PROTECTIVE SHUTDOWN
- EGT INCREASES - APU SWITCH TO THE OFF - ECU SHUTS DOWN APU IF
- MAINT, FAULT AND OVERSPEED POSITION DETECTS SHUTDOWN
CONDITION
00-00-00-496.fm
LIGHTS OFF - 60-SECOND COOL DOWN
- APU GEN OFF BUS LIGHT ON WHEN - LOW OIL PRESSURE, FAULT,
- APU SHUTS DOWN OR OVERSPEED LIGHT ON
APU IS READY TO SUPPLY POWER
737 GENERAL - APU OPERATION
00-00-00
- 85 -
737 GENERAL -- EQUIPMENT COOLING
General
To prevent damage to equipment, you must make sure that

cooling air is on while electrical power is on. The
controls and indications for the equipment cooling
system are on the equipment cooling panel.
Operation
The equipment cooling panel has an equipment cooling

SUPPLY switch and an equipment cooling EXHAUST switch.
Each switch has two positions:
- NORMAL
- ALTERNATE.
You put the switch in one of these positions to operate

the normal or the alternate fan.
Indication
The equipment cooling supply or exhaust OFF light and a

master caution light comes on when a failure occurs.
The equipment cooling system has low flow detectors to

give a warning when there is not sufficient cooling
airflow. On the ground the ground crew call horn comes
on when low flow is found. This occurs to prevent an
overheat condition.
00-00-00-027.fm
00-00-00
- 86 -

EQUIP COOLING
SUPPLY EXHAUST P5 FORWARD OVERHEAD PANEL
NORM
ALTN
OFF OFF
a a
00-00-00-027.fm
EMER EXIT LIGHTS
EQUIPMENT COOLING
PANEL
737 GENERAL - EQUIPMENT COOLING
00-00-00
- 87 -
737 GENERAL -- HYDRAULIC POWER OPERATION
00-00-00-294.fm
00-00-00
- 88 -

General Normally, the engine-driven pumps are on. When the
engines are on, the engine-driven pumps come on to also
You pressurize the hydraulic systems with a ground pressurize systems A and B.
service cart or with the hydraulic pumps.
An overheat light lets you monitor the system
The switches on the hydraulic panel lets you control temperature.
hydraulic system A and B hydraulic pumps.
The flight control panel lets you control the standby
hydraulic system. If you pressurize the hydraulic systems with the
hydraulic pumps, make sure there is sufficient fuel in
Ground Service Cart Pressurization the main fuel tanks to remove heat from the heat
exchangers.
To pressurize hydraulic system A, connect a ground
service cart to the left ground service disconnect. To pressurize a hydraulic system with a ground service
cart, first you must remove the pressure from the
To pressurize hydraulic system B, connect a ground hydraulic reservoir.
service cart to the right ground service disconnect.
WARNING: KEEP PERSONS AND EQUIPMENT AWAY FROM ALL
You can not pressurize the standby system from a ground CONTROL SURFACES AND THE NOSE GEAR WHEN
service cart. HYDRAULIC POWER IS SUPPLIED. THE AILERONS,
ELEVATORS, RUDDER, FLAPS, SLATS, SPOILERS,
Hydraulic Pump Pressurization AND THE NOSE GEAR ARE SUPPLIED WITH POWER BY
THE HYDRAULIC SYSTEMS. INJURIES TO PERSONS OR
You use the hydraulic panel to operate and to monitor DAMAGE TO EQUIPMENT CAN OCCUR WHEN HYDRAULIC
the hydraulic pumps for system A and B. The flight POWER IS SUPPLIED.
control panel lets you operate the standby pump.
CAUTION: YOU MUST MONITOR THE INSTRUMENTS AND INDICATOR
You pressurize system A and B with an engine-driven LIGHTS FOR THE HYDRAULIC SYSTEMS WHEN
pump (EDP) or an electric motor-driven pump (EMDP). The HYDRAULIC SYSTEMS ARE PRESSURIZED. THIS IS TO
00-00-00-294.fm
ELEC 1 and ELEC 2 switches on the hydraulic panel let MAKE SURE THE HYDRAULIC SYSTEMS OPERATE
you control the EMDPs. The hydraulic low pressure CORRECTLY. IF THE OVERHEAT LIGHT OF A
lights go off when the hydraulic pressure is normal.
00-00-00
- 89 -
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM COMES ON, YOU MUST STOP THE
OPERATION OF THAT HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
IMMEDIATELY. DAMAGE TO THE EQUIPMENT CAN OCCUR
IF YOU DO NOT DO THIS.
CAUTION: DO NOT OPERATE THE EMDP FOR MORE THAN TWO

MINUTES IF A MAIN FUEL TANK CONTAINS LESS THAN
250 GALLONS (1675 POUNDS/761 KILOGRAMS) OF
FUEL. YOU MUST LET THE RESERVOIR TEMPERATURE
DECREASE TO AMBIENT TEMPERATURE BEFORE YOU
OPERATE THE PUMP AGAIN. DAMAGE TO EQUIPMENT
CAN OCCUR IF YOU DO NOT DO THIS.
00-00-00-294.fm
00-00-00
- 90 -

FLT CONTROL STANDBY HYD

A B LOW a
QUANTITY
STBY STBY
LOW a
RUD RUD PRESSURE
OFF OFF STBY a
RUD ON
A ON B ON
ALTERNATE FLAPS
OFF
LOW a LOW a UP
PRESSURE PRESSURE
OFF
SPOILER ARM
A B DOWN
OFF OFF
FEEL a
DIFF PRESS
ON ON SPEED TRIM
FAIL
a
MACH TRIM
YAW DAMPER FAIL a
YAW AUTO SLAT

DAMPER a FAIL a
OFF
ON
FLIGHT CONTROL PANEL
P5 OVERHEAD PANEL
RETURN
CONNECTION
OVERHEAT OVERHEAT
a a
LOW a LOW a LOW a LOW a PRESSURE
PRESSURE PRESSURE PRESSURE PRESSURE
CONNECTION
ENG 1 ELEC 2 ELEC 1 ENG 2
OFF OFF
FWD
00-00-00-294.fm
ON ON
A HYD PUMPS B
LEFT GROUND SERVICE DISCONNECT (SYSTEM A)
HYDRAULIC PANEL (RIGHT GROUND SERVICE DISCONNECT SIMILAR)
737 GENERAL - HYDRAULIC POWER OPERATION
00-00-00
- 91 -
737 GENERAL -- COMMUNICATION EQUIPMENT COMPONENT LOCATIONS - 1
Flight Compartment Component locations
These are the captain and first officer flight

interphone system components:
- Boom mic jack

- Headphone jack
- Hand mic jack
- Oxygen mask mic jack
- Control column mic switch
- Flight interphone speaker
- Audio control panel.
The service interphone switch is on the P5 aft overhead

panel.
The passenger signs panel is on the P5 forward overhead

panel.
The controls for the VHF radios are on the P8 aft

electronics panel.
00-00-00-231.fm
00-00-00
- 92 -

SERVICE INTERPHONE SWITCH OBSERVER AUDIO CONTROL PANEL

PASSENGER SIGNS PANEL
CAPT FLIGHT INTERPHONE SPEAKER
F/O FLIGHT INTERPHONE SPEAKER
CAPT JACKS (AFT OF
NO. 5 LEFT WINDOW) F/O JACKS (AFT OF
- BOOM MICROPHONE NO. 5 RIGHT WINDOW)
- HEADPHONE - BOOM MICROPHONE
- HEADPHONE
CAPT CONTROL
COLUMN MIC SWITCH
F/O CONTROL
COLUMN MIC SWITCH
CAPT JACKS
- MASK MICROPHONE
- HAND MICROPHONE
F/O JACKS
- HAND MICROPHONE
- MASK MICROPHONE
P8 AFT ELECTRONIC PANEL

- CAPT AUDIO CONTROL PANEL
00-00-00-231.fm
- F/O AUDIO CONTROL PANEL
- RADIO COMMUNICATION PANEL 1
737 GENERAL - COMMUNICATION EQUIPMENT COMPONENT LOCATIONS - 1
00-00-00
- 93 -
737 GENERAL -- COMMUNICATION EQUIPMENT COMPONENT LOCATIONS - 2
Jack Locations
These locations have service interphone jacks:
- Electronic rack (location A)

- Right wing refueling slat (location B)
- Right wheel well (location C)
- Left wheel well (location D)
- Aft entry light panel (location E)
- APU (location F).
00-00-00-232.fm
00-00-00
- 94 -

C E
A F
D
CODE LOCATION
A ELECTRONICS RACK
B RT WING REFUELING SLAT
C RIGHT WHEEL WELL
D LEFT WHEEL WELL
E AFT ENTRY LIGHT PNL
F APU
00-00-00-232.fm
737 GENERAL - COMMUNICATION EQUIPMENT COMPONENT LOCATIONS - 2
00-00-00
- 95 -
737 GENERAL -- FLIGHT INTERPHONE SYSTEM OPERATION
General - Push down on the FLT INT receive volume switch and
turn the switch to adjust the volume
The flight crew uses the flight interphone system to - Push the FLT INT mic selector switch to select the
speak with each other and the ground crew. flight interphone system.
- Key a mic switch. You use either the mic switch on
Flight and maintenance crews use the flight interphone the control wheel or the radio-intercom switch on
system to get access to the communication systems. You the audio control panel.
can also use the flight interphone system to monitor - Talk on a microphone.
the navigation receivers.
You hear audio on the headphones that are connected at
Flight Interphone Components the other stations.
These are the captain and first officer flight The ground crew can listen and talk to the flight crew
interphone system components: with a headset connected to the flight interphone jack
on the external power panel.
- Control wheel microphone switch
- Audio control panel (ACP)
- Hand microphone
- Oxygen mask
- Headset
- Hand microphone (mic)
- Speaker.
The observer has the same components without a control

column microphone switch, boom mic jack, or speaker.
The external power panel has a flight interphone jack

for the ground crew.
Operation
00-00-00-233.fm
To talk between the pilot stations, do these on the
audio control panels:
00-00-00
- 96 -

FLT INT MIC

SELECTOR
INT
FLT INT RECEIVE

VOLUME CONTROL
CONTROL WHEEL
MIC SWITCH
RADIO- FLIGHT INTERPHONE
INTERCOM SPEAKERS (2)
RADIO
SWITCH
INT
AUDIO CONTROL PANEL (3)
EXTERNAL INTERPHONE
POWER
COMM FLIGHT SERVICE
NOSE
PILOT WHEEL WELL
ON
NORM
NOT CALL LIGHT
00-00-00-233.fm
IN USE
OXYGEN MASKS HEADSETS HEADPHONE HAND MIC
MICROPHONES AND HEADSETS EXTERNAL POWER PANEL
737 GENERAL - FLIGHT INTERPHONE SYSTEM OPERATION
00-00-00
- 97 -
737 GENERAL -- CREW CALL OPERATION
General
The ground crew call system makes call signals between

the flight compartment and ground crew.
Aural signals from the system tells you to use the

service interphone.
Components
The ground crew call system has these components:
- Ground call switch on the passenger signs panel

- Pilot call switch on the external power panel
- Ground crew call horn.
The system uses the aural warning module for alerts in

the flight compartment.
Operation
A crew member pushes the GRD CALL switch in the flight

compartment to call the ground crew. The switch is on
the passenger signs panel on the P5 forward overhead
panel. A horn in the nose wheel well makes a sound when
the crew member uses the switch.
The ground crew pushes the PILOT CALL switch on the

external power panel to call the flight compartment. A
call light on the forward overhead panel comes on and
00-00-00-234.fm
there is a chime from the aural warning module.
00-00-00
- 98 -

GRD
ATTEND CALL
GROUND CREW
CALL CALL HORN
PASSENGER SIGNS PANEL
EXTERNAL INTERPHONE PARKING BRAKE

POWER LIGHT
CONN. FLIGHT
PILOT CALL NWW LIGHT

ON
NORMAL
NOT
IN USE
00-00-00-234.fm
AURAL WARNING MODULE EXTERNAL POWER PANEL
737 GENERAL - CREW CALL OPERATION
00-00-00
- 99 -
737 GENERAL -- SERVICE INTERPHONE SYSTEM
General The ground crew hears audio when a headset connects to
a service interphone jack. For other stations to hear
The ground crew uses the service interphone system to the ground crew, the service interphone switch must be
talk to each other and to the flight crew. Service ON.
interphone jacks are at different locations on the
airplane.
The flight attendants use the service interphone system

to speak with each other and the pilots.
Components
The service interphone system has these components:
- Service interphone jacks

- Attendant handsets
- Service interphone switch.
The pilots can use the flight interphone system to

interface with the service interphone system.
Operation
From the flight compartment, you select the service

interphone function with the audio control panel (ACP).
Push the service interphone mic selector switch and
adjust the receiver volume control.
The attendant handset automatically connects into the

service interphone system when the handset is removed
00-00-00-235.fm
from the cradle.
00-00-00
- 100 -

OFF
- FLIGHT INTERPHONE
- MICROPHONES
- HEADSETS ON
- SPEAKERS
SERVICE INTERPHONE
SWITCH
SERVICE INTERPHONE
SERVICE INTERPHONE RECEIVE VOLUME
MIC SELECTOR CONTROL
CABIN
ATTENDANT
HANDSET (2)
C C C C C C Cw
PASSENGER CABIN
C C
SERVICE INTERPHONE
00-00-00-235.fm
AUDIO CONTROL PANEL (3) JACK (7)
FLIGHT COMPARTMENT
737 GENERAL - SERVICE INTERPHONE SYSTEM
00-00-00
- 101 -
737 GENERAL -- VHF COMMUNICATION SYSTEM OPERATION
General Use the frequency selectors to tune the radio to a new
frequency. The standby frequency display shows the new
You use these components to operate the VHF radio: frequency.
- Microphone or headset When you are sure the frequency is correct, push the
- Radio communication panel (RCP) frequency transfer switch. The active frequency
- Audio control panel. indicator shows the new frequency. The VHF radio uses
the new frequency.
Receive Operation
Listen to the audio from the VHF radio on the speaker
You use the radio communication panel and the audio or headset. Adjust the volume control switches on the
control panel to receive transmissions on the VHF audio control panel for a comfortable sound level.
radio.
Transmit Operation
On the audio control panel, push the receiver volume
control for the VHF radio. Turn the control to adjust Make sure the active frequency indicator shows the
the volume from the VHF radio. frequency you want to transmit. Make sure the frequency
you select is a valid transmit frequency.
You hear audio on the headset and the flight interphone
speakers. To hear sound from the flight interphone Push the microphone selector switch on the audio
speakers, push the speaker (SPKR) volume control to control panel for the VHF radio.
turn on the speaker. Turn the control to adjust the
volume of sound from the speaker. Listen for transmissions on the frequency you selected.
When the frequency is clear and you want to transmit a
When you apply power to the airplane, the radio message, key the mic and speak into it. You hear
communication panels (RCPs) are on. Initially, RCP 1 sidetone in the headphone and muted sidetone from the
tunes VHF 1 and RCP 2 tunes VHF 2. Push the VHF switch speaker. The flight interphone system mutes the
for the VHF radio you want to use. A light on the switch sidetone to the speaker when you use the boom mic or
comes on to show which radio the panel controls. The the hand mic.
frequency indicators show VHF radio frequencies
00-00-00-236.fm
(118.000 to 136.975 kHz). The VHF transceiver tunes to You can continue to transmit and receive on the
the frequency in the active frequency indicator. frequency you selected.
00-00-00
- 102 -

MIC SWITCH
R/T
HAND
ACTIVE STANDBY AUDIO CONTROL PANEL MICROPHONE CONTROL WHEEL
V PTT SOURCE
H C
F O
/ PANEL M
H M
OFF TEST
F
VHF 1 VHF 2 VHF 3 VHF
SEN
HF 1 AM HF 2
RADIO COMMUNICATION PANEL

1
1-VHF
INOP
00-00-00-236.fm
1 AUDIO CONTROL PANEL
INOP PLACARDS ARE OVER THE LEGEND
OF ANY RADIO SELECT SWITCH (VHF SELECT)
THAT IS NOT CONNECTED.
737 GENERAL - VHF COMMUNICATION SYSTEM OPERATION
00-00-00
- 103 -
737 GENERAL -- MAIN LANDING GEAR DOWNLOCK PIN
General
You install a downlock pin into the main landing gear

(MLG) to prevent an outside force from unlocking the
main landing gear.
There is one main landing gear downlock pin for each

main landing gear.
The downlock pin installs in the MLG downlock strut.
WARNING: YOU MUST CAREFULLY INSTALL THE GROUND LOCKS IN

ALL LANDING GEAR. AN ACCIDENTAL RETRACTION OF
THE LANDING GEAR CAN CAUSE INJURY TO PERSONS
AND DAMAGE TO EQUIPMENT.
00-00-00-323.fm
00-00-00
- 104 -

DOWNLOCK
SPRING (2)
DOWNLOCK
ACTUATOR
REACTION
LINK
DOWNLOCK
PIN HOLE
DOWNLOCK UPPER
STRUT SIDE
STRUT
LEFT MAIN LANDING GEAR
(LOOKING FORWARD)
00-00-00-323.fm
FWD
737 GENERAL - MAIN LANDING GEAR DOWNLOCK PIN
00-00-00
- 105 -
737 GENERAL -- NOSE LANDING GEAR DOWNLOCK PIN
General
You install a downlock pin into the nose landing gear

(NLG) to prevent an outside force from unlocking the
nose landing gear.
There is one nose landing gear downlock pin for the

nose landing gear.
The nose landing gear downlock pin installs in the NLG

downlock pin hole.
WARNING: YOU MUST CAREFULLY INSTALL THE GROUND LOCKS IN

ALL LANDING GEAR. AN ACCIDENTAL RETRACTION OF
THE LANDING GEAR CAN CAUSE INJURY TO PERSONS
AND DAMAGE TO EQUIPMENT.
00-00-00-324.fm
00-00-00
- 106 -

UPPER
DRAG
BRACE
FORWARD
LOCK LINK
AFT
LOCK LINK
FWD
NLG
DOWNLOCK LOWER
PIN HOLE DRAG
BRACE
FWD
00-00-00-324.fm NOSE LANDING GEAR NOSE LANDING GEAR LOCKING MECHANISM
737 GENERAL - NOSE LANDING GEAR DOWNLOCK PIN
00-00-00
- 107 -
737 GENERAL -- TOWING LEVER
General WARNING: MAKE SURE ALL PERSONS AND EQUIPMENT ARE AWAY
FROM THE NOSE GEAR UNTIL THE NOSE GEAR IS
A towing lever permits you to depressurize the nose CENTERED. A FAST MOVEMENT OF NOSE GEAR CAN
wheel steering system. Because of this, you do not have OCCUR IF THE HYDRAULIC SYSTEM IS PRESSURIZED
to depressurize hydraulic system A to tow the airplane. WHEN THE LOCKOUT PIN IS REMOVED. THIS CAN
CAUSE INJURY TO PERSONS AND DAMAGE TO
The towing lever is on the left side of the metering EQUIPMENT.
valve module above the steering actuator.
Operation
The towing lever is spring-loaded to the off position.

Move the lever forward to the tow position. Insert a
pin in the pin hole in the lever to hold the lever in
the towing position. A placard on the protective cover
(not shown) shows the two positions of the towing
lever.
If you tow the airplane and turn the nose wheels more
than 78 degrees, you must disconnect the torsion links.
Support the lower torsion link from dragging on the
ground when it is disconnected.
A red stripe on the outside of each nose landing gear

door shows when the wheels are at 78 degrees. When the
tow bar aligns with the red stripe, the wheels are at
78 degrees.
If you tow the airplane and turn the nose wheels more
than 90 degrees, you must disconnect the taxi light
00-00-00-329.fm
wire bundle.
00-00-00
- 108 -

TOWING
LEVER
FWD
NOSE LANDING GEAR
TOWING
LEVER
RED FWD PIN HOLE

STRIPE
TORSION NOSE WHEEL STEERING HYDRAULIC COMPONENTS
00-00-00-329.fm
LINKS (PROTECTIVE COVER REMOVED)
737 GENERAL - TOWING LEVER
00-00-00
- 109 -
737 GENERAL -- PARKING BRAKE SYSTEM
Purpose BRAKE SURFACES TEND TO FUSE TOGETHER.
THEREFORE, AFTER A HIGH ENERGY STOP, OR
The parking brake system uses the normal hydraulic FOLLOWING TOUCH AND GO STOPS, A COOLING PERIOD
brake system to keep the main landing gear brakes OF 40 TO 60 MINUTES SHOULD BE ALLOWED BEFORE
applied when you park the airplane. THE PARKING BRAKE IS SET.
Parking Brake System Indication
A red parking brake light next to the parking brake

lever shows the condition of the parking brake system.
A brake pressure indicator shows the available brake

pressure.
A light on the external power panel also shows the

condition of the parking brake system.
Operation
To set the parking brakes, push the brake pedals and

pull the parking brake lever. The linkage latches the
brake pedals in the brakes-applied position.
A fully charged brake accumulator shows 3000 PSI on the

brake pressure indicator. This keeps the brakes
pressurized for at least 8 hours.
CAUTION: PARKING BRAKES SHOULD NOT BE SET FOLLOWING A
00-00-00-034.fm
HIGH ENERGY STOP. HIGH ENERGY STOPS ARE
DEFINED AS A REFUSED TAKE OFF OR ANY STOP
OTHER THAN NORMAL. UNDER STATIC PRESSURE, HOT
00-00-00
- 110 -

3
2 4
BRAKE
1 PRESS
0
BRAKE PRESSURE INDICATOR
BRAKE
PEDALS (4) PARKING BRAKE
SET LIGHT INTERPHONE
PARKING
BRAKE LEVER
GHT PARK BRAKE
SET PARKING
BRAKE LIGHT
NOSE
T WHEEL WELL
ON
NORM
00-00-00-034.fm
LL LIGHT
EXTERNAL POWER PANEL CONTROL STAND
737 GENERAL - PARKING BRAKE SYSTEM
00-00-00
- 111 -
737 GENERAL -- AIRPLANE TOWING
General
You tow the airplane with a towbar that connects to the

nose gear tow fitting.
You install a special eyebolt on each main gear to move

the airplane in non-normal conditions or to moor the
airplane.
You can also tow the airplane with towbarless

equipment.
WARNING: WHEN YOU TOW THE AIRPLANE, ALL PERSONS MUST

STAY OUT OF THE DANGEROUS AREAS AROUND THE TOW
VEHICLE, TOW BAR, AND NOSE WHEELS. PERSONNEL
ON THE GROUND MUST BE AWARE OF THE POSSIBILITY
OF BEING RUN OVER BY THE NOSE WHEELS. THE TOW
VEHICLE, TOW BAR, AND AIRPLANE WILL CHANGE
POSITION DURING PUSHBACK AND TOWING. MAINTAIN
A MINIMUM OF 10 FEET SEPARATION BETWEEN
PERSONS ON THE GROUND AND THE EQUIPMENT THAT
MOVES. A FATAL INJURY COULD OCCUR.
See part two of the maintenance manual for more

information about towing the airplane.
00-00-00-029.fm
00-00-00
- 112 -

00-00-00-029.fm
MAIN LANDING GEAR
NOSE GEAR TOW TOW FITTING
FITTING
737 GENERAL - AIRPLANE TOWING
00-00-00
- 113 -
737 GENERAL -- TOWING OPERATION
General
You push or pull the airplane with a suitable tow

vehicle. The design of the airplane lets you tow the
airplane from the nose or the main landing gear.
You normally tow the airplane by the nose gear. A tow

bar from a tow vehicle connects to a fitting on the
nose gear. The maximum turn angle is 78 degrees for
normal towing. Red stripes on the nose gear doors show
this towing limit. Disconnect the nose gear torsion
link for turn angles more than 78 degrees. Disconnect
the torsion link and the taxi light cable for turn
angles more than 90 degrees.
You use a towbarless equipment to move the airplane as

an alternate tow vehicle.
You tow from the main gear for unusual towing

conditions such as towing on soft ground or on an
incline. This prevents loads more than the nose gear
structural limits. A tow fitting connects to an eye in
the jacking cone on each main gear. A locally
fabricated cable connects this cable to the tow
vehicle. The maximum turn angle is 30 degrees when you
tow from the main gear.
00-00-00-328.fm
00-00-00
- 114 -

MAX STEERING
ANGLE
30 DEG
78 DEG
SEE NOTES 1 AND 2
NOTES: 1. DISCONNECT NOSE GEAR TORSION
00-00-00-328.fm
LINK WHEN TOWING AT ANGLES >78 DEG
2. DISCONNECT TORSION LINK AND
TAXI LIGHT CABLE WHEN TOWING
AT ANGLES >90 DEG
737 GENERAL - TOWING OPERATION
00-00-00
- 115 -
737 GENERAL -- JACKING POINTS
General CAUTION: DO NOT PUT THE AIRPLANE ON THE JACKS IN WINDS
MORE THAN 35 KNOTS. IF YOU DO NOT OBEY THESE
There are seven jacking points to lift and stabilize INSTRUCTIONS, DAMAGE TO THE AIRPLANE CAN
the airplane. The jacking points consist of three main OCCUR.
and four auxiliary jack points.
CAUTION: DURING WINDY CONDITIONS, YOU MUST USE THE
The main jack points are the wing jack points A and B, STABILIZING JACK (JACK POINT D). YOU MUST PUT
and the aft body jack point C. These jack points allow A PRE-LOAD ON THE STABILIZING JACK TO A
you to connect jacks and lift the complete airplane. MAXIMUM OF 5000 POUNDS (2268 KILOGRAMS) AT
WINDS OF 35 MILES PER HOUR. IF YOU DO NOT OBEY
The four auxiliary jack points are the forward body THESE INSTRUCTIONS, YOU CAN CAUSE DAMAGE TO
jack point, the nose gear axle jack point, and the two THE AIRPLANE.
main gear axle jack points. The forward body jack point
at position D stabilizes the airplane. Jack points E Open the DRAIN MAST-AIR circuit breaker on the P18-3
and F, underneath the landing gear axles, lets you circuit breaker panel and attach a DO-NOT-CLOSE tag.
remove the wheel and tire or brake assembly without This removes heat from the drain mast so it does not
jacking the complete airplane. burn persons around the airplane.
Before you jack the airplane, make sure that the

airplane gross weight and the center of gravity are
within the approved limits. For complete information
about jacking and leveling the airplane, refer to
Maintenance Manual Part II, Chapter 7 and 8.
WARNING: MAKE SURE THE DOWNLOCK PINS ARE INSTALLED ON

ALL THE LANDING GEARS. WITHOUT THE DOWNLOCK
PINS, THE LANDING GEAR COULD RETRACT AND CAUSE
INJURIES TO PERSONS AND DAMAGE TO EQUIPMENT.
00-00-00-322.fm
00-00-00
- 116 -

JACK POINT A JACK POINT C

(WING) (AFT BODY)
JACK POINT E
(NOSE GEAR AXLE)
JACK POINT D
(FORWARD BODY)
JACK POINT B
(WING) JACK POINT F
(MAIN GEAR AXLE)
00-00-00-322.fm
A DB
F E F
737 GENERAL - JACKING POINTS
00-00-00
- 117 -
737 GENERAL -- FMCS CONTROL DISPLAY UNIT
General Maintenance BITE Page
The flight crew uses the control display unit (CDU, You use the MAINT BITE index page to select BITE for
also called the MCDU) to put in flight data and to these systems:
select displays and modes of operation. They also use
the CDU to start ADIRU alignment. You use the CDU to - Flight management computer system (FMCS)
test the FMCS and other systems. - Digital flight control system (DFCS)
- Autothrottle system (A/T)
There are two CDUs in the airplane. They are - Air data inertial reference system (ADIRU)
functionally and physically interchangeable. - Common display system (CDS)
- Engines
Physical Description - Auxiliary power unit (APU)
- Fuel quantity indication system (FQIS).
The CDU has a keyboard and a display.
This shows how to get to the MAINT BITE index page from
Line select keys (LSK) are on the left and right of the airplane electrical power up.
display.
The keyboard has function and mode keys and alpha-

numeric keys.
The CDU has these annunciators:
- FAIL
- CALL
- MSG (message)
- OFST (offset)
- EXEC (execute).
The EXEC light is on the right of the CDU keyboard.
00-00-00-341.fm
00-00-00
- 118 -

IDENT 1/2
MODEL ENG RATING
737-XXX XX.XX DISPLAY
NAV DATA ACTIVE
TBC6880401 MAR18APR17/97 MAINT BITE INDEX 1/1
APR18MAY17/97 <FMCS ENGINES>

OP PROGRAM
549849-001 LINE SELECT <DFCS APU>
SUPP DATA KEYS (12) <A/T FQIS>
APR17/97
<ADIRU
<INDEX POS INIT> <CDS
<INDEX F MC DOWN LOAD>
FUNCTION AND INIT RTE CLB CRZ DES BRT

REF
MODE KEYS
MENU LEGS DEP HOLD PROG EXEC
ARR
N1 FIX
LIMIT A B C D E
PREV NEXT
INIT/REF INDEX 1/1 ANNUNCIATORS C
PAGE PAGE F G H I J M
A S
(4) L G
<IDENT NAV DATA> Lw
1 2 3 K L M N O w
F O
<POS A
I
F
S
La 4 5 6 P Q R S T Tw
<PERF ALPHA-NUMERIC
KEYS 7 8 9 U V W X Y
<TAKEOFF
. 0 +/- Z SP DEL / CLR
<APPROACH SEL CONFIG>
00-00-00-341.fm
<OFFSET MAINT> CONTROL DISPLAY UNIT
737 GENERAL - FMCS CONTROL DISPLAY UNIT
00-00-00
- 119 -
737 GENERAL -- ELECTRICAL POWER INTRODUCTION
Purpose
The electrical power system makes, supplies and

controls electrical power. The system has automatic and
manual control features. Built-in-test equipment (BITE)
and alternate source selection make the system reliable
and easy to maintain.
Electrical power has these subsystems:
- Generator drive
- AC generation
- DC generation
- External power
- AC electrical load distribution.
00-00-00-240.fm
00-00-00
- 120 -

ELECTRICAL
POWER
AC ELECTRICAL
00-00-00-240.fm
GENERATOR AC DC EXTERNAL LOAD
DRIVE GENERATION GENERATION POWER
DISTRIBUTION
737 GENERAL - ELECTRICAL POWER INTRODUCTION
00-00-00
- 121 -
737 GENERAL -- ELECTRICAL POWER GENERAL DESCRIPTION
00-00-00-241.fm
00-00-00
- 122 -

Purpose - Main battery.
- Main battery charger.
The electrical power system makes and supplies AC and - Auxiliary battery.
DC power to airplane. The system has automatic and - Auxiliary battery charger.
manual controls and protection. A standby AC and DC
system gives normal and emergency power. The batteries are the backup DC source if other sources
do not operate. The standby power control unit (SPCU)
AC Power controls the distribution of dc power.
The electrical power system has four main AC power Standby Power
sources and one standby power source. These are the
main AC power sources and their supply capacity: With the loss of normal power, the standby power system
supplies a minimum of 60 minutes of AC and DC power to
- Left integrated drive generator (IDG 1) (90 KVA) systems necessary to maintain safe flight. The
- Right integrated drive generator (IDG 2) (90 KVA) batteries supply DC power. The static inverter uses
- APU starter-generator (90 KVA below 32,000 battery power to make AC power. The SPCU controls the
feet/9,753 meters, and goes down to 66 KVA at distribution of AC and DC standby power.
41,000 feet/12,496 meters)
- External power (90 KVA). Protection
The IDGs and APU starter-generator supply a 3 phase, The electrical power system uses automatic control to
115/200 volts (nominal) at 400 Hz. The AC power system protect the system from source failure or load failure.
design prevents two sources to the same load at the These line replaceable units (LRUs) supply the system
same time. with protection and control logic:
The static inverter supplies a one phase, 115v ac - Left generator control unit (GCU 1)
output to the AC standby bus. - Right generator control unit (GCU 2)
- APU generator control unit (AGCU)
DC Power - Bus power control unit (BPCU)
- Standby power control unit (SPCU)
00-00-00-241.fm
Three transformer rectifier units (TRUs) change 115v ac - Start converter unit (SCU).
to 28v dc. The airplane also has these DC power
sources:
00-00-00
- 123 -
The GCUs monitor the system to control and protect the The modules on the P5 also let you monitor the status
IDGs. The APU GCU and the starter converter unit (SCU) of the electrical power system. The panels have lights
work together to control and protect the APU starter- and an alpha-numeric LED display.
generator. The bus power control unit (BPCU) controls
and monitors the use of external power. The BPCU
protects the airplane from external power with quality
out of limits.
Control
These modules on the P5 panel give manual control of

the electrical power system:
- Electrical meters, battery and galley power module

(P5-13)
- Generator drive and standby power module (P5-5)
- AC systems, generator and APU module (P5-4).
The switches on these modules send signals to the LRUs

that control portions of the system. The LRUs then
energize or de-energize relays or breakers to control
electrical power.
Breakers allow power to the buses. A breaker closes to

let power through it. The breakers close when you
command the GCU to close it. The GCU closes the breaker
only when power is good and no other power source is on
the bus. The GCU receives breaker position through the
BPCU. These are the main breakers:
00-00-00-241.fm
- External power contactor (EPC)
- APU power breaker (APB)
- Generator control breaker (GCB).
00-00-00
- 124 -

DC AMPS CPS FREQ
A
SYS
DATA
EPC
DC VOLTS / AC AMPS / AC VOLTS
BAT TR UNIT ELEC

DISCHARGE a a a
AUX BAT
MAINT
APU GEN
BPCU EXTERNAL POWER
BAT TR1 GEN1 GEN2
A
BAT TR2 GRD INV
BUS PWR
STBY TR3 STBY TEST

PWR TEST PWR
OFF
BAT
OFF OFF
TO TRU 1 STATIC
ON
ON
CAB/UTIL IFE/PASS
ON
SYS INV
DC AC
SEAT
GCB 2
P5-13
1 2
GCU 2
SYS IDG 2
AC STDBY
DISCONNECT
STANDBY POWER
DISCONNECT
STATUS TRU 2
BAT OFF AUTO
TO
SYS
SCU A
P5-5
DC STDBY
TRU 3
GRD
PWR
OFF
APB
ON
BUS TRANSFER
A
O
F
F
U
T
AGCU APU CHARGER
O
STARTER-GENERATOR 1 DC
A BUSES SPCU
SYS
OFF OFF
STATUS
GEN 1 ON APU GEN ONGEN 2
APU
P5-4 GCB 1
00-00-00-241.fm GCU 1 AC
IDG 1 BUSES BATTERY 1
1 2 WITH DUAL BATTERY OPTION
737 GENERAL - ELECTRICAL POWER GENERAL DESCRIPTION
00-00-00
- 125 -
737 GENERAL -- ELECTRICAL POWER COMPONENT LOCATIONS
General Forward Lower Fuselage
Electrical power components are in these areas of the Relays for the electrical power system and other
airplane: airplane systems are located in junction boxes in this
area.
- Flight compartment
- External power panel EE Compartment
- Forward lower fuselage
- EE compartment Many of the electrical components are in the EE
- Engine compartment. These are just a few:
- APU compartment.
- Main battery
Flight Compartment - Main battery charger
- Auxiliary battery
Modules on the P5 overhead panel supply these functions - Auxiliary battery charger
for the electrical power system: - Generator control units (GCUs)
- Bus power control unit (BPCU)
- Manual control - Power distribution panels (PDPs)
- Indication - Start converter unit (SCU).
- DC and standby power system built-in-test
equipment (BITE). The GCUs and BPCU supply BITE for the AC electrical
power and external power systems.
The P6 and P18 panels have many electrical power system
circuit breakers and relays. Engine
External Power Panel The integrated drive generators (IDG) are on the
forward face of the engine accessory gearbox. The
The external power panel is on the right side of the air/oil cooler is on the engine fan case.
fuselage near the nose. The AC external power
receptacle is on this panel. APU Compartment
00-00-00-245.fm
The APU starter-generator is on the APU gearbox.
00-00-00
- 126 -

APU COMPARTMENT
- APU STARTER-GENERATOR
FLIGHT COMPARTMENT
- CONTROL SWITCHES
- INDICATIONS
- P6, P18 PANELS
- RELAYS
EXTERNAL ENGINE
POWER PANEL - INTEGRATED DRIVE GENERATOR (IDG)
EE COMPARTMENT - AIR/OIL COOLER
FORWARD LOWER FUSELAGE - MAIN BATTERY
- JUNCTION BOXES - MAIN BATTERY CHARGER
- AUXILIARY BATTERY
- AUXILIARY BATTERY CHARGER
00-00-00-245.fm
- GENERATOR CONTROL UNITS (GCU)
- BUS POWER CONTROL UNIT (BPCU)
- POWER DISTRIBUTION PANELS (PDP)
- START CONVERTER UNIT (SCU)
737 GENERAL - ELECTRICAL POWER COMPONENT LOCATIONS
00-00-00
- 127 -
737 GENERAL -- ELECTRICAL METERS, BATTERY, AND GALLEY POWER MODULE
General The alphanumeric display shows only voltage and
frequency when you select one of these:
You use the electrical meters, battery and galley power
module (P5-13) for these functions: - STBY PWR
- GRD PWR
- See electrical power parameters for AC and DC - INV.
components or buses
- Connect battery power to electrical buses with the The selector must be in the TEST position to use the
battery switch P5-13 BITE.
- Supply and remove power to the galleys with the
galley switch. DC Meter Selector
The module also has these BITE functions: The DC meter selector is a rotary selector with eight
positions. Each position, except the TEST position, is
- Shows DC and standby power system failure related to a DC power source or DC bus.
indications
- Monitors the dc and standby power and saves fault Voltage (DC VOLTS) and load (DC AMPS) show on the
messages in memory. alphanumeric display when you put the selector in any
- Shows fault messages on the LED alphanumeric of the TR positions or any of the BAT positions.
display.
When the selector is in the BAT BUS or STBY PWR
AC Meter Selector positions, the display shows voltage only.
The AC meter selector is a rotary selector with seven The selector must be in the TEST position to use the
positions. Each position, except the TEST position, is P5-13 BITE.
related to an AC power source or AC bus. The
alphanumeric display shows these parameters for the BAT DISCHARGE Light
three generators:
The amber BAT DISCHARGE light shows main battery
- Voltage (AC VOLTS) discharge or auxiliary battery discharge. The BAT
00-00-00-248.fm
- Load (AC AMPS) DISCHARGE light temporarily comes on during an APU
- Output frequency (CPS FREQ). start with battery power.
00-00-00
- 128 -

See the APU chapter for more information about APU - As many as two lines of maintenance fault
starting.(AMM PART I 49) messages.
TR UNIT Light The selectors and the maintenance switch control what
shows on the alphanumeric display.
The amber TR UNIT light shows transformer rectifier
unit (TRU) failure. The TR UNIT light comes on for any Battery Switch
one of these reasons:
When you put the battery switch to the ON position, the
- Any TRU fails on the ground, or main battery energizes these buses and components:
- TRU 1 fails in flight, or
- TRU 2 and TRU 3 fail in flight. - Switched hot battery bus
- Battery bus
ELEC Light - Static inverter
- AC standby bus
The ELEC light shows DC system or standby power system - DC standby bus
has a failure. You use BITE to find the failure. The - P5-13 alphanumeric display.
amber ELEC light comes on only when the airplane is on
the ground. The battery switch is a two-position switch. The cover,
when down, is a guard for the switch in the ON
MAINT Switch position. You must lift the cover before you move the
switch to the OFF position.
You use the maintenance switch during BITE. The BITE
operates only on the ground. The maintenance switch is CAB/UTIL Switch
a momentary push-button switch.
You use the CAB/UTIL switch to control power to the
LED Alphanumeric Display left and right recirculation fans, forward and aft door
area heaters, drain mast heaters, lavatory water
The LED alphanumeric display shows this type of heaters, ECS gasper fan, all 115v ac galley buses, 115v
information: ac shaver outlets, logo lights, and the potable water
00-00-00-248.fm
compressor.
- DC parameters (current, voltage)
- AC parameters (current, voltage, frequency)
00-00-00
- 129 -
IFE/PASS SEAT Switch
You use the IFE/PASS SEAT switch to control power to

the 115v ac audio entertainment equipment, 115v ac
video entertainment equipment, 115v ac airphone
equipment, and the passenger seat electronic outlets.
00-00-00-248.fm
00-00-00
- 130 -

DC AMPS CPS FREQ
LED
ALPHANUMERIC
DISPLAY

MAINTENANCE
FLIGHT COMPARTMENT BAT SWITCH
DISCHARGE TR UNIT ELEC
a a a
MAINT
DC METER AUX BAT APU GEN

SELECTOR BAT TR1 GEN1 GEN2 AC METER
SELECTOR
BAT GRD
TR2 PWR INV
BUS
STBY TR3 STBY TEST

PWR TEST PWR
CAB/UTIL
BATTERY SWITCH OFF OFF OFF POWER SWITCH
(BEHIND COVER)
BAT
ON
IFE POWER
ON
CAB/UTIL IFE/PASS SWITCH
ON
00-00-00-248.fm
SEAT
DC AC
ELECTRICAL METERS, BATTERY, AND GALLEY POWER MODULE (P5)
737 GENERAL - ELECTRICAL METERS, BATTERY, AND GALLEY POWER MODULE
00-00-00
- 131 -
737 GENERAL -- GENERATOR DRIVE AND STANDBY POWER MODULE
General STANDBY PWR OFF Light
The generator drive and standby power module (P5-5) has The amber STANDBY PWR OFF light comes on when 1 of
these indications and manual controls: these buses do not have power:
- IDG low oil pressure indication (DRIVE lights) - AC standby bus

- Indication that the battery bus or a standby bus - DC standby bus
does not have power (STANDBY PWR OFF light) - Battery bus.
- Generator drive disconnect switches
- Standby power switch. Standby Power Switch
DRIVE Light The standby power switch gives you manual control of
the ac and dc standby power bus sources. The switch is
The amber DRIVE light comes on when the IDG oil a 3-position switch. The switch is usually in the AUTO
pressure is less than the operation limit or when there position. The cover is a guard for the switch in the
is an underfrequency condition while the engine is in AUTO position.
operation.
Generator Drive Disconnect Switch
The generator drive disconnect switch operates the

disconnect mechanism for its IDG when the related
engine start lever is in the idle position. This
removes engine accessory gearbox power from the IDG.
There is 1 switch for each IDG. Each switch has a
spring load to the NORMAL position. The DISCONNECT
position is a momentary position. The cover is a guard
for the switch in the NORMAL position. Break-away wire
usually keeps the cover down. You must lift the cover
and break the wire to move the switch.
00-00-00-249.fm
00-00-00
- 132 -

STANDBY POWER SWITCH

(BEHIND GUARD)
STANDBY
1 PWR OFF a 2
DRIVE DRIVE
a a
STANDBY POWER
DISCONNECT DISCONNECT
GENERATOR DRIVE DISCONNECT

SWITCH (BEHIND GUARD)
BAT OFF AUTO
00-00-00-249.fm
GENERATOR DRIVE AND STANDBY POWER MODULE (P5-5)
737 GENERAL - GENERATOR DRIVE AND STANDBY POWER MODULE
00-00-00
- 133 -
737 GENERAL -- ELECTRICAL POWER - AC SYSTEMS, GENERATOR AND APU MODULE
00-00-00-250.fm
00-00-00
- 134 -

General TRANSFER BUS OFF Light
The upper part of the AC systems, generator and APU The amber TRANSFER BUS OFF light comes on when the AC
module (P5-4) has these lights: transfer bus does not have power. There is one light
for each AC transfer bus.
- GRD POWER AVAILABLE
- TRANSFER BUS OFF SOURCE OFF Light
- SOURCE OFF
- GEN OFF BUS The amber SOURCE OFF light shows when an AC transfer
- APU GEN OFF BUS. bus is not energized by the selected source. The left
SOURCE OFF light is related to these sources:
The upper part of the module also has these manual
controls: - IDG 1 (GEN 1 switch)
- APU (left APU GEN switch)
- Ground power switch - External power (ground power switch).
- Engine generator switches
- APU generator switches The right SOURCE OFF light is related to these sources:
- Bus transfer switch.
- IDG 2 (GEN 2 switch)
GROUND POWER AVAILABLE Light - APU (right APU GEN switch)
- External power (ground power switch).
The GRD POWER AVAILABLE light is on when external AC
power is connected and the quality is good. The light The SOURCE OFF light does not indicate that the AC
is bright blue when on. transfer bus is de-energized. For example, in flight
the left SOURCE OFF light comes on when generator
Ground Power Switch control breaker (GCB) 1 trips. However, the bus
transfer function lets IDG 2 power AC transfer bus 1.
You use the ground power switch to control external
power to the AC transfer buses. There is one light for each transfer bus.
00-00-00-250.fm
00-00-00
- 135 -
GEN OFF BUS Light APU Generator Switches
The blue GEN OFF BUS light comes on when the engine The APU engine generator switches give manual control
generator control breaker (GCB) is open. This shows for APU generator power source selection. There are two
that the IDG is not a power source in use. The light switches because there are two bus tie breakers (BTBs).
goes off when the GCB closes. The switches operate like the engine generator
switches.
APU GEN OFF BUS Light
Bus Transfer Switch
The blue APU GEN OFF BUS light shows that the APU is
running, but its generator is not a power source in The bus transfer switch gives you manual control of the
use. The light is on when the APU is running and the BTBs and the DC bus tie relay. The switch has two
auxiliary power breaker (APB) is open. The light goes positions. The switch is usually in the AUTO position.
off when the APB closes or you shut down the APU. A cover is a guard for the switch in the AUTO position.
Engine Generator Switches In the AUTO position, the BTBs and the DC bus tie relay
work automatically as necessary.
The engine generator switches give manual control for
IDG power source selection. Each switch is a three- The BTBs and the DC bus tie relay open when the switch
position switch and is spring-loaded to the center is put to the OFF position.
(neutral) position. The ON and OFF positions are
momentary positions.
You put a generator switch momentarily to the ON

position to make that IDG the power source for its AC
transfer bus. If IDG power quality is good, the
electrical power system first removes the present power
source (open its generator breaker). Then, the
generator breaker for the IDG closes and the IDG now
supplies power.
00-00-00-250.fm
00-00-00
- 136 -

GRD POWER
AVAILABLEb
GRD GROUND POWER

PWR SWITCH
OFF
ON
BUS TRANSFER
BUS TRANSFER SWITCH
A
TRANSFER
O U TRANSFER (BEHIND COVER)
FLIGHT COMPARTMENT BUS OFF a F T BUS OFF a
F O
SOURCE SOURCE
OFF a OFF a
BUS b OFF BUS b BUS b
ENGINE GENERATOR
OFF OFF SWITCH (2)
ON ON
GEN 1 APU GEN GEN 2
APU GENERATOR APU
SWITCH (2) b a
LOW OIL OVER
MAINT PRESSURE FAULT SPEED
a a
00-00-00-250.fm
AC SYSTEMS, GENERATOR AND APU MODULE (P5-4)
737 GENERAL - ELECTRICAL POWER - AC SYSTEMS, GENERATOR AND APU MODULE
00-00-00
- 137 -
737 GENERAL -- ELECTRICAL POWER DISTRIBUTION
General The system design makes sure that two AC power sources
can not supply power to the same transfer bus at the
These AC buses receive power directly from an AC power same time. However, one AC power source can supply
source: power to both transfer buses through the bus tie
breakers (BTBs).
- AC transfer bus 1
- AC transfer bus 2 Each transfer bus supplies power to these components or
- Ground service bus 1 buses:
- Ground service bus 2.
- Galleys (as many as 2)
System logic automatically removes loads (load shed) to - Main Bus
prevent an overload of an AC power source. - Ground service bus
- Transformer rectifier unit (as many as 2).
These DC buses receive power directly from the
transformer rectifier units (TRUs): Ground Service Buses
- DC bus 1 Each ground service bus receives power in one of these

- DC bus 2 two ways:
- Battery bus.
- The AC transfer bus on that side has power
These buses receive power directly from the main - The ground service switch on the forward attendant
battery or the main battery charger: panel is in the ON position and external power is
connected to the airplane.
- Hot battery bus
- Switched hot battery bus. The two ground service transfer relays control the
selection of the power source.
AC Transfer Buses
Main Buses, Galley Buses and IFE/PASS SEAT Buses
These AC sources supply power to the AC transfer buses:
The main buses, galley buses and IFE/PASS SEAT buses
00-00-00-242.fm
- External power receive power from their respective AC transfer bus.
- APU starter-generator Load shed relays remove the power to these buses when
- Integrated drive generators (IDGs). their loads exceed operating limits. This protects the
00-00-00
- 138 -

AC power source from overload. The bus power control The battery bus normally receives power from TRU 3. The
unit (BPCU) controls the load shed function. battery bus receives power from the battery if TRU 3
has no output.
DC Buses
The switched hot battery bus receives power from the
DC bus 1 usually receives power from TRU 1. However, hot battery bus when the battery switch (P5 panel) is
the bus can receive power from TRU 2 or TRU 3 through in the ON position.
the bus tie relay. This relay is usually energized.
External Power
DC bus 2 usually receive power from TRU 2. TRU 3
supplies power if TRU 2 fails. DC bus 2 may also External power can supply power to these buses:
receive power from TRU 1 through the bus tie relay.
- AC transfer buses
Standby Buses - Ground service buses.
The AC standby bus usually receives power from AC External power supplies power to each AC transfer bus
transfer bus 1. The static inverter may also supply through the external power contactor (EPC) and the
power to this bus. A remote control circuit breaker necessary bus tie breaker (BTB).
(RCCB) controls power to the static inverter.
APU Power
The DC standby bus usually receives power from DC bus
1. The hot battery bus may also supply power to the DC The APU starter-generator supplies power to each AC
standby bus. transfer bus through the APU breaker (APB) and the
necessary BTB. The APU can supply power to both AC
Battery Buses transfer buses on the ground or inflight. See the AC
Generation section for more information.(AMM PART I 24-
The hot battery bus usually receives power from the 20)
main battery or main battery charger. The auxiliary
battery and auxiliary battery charger connects in IDG Power
parallel with the main battery during non-normal
00-00-00-242.fm
conditions to help supply power. See the DC Generation The IDGs are the normal power sources of the AC
section for more information.(AMM PART I 24-30) transfer buses. An IDG supplies power through a
generator control breaker (GCB).
00-00-00
- 139 -
Battery Charger
Each battery charger makes sure its battery stays at

maximum charge. Each battery charger also operates as a
TRU when not in the charge mode.
Remote Control Circuit Breaker (RCCB)
The standby power system uses a RCCB to control power

input to the static inverter. This RCCB is normally
closed. See the Standby Power section 24-34 for more
information.(AMM PART I 24-34)
The dual battery RCCB closes to put the auxiliary

battery and the auxiliary battery charger output in
parallel with the output of the main battery and its
charger. This RCCB is normally open. See the DC
Generation section for more information.(AMM PART I 24-
30)
00-00-00-242.fm
00-00-00
- 140 -

IDG APU IDG

1 GEN EXT 2
PWR
GND SVC GCB 1 APB EPC GCB 2 GND SVC
XFR RLY 1 XFR RLY 2
AC XFR BUS 1 AC XFR BUS 2
BTB 1 BTB 2
GALLEY (S) GALLEY (S)

GND SVC BUS 1 GND SVC BUS 2
MAIN BUS 1 MAIN BUS 2
IFE/PASS SEAT TR3 XFR IFE/PASS SEAT

AUX BAT RLY
CHGR
MAIN BAT
TRU 1 TRU 3 TRU 2 CHGR
RCCB
AUX
BAT BUS TIE
DC BUS 1 RLY DC BUS 2
STATIC
INVERTER STDBY
NORMAL RLY MAIN
RCCB BAT BUS BAT
AC STBY BUS NORM RLY DC STBY BUS
TO APU
START
STBY DC CIRCUIT
BAT BUS ALTN RLY
ALT RLY BAT BUS
FROM DC BUS 1
00-00-00-242.fm
SW HOT BAT GND SVC HOT BAT BUS
BUS RLY BUS RLY
SW HOT BAT BUS GND SVC DC BUS
737 GENERAL - ELECTRICAL POWER DISTRIBUTION
00-00-00
- 141 -
737 GENERAL -- ELECTRICAL POWER OPERATION
00-00-00-247.fm
00-00-00
- 142 -

General You use the IFE/PASS SEAT switch to control power to:
You use switches on the forward P5 overhead panel or - 115v ac audio entertainment equipment
the forward flight attendant panel to operate the - 115v ac video entertainment equipment
electrical system. See the distribution general - 115v ac airphone equipment
description in this section for more information about - Passenger seat electronic outlets.
the operation effect on distribution.
You use the dc and ac selectors and the alphanumeric
Electrical Meters, Battery, And Galley Power Module display to monitor the electrical power system power
(P5-13) sources.
You put the BAT switch to the ON position to energize Generator Drive And Standby Power Module (P5-5)
these buses and components with battery power:
The generator drive disconnect switch operates the
- Switched hot battery bus disconnect mechanism for its integrated drive generator
- Battery bus (IDG). This removes engine accessory gearbox power from
- Static inverter the IDG. The engine start lever must be in the idle
- AC standby bus position for the disconnect function to operate.
- DC standby bus
- P5-13 alphanumeric display. The standby power switch gives you manual control of
the ac and dc standby power bus sources. In the auto
You use the CAB/UTIL switch to control power to: position, the ac standby bus receives power from ac
transfer bus 1, and the dc standby bus receives power
- Left and right recirculation fans from dc bus 1 when these sources are available. If the
- Forward and aft door area heaters sources are not available, the ac standby bus receives
- Drain mast heaters power from the static inverter, and the dc bus receives
- Lavatory water heaters power from the battery.
- ECS gasper fan
- 115v ac galley buses These are the effects of the standby power switch in
- 115v ac shaver outlets the other two positions:
00-00-00-247.fm
- Logo lights
- Potable water compressor. - Deenergize the ac standby bus and the dc standby
bus (OFF position)
00-00-00
- 143 -
- Energize the ac standby bus with battery power are two bus tie breakers (BTBs) that supply power to
through the static inverter (BAT position) the ac transfer buses. The two ac transfer buses
- Energize the dc standby bus with battery power receive APU power with operation of one APU GEN switch
(BAT position). if the ac transfer buses do not have power initially.
If the ac transfer buses do have power, then only the
AC Systems, Generator, And APU Module (P5-4) ac transfer bus on the same side as the APU GEN switch
you operate energizes with APU power.
You use the ground power switch to control external
power to the ac transfer buses. The blue GRD POWER The blue APU GEN OFF BUS light comes on when the APU is
AVAILABLE light above the switch shows if the ground ready to supply electrical power.
source is connected and quality is good. The two ac
transfer buses receive power when you put the ground Forward Flight Attendant Panel
power switch to the ON position. Initial power sources
are removed before the transfer buses receive external You use the ground service switch to supply external
power. power to ground service bus 1 and 2 with external power
connected. This makes it possible to supply electrical
The bus transfer switch gives you manual control of the power for cabin servicing without access to the flight
BTBs and the dc bus tie relay. In the AUTO position, compartment.
the BTBs and the dc bus tie relay operate as necessary.
In the OFF position, the BTBs open and isolate the ac

transfer buses from each other. The dc bus tie relay
also opens. This isolates dc bus 1 and dc bus 2 from
each other. The position also resets the BTB trip
circuits.
You use the GEN 1 and GEN 2 switches to supply IDG power
to an ac transfer bus. The ac transfer bus on that side
goes to IDG power when you temporarily put the switch
to the ON position. Initial power sources are removed.
00-00-00-247.fm
You use the APU GEN switches to supply power to the ac
transfer buses. There are two switches because there
00-00-00
- 144 -

DC AMPS CPS FREQ
BAT A TR UNIT ELEC

DISCHARGE A A
MAINT
AUX BAT APU GEN

BAT TR1 GEN1 GEN2
BAT TR2 GRD INV

BUS PWR
STBY TR3 STBY TEST

ELECTRICAL METERS
PWR TEST PWR BATTERY AND GALLEY
OFF
OFF OFF POWER MODULE
BAT
ON ON
(P5-13)
ON CAB/UTL IFE/PASS
SEAT
DC AC
STANDBY
1 PWR OFF A 2
DRIVE DRIVE
A
A
STANDBY POWER
DISCONNECT DISCONNECT GENERATOR DRIVE
FLIGHT COMPARTMENT AND STANDBY
BAT OFF AUTO POWER MODULE
(P5-5)
R R
GRD POWER
AVAILABLE
GRD B
PWR
OFF
ON
AC SYSTEM
BUS TRANSFER
O
A GENERATOR AND
U
TRANSFER
BUS OFF A
F
F
T
TRANSFER
BUS OFF A APU MODULE
O
FORWARD ATTENDANT PANEL
SOURCE
OFF A
SOURCE
OFF A
(P5-4)
00-00-00-247.fm
GROUND SERVICE BUS B OFF BUS B BUS B
SWITCH OFF OFF
ON ON
GEN 1 APU GEN GEN 2
APU
737 GENERAL - ELECTRICAL POWER OPERATION
00-00-00
- 145 -
MAINTENANCE DOCUMENTS -- INTRODUCTION
General - Flight faults
- Ground faults
The maintenance documents for the 737-600/700/800 - Service problems
supply aid for all maintenance activities. Many - Structural damage.
different documents used together let you do
maintenance on the airplane. The maintenance documents You use these documents to do unscheduled maintenance:
help you do scheduled and unscheduled maintenance work.
- Fault Reporting Manual (FRM)
Scheduled Maintenance - Fault Isolation Manual (FIM)
- Structural Repair Manual (SRM)
These are examples of scheduled maintenance work: - Dispatch Deviations Guide (DDG)
- Airplane Maintenance Manual (AMM).
- Through stop checks
- Airplane turn around Maintenance Planning Document
- Daily checks
- Planned checks. The Maintenance Planning Document (MPD) gives tasks for
each type of scheduled maintenance check. Airlines use
You use these documents to do scheduled maintenance: the MPD to make task cards that the technician uses
during the maintenance checks.
- Maintenance Planning Document (MPD)
- Airplane Maintenance Manual (AMM). Airplane Maintenance Manual
These documents supply support data to do scheduled The Airplane Maintenance Manual (AMM) has two parts.
maintenance: Part I is the Systems Description Section (SDS). This
section replaces the description and operation (D and
- System Schematics Manual (SSM) O) section of the 737-300/400/500 airplane models.
- Wiring Diagram Manual (WDM)
- Structural Repair Manual (SRM) Part II is practices and procedures. The practices and
- Illustrated Parts Catalog (IPC). procedures has data in relation to these functions:
01-00-00-001.fm
Unscheduled Maintenance - Removal/installation of components
- Component location
These are examples of unscheduled maintenance work: - Maintenance practices
01-00-00
- 146 -

- Servicing Standard Wiring Practices Manual
- Adjustment/test
- Inspection/check The Standard Wiring Practices Manual has instructions
- Cleaning/painting for maintenance and repair of the wiring of all Boeing
- Repair. airplanes. It is not customized.
System Schematics Manual Fault Reporting Manual
The System Schematic Manual (SSM) gives a description The flight crew uses the Fault Reporting Manual (FRM)
of system operation and helps in the fault isolation to make communication better with maintenance
process. It shows the interfaces of all LRUs of a personnel. The flight crew uses the FRM to get fault
system or sub-system. It also supplies a general codes for airplane faults. These faults can be flight
knowledge about system operation. deck effects or other faults. The FRM has standard log
book write-ups for each fault code.
Wiring Diagram Manual
The fault code permits faster maintenance when the
The Wiring Diagram Manual (WDM) supplies details of the airplane is on the ground.
point-to-point wiring on the airplane.
FRM fault codes refer you to the FIM.
Illustrated Parts Catalog
Fault Isolation Manual
The Illustrated Parts Catalog supplies part replacement
data. This data includes: You use the Fault Isolation Manual (FIM) to repair
airplane faults. You start the fault isolation process
- Replacement part number with FRM fault codes or a fault description. The FIM
- Part illustrations identifies the maintenance actions you use to correct
- Supplier data the fault.
- Specification numbers
- Recommended spares. Structural Repair Manual
01-00-00-001.fm
The Structural Repair Manual (SRM) supplies descriptive
data and instructions to help in field repair of
01-00-00
- 147 -
airplane structure. The SRM is not customized. It has C/P - cleaning/painting
data in relation to these areas: DDG - Dispatch Deviation Guide
FIM - Fault Isolation Manual
- Allowable damage evaluation
FRM - Fault Reporting Manual
- Typical repairs
- Material identification I/C - inspection/check
- Material substitution IPC - Illustrated Parts Catalog
- Fastener installation LRU - line replaceable unit
- Alignment check MMEL - Master Minimum Equipment List
- Planning. MP - maintenance practices
MPD - Maintenance Planning Document
Dispatch Deviation Guide
R/I - removal/installation
The Dispatch Deviation Guide (DDG) supplies Boeing SDS - Systems Description Section
recommended minimum equipment necessary for dispatch in SRM - Structural Repair Manual
the Master Minimum Equipment List (MMEL). It also SRV - service
supplies the procedures for dispatch with a fault if SSM - System Schematics Manual
permitted.
WDM - Wiring Diagram Manual.
Each maintenance document has an introduction to show

you how to use that document.
Abbreviations and Acronyms
AMM - Airplane Maintenance Manual

ASN - assigned subject number
A/T - adjustment/test
01-00-00-001.fm
ATA - Air Transport Association
CL - component location
CMCS - central maintenance computing system
01-00-00
- 148 -

SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE UNSCHEDULED MAINTENANCE
- THROUGH STOP - STRUCTURAL DAMAGE - FLIGHT FAULTS - FLIGHT FAULTS

- TURN AROUND - GROUND FAULTS
- DAILY - SERVICE PROBLEMS
- PLANNED CHECKS
FAULT
MAINTENANCE STRUCTURAL REPORTING
PLANNING DATA REPAIR MANUAL
DOCUMENT MANUAL
DISPATCH
DEVIATION
GUIDE
BOEING 737
TASK CARDS MAINTENANCE
AND INDEXES TIPS
AIRPLANE
MAINTENANCE FAULT
MANUAL ISOLATION
MANUAL
JOB
SUPPORTING DATA COMPLETE
SYSTEM WIRING ILLUSTRATED STANDARD

WIRING
01-00-00-001.fm
SCHEMATICS DIAGRAM PARTS
MANUAL MANUAL CATALOG PRACTICES
MANUAL
MAINTENANCE DOCUMENTS - INTRODUCTION
01-00-00
- 149 -
MAINTENANCE DOCUMENTS -- MAINTENANCE PLANNING DATA DOCUMENT
General
014The 737 Maintenance Planning Data Document gives

operators general information about scheduled
maintenance for the 737-600/700/800/900 airplane.
Operators use it to develop a scheduled maintenance
program. The Maintenance Planning Data Document has
these sections:
- Introduction
- Airline Dimensions
- Zone Diagrams
- Access Doors and Panels
- Lubrication and Filters
- Systems Maintenance Program
- Structural Inspection Program
- Component Information
- Corrosion Prevention and Control Programs
- Appendix A - Maintenance Program Man-Hours
- Appendix B - Highlights.
The maintenance steering group three (MSG 3) analyzes

each part. It chooses the most logical way to track the
part; for example, time or cycles. The results of the
analysis are in the Maintenance Requirements Review and
Proposal Document.
The maintenance requirements review board uses the

analysis to make a report. The Maintenance Planning
Data Document is made from this document. The airline
01-00-00-203.fm
scheduled maintenance program and airline job cards
come from the Maintenance Planning Data Document.
01-00-00
- 150 -

737-6/7/8/900
MAINTENANCE
MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS
STEERING REVIEW
GROUP 3 &
ANALYSIS PROPOSAL
DOCUMENT
Vol 1-9
ATA
737-6/7/8/900
MRB
REPORT
737-6/7/8/900
MAINTENANCE BOEING 737
MANUAL MAINTENANCE
TASK CARDS PLANNING
AND INDEXES
DATA
BOEING BOEING FAA
DOCUMENT
MAINTENANCE BOEING
MANUAL
AIRLINE
MAINTENANCE AIRLINE
SERVICE LETTERS PROGRAM JOB
AIRWORTHINESS DIRECTIVES CARDS
VENDOR MANUALS AIRLINE
01-00-00-203.fm
AIRLINE
SERVICE BULLETINS
MAINTENANCE DOCUMENTS - MAINTENANCE PLANNING DATA DOCUMENT
01-00-00
- 151 -
MAINTENANCE DOCUMENTS -- FAULT REPORTING MANUAL
General Cabin Faults
The fault reporting manual (FRM) gives the flight crew The CABIN FAULTS section is a list of fault
a simple list of fault descriptions. Each fault descriptions for malfunctions that the cabin crew can
description has a fault code. see. The faults are in groups based on system function.
With each description is a fault code. An example of a
When the flight crew finds a problem on the airplane, cabin fault is: READING LIGHT - DOES NOT TURN OFF.
they look for the description of the fault indication
in the FRM. They write the fault description and the This information is the same as the information in the
fault code in the log book. They can also send the FIM. The FIM also has a FIM task number. See the
information to a ground station so maintenance section on the FIM for more information.
personnel can prepare before the airplane arrives.
The FRM has these sections:
- Observed faults
- Cabin faults.
Observed Faults
The OBSERVED FAULTS section is an alphabetical list of

fault descriptions for malfunctions that the flight
crew or ground service crew can see. These are some
examples of observed faults:
- Flap lever difficult to operate

- Tire number 3 is worn.
This information is also in the FIM. The FIM also has a

FIM task number. See the section on the FIM for more
01-00-00-007.fm
information.
01-00-00
- 152 -

737
Fault Reporting Manual
EFFECTIVITY
OBSERVED FAULTS
ALL Page 1
Oct 05/96
EFFECTIVITY
CABIN FAULTS
01-00-00-007.fm
ALL Page 101
Oct 05/96
MAINTENANCE DOCUMENTS - FAULT REPORTING MANUAL
01-00-00
- 153 -
MAINTENANCE DOCUMENTS -- DISPATCH DEVIATION PROCEDURES GUIDE
01-00-00-201.fm
01-00-00
- 154 -

General The MEL items are in ATA sequence. There is a general
system schematic at the start of each ATA chapter.
The dispatch deviations procedures guide (DDG) helps
the airline operations and maintenance organizations. These are the parts of the minimum equipment list
It helps these organizations make the procedures needed items:
to operate their aircraft in the different nonstandard
configurations. This manual shows the Federal Aviation - Item
Administration's (FAA) permitted nonstandard - Repair Interval
configurations. It has these sections: - Number installed
- Number required for dispatch
- Introduction - Remarks or exceptions
- Minimum Equipment List Items - Placard
- Configuration Deviation List Items - Maintenance procedure (optional)
- Ferry Items - Operations procedure (optional).
- Miscellaneous Items.
The item is the equipment, system, or function
Introduction installed in the airplane.
The introduction section gives the purpose, background, The repair interval shows when you must repair the
contents, and organization of the DDG. item. Repair intervals are specified in the front
section of the MEL. These letter codes show the time
Minimum Equipment List Items interval:
The FAA publishes a master minimum equipment list - A - as shown in the remarks or exceptions column
(MMEL). The operator can add to the MMEL. Then it is - B - within 3 consecutive calendar days
the operator's minimum equipment list (MEL). The MMEL - C - within 10 consecutive calendar days
tells you the minimum equipment and the procedures - D - within 120 consecutive calendar days.
necessary to operate the aircraft. The operator's MEL
cannot be less restrictive than the master minimum Repair intervals are specified in the front section of
equipment list. the MMEL.
01-00-00-201.fm
The MEL has an ATA index of MEL items and a list of
definitions.
01-00-00
- 155 -
The number installed is the quantity usually installed includes secondary airframe and engine parts which you
in the airplane. A dash (-) shows if the quantity can do not have to have for dispatch.
change.
Ferry Items
The number required for dispatch is the minimum
quantity necessary for operation if you meet the The ferry items section contains information for
conditions in the remarks of exceptions column. The dispatch with a configuration deviation for which
MMEL may show a dash (-) in this column. The MEL must revenue passengers are not permitted by the MMEL or the
show actual quantity required. CDL. A ferry flight occurs when it is necessary to fly
the aircraft back to a maintenance base for repairs.
The remarks or exceptions column shows what you must do
to release the airplane. It may also show operations Miscellaneous Items
notes and limits.
Miscellaneous items section contains a list of other
The placard section shows the placard and where you items that are unique.
must put it when this item does not operate.
Some MEL items have a maintenance procedure that you

must do to release the airplane. The maintenance
procedure is listed in the MEL if it is simple. A
reference to the procedure in the 900 page block of the
airplane maintenance manual (AMM) is listed if the
procedure is more complex.
Some MEL items have an operations procedure. The flight

crew must do this procedure if your airline operates
the airplane when this item does not operate.
Configuration Deviation List Items
01-00-00-201.fm
The configuration deviation list (CDL) is an appendix
to the FAA approved aircraft flight manual (AFM). It
01-00-00
- 156 -

DISPATCH DEVIATIONS PROCEDURES GUIDE

Section 2 ATA 49
MMEL Airborne Auxiliary Power
NUMBER INSTALLED
REPAIR INTERVAL NUMBER INSTALLED
NUMBER REQUIRED FOR DISPATCH
ITEM REMARKS OR EXCEPTIONS

MEL ITEM 49-15 Start Power Unit C 1 0 (M)Except for ER operations, may be REMARKS OR EXCEPTIONS
(-600/-700/-800) inoperative provided procedures do not require
use of APU.
1) AC/DC Start Systems C 2 1
REPAIR INTERVAL
PLACARD
NUMBER REQUIRED FOR
PLACARD 1. Start Power Unit Inoperative, APU switch - APU INOP
DISPATCH
2. AC/DC Start System Inoperative, APU switch - AC or DC START INOP
MAINTENANCE (M)
MAINTENANCE PROCEDURE Deactivate the start power unit (AMM 49-00-00/901):
1. Position the APU switch (P5 panel) OFF
2. Open and collar the following circuit breakers:
A. P6-4 panel AUX POWER UNIT CONT

B. P6-4 panel AUX POWER UNIT SCU FAN POWER
C. P6-2 panel APU FIRE SW POWER
D. P91 panel APU SCU AC
3. Disconnect, cap and stow the battery type connector to the SPU, located on the E2-2 Shelf
in the EE bay.
OPERATIONS PROCEDURE
(NOT SHOWN)
01-00-00-201.fm
DEC19/97 D6-32545 2-49-15.0
DISPATCH DEVIATION PROCEDURES GUIDE - MINIMUM EQUIPMENT LIST ITEM
MAINTENANCE DOCUMENTS - DISPATCH DEVIATION PROCEDURES GUIDE
01-00-00
- 157 -
MAINTENANCE DOCUMENTS -- FIM - INTRODUCTION
General FIM Chapter Subjects
You use the Fault Isolation Manual (FIM) to isolate and The chapter subjects have two types of information. The
correct airplane faults. subjects have the fault isolation tasks. They also have
information that help you identify the correct task.
To isolate a fault, you must get a FIM task number. You These are the chapter subjects:
use different sections of the FIM along with airplane
data to identify the correct task number. - How to use the FIM
- Fault code index
The FIM has these parts: - Maintenance message index
- Fault isolation tasks
- Introduction - Task support pages.
- Front subjects
- Chapter subjects. Training Information Point
FIM Introduction The flight crew uses the fault reporting manual (FRM)
to find the fault code.
The introduction is a very important part of the FIM.
It explains the parts of the FIM and tells how to use If the flight crew does not supply a fault code, you
them. can use the front subjects of the FIM to find the task
number.
FIM Front Subjects
You use the front subjects to find a task number. With

a fault description or a cabin fault code, you can find
which tasks in the FIM you must do to correct the
fault. These are the front subjects:
- Observed fault list in alphabetical order

- Observed fault list in system order
01-00-00-008.fm
- Cabin fault list
- Cabin fault code index.
01-00-00
- 158 -

737-600/700/800/900
Fault Isolation Manual
49
AUXILARY POWER
AIRBORNE
EFFECTIVITY OBSERVED FAULT LIST EFFECTIVITY 49-HOW TO USE THE FIM
ALL ALPHABETICAL ALL Page 1
Page 1 Dec 05/96
Oct 05/96
EFFECTIVITY 49-FAULT CODE INDEX
EFFECTIVITY OBSERVED FAULT LIST ALL Page 101
SYSTEM ORDER Dec 05/96
ALL
Page 1
Oct 05/96 EFFECTIVITY 49-MAINT MSG INDEX
EFFECTIVITY CABIN FAULT LIST ALL Page 101
Dec 05/96
ALL
Page 1
EFFECTIVITY 49-40 TASK 814
01-00-00-008.fm
Oct 05/96
ALL Page 201
Dec 05/96
EFFECTIVITY
CABIN FAULT CODE INDEX EFFECTIVITY 49-40 TASK SUPPORT
ALL
Page 101 ALL Page 301
Oct 05/96 Dec 05/96
FIM FRONT SUBJECTS FIM CHAPTER SUBJECTS

MAINTENANCE DOCUMENTS - FIM - INTRODUCTION
01-00-00
- 159 -
MAINTENANCE DOCUMENTS -- FIM - OBSERVED FAULT LISTS
General
The Observed Fault List is a list of fault descriptions

for malfunctions that the flight crew or ground service
crew can see. The first list has all of the fault
descriptions in alphabetical order. The second list has
all of the fault descriptions grouped by systems and
the systems are in ATA chapter section order.
These are the items in the list:
- Fault description
- Fault code
- FIM task number.
When you use the alphabetical list, select the fault

that best describes the malfunction.
The same fault may have more than one description. For
example, the fault code is the same for these
descriptions:
- Glareshield panel light(s) do not come on

- Light(s), glareshield panel, do not come on.
01-00-00-009.fm
01-00-00
- 160 -

737-600/-900 737-600/-900
FAULT ISOLATION MANUAL FAULT ISOLATION MANUAL
FAULT DESCRIPTION FAULT CODE GO TO FIM TASK FAULT DESCRIPTION FAULT CODE GO TO FIM TASK
Anti-collision (strobe) light 38-1 WATER/WASTE - PORTABLE WATER
does not go off
Galley faucet leaks or faucet damaged.................. 381 045 00 25-99 TASK 801
- left wing......................................... 334 250 41 33-44 TASK 801
- right wing........................................ 334 250 42 33-44 TASK 801
Portable water
- tail.............................................. 334 260 00 33-44 TASK 801
auxiliary tank (40-gallon) leaks..................... 381 042 00 25-99 TASK 801
main tank (60-gallon) leaks.......................... 381 041 00 25-99 TASK 801
Anti-collision light
system does not pressurize........................... 381 020 00 38-10 TASK 803
does not come on correctly
tank does not fill................................... 381 030 00 38-10 TASK 801
- left wing......................................... 334 230 41 33-44 TASK 801
tank leaks........................................... 381 040 00 38-10 TASK 802
- lower............................................. 334 270 47 33-44 TASK 801
- right wing........................................ 334 230 42 33-44 TASK 801
Water leakage
- tail.............................................. 334 240 00 33-44 TASK 801
- aft cargo compartment ceiling...................... 381 050 45 38-10 TASK 804
- upper............................................. 334 270 46 33-44 TASK 801
- forward cargo compartment ceiling.................. 381 050 44 38-10 TASK 804
does not go off
- lower............................................. 334 280 47 33-44 TASK 801
38-3 WATER/WASTE - WASTE DISPOSAL
- upper............................................. 334 280 46 33-44 TASK 801
Waste quantity indicator
ANTISKID INOP light shows tank is empty when tank is full
light on.............................................. 324 070 00 32-42 TASK 829 - attendant's panel.................................. 383 050 00 38-30 TASK 810
shows tank is full when tank is not full
APCH WARN shows on HUD combiner display or HUD annunciator - attendant's panel.................................. 383 040 00 38-30 TASK 810
panel................................................... 343 660 00 34-36 TASK 807
Waste tank
APU does not precharge................................... 383 020 00 38-30 TASO 812
air inlet door does not fully open or fully close..... 491 010 00 49-60 TASK 801
backfire.............................................. 492 150 00 49-55 TASK 801 Waste tank drain valve handle
does not start, FAULT light on........................ 492 100 00 49-60 TASK 801 does not drain tank when pulled...................... 383 030 00 38-30 TASK 813
does not start, MAINT light on........................ 492 110 00 49-60 TASK 801
does not start, no APU indication lights on........... 492 130 00 49-15 TASK 805 49-1 AUXILIARY POWER UNIT - POWER PLANT
does not start, OVER SPEED light on................... 492 120 00 49-60 TASK 801
APU
fire false alarm...................................... 261 060 00 26-10 TASK 801
air inlet door does not fully open or full close..... 491 010 00 49-60 TASK 801
fuel valve does not fully open or fully close......... 493 010 00 49-60 TASK 801
vibration is excessive............................... 491 020 00 49-15 TASK 807
oil consumption hight................................. 492 140 00 49-95 TASK 801
surges during main engine start....................... 492 160 00 49-55 TASK 808
APU starter generator
vibration is excessive................................ 491 020 00 49-15 TASK 807
noisy during APU start............................... 491 030 00 49-45 TASK 803
APU BITE INOP message shows on the CDU.................. 496 010 00 49-65 TASK 801
49-2 AUXILIARY POWER UNIT - ENGINE
APU BOTTLE DISCHARGED light for the APU fire extinguishing APU
system does not start, FAULT light on....................... 492 100 00 49-60 TASK 801
light on.............................................. 262 070 00 26-20 TASK 802 does not start, MAINT light on....................... 492 110 00 49-60 TASK 801
does not start, no APU indication lights on.......... 492 130 00 49-15 TASK 805
APU DET INOP light does not start, OVER SPEED light on.................. 492 120 00 49-60 TASK 801
light on.............................................. 261 050 00 26-10 TASK 801 oil consumption high................................. 492 140 00 49-95 TASK 801
APU FAULT light

light on, APU had a protective shutdown.............. 492 010 00 49-60 TASK 801
light on, APU operates without a protective shutdown. 492 020 00 49-15 TASK 801
EFFECTIVITY EFFECTIVITY
OBSERVED FAULT LIST OBSERVED FAULT LIST
01-00-00-009.fm
ALL ALPHABETICAL ALL SYSTEM-ORDER
Page 5 Page 60
Oct 10/2005 Feb 10/2006
OBSERVED FAULT LIST IN ALPHABETICAL ORDER OBSERVED FAULT LIST IN SYSTEM ORDER
MAINTENANCE DOCUMENTS - FIM - OBSERVED FAULT LISTS
01-00-00
- 161 -
MAINTENANCE DOCUMENTS -- FIM - CABIN FAULT LIST
General Training Information Point
The Cabin Fault List is a list of fault descriptions When you use the cabin fault list, select the fault
for malfunctions that the cabin crew finds. The faults that best describes the malfunction.
are in groups based on system function.
The FIM cabin fault list and the FRM cabin faults
These are the items in the list: section have the same information except the FIM cabin
fault list also has the FIM task number.
- Fault description
- Fault code
- FIM task number.
Cabin Fault Code Structure
Each cabin fault code starts with a letter. This tells

you that the fault is not in a flight-related system.
It shows the general cabin function. For example, L is
the letter for lights faults.
The second and third digits show the type of component.

For example, 03 is the code for a light.
The fourth and fifth digits show the type of problem.

For example, 83 is the code for an inoperative
component.
The last three digits are not specified. The cabin crew
uses these digits to enter a location identifier such
as a seat number or galley location.
01-00-00-010.fm
01-00-00
- 162 -

737-600/-900
FAULT ISOLATION MANUAL
FAULT DESCRIPTION FAULT CODE GO TO FIM TASK

(location---)
LIGHTS
Attendant work light:
does not turn off ............................ L31 83 --- 33-20 TASK 801
does not turn on ............................ L31 84 --- 33-20 TASK 801
Call light above the passenger seat:

Ceiling light, bin mounted:

Ceiling light, recessed:

FAULT DESCRIPTION FAULT CODE GO TO FIM TASK

(location---)
LIGHTS
SYSTEM
FUNCTION
Reading light:
CABIN FAULT Window light:

(TYPICAL) does not turn off ............................
does not turn on ............................
L25 83 ---
L25 84 ---
33-20 TASK 801
33-20 TASK 801
01-00-00-010.fm
EFFECTIVITY
CABIN FAULT LIST
ALL Page 9
FEB 10/2005
MAINTENANCE DOCUMENTS - FIM - CABIN FAULT LIST
01-00-00
- 163 -
MAINTENANCE DOCUMENTS -- FIM - CABIN FAULT CODE INDEX
General
The Cabin Fault Code Index is an alphabetical list of

fault codes for malfunctions that the cabin crew can
see. You use the index when you have a cabin fault
code.
The index has these items:
- Fault code
- Brief description
- FIM task number.
The Cabin Fault Code Index has the same data as the
Cabin Fault List. The only difference is the faults are
in alpha-numerical order of the fault codes. They are
not in groups by system function.
01-00-00-011.fm
01-00-00
- 164 -

737-600/-900
FAULT CODE FAULT DESCRIPTION GO TO FIM TASK

L17 84 --- Entry light: does not turn on. 33-20 TASK 801
L18 83 --- Galley ceiling light: does not turn off. 33-20 TASK 801
L18 84 --- Galley ceiling light: does not turn on. 33-20 TASK 801
L19 83 --- Lavatory light: does not turn off. 33-20 TASK 801
L19 84 --- Lavatory light: does not turn off. 33-20 TASK 801
L21 83 --- Night light does not turn off. 33-20 TASK 801
L21 84 --- Night light does not turn on. 33-20 TASK 801
L23 83 --- Reading light: does not turn off. 33-20 TASK 801
L23 84 --- Reading light: does not turn on. 33-20 TASK 801
L25 83 --- Window light: does not turn off. 33-20 TASK 801
L23 83 --- Reading light: does not turn off. 33-20 TASK 801
L23 84 --- Reading light: does not turn on. 33-20 TASK 801
CABIN FAULT CODE
(TYPICAL) M12 67 --- Ceiling panel: wet. 38-10 TASK 804
M13 12 --- Closet door: damaged. AIRLINE METHOD
M13 27 --- Closet door: hard to close. AIRLINE METHOD
M13 28 --- Closet door: hard to open. AIRLINE METHOD
EFFECTIVITY
CABIN FAULT CODE INDEX
01-00-00-011.fm
ALL Page 108
Jun 10/2005
MAINTENANCE DOCUMENTS - FIM - CABIN FAULT CODE INDEX
01-00-00
- 165 -
MAINTENANCE DOCUMENTS -- FIM - FAULT CODE INDEX
General
Each FAULT CODE INDEX is a numerical list of all fault

codes for a chapter. Each fault code has a fault
description and a FIM task number.
Fault Code Structure
All fault codes have eight digits. The codes have two
blank spaces to make them easier to read.
The first three digits of the fault code are the ATA
chapter plus the subject. For example, 492 is chapter
49 (APU), subject 92 (start).
The middle three digits are a unique number for the

fault.
The last two digits are a location identifier or an

engine identifier.
01-00-00-012.fm
01-00-00
- 166 -

737-600/-900
491 010 00 APU: air inlet door does not fully open or fully close. 49-60 TASK 801
491 020 00 APU: vibration is excessive. 49-10 TASK 807
491 030 00 APU starter generator: noisy during APU start. 49-45 TASK 803
492 010 00 APU FAULT light: light on, APU had a protective
shutdown. 49-15 TASK 801
492 100 00 APU: does not start, FAULT light on. 49-60 TASK 801
492 090 00 APU OVER SPEED light: light on, APU had a protective
shutdown. 49-60 TASK 801
492 100 00 APU: does not start, FAULT light on. 49-60 TASK 801
492 110 00 APU: does not start, MAINT light on. 49-60 TASK 801
492 120 00 APU: does not start, OVER SPEED light on. 49-60 TASK 801
492 130 00 APU: does not start, no APU indication lights on. 49-15 TASK 805
492 140 00 APU: oil consumtption high. 49-95 TASK 801
492 150 00 Smoke or flame in APU exhaust 49-55 TASK 801
492 160 00 Surge of APU during main engine start 49-55 TASK 808
493 010 00 APU: fuel valve does not fully open or fully close. 49-60 TASK 801
494 010 00 Battery voltage: less than 22 volts with BAT switch
at ON and no AC power on the charger. 49-45 TASK 801
494 020 00 Battery voltage: less than 26 volts with AC power
the charger. 49-45 TASK 802
495 010 00 DUAL BLEED light: light on, APU BLEED switch at OFF 49-55 TASK 803
495 031 00 Duct pressure indication: low or not constant during
main engine start, the APU is the bleed source. 49-55 TASK 807
495 032 00 Duct pressure indication: low or not constant during
pack peration, the APU is the bleed source. 49-55 TASK 806
495 050 00 Duct pressure indication: zero, the APU is the bleed
source 49-55 TASK 804
495 010 00 APU BITE INOP message shows on the CDU 49-65 TASK 801
EFFECTIVITY
FAULT CODE INDEX
01-00-00-012.fm
ALL Page 101
Feb 10/2005
MAINTENANCE DOCUMENTS - FIM - FAULT CODE INDEX
01-00-00
- 167 -
MAINTENANCE DOCUMENTS -- FIM - MAINTENANCE MESSAGE INDEX
General
A MAINTENANCE MESSAGE INDEX is included in the front of

the chapter for components covered in that chapter that
have BITE.
A maintenance message is the fault indication that you

get from BITE. It can help you find the cause of an
observed fault. These are maintenance messages:
- A specific light or lights

- An alphanumeric code
- A group of english words with or without an
associated numeric code.
The MAINTENANCE MESSAGE INDEX is a list, in

alphanumeric order, of BITE indications grouped by LRU
and system. Each message has a FIM task number.
01-00-00-013.fm
01-00-00
- 168 -

737-600/700/800/900
AN ALPHANUMERIC CODE
LRU/SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MESSAGE GO TO FIM TASK
APU 49-41251 START CONVERTER UNIT SHOWS HIGH 49-40 TASK 812
TEMPERATURE
APU 49-41252 START CONVERTER SHOWS VOLTAGE 49-40 TASK 813
REGULATOR FAILED
APU 49-41253 START POWER UNIT SHOWS START 49-40 TASK 814
SYSTEM INOP
APU 49-41254 START CONVERTER UNIT SHOWS START 49-40 TASK 821
SYSTEM INOP
APU 49-41255 START POWER UNIT SHOWS HIGH 49-40 TASK 815
TEMPERATURE
A GROUP OF ENGLISH WORDS

CAB PRESS CON ACFT RATE HI 21-31 TASK 802
CAB PRESS CON AUTO/MAN ERROR 21-31 TASK 809
CAB PRESS CON CAB DIFF PRESS HI 21-31 TASK 805
A SPECIFIC LIGHT
ATC-1(L) XPDR ALT 34-53 TASK 804
ATC-1(L) XPDR BOT 34-53 TASK 808
ATC-1(L) XPDR DATA IN 34-53 TASK 810
01-00-00-013.fm
EFFECTIVITY
34-MAINT MSG INDEX
ALL
Page 101
OCT 05/98
MAINTENANCE DOCUMENTS - FIM - MAINTENANCE MESSAGE INDEX
01-00-00
- 169 -
MAINTENANCE DOCUMENTS -- FIM - FIM TASKS
General - No equipment in the system is deactivated.
FIM tasks have the procedures to find and correct The task has an initial evaluation paragraph that tells
faults. The tasks are grouped at the sub-subsystem you if the fault is intermittent.
level. For example, all sub-subsystem 27-31 tasks are
in a group. These tasks are in numerical order by task After the initial evaluation paragraph, the task has
number. several steps. The steps may use several different
paths. When you are at the end of a path, that task says
The task identifier is the sub-subsystem number, the that you corrected the fault.
word TASK, and a three digit number.
Each FIM task assumes that the cause of the fault is a
single failure. When a step in a FIM task says to do a wiring check,
these are the types of checks you must do for the
FIM Task Structure specified pins:
Each FIM task has some or all of these paragraphs: - Continuity from contact to contact
- Shorts between the contacts
- Task title with task number - Shorts from each contact to ground.
- Task description
- Possible causes A step in a FIM task may ask you to do a task in the
- Circuit breakers AMM. After you do the AMM task, you must go back to the
- Related data FIM and complete the FIM task.
- Initial evaluation
- Fault isolation steps.
These are the assumed conditions at the start of the

task:
- External electrical power is on
01-00-00-014.fm
- Hydraulic power and pneumatic power are off
- Engines are shut down
- Circuit breakers for the system are closed
01-00-00
- 170 -

TASK TITLE AND

TASK NUMBER
TASK 737-600/-900 737-600/-900

DESCRIPTION FAULT ISOLATION MANUAL FAULT ISOLATION MANUAL
1. Start Power Unit Shows Start System INOP - Fault Isolation RELATED Power Distribution Panel Number 1, P91
Row Col Number Name
A. Description
(1) This task is for this maintenance message
DATA A 11 C01336 APU START CONV
MAINTENANCE (a) 49-41253 START POWER UNIT SHOWS START SYSTEM INOP D. Related Data
MESSAGE
(2) During an APU start cycle, the start power unit uses ac power first
(if available) or dc power from the airplane battery and changes this
power to 270V DC. This power is supplied to the start converter unit.
INITIAL (1) Component Location (Figure 301)
(2) Simplified Schematic (Figure 302)
The ac/dc converter and dc/dc converter in the start power unit use
monitoring circuits to do a check for correct operation. This fault is
EVALUATION (3) (WDM 49-41-11)
set when one of the two converters is defective. If the dc/dc converter E. Initial Evaluation
is defective and ac power is available, then the APU can start. If the (1) Do this task: APU BITE Procedure, 49-60 TASK 801
ac/dc converter is defective and dc power is available, then the APU (a) If the CDU display shows this maintenance message on the CURRENT
can start. If the DC link circuit is defective in the start converter STATUS page, then do the FAULT Isolation Procedure below.
unit or between the start converter unit and start power unit, the APU (b) If the CDU display does not show this maintenance message on the
will not start on the ac or dc power. CURRENT STATUS page, then do these steps:
POSSIBLE (3) The APU FAULT light on the P5 forward overhead panel can show for this
maintenance message.
1) Look at the MAINTENANCE HISTORY page on the CDU display to see
if this maintenance message shows.
CAUSES B. Possible Causes
2) If the CDU display shows this maintenance message in the last
APU cycle, then do these steps:
(1) Internal problem with the start converter unit, M1710, and/or the a) Do this task: APU Starting and Operation, AMM TASK
start power unit, M1850 49-11-00-860-801
(2) Airplane wire harness problem b) Do this task: APU Usual Shutdown, AMM TASK 49-11-00-860-802
(3) Wiring between the start power unit, M1850, and start converter unit, c) Do this task: APU BITE Procedure, 49-60 TASK 801
M1710 d) Set the APU master switch to the ON position.
(4) Start converter unit, M1710 e) Look at the CURRENT STATUS page on the CDU display to see if
(5) Start power unit, M1850 this maintenance message shows.
f) If the CDU display does not show this maintenance message,
CIRCUIT
(6) Voltage problem between the APU START CONV circuit breaker and the
start power unit, M1850 FAULT then there was an intermittent fault.
g) Set the APU master switch to the OFF position.
BREAKERS C. Circuit Breakers ISOLATION h) If the CDU display shows this maintenance message, then do
the Fault Isolation Procedure below.
(1) These are the primary circuit breakers related to the fault:
PROCEDURE 3) If the CDU display does not show this maintenance message in the
last APU cycle, then there was an intermittent fault.
Battery Shield, J9
Row Col Number Name F. Fault Isolation Procedure
A 4 C00142 BATTERY CHARGER (1) Do this check of the start converter unit, M1710, and the start power
unit, M1850:
F/O Electrical System Panel (a) Make sure the APU master switch is OFF.
Row Col Number Name (b) Remove the start converter unit, M1710. To remove it, do this task:
A 14 C00033 AUX POWER UNIT CONT Start Converter Unit Removal, AMM TASK 49-41-61-000-801
B 14 C01424 AUX POWER UNIT SCU FAN POWER (c) Remove the start power unit, M1850. To remove it, do this task:
Start Power Unit Removal, AMM TASK 49-41-71-000-801
Power Distribution Panel Number 1, P91 (d) Examine the electrical connector D11114 on the start converter unit,
M1710, and electrical connector D11478 on the start power unit,
Row Col Number Name M1850. To examine them, do this task: Electrical Connector and
A 11 C01336 APU START CONV Terminal Inspection, AMM TASK 49-11-01-200-802.
EFFECTIVITY EFFECTIVITY
49-40 TASKS 814 49-40 TASKS 814
ALL Page 298.23 ALL Page 298.24
June 10/2005 June 10/2005
01-00-00-014.fm
MAINTENANCE DOCUMENTS - FIM - FIM TASKS
01-00-00
- 171 -
MAINTENANCE DOCUMENTS -- FIM - TASK SUPPORT PAGES
General
For each sub-subsystem, some tasks have TASK SUPPORT

pages. These pages have data to help you do the FIM
tasks. This data may include simplified schematics or
component access illustrations.
01-00-00-015.fm
01-00-00
- 172 -

737-600/-900
D11428 D11478B D10569

115V AC φΑ 32
A 5
TRANSFER φΒ
BUS 1 B 6
φΧ C 7
P5-13 ELECTRICAL
35 D11478A METERS, BATTERY AND
C1336
17 SPU FAN PWR RTN GALLEY POWER MODULE
APU START
CONVERTER 16 SPU FAN PWR
(A11) D11712B
P91 POWER M1850 START POWER 1
DISTRIBUTION PANEL 1 UNIT
M1720 STANDBY POWER
CONTROLLER UNIT
D11114B
16
17 D11114C D3599B
START ENABLE 18 B9 START ENABLE
SCU BITE 0 43 D1 SCU BITE 0
D3599A
SCU BITE 3 56 C13 SCU BITE 3
D11114C
D3599B
3 DC CONT PWR
5 DC PWR RTN D7 IGNITION OUTPUT
S248 APU SW M1710 START M1709 APU ELECTRONIC

CONVERTER UNIT CONTROL UNIT
(AFT CARGO BAY)
D10434/P3 P13
17 1
16 2
APU FIREWALL YAAM001

DISCONNECT IGNITION UNIT
WDM 24-21-31 (STA 1088)
49-41-11 AUXILIARY POWER UNIT
49-62-11
SSM 24-21-31
49-41-11
49-62-11
APU Ignition and Start System Simplified Schematic
Figure 302 (Sheet 1 of 4)/49-40-00-990-802
01-00-00-015.fm
EFFECTIVITY
49-40 TASK SUPPORT
ALL Page 303
Oct 10 2005
MAINTENANCE DOCUMENTS - FIM - TASK SUPPORT PAGES
01-00-00
- 173 -
MAINTENANCE DOCUMENTS -- HOW TO USE THE FIM - INTRODUCTION
General
A guide that shows how to use the FIM is in the front of

each ATA chapter in the FIM. This guide is in six
figures. The six figures are:
- Figure one - Basic fault isolation process

- Figure two - Getting fault information from the
BITE manual
- Figure three - Finding the fault isolation task in
the FIM
- Figure four - Doing the fault isolation task
- Figure five - Subjects at the front of FIM
- Figure six - Subjects in each FIM chapter.
01-00-00-100.fm
01-00-00
- 174 -

737-600/700/800/900
These are the possible types

of faults:
1. Observed Fault
2. Cabin Fault
YOU FIND A FAULT WITH
AN AIRPLANE SYSTEM If you are on the airplane and you
have the BITE manual, you can use
the BITE manual to get more
information:
or
Use the fault description to find

the fault isolation task. The tasks
that are BITE procedures are in the
BITE manual.
For details, see Figure 2

FIM:
FIM
dex in
Use the fault code or description ault
to find the task in the FIM. Fault
GO TO THE There is a numerical list of fault dure.
FAULT ISOLATION codes in each chapter. There are
TASK IN THE FIM lists of fault descriptions at the he
front of the FIM.
For details, see Figure 3 be a

ght,
he
.
give
The fault isolation task explains it ult d
how to find the cause of the fault. or the the
FOLLOW THE STEPS OF THE When the task says "You corrected o the ne if
the fault" you know that the fault steps
FAULT ISOLATION TASK s to
is gone.
on of
For details, see Figure 4 FIM
Fault Isolation Process ult

and
Figure 1 the
ps
EFFECTIVITY
49-HOW TO USE THE FIM
ALL t
Page 1 ter ll say
Jun 15/96 the
Getting Fault Information from BITE ance
ement
Figure 2 ents to
appens
EFFECTIVITY
ALL
ALL
Page 2
Jun 15/96
then"
Finding the Fault Isolation Task in the FIM
.
Figure 3
T
EFFECTIVITY
49-HOW TO USE THE FIM re.
R
1
6
ALL
IST
Page 3
age 4
Mar 15/94 15/96
Doing the Fault Isolation Task INDEX

Page 104
Figure 4 Jun 15/96
EFFECTIVITY
ALL in
Page 4 sk
Jun 15/96 01
201
Subjects at Front of FIM 96
Figure 5 PPORT
EFFECTIVITY Page 303
49-HOW TO USE THE FIM un 15/96
ALL
Page 5 ed to
Jun 15/96 on.
01-00-00-100.fm
Subjects in Each FIM Chapter
Figure 6
EFFECTIVITY
ALL
Page 6
Jun 15/96
MAINTENANCE DOCUMENTS - HOW TO USE THE FIM - INTRODUCTION
01-00-00
- 175 -
MAINTENANCE DOCUMENTS -- HOW TO USE THE FIM - FIGURE 1
Figure 1: Basic Fault Isolation Process
Figure 1 shows the basic fault isolation process. These

are the three main steps to the fault isolation
process:
- Find a fault
- Go to the fault isolation task
- Do the steps of the fault isolation task.
The information at the right of the step gives more

information on how to complete the step.
01-00-00-101.fm
01-00-00
- 176 -

737-600/700/800/900
These are the possible types

of faults:
YOU FIND A FAULT WITH
AN AIRPLANE SYSTEM
1. Observed Fault
2. Cabin Fault
If you did a BITE test already,

then you can go directly to the
USE BITE TO GET fault isolation procedure for
the maintenance message.
MORE INFORMATION
Use the fault code or description

to find the task in the FIM.
GO TO THE There is a numerical list of fault
FAULT ISOLATION codes in each chapter. There are
TASK IN THE FIM lists of fault descriptions at the
front of the FIM.
The fault isolation task explains

how to find the cause of the fault.
FOLLOW THE STEPS OF THE When the task says "You corrected
the fault" you know that the fault
FAULT ISOLATION TASK is gone.
Basic Fault Isolation Process

Figure 1
01-00-00-101.fm
EFFECTIVITY
ALL
Page 1
Jun 15/96
MAINTENANCE DOCUMENTS - HOW TO USE THE FIM - FIGURE 1
01-00-00
- 177 -
Figure 2: Getting Fault Information from BITE
Figure 2 shows how to use the BITE information. The

BITE information can show as:
- A maintenance message
- A text message
- A light
- An indication.
If you have a cabin fault, the BITE information does

not help you.
To find the fault isolation task for a maintenance

message, go to the Maintenance Message Index in the
chapter for the related system.
01-00-00-102.fm
01-00-00
- 178 -

737-600/700/800/900
Some airplane systems have built-in test equipment (BITE). If the system
finds a fault when you do a BITE test, it will give you a maintenance
message.
A maintenance message can be any of these:
- a code
- a text number
- a light
- an indication.
To find the fualt isolation task for a maintenance message, go to the

Maintenance Message Index in the chapter for the applicable system.
If you do not know which chapter is the correct one, look at the ist at the
front of any Maintenance Message Index. For each system or component (LRU)
that has BITE, this list gives the chapter number where you can find the
Index that you need
Find the maintenance message for the applicable LRU or system in the Index.
Then find the task number on the same line as the maintenance message.
.
Go to the task in the FIM and do the steps of the task (see Figure 4.)
Getting Fault Information from BITE

Figure 2
01-00-00-102.fm
EFFECTIVITY
ALL
Page 2
Oct 10/2001
01-00-00
- 179 -
Figure 3: Finding The Fault Isolation Task In The FIM
Figure 3 shows what you need to do to find the fault

isolation task in the FIM. The left side of figure 3
asks the question (IF YOU HAVE:). The right side (THEN
DO THIS TO FIND THE TASK IN THE FIM:) tells you how to
find the task in the FIM.
01-00-00-103.fm
01-00-00
- 180 -

737-600/700/800/900
IF YOU HAVE: THEN DO THIS TO FIND THE TASK IN THE FIM:
1. The first two digits of the fault code are the FIM
chapter that you need. Go to the Fault Code Index in
that chapter and find the fault code. If the fault
code starts with a letter, then go to the Cabin Fault
FAULT CODE Code Index at the front of the FIM.
2. Find the task number on the same line as the
fault code. Go to the task in the FIM and do the
steps in the task (see Figure 4).
1. Go to the Observed Fault List at the front of the

FIM and find the best description for the fault.
OBSERVED FAULT
DESCRIPTION 2. Find the task number on the same line as the fault
description. Go to the task in the FIM and do the
steps of the task (see Figure 4).
1. Go to the Cabin Fault List at the front of the FIM

and find the best description for the fault.
CABIN FAULT
DESCRIPTION 2. Find the task number on the same line as the fault
description. Go to the task in the FIM and do the
steps of the task (see Figure 4).
1. Go to the Maintenance Message Index in the chapter

for the LRU (the front of each Index gives you the
MAINTENANCE chapter number for all LRUs). Find the maintenance
MESSAGE message in the Index.
(FROM BITE) 2. Find the task number on the same line as the
maintenance message. Go to the task in the FIM
and do the steps in the task (see Figure 4).
Finding the Fault Isolation Task in the FIM

Figure 3
01-00-00-103.fm
EFFECTIVITY
ALL
Page 3
Mar 15/94
01-00-00
- 181 -
Figure 4: Doing The Fault Isolation Task
Figure 4 shows these steps in each FIM task:
- Assumed conditions at the start of the task

- Possible causes
- Initial evaluation paragraph
- Fault isolation steps.
The possible causes show a list of LRUs and things that

can cause the problem. The fault isolation steps help
to find which of the possible causes made the fault
occur.
01-00-00-104.fm
01-00-00
- 182 -

737-600/700/800/900
ASSUMED CONDITIONS AT START OF TASK

External electrical power is ON
Hydraulic power and pneumatic power are OFF
Engines are shut down
Circuit breakers for the system are closed
No equipment in the system is deactivated
POSSIBLE CAUSES
The list of possible causes has the most likely cause first and
the least likely cause last.
You can use the maintenance records of your airline to determine if
the fault occurred before. Compare the list of possible causes to
the past maintenance actions. This will help prevent repetition of
the same maintenance actions.
INITIAL EVALUATION PARAGRAPH

The primary purpose of the Initial Evaluation paragraph at the
start of the task is to help you find outif you can detect the
fault right now:
- If you cannot detect the fault right now, then the task cannot
isolate the fault and the Intial Evaluation paragraph will say
that there was an intermittent fault
- If you have an intermittent fault, you must use your judgement
(and follow your airline's policy) to decide which maintenance
action to take. Then monitor the airplane to see if the fault
happens again on subsequent flights.
The Initial Evaluation paragraph can also help you find out which
Fault Isolation Procedure to use to isolate and correct the fault.
FAULT ISOLATION STEPS

Do the steps of the task in the specified order. The "If ... then"
statements that you see will guide you along the correct path.
When you are at the endpoint of the path, the step says "You
corrected the fault." Complete the step and exit the procedure.
Doing the Fault Isolation Task

Figure 4
01-00-00-104.fm
EFFECTIVITY
ALL
Page 4
Jun 15/96
01-00-00
- 183 -
Figure 5: Subjects at Front of FIM
Figure 5 shows what information is at the front of the

fault isolation manual. The front subjects also show in
the FIM introduction.
01-00-00-105.fm
01-00-00
- 184 -

737-600/700/800/900
737-600/700/800/900
Alphabetical list of all

observed faults. Gives the EFFECTIVITY OBSERVED FAULT LIST
fault code and a FIM task ALL
ALPHABETICAL
Page 1
Oct 05/96
number for each fault.
EFFECTIVITY OBSERVED FAULT LIST
SYSTEM ORDER
ALL Page 1
Oct 05/96
List of all observed faults in
order by ATA system. Gives the EFFECTIVITY CABIN FAULT LIST
ALL
fault code and FIM task number
Page 1
Oct 05/96
for each fault. EFFECTIVITY CABIN FAULT CODE INDEX

ALL Page 101
Oct 05/96
List of all cabin faults arranged

in order by cabin function. Gives
the fault code and FIM task number Numerical list of all cabin faults in
for each fault. order by fault code. Gives a FIM task
number for each fault.
Subjects at Front of FIM

Figure 5
01-00-00-105.fm
Page 5
Jun 15/96
01-00-00
- 185 -
Figure 6: Subjects in Each FIM Chapter
Figure 6 shows what information is at the front of each

ATA chapter of the fault isolation manual. The ATA
chapter information also shows in the FIM introduction.
01-00-00-106.fm
01-00-00
- 186 -

737-600/700/800/900
49
Auxiliary Power
Unit
Instructions for
using the FIM.
EFFECTIVITY
ALL Page 1
Numerical index of all Oct 05/96
fault codes that start EFFECTIVITY

49-FAULT CODE INDEX
with the chapter number. ALL Page 101
Oct 05/96
Gives a description and
a FIM task number for EFFECTIVITY
49-MAINT MSG INDEX
ALL Page 101
each fault. Oct 05/96
EFFECTIVITY
49-31 TASK 801
Alpha-numeric index of all ALL Page 201
maintenance messages (from Bite) Oct 05/96
for the chapter. Gives a FIM task EFFECTIVITY

49-31 TASK SUPPORT
number for each message. ALL Page 301
Oct 05/96
Fault isolation procedures for the

chapter. Each procedure is identified Illustrations and charts related to
by a chapter-section number and a the tasks in the chapter-section.
3-digit task number.
Subjects in Each FIM Chapter
Figure 6
01-00-00-106.fm
Page 6
Jun 15/96
01-00-00
- 187 -
MAINTENANCE DOCUMENTS -- MAINTENANCE TIP
General Recommended Action
The maintenance tip gives information that helps the This section gives the actions required to dispatch the
mechanic in a procedure. The information is short and airplane. This section may include a sketch if
simple so it is easy to understand. It is published and applicable.
mailed within 10 days. The maintenance tip gives
mechanics information to make repairs quickly and Background
easily. It has these sections:
The background section gives the probable cause of the
- Subject condition. It may tell how to prevent the condition.
- Applicability
- Condition Maintenance Manual Action
- Recommended action
- Background (optional) This section is made by maintenance publications and
- Maintenance manual action. shows which manuals have updates.
Subject
The subject shows the topic of the procedure.
Applicability
The applicability specifies line numbers, airplanes, or

part numbers and software if necessary.
Condition
The condition section gives a brief description of the

condition.
01-00-00-202.fm
01-00-00
- 188 -

Customer
Services
Division
737 MT 28-001
5 May 1998
SUBJECT CENTER TANK BOOST PUMPS ALLOWED TO RUN DRY
APPLICABILITY ALL 737-600 TO -900 AIRPLANES

CONDITION There have been two reports of center tank fuel boost pump low pressure
lights remaining illuminated after putting fuel in the center tank. These
have occurred after maintenance or operational use where the pumps have
been run for several minutes after the low pressure light becomes
illuminated with a nearly empty tank. This continued operation with low
fuel causes the fuel within the fuel pump to evaporate, resulting in a loss of
prime to the pump.
RECOMMENDED When the low pressure light remains illuminated, turn the pump off. Do
ACTION not run the pumps dry for extended periods of time. To reprime the pumps
in place, requires that 15000 lbs of fuel be in the center tank. Alternatively,
the pump(s) may be primed by preforming one of the following procedures:
1. DIP THE MOTOR IMPELLER UNIT IN FUEL PRIOR TO INSTALLATION
2. WET THE MOTOR/IMPELLER UNIT BY ADDING FUEL VIA THE PUMP HOUSING
DRAIN PORT (EXTERNAL TO THE TANK)
After priming, put a minimum of 4000 lbs of fuel in the center tank to cover
the pump inlet. Turn on the affected pump(s) and verify that pump(s) will
transfer fuel.
BACKGROUND The low pressure light on the P5 panel will flash at different levels of fuel
in the center tank depending on the attitude of the airplane. The pumps
should be turned off when the low pressure light remains illuminated.
Typically the right boost pump inlet is uncovered first then the left pump.
The loss of prime condition is not observed on 737-300/-400/-500 models

because the center tank boost pumps have a reprime line which allow the
pumps to reprime during refueling operations. Unlike the
737-300/-400/-500 airplanes the -600/-700/-800/-900 models do not
have a center tank boost pump reprime line.
MAINTENANCE Alternate boost prime procedures will be added to maintenance manual,

MANUAL ACTION and notes will be inserted into appropriate section of FIM 28-22 in the
5 October 1998 revision of the Airplane Maintenance Manual and FIM.
01-00-00-202.fm
MAINTENANCE DOCUMENTS - MAINTENANCE TIP
01-00-00
- 189 -
MAINTENANCE DOCUMENTS -- AMM PART 1
General Divisions
The Airplane Maintenance Manual (AMM) Part I is the The SDS organization is by ATA chapter (system) or
first of the two parts of the AMM. It is called the chapter/section (subsystem). Each ATA chapter/section
Systems Description Section (SDS). This section defines an airplane system or subsystem.
replaces the description and operation (D and O)
section of 737-300/400/500 AMM. Both Part I and Part II Each subject of the SDS has this information:
of the AMM show the configuration of the airplanes in
an operator's fleet. - Purpose/introduction
- General description
Purpose - Component location
- Interface
The SDS gives descriptions of the interfaces, function, - Operation
and operation of the airplane systems and subsystems. - Functional description
You use these descriptions to become familiar with the - Training information points (TIPs).
airplane systems so that you can do fault isolation and
system maintenance.
The SDS content can be used as a training manual.
Organization
The SDS uses text/graphic paravisuals (pagesets). Each

graphic has one or more pages of text that describe the
information on the graphic. The graphic has the primary
information and the associated text page(s) have the
support information or explanations.
The SDS uses a horizontal (sometimes called landscape)

format. All pages (graphic and text) are 8-1/2 by 11
01-00-00-002.fm
inches. The graphic page is always on the bottom (odd
numbered page) of the text/graphic paravisual. The text
pages have a double galley (two column) format.
01-00-00
- 190 -

MAINTENANCE MANUAL
APU IGNITION AND START SYSTEM - SPU AND SCU GENERAL DESCRIPTION
Start Power Unit starter-generator. At 70 percent speed, the elctronic

control unit removes the start signal for the start
The start power unit changes 115v ac or 28v dc
electrical power to 270v dc power. Transfer bus 1 or
the battery supplies power to the start power unit
converter unit. With the start signal off, the SCU and
the SPU removes the power from the starter-generator. TEXT PAGE
(SPU). Training Information Point
The SPU gives fault data to the ECU through the SCU for The maximum duty cycle for the SPU and SCU is three
display on the CDU. starts, on after the other, followed by a 15 minute
cool down period. If you do too many starts one after
The SPU is in the EE compartment on the E2-2 shelf. the other the SCU and SPU will get too hot and stop the
APU start. More starts are possible after the SCU and
Start Converter Unit SPU cool.
The start converter unit (SCU) converts the 270v dc You access the SCU terminal block for the AC power
power to AC and sends it to the starter-generator. feeder wires from the back of the SCU. You remove the
panel behind the E2 rack from the forward cargo
The SCU gives fault data to the ECU for display on the compartment to access the back of the SCU.
CDU.
The SCU is in the EE compartment on the E2-2 shelf.
See the electrical chapter for more information about

the APU starter-generator generate function. (AMM PART I
24)
Start Control
The electronic control unit sends a signal to the start GRAPHIC PAGE
49-40-00-002 REV 0
converter unit when the air inlet door is fully open.
the start converter unit tells the start power unit to
supply the 270v dc. The start converter unit changes
the 270v dc to ac power for the operation of the
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
EFFECTIVITY
ALL 49-40-00 Page 08
Oct 5/1998
EE COMPARTMENT
(LOOKING AFT)
115V AC TRANSFER BUS 1

OR BATTERY
ECU
(AFT CARGOL)
49-40-00-002 REV 0
START POWER UNIT (E2-2)
01-00-00-002.fm
APU IGNITION ANDÎ START SYSTEM - SPU AND SCU GENERAL DESCRIPTION
EFFECTIVITY
ALL 49-40-00 Page 09
OCT 5/1998
MAINTENANCE DOCUMENTS - AMM PART 1
01-00-00
- 191 -
MAINTENANCE DOCUMENTS -- AMM PART 2 - INTRODUCTION
General Page Type Page Block
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION (R/I) 401-499
Part II of the AMM contains the maintenances practices
and procedures to do maintenance on the airplane. ADJUSTMENT/TEST (A/T) 501-599
INSPECTION/CHECK (I/C) 601-699
Chapter Numbering System CLEANING/PAINTING (C/P) 701-799
REPAIRS (AR) 801-899
The manual has a tab section for each ATA chapter. In DISPATCH DEVIATIONS GUIDE (DDG) 901-999
each tab section, the manual has more divisions that
use the assigned subject number (ASN) list number 49- If all the topics for an ATA chapter, subsystem, or
41-71, where: sub-subsystem are short, all the topics are in one
MAINTENANCE PRACTICES page block.
- 49 is the ATA chapter
- 41 is the subject Dispatch Deviation Guide
- 71 is the section.
The DDG page block has procedures with maintenance
The table of contents for each chapter shows the tasks that prepare the airplane for flight with
maintenance procedures in numerical sequence for each systems/components not in operation. The DDG also has
subsystem and sub-subsystem. For each subsystem or sub- tasks to put the airplane back to its normal operating
subsystem, the maintenance tasks are in alphabetical condition.
sequence in relation to the page numbers that show.
Page Numbering System
Chapter 12 of the AMM has the title SERVICING. This
Each page has 2 numbers in the bottom right corner, the chapter has procedures to fill and drain items. These
ASN and a topic page number. Each topic has a page are examples:
block. Each page block is for a special type of data.
These are the page blocks. - Fuel
- Oil
- Hydraulic fluid
01-00-00-003.fm
Page Type Page Block - Water
MAINTENANCE PRACTICES (MP) 201-299 - Tire pressure.
SERVICING (SRV) 301-399
01-00-00
- 192 -

737-600/-900 737-600/-900
AIRCRAFT MAINTENANCE
CHAPTER 49MANUAL AIRCRAFT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
AUXILIARY POWER UNIT START POWER UNIT - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
Chapter 1. General
Section A. This procedure has these tasks:
Subject Subject Conf Page Effect
(1) A removal of the start power unit
Igniter Plug Installation 404 ALL (2) An installation of the start power unit
TASK 49-41-51-400-801 B. The start power unit is installed on the E2-2 electrical shelf. The E2-2
electrical shelf is found in the electrical and electronics compartment
IGNITER PLUG - INSPECTION CHECK 49-41-51 601 ALL (section 43)
Igniter Plug Installation 601 ALL TASK 49-41-71-000-801

TASK 49-41-51-200-801 2. Start Power Unit Removal
IGNITER PLUG - CLEANING/PAINTING 49-41-51 701 ALL (Figure 401)

A. References
Igniter Plug Installation 701 ALL
TASK 49-41-51-100-801 Reference Title
20-10-07-000-801 E/E Box Removal (P/B 201)
IGNITER PLUG LEAD - REMOVAL/ 49-41-52 401 ALL 20-40-12-000-802 ESDS Handling for Metal Encased Unit Removal (P/B201)
INSTALLATION
B. Location Zones
Igniter Plug Installation 401 ALL
TASK 49-41-52-000-801 Zone Area
Igniter Plug Installation 404 ALL 118 Electrical and Electronics Compartment - Right
TASK 49-41-52-400-801 121 Forward Cargo Compartment - Left
122 Forward Cargo Compartment - Right
IGNITER PLUG LEAD - INSPECTION/ CHECK 49-41-52 601 ALL 211 Flight Compartment - Left
Igniter Plug Lead Inspection 601 ALL C. Access Panels

TASK 49-41-52-200-801
Number Name/Location
IGNITER PLUG LEAD - CLEANING/PAINTING 49-41-51 701 ALL 117A Electronic Equipment Access Door
821 Forward Cargo Door
Igniter Plug Lead Cleaning 701 ALL
TASK 49-41-52-100-801
D. Prepare for the Removal
START CONVERTER UNIT - REMOVAL/ 49-41-61 401 ALL SUBTASK 49-41-71-860-001
INSTALLATION (1) Make sure the APU master switch on the P5 forward overhead panel is
OFF and install a DO-NOT-OPERATE tag.
Start Converter Unit Removal 401 ALL SUBTASK 49-41-71-010-001
TASK 49-41-61-000-801
(2) Open these access panels:
Start Converter Unit Installation 407 ALL Number Name/Location
TASK 49-41-61-400-801
117A Electronic Equipment Access Door
START POWER UNIT - REMOVAL/ 49-41-71 401 ALL 821 Forward Cargo Door
INSTALLATION SUBTASK 49-41-71-860-002
Start Power Unit Removal 401 ALL (3) Open these circuit breakers and install safety tags:
TASK 49-41-71-000-801 Battery Shield, J9
Row Col Number Name
A 4 C00142 BATTERY CHARGER
49-CONTENTS
Page 10 EFFECTIVITY
49-41-71
01-00-00-003.fm
Oct 10/2005
ALL Page 401
Oct 10/2003
MAINTENANCE DOCUMENTS - AMM PART 2 - INTRODUCTION
01-00-00
- 193 -
MAINTENANCE DOCUMENTS -- AMM PART 2 - MAINTENANCE TASK STRUCTURE
01-00-00-004.fm
01-00-00
- 194 -

General Consumable Materials Paragraph (Not Shown)
The maintenance tasks are procedures for specific The consumable materials paragraph is a summary of all
maintenance requirements. For example, R/I page blocks consumable materials necessary to complete the task.
normally contain two tasks: removal of the LRU and The Boeing Spares Department gives each airline a list
installation of the LRU. of all consumable materials that you need to do all the
tasks in the maintenance manual.
Each procedure has some or all of these paragraphs:
References Paragraph
- General
- Equipment The references paragraph is a list that supplies all
- Consumable materials references. References may be made to other AMM
- References procedures or other manuals.
- Access
- Prepare for removal Access Paragraph
- Procedure
- Put the airplane back to its usual condition The access paragraph is a summary of all location zones
- Installation test. and access panel information to do the task. See
chapter six of the maintenance manual for more
General Paragraph information on the zone and access panel numbering
systems.
The general paragraph is an introduction that gives the
purpose and limitations of the task. There may be a Prepare for Paragraph
general paragraph for the page block, or for each task.
The prepare for removal paragraph is for tasks in the
Equipment Paragraph (Not Shown) R/I, A/T, and I/C page block(s). The paragraph gives
all the things you must do before you start the task.
The equipment paragraph is a summary of all tools and This includes any doors, panels, or circuit breakers
test equipment to support the task. Each piece of that you must open.
equipment also has its part number.
01-00-00-004.fm
01-00-00
- 195 -
Procedure Paragraph (Not Shown)
The procedure paragraph has the steps to complete the

task.
Put the Airplane Back to Usual Condition Paragraph (Not

Shown)
The paragraph gives all the things you must do to put

the airplane back to its usual condition. This includes
any doors, panels, or circuit breakers that you must
close.
Installation Test Paragraph (Not Shown)
The paragraph lists all the steps you must do to do a

test of the component you just installed.
Each page has a section that gives the effectivity of

the page. It may say ALL or it may give specific
airplane identification numbers.
01-00-00-004.fm
01-00-00
- 196 -

737-600/700/800/900
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
GENERAL
PARAGRAPH
START POWER UNIT- REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
1. General
A. This procedure has these tasks:
(1) A removal of the start power unit.
(2) An installation of the start power unit.
B. The start power unit is installed on the E2-2 electrical shelf. The E2-2
(section 43)
C. The start power unit is referred to as the SPU.
REFERENCES TASK 49-41-71-000-801
PARAGRAPH 2. Start Power Unit Removal (Fig. 401)

A. References
(1) AMM TASK 20-10-07-000-801 p201, E/E Box Removal
(2) AMM TASK 20-40-12-000-802 p 201, ESDS Handling for Metal Encased Unit
ACCESS Removal
PARAGRAPH B. Access
(1) Location Zones
(a) 118 Electrical and Electronics Compartment - Right
(b) 121 Forward Cargo Compartment - Left
(c) 122 Forward Cargo Compartment - Right
(d) 211 Flight Compartment - Left
(2) Access Panels
(a) 117A Electronic Equipment Access Door
(b) 821 Forward Cargo Door
C. Prepare For The Removal
PREPARE FOR
SUBTASK 860-001
PARAGRAPH (1) Make sure that the APU master switch on the P5 forward overhead panel is
SUBTASK 860-002
(2) Open these circuit breakers and attach D0-NOT-CLOSE tags:
(a) Circuit breaker panel, P6-4:
1) 6A14 AUX POWER UNIT CONT
2) 6B14 AUX POWER UNIT SCU FAN POWER
PARAGRAPHS NOT SHOWN SUBTASK 010-001
(3) Open the electrical equipment access door, 117A
SUBTASK 860-005
- EQUIPMENT (4) Open these circuit breakers and attach DO-NOT-CLOSE tags:
(a) Battery Shield, J9:
- CONSUMABLE MATERIALS 1) 9Z99 BATTERY CHARGER
- PROCEDURE (b) Power Distribution Panel Number 1, P91:
1) 91G1 APU START CONV
- PUT THE AIRPLANE BACK TO
USUAL CONDITION
- INSTALLATION TEST
EFFECTIVITY
49-41-71
ALL
01-00-00-004.fm
Page 401
Jun 05/98
MAINTENANCE DOCUMENTS - AMM PART 2 - MAINTENANCE TASK STRUCTURE
01-00-00
- 197 -
MAINTENANCE DOCUMENTS -- AMM PART 2 - AMTOSS NUMBERS
General ATA Chapter, Section, and Subject
All maintenance tasks and sub-tasks have an aircraft These parts identify the airplane part for this task.
maintenance task oriented support system (AMTOSS) Each has two digits.
number. These are the reference numbers that you use to
find a specified task. AMTOSS numbers show before each Function Code
task and sub-task in the aircraft maintenance manual
(AMM). These are examples of AMTOSS task numbers: The function code defines the maintenance task. It has
three alpha-numeric digits. The full definition of the
- TASK 49-41-71-000-801 function code is in ATA Specification 100. The first
- SUBTASK 49-41-71-860-001 two digits define the type of task. The third digit is
not used by Boeing and is always zero. This is a list of
AMTOSS task and subtask numbers have these six parts: the first two digits of the function codes.
- ATA chapter
- ATA section Function Codes 0X0: Removal
- ATA subject
010 Remove, open for access
- Function code
- Sequence number Remove, disconnect, loosen, remove unit,
020
- Configuration. component, or item
040 Deactivate
This is an example of the parts of an AMTOSS task. 070 Erase/delete software or data
080 Remove test or support equipment
AMTOSS TASK 49-41-71-000-801

49 ATA chapter Function Codes 1X0: Cleaning
41 ATA section 110 Chemical
71 ATA subject 120 Abrasive
000 Function code 130 Ultrasonic
01-00-00-016.fm
801 Sequence number 140 Mechanical
BLANK Configuration (not applicable) 150 Stripping
01-00-00
- 198 -

Function Codes 1X0: Cleaning
160 Miscellaneous cleaning Function Codes 4X0: Installation
170 Flushing Install, close items removed, opened for
410
access
Install, reconnect unit, tighten safety
420
Function Codes 2X0: Inspection, Checks component or item
210 General visual 440 Reactivate
220 Detailed dimensional 470 Install/load data or software
230 Penetrant 480 Install test or support equipment
240 Magnetic
250 Eddy current
260 X-ray holographic Function Codes 5X0: Material and Aircraft Handling
270 Ultrasonic 510 Shipping
280 Special or specific 520 Receiving
290 Borescope 530 Packing
540 Unpacking
550 Storage or return to service
Function Codes 3X0: Repair 560 Marshaling or positioning
310 Welding or brazing 570 Engine ferry or pod maintenance
320 Machining, reaming, or blending 580 Aircraft handling
330 Composite
340 Fiberglass, plastic, honeycomb, or epoxy
350 Miscellaneous repair Function Codes 6X0: Servicing, Preserving, and
Lubricating
360 Leakage repair
610 Servicing
370 Painting
620 Preserving
380 Plating
01-00-00-016.fm
630 De-preserving
390 Sealing
640 Lubricating
650 Fueling or defueling
01-00-00
- 199 -
Function Codes 6X0: Servicing, Preserving, and Function Codes 8X0 and 9X0: Miscellaneous
Lubricating 900 Change (remove and install)
660 Deicing or anti-icing 910 Standard practices
670 Disinfect or sanitize 930 Marking
680 Drain fluid 940 Job set up or close up
950 Masking
960 Replace
Function Codes 7X0: Testing and Checking
970 Data recording or calculating
710 Operational
980 Manual operation or positioning
720 Functional
990 Illustrations or tables
730 System
740 BITE Sequence Number
750 Special
760 Electrical The sequence number makes sure there is a unique number
for all tasks and sub-tasks which have the same ATA and
780 Pressure
function code. Task sequence numbers are numbered 801
790 Leak through 999. If all task numbers are used, the third
digit uses alphabetic characters. Sub-task sequence
numbers are numbered 001 through 800.
Function Codes 8X0 and 9X0: Miscellaneous
810 Fault isolation Configuration
Adjusting, aligning, calibrating, or
820 The configuration is a three digit alpha-numeric code
rigging
that identifies the maintenance task for these items:
Preparing for maintenance or restoring to
840
normal
- Configuration
850 Operator modification incorporation - Methods or techniques
860 Aircraft or system configuration - Variations of standard practices.
01-00-00-016.fm
870 Bleeding
880 Heating or cooling This data is blank or has zeroes if there is no data.
890 Airline maintenance program
01-00-00
- 200 -

TASK 49-41-71-000-801
737-600/-900
AIRCRAFT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
START POWER UNIT - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
1. General
A. This procedure has these tasks:
SEQUENCE NUMBER AMTOSS (1) A removal of the start power unit

(2) An installation of the start power unit
TASK B. The start power unit is installed on the E2-2 electrical shelf. The E2-2
FUNCTION CODE (section 43)
TASK 49-41-71-000-801
2. Start Power Unit Removal
ATA SUBJECT (Figure 401)
A. References
Reference Title
ATA SECTION 20-10-07-000-801 E/E Box Removal (P/B 201)
20-40-12-000-802 ESDS Handling for Metal Encased Unit Removal (P/B201)
B. Location Zones
ATA CHAPTER Zone Area
118 Electrical and Electronics Compartment - Right
121 Forward Cargo Compartment - Left
122 Forward Cargo Compartment - Right
211 Flight Compartment - Left
AMTOSS C. Access Panels

SUBTASK Number Name/Location
821 Forward Cargo Door
AMTOSS SUBTASK 49-41-71-860-001 D. Prepare for the Removal
SUBTASK 49-41-71-860-001
(1) Make sure the APU master switch on the P5 forward overhead panel is
SUBTASK 49-41-71-010-001
(2) Open these access panels:
Number Name/Location
SEQUENCE NUMBER 821 Forward Cargo Door
SUBTASK 49-41-71-860-002
(3) Open these circuit breakers and install safety tags:
FUNCTION CODE Battery Shield, J9
Row Col Number Name
A 4 C00142 BATTERY CHARGER
ATA SUBJECT
ATA SECTION EFFECTIVITY
01-00-00-016.fm
49-41-71
ALL Page 401
Oct 10/2003
ATA CHAPTER
MAINTENANCE DOCUMENTS - AMM PART 2 - AMTOSS NUMBERS
01-00-00
- 201 -
MAINTENANCE DOCUMENTS -- SYSTEM SCHEMATIC MANUAL
Purpose There is a sheet number only if the schematic cannot
show on one sheet.
The System Schematics Manual gives the user an
understanding of system operation and helps in the General Chapter
fault isolation process. To do this, the manual
includes this kind of information on the schematics: There is a general chapter. It has chapter number 00.
The general chapter has this customized data:
- Component locations
- Component identification (drawings) - 00-00-00-00 - Airplane principal dimensions
- Controls - 00-00-00-10 - Ground service access panels
- Displays - 00-00-00-20 - Airplane stations
- Logic for system/subsystem operation - 00-00-00-40 - Equipment center locations.
- Logic for messages
- Line replaceable units (LRU).
Organization
The System Schematics Manual organization is by ATA

chapter, then chapter/section (subsystem). Each ATA
chapter/section usually defines an airplane system or
subsystem. Within an ATA chapter, the schematics show
in increasing depth or complexity.
The schematic numbers follow this order:
- ATA chapter/section (four-digit number)

- Schematic number (two-digit number)
- Page number
- Sheet number.
01-00-00-005.fm
Page numbers (Page 101, 102, etc.) show configurations
of a schematic for different airplanes in a customer's
fleet.
01-00-00
- 202 -

737-700 SYSTEM SCHEMATIC MANUAL

49-62-51
D3599C WIRING DIAGRAMS
2 28V DC
D3599B 49-41-11
49-62-11 49-62-11
2NO C2 OFF (28V DC)
2C
28V DC SWITCHED 2NC 49-62-11 49-62-11 A2 ON (28V DC)
HOT BATTERY BUS OFF
24-61-11 7.5 49-62-11 C1 START (28V DC)
ON
C33 AUX
POWER UNIT START
CONT (A14) 1NC NC
1C
1NO 49-62-11 24-31-11 B9 START ENABLE D3599B D10434/P3 P13
D1 SCU BITE 0 IGNITION D7 17 1
D2 SCU BITE 1 OUTPUT 16 2
S248 APU SQ (P5) D3 SCU BITE 2
D3599A
D11114C D11114C C13 SCU BITE 3 APU FIREWALL
3 DC CONT PWR START ENABLE 7 DISCONNECT M1(YAA) IGNITION
115V AC SCU BITE 0 61 (STA 1088) UNIT
4 DC PWR RTN
STANDBY BUS SCU BITE 1 62
24-54-11 5 55 SCU BITE 2 63 M1709 APU ELECTRONIC CONTROL
C1424 AUX 56 SCU BITE 3 64 UNIT (AFT CARGO BAY) 24-21-31
POWER UNIT D11118/P4 P5
SCU FAN POWER RESOLVER PWR + 67 15 7
(B14) RESOLVER PWR - 66 30 8
D11478A D11114C
RESOLVER
DC/DC ENABLE 10 59 RESOLVER SIN + 54 29 9
P6-4 CIRCUIT BREAKER PANEL SUP OPTO RTN 11 46 RESOLVER SIN - 53 28 10
AC/DC ENABLE 8 21 SINE
AC/DC ENABLE RTN 9 33 RESOLVER COS + 42 12 11
SOFT START RETURN 1 20 RESOLVER COS - 41 27 12
SPU FAN PWR RTN 17 44 COSINE
SPU FAN PWR 16 57
DC/DC INPUT SENSE + 62 2
DC/DC INPUT SENSE - 63 11 D11114B P6
D11428 D11478B AC/DC 3 24 30 A 5 25
115V AC φA 3 PHASE SENSE 1
PMG
A 5 AC/DC 3
3 PHASE SENSE RTN 25 43 PMG INPUT B 6 24 2
TRANSFER BUS 1 WIRED SPARE 1 43 45 C 13 10 3
24-51-11 φB B 6 WIRED SPARE 2 44 58
AC/DC TEMP SENSE + 30 23 EXCITER FIELD + 8 6 5 EXCITER
φC 35 C 7 AC/DC TEMP SENSE - 31 36 EXCITER FIELD - 10 8 7
C1336 FIELD
DC/DC TEMP SENSE + 55 22
APU START DC/DC TEMP SENSE - 56 35
CONVERTER (A11) DC/DC FTO FLAG 33 8
DC/DC BIT FLAG 34 34
P91 POWER DISTRIBUTION DC/DC OPTO RTN 35 18
PANEL 1 DC/DC INPUT OK 46 19 D11114A
WIRED SPARE 3 47 47 C 3
DC/DC INTERLOCK + 14 1 SCU OUTPUT/ B 2
DC/DC INTERLOCK - 27 9 POR A 1
24-31-11 D11478B D11114B
D44 24-31-11 D11798 DC LINK POWER + 1 25
+ + DC LINK POWER - 3 18 D11114C
- 12 P5
DC LINK POWER + 2 26 23 3
DC LINK POWER - 4 24 22 2
24-24-31
3 1
4 4
E1
20
M6 BATTERY (J9) 24-22-31 APU FIREWALL
21 DISCONNECT
(STA 1088)
M1850 START POWER UNIT (E2-2)
24-22-31
D11436 D10904 TRIP TB5002
24-21-51 D10896A D11114C
32-09-11 38 10 8 A T1
UV PROTECTION FLAG 59 29 UV PROT FLAG APB AUX
OV PROTECTION FLAG 60 28 OV PROT FLAG SENSE 39 11 18 B T2
VR ENABLE 8 17 VR ENABLE CLOSED
C T3
AIR D10896B
D11142 PMG SIGNAL + 21 13 + PMG SENSE 24-21-31 N
31 PMG SIGNAL - 11 25 - PMG SENSE COM 15 C803 AUX
A 6 PWR BRKR
CURRENT 24-21-31
LIMIT CT B 14 G13(YAA) STARTER GENERATOR
GND P91 POWER DISTRIBUTION
16 AIR/GND C 27
PANEL 1
AIR/GND AUXILIARY POWER UNIT
G14 APU GEN CONT UNIT (E3-1)
M2061 PROX SWITCH ELEX UNIT M1710 APU START CONVERTER UNIT (E2-2)
(NOSE WHEEL WELL)
49-11-11
01-00-00-005.fm
YA001-YA011, YA301
APU IGNITION AND Page 101
STARTING SYSTEM
Jan 03/2006
D280A201
MAINTENANCE DOCUMENTS - SYSTEM SCHEMATIC MANUAL
01-00-00
- 203 -
MAINTENANCE DOCUMENTS -- WIRING DIAGRAM MANUAL
Purpose
The Wiring Diagram Manual gives details of the point-

to-point wiring on the airplane. It shows all
connectors including breakout and shelf connectors.
The wiring diagram shows simple internal components of

LRUs to help the user better understand the signal flow
and purpose of the wiring. Internal components do not
show if they are complex or if the signal(s) comes from
or goes to software.
Organization
The organization of the wiring diagram manual is

similar to the system schematic manual. It uses the ATA
chapter/section organization.
These are the sections in chapter 91 of the wiring

diagram manual:
- Equipment list
- Diagrams
- Charts
- Hook-up list
- Wire list
- Circuit breaker list
- Disconnect bracket list.
01-00-00-006.fm
01-00-00
- 204 -

737-700 WIRING DIAGRAM MANUAL

AP0600B
DISCONNECT BRACKET LIST PRESS. SEAL AB1088
STA 1016
115V AC STANDBY
BUS SECT 2
=B =L
W0044
W0220
CIRCUIT BREAKER LIST C
6 3
24-54-11 5 0498-20 24 W5612-0501-20 0109-20 62 IGNITION W5726-2233R-22 SM14 W5726-2204R-20
WIRE LIST
25 D7 17 1
C1424 APU SCU GD2203-AC 0110-20 63 OUTPUT
FAN POWER J D40352P D40360P J W5726-2233B-22 SM15 W5726-2204B-20 16 2
SCU BITE 2 D3
P6-4
49-62-1 SH 1 A5 0245-20 3 DC CONT PWR HOOK-UP LIST SCU
SCU
BITE 1
BITE 0
D2
D1
GD4815-ST
D10434
P13
D40946P J M1(YAA) IGNITION UNIT

P6 LOAD CONTROL CENTER - RIGHT
GD2203-DC 0112-20
9
5 DC PWR RTN
UV PROT FLAG
CHARTS START ENABLE B9
D3599B
24-21-31
8
10
OV PROT FLAG
VR ENGABLE DIAGRAMS
24-31-11 SCU BITE 3 C13
24 + PMG SENSE YA1 0122-24
AIR
37 - PMG SENSE TB2201
EQUIPMENT LIST M1709 APU ELEC
CONT UNIT
D3599A
(AFT CARGO BAY)

31 W5156-0540-22 A6 0113-24 19 AIR/GND
SCU BITE 3 56 0123-24 A5 W5726-0505-24
D11142 D40456P J D11114C 0118-24 A3 0501-24
GND START ENABLE 18
SCU BITE 0 43 0119-24 B3 0502-24 AB1088
32-64-11 SCU BITE 1 44 0120-24 A4 0503-24 PRESS. SEAL
SCU BITE 2 55 0121-24 B4 0504-24 STA 1016
M2061 PSEU 65 B6 14
RESOLVER PWR + 67 2026R-22 B5 2201R-22 15 7 R
66 2026B-22 A6 2201B-22 30 8 E
RESOLVER PWR -
S
52 A8 13
O
RESOLVER SIN + 54 2027R-22 A7 2202R-22 29 9 L
RESOLVER SIN - 53 2027B-22 B7 2202B-22 28 10 SINE V
40 B9 26 E
RESOLVER COS + 42 2028R-22 B8 2203R-22 12 11 R
DC/DC ENABLE 10 2016R-22 10 RESOLVER COS - 41 2028B-22 A9 W5726-2203B-22 27 12 COSINE
SUP OPTO RTN 11 2016B-22 11
D11114C J D40928P
AC/DC ENABLE 8 3201R-22 8 23 3
AC/DC ENABLE RTN 9 3201B-22 9 22 2
24-24-31
SOFT START RTN 1 3201Y-22 1 3 1
SPU FAN PWR RTN 17 2018B-22 17 4 4
SPU FAN PWR 16 2018R-22 16
DC/DC INPUT SENSE + 62 2019R-22 62 P5
DC/DC INPUT SENSE - 63 2019B-22 63 B10 11
AC/DC 3f SENSE 24 2020R-22 24 A 5 24-21-31 H 24-21-31 25 1
AC/DC 3f SENSE RTN 25 2020B-22 25 PMG
WIRING DIAGRAM
PMG INPUT B 6 24-21-31 K 24-21-31 24 2
SPU TEMP 1 SENSE + 43 2021R-22 43 C 13 24-21-31 J 24-21-31 10 3
SPU TEMP 1 SENSE - 44 2021B-22 44 19
AC/DC TEMP SENSE + 30 2022R-22 30 EXCITER FIELD + 8 24-21-31 F 24-21-31 6 5
AC/DC TEMP SENSE - 31 2022B-22 31 EXCITER FIELD - 10 24-21-31 G 24-21-31 8 7
DC/DC TEMP SENSE + 55 2023R-22 55 EXCITER
20 0124-16 A10 GD4815-ST
MANUAL
P6 FIELD
DC/DC TEMP SENSE - 56 2023B-22 56 GD2205-ST
DC/DC FTO FLAG 33 3002R-22 33 J D40912P D11118
21 0125-16
DC/DC BIT FLAG 34 3002B-22 34 GD2205-ST PRESS. SEAL
DC/DC OPTO RTN 35 3002Y-22 35 D11114A STA 1016
DC/DC INPUT OK 46 0114-22 46 E1 A T1
A 24-21-31 24-21-31
DC/DC OVERCURRENT 47 0227-22 47
DC/DC INTERLOCK + 14 2047R-22 14 SCU OUTPUT/ E2 B T2
B 24-21-31 24-21-31
DC/DC INTERLOCK - 27 2047B-22 27 POR
DC/DC INTERLOCK SHIELD 6 NC 6 E3 C T3
C 24-21-31 24-21-31
D11478A D11114B N
TB5002 AC 24-21-31
15 0126-22 24-21-31
DC LINK PWR + 1 2024R-16 25 GD2203-AC CLOSED
G13(YAA) STARTER GENERATOR
DC LINK PWR - 3 2024B-16 18 APB AUX SENSE 59 2029R-24 A1 W5726-2238R-24 11 18
DC LINK PWR + 2 2025R-16 26 58 2029B-24 B1 W5726-2238B-24 10 8
TRIP AUXILIARY POWER UNIT
1 DC LINK PWR - 4 2025B-16 24
E1 D11114C J D40928P D11436 D10904 24-22-31
1 DC LINK SHIELD 8 23
GB3102-ST
D11114A C803 AUX PWR
M1710 APU START BRKR
1 GD3252-DC W2532-0516-1/0 -
CONVERTER UNIT PUBLISHED BY THE BOEING COMMERCIALOA AIRPLANE GROUP,
+ W2532-0501-2/0 +
5 0115-12 1 W5230-0510-12
SEATTLE,
A
OB 115V AC
24-31-11 24-31-11 6 0116-12 2 0511-12WASHINGTON,
B USA
D44 D11798 TRANS BUS 1
OC 24-51-11
M6 BATTERY 7 0117-12 3 A W5230-
DIVISION
0512-12 OF THE
C BOEING
35 COMPANY
C1336 APU START
J9 BATTERY SHIELD D11478B J D43084P D11428 CONVERTER
M1850 START POWER
UNIT
NOTES: P91 POWER DISTRIBUTION PANEL 1
E2-2 SHELF
01-00-00-006.fm
1 BONDING JUMPER GROUND SIZED FOR CURRENT OF
2500 AMPS INSTALLED BY EQUIPMENT INSTATLLATION.
YA001-YA0 11
APU IGNITION AND 49-41-11 49-41-11
Page 1 Page 1
STARTING SYSTEM Feb 08/2005 Feb 08/2005
MAINTENANCE DOCUMENTS - WIRING DIAGRAM MANUAL
01-00-00
- 205 -
MAINTENANCE DOCUMENTS -- STANDARD WIRING PRACTICE MANUAL
General Table Of Contents
The standard wiring practice manual contains the The table of contents lists the manual sections and
necessary procedures and data for maintenance of the subjects.
electrical wires and electrical terminations of all
Boeing commercial airplane models. The standard wiring Cross-Reference Index
practice manual has these sections:
The cross-reference index is an alphanumeric list of
- Revision transmittal the names, part numbers, and the suppliers of the
- List of effective pages equipment in this manual. Each entry in the cross-
- Introduction reference index also gives the chapter/section/subject
- Table of contents where you can find the assembly procedure or the
- Cross-reference index maintenance data for the equipment.
- Standard practice subjects.
Standard Practice Subjects
Revision Transmittal
Each subject starts with a table of contents with these
The revision transmittal is a list of all the manual sections:
changes and up-dates.
- Major breakdown or subdivision
List Of Effective Pages - Page number of where the breakdown or subdivision
starts.
The list of effective pages shows all the pages of the
manual. It gives the current change date for that page. These are the important data tables:
Introduction - Contact crimp tools in subject 20-00-12

- Insulation removal tools in subject 20-00-15
The introduction gives the purpose and general - Materials in subject 20-00-11
instructions on the sections of the manual. - Wire type codes and wire part numbers in subject
20-00-13.
01-00-00-206.fm
01-00-00
- 206 -

WIRING DIAGRAM MANUAL

CHAPTER 20
STANDARD WIRING PRACTICES MANUAL
DOCUMENT D6-54446
Published By
01-00-00-206.fm
BOEING COMMERCIAL AIRPLANES
Seattle, Washington USA
MAINTENANCE DOCUMENTS - STANDARD WIRING PRACTICE MANUAL
01-00-00
- 207 -
MAINTENANCE DOCUMENTS -- PARTS CATALOG - INTRODUCTION
General General System Of Assembly Order - Detailed Parts List
The Boeing Company makes, sends out and revises the This catalog uses indentation to show the relationship
parts catalog for customer use. Only customers can use of one part to another. For all items, the indented
it to provision, requisition, store, and send out line number shows the relationship to the installation, next
replaceable aircraft parts. It identifies parts for the higher assembly, or components above it. These are the
airplanes that Boeing delivers to its customers. The levels and their relationship:
parts catalog has these sections:
- 1
- Table Of Contents - Installation
- Introduction - 2
- Explanation Of Parts List Data - .Detailed parts for installation
- General System of Assembly Order-Detailed Parts - .Assembly
List - .Attaching parts for assembly
- Instructions To Locate Part - .3
- A/L code To Name List - ..Detail parts for assembly
- Zone Diagrams - ..Sub-Assembly
- Sect/Sta Diagrams - ..Attaching parts for Sub-Assembly
- Major Dwg Index - ..4
- Filter Kits - ...Detail parts for Sub-Assembly
- Suppliers Name And Address Index - ...Sub-Sub Assembly
- Service Bulletin And Modification List. - ...Attaching parts for Sub-Sub-Assembly
- ...5
To quickly know the parts catalog, review these - ....Detail parts for Sub-Sub-Assembly.
sections in the front of the catalog:
- General System of Assembly Order-Detailed Parts

List
- Explanation Of Parts List Data
- Instructions To Locate A Part.
01-00-00-205.fm
01-00-00
- 208 -

PARTS
CATALOG MAINTENANCE
BOEING MODEL 737

DOCUMENT D633XXX
MASTER
ILLUSTRATED PARTS CATALOG
Revision 28 dated March 5, 1996
This is a revision to the Illustrated Parts Catalog for the

airline and model identified and completely replaces all
previous issues.
The Service Bulletin and Modification List provided in this

revision contains all of the applicable Service Bulletins
and Modifications incorporated to date.
BOEING COMMERCIAL AIRPLANES

(A Division of The Boeing Company)
P.O. BOX 3707
Seattle, Washington 98124-2207
01-00-00-205.fm
MASTER Revision Transmittal Letter
MAR 5/96 Page 1
MAINTENANCE DOCUMENTS - PARTS CATALOG - INTRODUCTION
01-00-00
- 209 -
MAINTENANCE DOCUMENTS -- PARTS CATALOG - HOW TO LOCATE A PART
General
Sample pages in the introduction show how to find a

part number entry. The instructions are in these
sections:
- When the part number is known

- When the part number is unknown.
When The Part Number Is Known
When you know the part number (reference 1), you find
the part number in the numerical index. Then you can
write down the chapter, section, unit, figure, and item
number.
When The Part Number Is Unknown
When you do not know the number, do these steps:
- Go to the table of contents in the chapter where

the part is (reference 2)
- Refer to the main group in which the part should be
listed (reference 3)
- Figures are listed in alphabetical order by a main
noun. You find the title of the figure in which the
part is shown (reference 4)
- Write down the section, unit, and figure number
- Go to the chapter and figure and find the part on
the illustration or in the parts list by the item
01-00-00-207.fm
number (reference 5).
01-00-00
- 210 -

PARTS PARTS
CATALOG MAINTENANCE CATALOG MAINTENANCE
INSTRUCTION TO LOCATE A PART IN THE DETAILED PARTS LIST INSTRUCTIONS TO LOCATE A PART IN THE DETAILED PARTS LIST
THE PART NUMBER IS KNOWN 5. Turn to chapter and figure

3. Refer to main group in and locate part on the
1. Find part number in Numerical which the part should illustration or in the
Index. Note chapter, section, be listed. parts list by the item
unit, figure and item number. number.
4. Figures are listed in
THE PART NUMBER IS UNKNOWN alphabetical order by
main noun. Find title of PARTS
2. Turn to Table of Contents figure in which the part CATALOG
in the desired chapter. should be shown. Note STA

STA
400
section, unit and figure 260
number. STA
35
178
PARTS
48
CATALOG
30 35
PART NUMBER TTL PART NUMBER 46
STA
CH-SECT-UNIT-FIG-ITEM REQ. CH-SECT-UNIT-FIG-ITEM
190
B
253T3215-5010 253T3215-71 PARTS
53 13 03 1 40K RF 53 13 03 1 47L ZONE
CATALOG
253T3215-5011 253T3215-72 115
PARTS
53 13 03
253T3215-5012
1 45K RF 27 21 07
53 13 03
2
1
1P
47J
CHAPTER 27 - FLIGHT CONTROLS
2 110
CATALOG
53 13 03 1 40K RF 253T3215-73 TABLE IF CONTENTS

A LISTS
53 13 03 1A 55 53 13 03 1 40K EFECT
RF FIG ITEM PART NUMBER 1234567 NOMENCLATURE PER
CHAPTER
253T3215-5013 53 13 03 1A 55 FROM TO
SECTION ASSY
53 13 03 1 45K RF 253T3215-74
SUBJECT UNIT FIGURE EFFECT 125
53 13 03 1A 60 RF 53 13 03 1 45K 35
253T3215-502 53 13 03 1A 60 3 40
43
- 1 253T3200-1 JACKSHAFT INSTL-RUD CONT
JACKSHAFT INSTL-RUD CONT
RF
27 21 07 2 1J RF 253T3215-75 50
RUDDER AND REDDER TRIM CONTROL SYSTEM 27-21-00 (LH)
53 13 03 1 47M 1 27 21 07 2 1Q 60
ACTUATOR ASSY-RUD RATIO 27-21-13 50 (FOR NWA SEE
253T3215-503 27 21 07 2A 1J 70
R ACTUATOR INSTL-RUD 27-21-02 1 48 27-21-57 FIG. 1)
27 21 07 2 1K RF 53 13 03 1 47Q 30
ADJUSTMENT INSTL-RUD PEDAL 27-21-06 1 35 - 5 253T3200-2 JACKSHAFT INSTL-RUD CONT RF
46
53 13 03 1 47K 1 53 13 03 1A 65
BRACKET INSTL-IDLER PULLEY 27-21-51 1 40 (RH)
253T3215-505 253T3215-76
27 21 07 2 1L RF 27 21 07 2 5L
BRACKET INSTL-STA 1326 RUD PULLEY 27-21-53 1 43 A B
(FOR NWA SEE
BRACKET INSTL-STA 1654.5 RUD PULLEY 27-21-54 1 27-21-57 FIG. 1)
53 13 03 1 47P 1 27 21 07 2A 5
BRACKET INSTL-STA 246.0 RA AND RB 27-21-55 1 10 3-74664 .PLATEW-(LH SIDE) 1
253T3215-506 85
53 13 03 1 48M
CABLE PULLEY 234999 INGO FROM SH AL QQ-A-362
27 21 07 2 5J RF 53 13 03 1A 70
CENTERING AND TRIM INSTL-RUD CONT FEEL 27-21-10 1 T3 TEMP SRF 2.30 0.153F
53 13 03 1 48L 1 95
253T3219-1 90
CONTROL INSTL-RUD AND RUD TRIM 27-21-57 1 0.102 IN.2.60 IN.
253T3215-507 27 21 07 1 30
COVER INSTL-RUD PEDAL 27-21-05 5 2.60 IN.)
27 21 07 2 1M RF 253T3223-1
HOSE AND BOOT INSTL-HYD RUD RATIO 27-21-13 5 (USED ON 253T3200-1)
53 13 03 1 47M 1 27 21 07 2 50
CHANGER ACTR 15 NAS1351C3HSP . SCREW- 2
253T3215-57 27 21 07 2 105
HYDRAULIC INSTL-SECT. 72 VERT. FIM 27-21-59 1 (OPT NAS1351-3H6P)
27 21 07 2 40 1 253T3400-1
IDLER PULLY INSTL-STA 676 STAB. TRIM 27-21-51 10 15 NAS1351-3NSP . SCREW- 2
27 21 07 2A 40 1 27 21 05 5 1L
JACKSHAFT INSTL-RUD CONT 27-21-07 1 95 (OPT NAS1351C3H6P)
253T3215-58 27 21 57 1 170
MANIFOLD INSTL-VERT. STAB. YDR 27-21-56 1 90
27 21 07 2 45 1 253T3400-12 20 253T3214-1 .CRANK-(RH SIDE) 1
PANEL INSTL-ELECTRONICS 27-21-20 1
27 21 07 2A 45 1 85
27 21 05 5 21 (USED ON 253T3200-10
PANEL INSTL-OVERHEAD 27-21-58 2
253T3215-64 27 21 05 6 5 ATTACHING PARTS
PANEL INSTL-RUD CONT 27-21-05 1 JACKSHAFT INSTL-RUDDER CON
27 21 07 2 5K RF 27 21 05 6A 5 25 NASA1351C3H36P . SCREW- 3
RATIO CHANGER INSTL-RUD CONT. 27-21-13 1 FIGURE 1
53 13 03 1 48J 1 253T3400-13 (OPT NAS1351-3H36P)
SEAL INSTL-STA 1582.0 DOME PRESSURE 27-21-52 1
253T3215-68 27 21 05 5 22 (OPT 253T3200-3)
RUDDER AND ELEVATOR SHUTOFF VALVES 27-23-00
53 13 03 1 40 1 JUNE 22/96
27 21 05 6 10 25 NAS1351-3H36P . SCREW- 3
HYDRAULIC INSTL-SECT. 48 BODY AFT 27-23-51 1
253T3215-71 27 21 05 6A 10 (OPT NAS1351C3H36P)
HYDRAULIC INSTL-SECT. 72 VERT. FIN 27-23-52 3
27 21 07 2 1N RF 253T3400-19 (OPT 253T3200-3)
SEAL INSTL-SECT. 48 HYDR PRESSURE 27-23-55 1
VALVE INSTL-STA 1654 AND STA 1702 27-23-01 1 25 253T32OO-3 . SCREW- 3
EMPEMMAGE DC MOTOR SHUTOFF (ALT FROM BAC830NT3K28)
4 (OPT NAS1351C3H36P)
(OPT NAS1351-3H36P)
27-CONTENTS
XX PAGE 4 30 253T3219-1 .HOUSING ASSY- 2
JUNE 22/96 JUN 22/88 (ALT FROM 9-30874)
27-21-07
FIG. 1 5
1
PAGE 1 27-21-07
JUNE 22/96 JUN 22/88 FIG. 1
PAGE 1
01-00-00-10-03A
01-00-00-10-04A
SAMPLE PAGES JUNE 22/96 JUN 22/88
SAMPLE PAGES
INSTRUCTIONS TO LOCATE PART INSTRUCTIONS TO LOCATE PART
01-00-00-207.fm
MAR 5/96 PAGE 2 MAR 5/94 PAGE 2
MAINTENANCE DOCUMENTS - PARTS CATALOG - HOW TO LOCATE A PART
01-00-00
- 211 -
MAINTENANCE DOCUMENTS -- PARTS CATALOG - EXPLANATION OF ILLUSTRATION TECHNIQUES
General
The explanation of illustrated techniques section has

two types of pages. The first is a sample page of an
airplane part. There are reference numbers on this page
that point to important areas. The second page type has
the text that explains the meaning of the reference
numbers.
01-00-00-208.fm
01-00-00
- 212 -

PARTS PARTS
CATALOG MAINTENANCE CATALOG MAINTENANCE
EXPLANATION OF ILLUSTRATION TECHNIQUES EXLANATION OF ILLUSTRATION TECHNIQUE
The illustration portion of a figure in the Illustrated Parts

Catalog pictorially displays the relationship of the parts
identified the Parts List. The following is an explanation
PARTS of certain techniques used in the illustration to present the
CATALOG MAINTENANCE
relationship of these parts. The numbers correspond to those
175
STA shown in the following sample.
STA 400
260
185 1. Detail coverage of any portion of the illustration is
STA 180 provided by isolating sections in specific exploded views
178 195 170 with alphabetic designations.
190
165
125 160 2. Components of assemblies are shown either within a specific
135 200 205 A 155
exploded view of the assembly or the item numbers of the
STA
190 1 O 150
components are included within a bracket which is identified
ZONE
115
by the item number of the assembly.
110 A
3. When a component is physically illustrated such that a lead
line from the item number within a bracket to the illus-
tration of the part would be confusing or indeterminate, an
105 55 arrow is used to point in the direction of the illustrated
B 65
component.
75
4. Alternate configuration are indicated by a dual-headed arrow

3 200
relating the illustration of the configuration involved.
50
60 80
48
85
70
2
30
46
A
B 50
4
B
60
85 70
10
1 15
20
JACKSHAFT INSTL-RUDDER CONTROL
FIGURE 1 25
27-11-07-01
JUNE 22/96 PAGE 0
01-00-00-10-05
SAMPLE PAGE
ILLUSTRATION TECHNIQUES ILLUSTRATION TECHNIQUES

MAR 5/96
01-00-00-208.fm
MAR 5/96 PAGE 1 PAGE 2
REFERENCE NUMBERS
MAINTENANCE DOCUMENTS - PARTS CATALOG - EXPLANATION OF ILLUSTRATION TECHNIQUES
01-00-00
- 213 -
MAINTENANCE DOCUMENTS -- STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL - 1
General
The structural repair manual has general data and

instructions for repair of the airplane structure. This
manual gives the usual procedures and repair materials.
The Federal Aviation Administration (FAA) gives
approval for the data in the structural repair manual.
The structural repair manual has these sections:
- Standard Practices and Structures-General (51)

- Doors (52)
- Fuselage (53)
- Nacelles/Pylons (54)
- Stabilizers (55)
- Windows (56)
- Wings (57).
The introduction pages show how to use the Structural

Repair Manual.
01-00-00-204.fm
01-00-00
- 214 -

737-700
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL
737-700 1. General
A. This Structural Repair Manual gives general data and special instructions
for the repair of the Boeing 737-700 airplane structure. This manual
gives general airplane data, usual procedures, and repair materials.
This manual also includes material identification, allowable damage, and
repair data for the airplane structure. Procedures usually done together
with the structural repair (such as an airplane symmetry check or support
of the airplane in the jigged position) are also given. This manual was
made as specified in the Air Transport Association Specification 100 -
Specification for Manufacturer's Technical Data. The data in this manual
Structural Repair Manual which has an important effect on the airplane structure was approved by
the Federal Aviation Administration.
B. Some structural components that can be repaired are not included in this
manual. It is possible that repairs are not given because a general
repair was not easily applied to a specified structure. Also, it is
possible that service experience has shown a repair is not neccessary
for a specified structure. For some types of damage, an analysis by The
Boeing Company is necessary before an applicable repair can be made.
When an applicable repair is not found in this manual, look at these
items:
(1) Do a repair as specified in the general repair practices and

procedures given in Chapter 51 of this manual.
(2) Prepare a special repair for damage not included in this manual.
(3) Replace the damaged part.
C. This manual will change to include more approved repairs when the service
experience shows a necessary repair for a specified structure.
D. For the most important structural damage, it is recommended that the data
in this manual be used together with aid from The Boeing Company Support
Representative. Refer to paragraph 4 for instructions on how to use the
data in this manual to make an order for structural spare part.
DOCUMENT D6-37635
PUBLISHED BY BOEING COMMERCIAL AIRPLANES GROUP, SEATTLE, WASHINGTON, USA
INTRODUCTION
01-00-00-204.fm
A DIVISION OF THE BOEING COMPANY
Page 1
D634A201 Mar 10/98
MAINTENANCE DOCUMENTS - STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL - 1
01-00-00
- 215 -
MAINTENANCE DOCUMENTS -- STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL - 2
General
The introduction helps you find the damaged part or

area. The introduction uses the horizontal stabilizer
forward box rib as an example. The horizontal
stabilizer forward box rib shows in chapter-section-
subject 55-10-09. Figure 2 shows these items about 55-
10-09:
- Identification of forward box rib is on page 1

- Allowable damage of forward box rib is on page 101
- Repair of forward box rib is on page 201.
01-00-00-211.fm
01-00-00
- 216 -

737-700 737-700
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL
PROCEDURE TO FIND THE

A. Identify the material of the damaged part. Refer to the applicable APPLICABLE TOPIC
material identification data in this manual. For the example used
before, in 55-10-09, the topic "Identification 1 - Horizontal Stabilizer
Forward Box Ribs" gives the identification data for the damaged part.
NOTE:
____ The material identification tables and some of the figures give
reference drawing numbers. Refer to these reference drawings when 737-700
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL
the applicable structure is not identified.
CHAPTER 55 - STABILIZERS
B. Find the allowable damage data for the damaged structure. Refer to the
TABLE OF CONTENTS
_________________
Manual Arrangement and Number System in the Introduction of this manual.
Also refer to the List of Chapters for this manual and to the Table of CHAPTER
SECTION
Contents in the applicable chapter. As an example, if the damaged part _______
SUBJECT _______
SUBJECT ____
PAGE
was a rib in the forward box of the horizontal stabilizer, the allowable _____________________
STABILIZERS - GENERAL 55-00-00 1
damage data is found as follows: HORIZONTAL STABILIZER

_____________________ 55-10-00 1
(1) The List of Chapters for this manual shows that data on Stabilizers
is included in Chapter 55.
RIBS
Identification 1 - Horizontal Stabilizer 55-10-09 1
(2) The Table of Contents for Chapter 55 shows that all data on the Forward Box Ribs
Horizontal Stabilizer is included in the Chapter-Section-Subject 55-10-xx.
The data on Ribs is given in Chapter-Secion-Subject 55-10-09. The
topic "Allowable Damage 1 - Horizontal Stabilizer Forward Box Ribs" Allowable Damage 1 - Horizontal Stabilizer 55-10-09 101
gives the allowable damage data for the damaged part. Forward Box Ribs
C. Find the repair data for the damages structure. For the example used
before, in 55-10-09, the topic "Repair 1 - Horizontal Stabilizer Forward
Box Ribs" gives the repair data for the damaged part. Repair 1 - Horizontal Stabilizer 55-10-09 201
Forward Box Ribs
D. Unless specified differently, all dimensions in this manual are given in
inches.
55-CONTENTS
Page 2
D634A201 Jan 05/97
How to Use the Manual

Figure 2
INTRODUCTION INTRODUCTION
01-00-00-211.fm
Page 8 Page 9
D634A201 May 24/96 D634A201 May 24/96
MAINTENANCE DOCUMENTS - STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL - 2
01-00-00
- 217 -
MAINTENANCE DOCUMENTS -- SCENARIO 1 - LRU FAILURE
General
Scenario 1 shows the flow and use of the tools for a

line replacable unit (LRU) that has an internal
failure. The flow shows these steps:
- Flight crew uses the Fault Reporting Manual (FRM)

to find the fault code
- Flight crew writes the fault code and a short
description of the problem in the airplane flight
log
- Maintenance crew does a check of the Dispatch
Deviation Guide and makes a decision to do a repair
or make a dispatch without a repair
- For a repair, the maintenance crew uses the Fault
Isolation Manual (FIM) to find the FIM task number
- Maintenance crew does the BITE procedure and gets
a maintenance message from the BITE
- Maintenance crew finds the FIM task number in a
table in the FIM
- Maintenance crew writes the task number that shows
adjacent to the fault code
- Maintenance crew finds the task number in the FIM
- FIM shows to remove and replace the LRU and gives
references to the Maintenance Manual removal and
installation (R & I) section
- Maintenance crew uses the Maintenance Manual R & I
procedures to install a good LRU
- FIM then gives the steps to make sure the fault is
corrected
01-00-00-209.fm
- Fault is gone
- Maintenance crew completes the job and does the
paperwork.
01-00-00
- 218 -

AIRPLANE
FLIGHT LOG
DO
FAULT DISPATCH REPAIR FAULT
REPORTING DEVIATION ISOLATION TASK NUMBER
MANUAL GUIDE MANUAL
FLIGHT CREW
WRITE-UP DO THE LRU TEST
AND GET THE
MAKE A DISPATCH MAINTENANCE
WITHOUT REPAIR MESSAGE
FAULT AIRPLANE FAULT

ISOLATION MAINTENANCE ISOLATION JOB
MANUAL MANUAL MANUAL DONE
AIRPLANE
LOOK IN A TABLE R&I FOR THE LRU DO THE FIM TASK LRU TEST FLIGHT LOG,
01-00-00-209.fm
FOR THE TASK NUMBER AND MAKE SURE THE IS GOOD COMPLETE THE
AND DO THE TASK REPAIR IS COMPLETE PAPERWORK
(R&I FOR THE LRU)
MAINTENANCE DOCUMENTS - SCENARIO 1 - LRU FAILURE
01-00-00
- 219 -
MAINTENANCE DOCUMENTS -- SCENARIO 2 - LOST INPUT TO LRU
General - FIM shows to install the LRUs again; the
maintenance crew uses the Maintenance Manual to
Scenario 2 shows flow and use of the tools for a lost install the LRUs
input to a line replaceable unit (LRU). The flow shows - FIM then gives the steps to make sure the fault is
these steps: corrected
- Maintenance crew does a test of the LRU, and the
- Flight crew uses the Fault Reporting Manual (FRM) test shows that the LRU is good
to find the fault code - Maintenance crew completes the job and does the
- Flight crew writes the fault code and a short paperwork.
description of the problem in the airplane flight
log
- Maintenance crew does a check of the Dispatch
Deviation Guide and makes a decision to do a repair
or makes a dispatch without a repair
- For a repair, the maintenance crew uses the Fault
Isolation Manual (FIM) to find the FIM task number
- Maintenance crew does the BITE procedure and gets
a maintenance message from the BITE
- Maintenance crew finds the FIM task number in a
table in the FIM manual
- FIM shows to remove the LRUs that have an interface
and gives references to the Maintenance Manual
removal and installation (R & I) section
- Maintenance crew uses the maintenance manual R & I
procedures to remove the LRUs
- FIM then shows to do a test of the wiring between
the LRUs
- Test shows that the wiring is bad
- Maintenance crew uses the System Schematics and
Wiring Diagrams to do troubleshooting of the bad
01-00-00-210.fm
wiring
- Maintenance crew uses the Standard Wiring
Practices Manual and repairs the wiring
01-00-00
- 220 -

DO THE LRU TEST
AIRPLANE AND GET THE
FLIGHT LOG MAINTENANCE
MESSAGE
DO
FAULT REPORTING DISPATCH REPAIR FAULT ISOLATION
DEVIATION TASK
MANUAL MANUAL NUMBER
GUIDE
FLIGHT CREW MAKE A DISPATCH

WRITE-UP WITHOUT REPAIR
SYSTEM
AIRPLANE SCHEMATICS
FAULT ISOLATION MAINTENANCE FAULT ISOLATION STANDARD
MANUAL MANUAL MANUAL WIRING
PRACTICES
MANUAL
WIRING
LOOK IN A TABLE REMOVE THE DO A RESISTANCE CHECK DIAGRAMS
FOR THE TASK NUMBER 2 LRU(S) ON THE DATA BUS WIRES REPAIR THE SPLICE
THEN DO THE TASK (1 WIRE OPEN)
(NO AIR DATA)
DO TROUBLESHOOTING OF
THE WIRING (FOUND BAD SPLICE)
AIRPLANE
AIRPLANE FLIGHT LOG JOB
FAULT ISOLATION MAINTENANCE FAULT ISOLATION DONE
MANUAL MANUAL MANUAL
01-00-00-210.fm
DO THE TASK
GO BACK TO THE FIM INSTALL THE LRU(S) AND MAKE SURE THE LRU TEST COMPLETE THE
REPAIR IS COMPLETE IS GOOD PAPERWORK
MAINTENANCE DOCUMENTS - SCENARIO 2 - LOST INPUT TO LRU
01-00-00
- 221 -
COMPUTER BASE TRAINING (CBT) -- CHECKLIST
General 13 ___ 24-00 DC Electrical Power - Fault Isolation
(CAB/UTIL & IFE/PASS)
This gives you a checklist of all the CBT lessons that
apply to your airplane. Some training courses will not 14 ___ 26-10 Engine Fire Protection - Fault Isolation
include all of these lessons as a part of the
curriculum. 15 ___ 27-32 Stall Management/Yaw Damper (SMYD) - Fault
Isolation
Student Paced Computer Based Training (SPCBT)
16 ___ 27-51 Trailing Edge Flaps System - Fault
All SPCBTs lessons include text and audio. Isolation (No RSEP)
1 ___ 00-00 Introduction to Student Paced CBT 17 ___ 27-51 Flap Slat Electronics Unit (FSEU) - BITE
Operation
6 ___ 22-11 DFCS System - Fault Isolation (Collins FCC,
CRT CDU) 18 ___ 27-62 Speedbrake Control System - Auto
Speedbrake - Fault Isolation
7 ___ 22-23 Stall Management Yaw Damper (SMYD) - BITE
Operation 19 ___ 28-00 Fuel System - Fueling Operations
8 ___ 22-31 Autothrottle System - Fault Isolation 20 ___ 28-41 Fuel Quantity Indicating System - Fault
(Collins FCC, LCD CDU) Isolation
9 ___ 23-11 HF Communication System - Operation (RTP) 21 ___ 29-00 Hydraulic System - Normal Operation
(PFD/ND, RSEP, S138 (10) sw)
10 ___ 23-12 VHF Communication System - Operation (RTP)
22 ___ 29-18 Hydraulic System - Servicing (PFD/ND,
11 ___ 23-31 Passenger Address System - Operation (HS RSEP)
with Numbers)
23 ___ 31-25 Clocks - Operation
12 ___ 23-31 Passenger Address System - Fault Isolation
01-01-00-001.fm
(5342) 24 ___ 31-31 Flight Data Recording System - Fault
Isolation
01-01-00
- 222 -

25 ___ 31-62 Common Display System - EFIS Display 37 ___ 34-46 Ground Proximity Warning System - Fault
Overview (PFD/ND, Basic S/W, VSD) Isolation (Enhanced)
26 ___ 31-62 CDS - Engine Display Overview (Over/Under, 38 ___ 34-61 FMCS Data Installation (ALSIGNL ADL, 20
Basic S/W) Pos Switch, LCD CDU)
27 ___ 31-62 CDS - Display Selection (PFD/ND, Not Cat 39 ___ 34-61 Flight Management System - Fault Isolation
IIIb, Compactable) (Dual FMC, CRT MCDU)
28 ___ 31-62 CDS - Fault Isolation (PFD/ND, LCD CDU) 40 ___ 36-00 Pneumatic System -
Pressurization/Depressurization
29 ___ 31-62 CDS - Ground Tests (PFD/ND, LCD CDU, Enh
GPWS) 41 ___ 38-32 Vacuum Waste Tank - Servicing
30 ___ 32-09 Proximity Switch Electronics Unit (PSEU) - 42 ___ 49-00 Auxiliary Power Unit (APU) - Operation
BITE Operation (PSEU-2)
43 ___ 49-70 Auxiliary Power Unit (APU) - Fault
31 ___ 32-42 Antiskid/Autobrake System - Fault Isolation
Isolation
44 ___ 73-21 Engine Fuel and Control - Fault Isolation
32 ___ 32-42 Antiskid/Autobrake Control Unit (AACU) -
BITE Operation 45 ___ 77-00 Exhaust Gas Temperature (EGT) Exceedances
- Recall and Erase
33 ___ 34-21 ADIRS Data Entry and Alignment Faults (No
GPS, PFD/ND, LCD CDU) 46 ___ 78-36 Thrust Reverser Control System - Fault
Isolation
34 ___ 34-21 Air Data Inertial Reference System - Fault
Isolation (LCD CDU) Instructor Led Computer Based Training (ILCBT)
All ILCBTs include text and generally no audio.
01-01-00-001.fm
36 ___ 34-31 Radio Navigation (PFD/ND) 1 ___ 00-00 Introduction to Instructor Led CBT
01-01-00
- 223 -
2 ___ 00-00 Airplane General (737-800) 15 ___ 23-43 Flight Crew Call System - General
Description (Numeric Keypad)
3 ___ 00-00 Airplane General - Electrical Power Distrib
(Dual Battery & CAB/UTIL & IFE/PASS) 16 ___ 23-51 Audio Control Panel (10-62090-77)
4 ___ 00-00 Airplane General - Avionics Photo Field 17 ___ 24-00 Electrical Power - Functional Description
Trip (Dual Battery & CAB/UTIL & IFE/PASS)
5 ___ 00-24 Airplane General (737-800) 18 ___ 26-10 Engine Fire Detection - Normal Operation
6 ___ 21-50 Air Conditioning Pack - Functional 19 ___ 26-10 Engine Fire Detection - Operational Test
Description (737-800/900)
20 ___ 26-10 Engine Fire Detection - Single Loop
8 ___ 21-60 Air Conditioning - Temperature Control -
Functional Description (737-800/900) 21 ___ 27-11 Aileron System - Operation
9 ___ 22-11 AutoFlight Status Annunciator - Operation 22 ___ 27-31 Elevator Feel - Functional Description
(Basic, CWS and AS Warning) (EFSM, RSEP)
10 ___ 22-11 DFCS System - A/P Engage/Disengage 23 ___ 27-41 Stabilizer and Elevator Systems -
Operation (PFD/ND, Collins FCC, LCD CDU) Functional Description
11 ___ 22-23 Yaw Damper and WTRIS - Engage/Disengage 24 ___ 27-51 TE Flaps and LE Devices - Operation (No
Operation load relief light, RSEP)
12 ___ 22-31 Autothrottle System - Engage/Disengage 25 ___ 27-61 Spoiler Mixer and Ratio Changer -
Operation (PFD/ND, Collins FCC) Functional Description
13 ___ 23-31 Passenger Address System - Functional 26 ___ 27-81 Leading Edge Devices - Functional
Description (PRAM) Description - Hydraulic (RSEP)
01-01-00-001.fm
14 ___ 23-42 Ground Crew Call System - General 27 ___ 28-21 Pressure Refueling System - Functional
Description (ACP Call light bottom, No Latch) Description - Power & Control
01-01-00
- 224 -

28 ___ 28-22 Fuel System - Center Tank Boost Pump - 40 ___ 32-51 Nose Wheel Steering System - Functional
Operation Description
29 ___ 28-22 Fuel System - Engine Fuel Spar Valve - 41 ___ 34-21 Air Data Inertial Reference System - No
Operation Cooling/On DC Warning (GPS)
30 ___ 28-22 Fuel System - Cross Feed Valve - 42 ___ 34-21 Air Data Inertial Reference System - DC
Functional Description Power Operation
31 ___ 29-25 Hydraulic Power Transfer Unit System - 43 ___ 34-31 Instrument Landing System - Antenna
Functional Description (S138 (10) SW) Interface
32 ___ 30-00 Engine Anti-Ice 44 ___ 34-43 Weather Radar System - Power ON/OFF
(COLLINS, Predictive W/S)
33 ___ 31-31 Flight Data Recorder System (ALSGNL)
45 ___ 34-45 TCAS - Self Test Displays (PFD/ND, Split
34 ___ 31-51 Aural Warning System - Operation (SELCAL, Axis F/D)
Cargo Comp Fire Detectors)
46 ___ 34-45 TCAS - Displays
35 ___ 31-51 Aural Warning Unit - Test
47 ___ 34-46 GPWS - Mode Descriptions (PFD/ND, Enh
36 ___ 32-31 Landing Gear Control System - Functional GPWS)
Description (PFD/ND)
48 ___ 34-61 Multifunction Control Display Unit (MCDU)
37 ___ 32-32 MLG Extension and Retraction System - - Controls and Display (MCDU/LCD)
Functional Description
49 ___ 35-10 Flight Crew Oxygen System - General
38 ___ 32-33 NLG Extension and Retraction System - Description & Servicing
Functional Description
50 ___ 36-10 Engine Bleed Air - General Description
01-01-00-001.fm
39 ___ 32-41 Hydraulic Brake System - Functional
Description 51 ___ 36-10 Engine Bleed Air - 9th and 5th Stage
Bleeds
01-01-00
- 225 -
52 ___ 36-10 Engine Bleed Air PreCooler System - 64 ___ 78-34 Thrust Reverser System - Functional
General Description Description - Deploy/Stow Control
53 ___ 36-10 Engine Bleed Air - 450F Thermostat 65 ___ 78-34 Thrust Reverser System - Functional
Description - Deploy/Stow Hydraulic Flow
54 ___ 36-10 Engine Bleed Air - Overtemperature Bleed
Trip Off 66 ___ 79-20 Engine Oil System - General Description
55 ___ 36-11 Engine Bleed Air - Control - Functional 67 ___ 80-00 Engine Starting System - Functional
Description Description (PFD/ND)
56 ___ 38-11 Potable Water System - General Description

& Servicing
57 ___ 49-00 APU Start/Shutdown - Operation
58 ___ 49-40 APU Ignition/Starting System - Functional

Description
59 ___ 73-11 Engine Fuel System - Functional

Description
60 ___ 75-00 Engine Air System - Functional Description
61 ___ 77-11 Engine Tachometer System - Functional

62 ___ 77-21 EGT Indicating System - Functional

01-01-00-001.fm
63 ___ 78-30 Thrust Reverser System - General
Description
01-01-00
- 226 -

01-01-00-001.fm
COMPUTER BASE TRAINING (CBT) - CHECKLIST
01-01-00
- 227 -
COMMON DISPLAY SYSTEM -- INTRODUCTION
31-62-00-001.fm
31-62-00
- 228 -

General arpt - airport
arr - arrival
The common display system (CDS) shows performance, ASA - autoflight status annunciator
navigation, and engine data in many different formats
ASIC - application specific integrated circuit
on 6 display units in the flight compartment.
A/S - airspeed
Abbreviations and Acronyms A/T - autothrottle
ATA - actual time of arrival
AA - autoflight status annunciator ATC - air traffic control
A/C - air conditioning att - attitude
ac - alternating current baro - barometric
ACARS - aircraft communication addressing and BCS - back course
reporting system BITE - built-in test equipment
ACMS - airplane condition monitoring system BLS - bezel light sensor
acq - acquisition brg - bearing
act - active C - celsius
ADF - automatic direction finder CAA - Civil Aviation Authority
ADI - attitude director indication calc - calculate
ADIRU - air data inertial reference unit cap - capture
ADIRS - air data inertial reference system capt - captain
ADL - airborne data loader CAS - computed airspeed
ADR - air data reference CCA - circuit card assembly
A/I - anti-ice CDS - common display system
alt - altitude CDU - control display unit
altn - alternate CG - center of gravity
ANP - actual navigation performance CI - cost index
AOA - angle of attack CIAP - common instrument approach procedure
31-62-00-001.fm
app - approach CL - center lower
APU - auxiliary power unit clb - climb
ARINC - Aeronautical Radio Incorporated clr - clear
31-62-00
- 229 -
clk - clock dsply - display
cmd - command DTG - distance to go
co - company DU - display unit
comp - complete DUDB - display unit database
con - continuous E - east
config - configuration ECS - environmental control system
CP - control panel ECU - electronic control unit
CPU - central processor unit EDFCS - enhanced digital flight control system
CRC - cyclic redundancy check EEC - electronic engine controller
crs - course EFIS - electronic flight instrument system
crz - cruise EGPWS - enhanced ground proximity warning system
ctr - center EGT - exhaust gas temperature
CU - center upper EIS - engine indicating system
DA - drift angle eng - engine
DB - database ETA - estimated time of arrival
DBL - database loader E-W - east-west
dc - direct current F - fahrenheit
de - delete FAA - Federal Aviation Administration
dep - departure FAC - final approach course
des - descent FANS - future air navigation system
dest - destination FCC - flight control computer
DEU - display electronics unit FD - flight director
dev - deviation FDAU - flight data acquisition unit
DFDAU - digital flight data acquisition unit FF - fuel flow
DFCS - digital flight control system flt - flight
dist - distance FU - fuel used
31-62-00-001.fm
DLDR - data loader FMA - flight mode annunciation
DME - distance measuring equipment FMC - flight management computer
DSM - display select module FMCS - flight management computer system
31-62-00
- 230 -

F/O - first officer HPA - hecto pascals
FPA - flight path angle HSI - horizontal situation indication
FPV - flight path vector hyd - hydraulic
FQIS - fuel quantity indicating system IAN - integrated approach navigation
FQPU - fuel quantity processor unit ign - ignition
freq - frequency IGS - instrument guidance system
FSEU - flap slat electronics unit ILS - instrument landing system
ft - feet IM - inner marker
FT - functional test in - inches
fwd - forward inbd - inboard
G - ground inop - inoperative
GA - go-around instr - instrument
GCU - generator control unit I/O - input/output
GG - graphics generator IOC - input output controller
GG CCA - graphics generator circuit card assembly IOP - input/output processor
GLS - GPS landing system IR - inertial reference
GMT - Greenwich mean time IRS - inertial reference system
G/P - glide path isol - isolation
GPS - global positioning system JAA - Joint Aviation Authorities
GPWC - ground proximity warning computer kg - kilograms
GPWS - ground proximity warning system km - kilometer
G/S - glideslope kt - knot
GS - ground speed L - left
hdg - heading lb - pound
HIRF - high intensity radiation field LC - lower center
hrdw - hardware LCD - liquid crystal display
31-62-00-001.fm
H/W - hardware LDA - localizer directional aid
HG - mercury LED - light emitting diode
hld - hold LIB - left inboard
31-62-00
- 231 -
LNAV - lateral navigation NPS - navigation performance scales
LOB - left outboard N-S - north-south
loc - localizer NV - non-volatile
LRU - line replaceable unit norm - normal
LSK - line select key OAT - outside air temperature
mag - magnetic outbd - outboard
MAGVAR - magnetic variation OM - outer marker
maint - maintenance OPC - operational program configuration
MASI - Mach airspeed indicator OPS - operational program software
max - maximum PDL - portable data loader
MCDU - multi-purpose control display unit PFD - primary flight display
MCP - mode control panel pln - plan
MDA - minimum descent altitude pos - position
MFD - multi-function display pri - primary
MHz - megahertz PROM - programmable read-only memory
mins - minimums pth - path
MLS - microwave landing system PWS - predictive windshear system
MM - middle marker QCS - quiet climb system
MMO - Mach, maximum operating QFE - altimeter setting to show altitude above
mtrs - meters reference airfield
N - north QNH - altimeter setting to show altitude above
N1 - engine fan speed mean sea level
N2 - engine core speed qty - quantity
N/A - not applicable R - right
nav - navigation R-CLB - reduced thrust climb
NCD - no computed data R-TO - reduced thrust take off
31-62-00-001.fm
NCP - navigation control panel RA - radio altitude
ND - navigation display RAM - random access memory
nm - nautical miles rcv - receiver
31-62-00
- 232 -

ref - reference TCAS - traffic alert and collision avoidance
RIB - right inboard system
RLS - remote light sensor T/C - top of climb
RNAV - area navigation T/D - top of descent
RNP - required navigation performance T/E - trailing edge
ROB - right outboard terr - terrain
rst - reset TFC - traffic
RW - runway tgt - target
rwy - runway thr - thrust
S - south thr ref - thrust reference
SDF - simplified directional facility TMA - thrust mode annunciation
SDI - source destination identifier TO - takeoff
sel - select TRA - thrust resolver angle
SID - standard instrument departure trk - track
SMYD - stall management yaw damper tru - true
spd - speed UC - upper center
SRAM - scratch random access memory UPD - update
SSEC - static source error correction UTC - universal time (coordinated)
SSM - sign status matrix v - volt
sta - station V1 - takeoff decision speed
STD - standard V2 - engine out safe climb speed
SW - software VANP - vertical actual navigation performance
s/w - software VHF - very high frequency
SWDL - software data loader vib - vibration
TAI - thermal anti-ice vlv - valve
TAS - true airspeed VMO - velocity, maximum operating
31-62-00-001.fm
TAT - total air temperature VNAV - vertical navigation
TBC - The Boeing Company VOR - VHF omnidirectional range
VR - takeoff rotation speed
31-62-00
- 233 -
VRNP - vertical required navigation performance
V/S - vertical speed
VSD - vertical situation display
VSI - vertical speed indicator
VTK - vertical track
W - west
wpt - waypoint
WTAI - wing thermal anti-ice
WXR - weather radar
xfr - transfer
xmtr - transmitter
xtk - crosstrack
Z - zulu
ZFW - zero fuel weight
31-62-00-001.fm
31-62-00
- 234 -

31-62-00-001.fm
COMMON DISPLAY SYSTEM - INTRODUCTION
31-62-00
- 235 -
CDS -- GENERAL DESCRIPTION
31-62-00-002.fm
31-62-00
- 236 -

Purpose - Two remote light sensors (RLSs).
The common display system (CDS) shows this data to the Operation
flight crew:
These are the things that sets the data that shows on
- Attitude the displays units:
- Navigation
- Flight mode - Display unit status
- Engine and systems data. - Display unit location
- Selections made on the control panels and modules.
The CDS also is an interface between some airplane
systems. These are the formats that show on the display units:
External Interfaces - Primary flight display (PFD)

- Navigation display (ND)
The computer for the CDS is the display electronics - Engine display.
unit (DEU). Many avionic and airframe systems have
interfaces with the DEUs. These systems send ARINC 429, Functional Description
analog, and discrete data to the DEUs. The DEUs send
ARINC 429, analog, and discrete data to these systems. Two DEUs collect data from many avionic and airframe
systems. Each DEU sends the data out on two coax
Components cables. A coax coupler at the end of each coax cable
divides the data signal and sends the data to all six
These are the components of the common display system: display units. The two DEUs send data to all six
display units. The DUs have program pins that identify
- Two display select panels the DU position. The DU position sets what data the DU
- One engine display control panel shows on its display. DU status data goes from each DU
- Two EFIS control panels to the DEUs on ARINC 429 data busses.
- Two display source selectors
- Two display electronics units (DEUs) The DEUs also are the interface between some avionic
31-62-00-002.fm
- Four coax couplers and airframe systems. For example, the DEUs receive
- Six display units (DUs) that are the same BITE data from the electronic engine controller (EEC)
- Two brightness control panels and auxiliary power unit (APU). The DEUs send this data
31-62-00
- 237 -
to the flight management computer. The DEUs also send
EEC data to other avionic systems.
31-62-00-002.fm
31-62-00
- 238 -

MAIN PANEL DUs LOWER DU

NORM NORM
OUTBD ENG ENG ND
PFD PRI MAIN PANEL UPPER DU
PRI
BRT
PFD
INBD
MFD OFF
OUTBD DU INBD DU LOWER DU
BRT BRT BRT
DISPLAY
SELECT
PANEL (2) RADIO
MINS
BARO
FPV MTRS
IN
BARO
HPA
BRIGHTNESS CONTROL
STD
RST
PANEL (2)
VOR 1 VOR
MAP
PLN 20 40 80 VOR 2
APP 10 160
OFF CTR 5 TFC 320 OFF
ADF 1 640 ADF 2

WXR STA WPT ARPT DATA POS TERR
EFIS CONTROL PANEL (2)

RLS (2)
N1 SET SPD REF AUTO BRAKE

AUTO AUTO AUTO BRAKE
1 DISARM
BOTH V1
2
2 VR 1 3
DISPLAYS
WT
OFF MAX
FUEL FLOW VREF
SOURCE CONTROL PANEL
RESET
MFD RTO AUTO BOTH BOTH
ANTI SKID ALL ALL
RATE
ENG SYS ON 1 ON 2 ON 1 ON 2
USED ANTI SKID
INOP
NORMAL
DU (6)
ENGINE DISPLAY DISPLAY SOURCE
CONTROL PANEL SELECTORS
COAXIAL
COUPLER (4)
ARINC 429
OUTPUT BUSES
31-62-00-002.fm
AIRPLANE SYSTEMS AIRPLANE SYSTEMS
DISCRETES
DISPLAY ELECTRONICS UNIT (2)

CDS - GENERAL DESCRIPTION
31-62-00
- 239 -
CDS -- FLIGHT COMPARTMENT COMPONENT LOCATION - 1
Component location
These are the CDS components in the flight compartment:
- Left outboard DU
- Left inboard DU
- Right outboard DU
- Right inboard DU
- Upper center DU
- Lower center DU
- Captain EFIS control panel
- First officer EFIS control panel
- Captain display select panel
- First officer display select panel
- Engine display control panel
- Left remote light sensor
- Right remote light sensor
- Captain brightness controls
- First officer brightness controls
- Display source selectors.
The flight management computer system control display

units (CDU) show CDS BITE data.
31-62-00-003.fm
31-62-00
- 240 -

P5 FORWARD OVERHEAD PANEL

- DISPLAY SOURCE SELECTORS
P2 CENTER INSTRUMENT PANEL

P7 GLARESHIELD PANEL - ENGINE DISPLAY CONTROL PANEL
- EFIS CONTROL PANELS - UPPER CENTER DU
P1 CAPT INSTRUMENT PANEL P3 F/O INSTRUMENT PANEL
- CAPT DISPLAY SELECT PANEL - F/O DISPLAY SELECT PANEL
- LEFT INBOARD DU - RIGHT INBOARD DU
- LEFT OUTBOARD DU - RIGHT OUTBOARD DU
- CAPT BRIGHTNESS - F/O BRIGHTNESS CONTROLS
CONTROLS
31-62-00-003.fm
P9 FORWARD ELECTRONICS PANEL
- LOWER CENTER DU
- RIGHT CDU
- LEFT CDU
CDS - FLIGHT COMPARTMENT COMPONENT LOCATION - 1
31-62-00
- 241 -
Coax Couplers
There are four coax couplers. Coax couplers 1 and 3 are

to the right of the captain rudder pedals. Coax
couplers 2 and 4 are to the left of the first officer
rudder pedals.
To get access to the coax couplers, remove the access

panel on the inboard side of the rudder pedals and
remove the flight management computer (FMC) control
display unit (CDU). If necessary, remove the pilot
seat. You can now disconnect the coaxial connectors and
remove the coupler bracket. The coax couplers are on
the bracket.
The coaxial connectors have a spring loaded sleeve that

locks the connector to the coupler. You pull the sleeve
back to attach or remove the connector to the coupler.
31-62-00-004.fm
31-62-00
- 242 -

CAPT RIGHT
RUDDER PEDAL (REF)
COAX COUPLERS
1 AND 3
ACCESS PANEL
REMOVED (REF)
COUPLER INSTALLATION
WIRE ACCESS PANEL REMOVED
FWD
ACCESS PANEL
REMOVED (REF)
FWD
COUPLER REMOVAL AND

COUPLER BRACKET REMOVAL
31-62-00-004.fm
FWD COUPLER WIRES
(LEFT SIDE SHOWN)
31-62-00
- 243 -
Remote Light Sensors
The remote light sensors are on the forward part of the

glareshield. The sensors face forward.
31-62-00-005.fm
31-62-00
- 244 -

REMOTE LIGHT SENSORS
31-62-00-005.fm GLARESHIELD
31-62-00
- 245 -
CDS -- EE COMPARTMENT COMPONENT LOCATION
EE Compartment
The display electronics units (DEUs) are on the E3-1

shelf.
31-62-00-006.fm
31-62-00
- 246 -

E3-1
- DEU 2
- DEU 1
31-62-00-006.fm
EE COMPARTMENT
(LOOKING AFT)
CDS - EE COMPARTMENT COMPONENT LOCATION
31-62-00
- 247 -
CDS -- POWER INTERFACES
Power faults in nonvolatile memory and to do an orderly shut
down of the processor. The DEU can use the hold up
The 28v dc standby bus supplies power to these voltage for up to 10 seconds.
components:
- Left outboard display unit

- Left inboard display unit
- Upper center display unit
- Captain EFIS control panel
- Display electronics unit (DEU) 1.
The 28v dc bus 2 supplies power to these components:
- Right outboard display unit

- Right inboard display unit
- Lower center display unit
- First Officer EFIS control panel
- DEU 2.
The 28v dc hot battery bus also supplies power to the

DEU 1 and DEU 2. This power is the hold up voltage. The
DEU uses the hold up voltage to keep operation during
power transients. The DEU can use the hold up voltage
for a loss of the primary power of up to 1 second. If
there is a loss of primary power for more than 1
second, the DEU does a shut down. After a shut down, it
takes 90 seconds to start the DEU operation.
The DEU also uses the hold up voltage to do a shut down

of the DEU processor. The DEU can have faults in random
31-62-00-100.fm
access memory or be in execution of a command when
there is a loss of primary power. When a power loss
occurs, the DEU uses the hold up voltage to store
31-62-00
- 248 -

28V DC 28V DC
STANDBY BUS DC BUS 2
DISPLAY CAPT DISPLAY F/O
OUTBD OUTBD
L OUTBOARD DU R OUTBOARD DU
28V DC 28V DC
STANDBY BUS DC BUS 2
DISPLAY F/O
DISPLAY CAPT INBD
INBD R INBOARD DU
L INBOARD DU
28V DC
28V DC DC BUS 2
STANDBY BUS DISPLAY CTR
DISPLAY CTR LWR
UPR LOWER CENTER DU
UPPER CENTER DU
28V DC
DC BUS 2
28V DC DISPLAY
STANDBY BUS F/O EFIS
CONT PNL F/O EFIS
DISPLAY CONTROL PANEL
CAPT EFIS 28V DC
CONT PNL CAPT EFIS DC BUS 2
CONTROL PANEL
DISPLAY
DEU 2 PRI
28V DC
28V DC HOT BAT
STANDBY BUS DISPLAY
DISPLAY DEU 2
DEU 2 HLDUP
DEU 1 PRI
DEU 1 28V DC
HOT BAT
31-62-00-100.fm
DISPLAY
DEU 1 HLDUP
P18-2 CIRCUIT BREAKER PANEL P6-1 CIRCUIT BREAKER PANEL
CDS - POWER INTERFACES
31-62-00
- 249 -
CDS -- PROGRAM PINS INTERFACE
Program Pins - Left outboard (LOB)
- Left inboard (LIB)
The display electronics units (DEU) and the display - Upper center (UC)
units (DU) have hardware program pins. - Lower center (LC)
- Right inboard (RIB)
DEU Program Pins - Right outboard (ROB).
These are the 3 types of program pins for the DEU:
- DEU position
- Airframe type
- Parity.
DEU position identifies the DEU as the left, right, or

center unit. The 737 airplane only uses 2 DEUs. The
DEUs are left or right.
Airframe type identifies the airplane type with the

DEU.
The parity program pin identifies odd parity for the

ARINC 429 data words. Odd parity identifies that each
ARINC 429 data word has an odd number of data bits set
to 1. A data word that does not have odd parity is not
valid. For more information about parity, refer to
ARINC specification 429.
DU Program Pins
Each DU has different program pins connected to ground.
31-62-00-101.002
The program pins identify the DU location. These are
the DU locations:
31-62-00
- 250 -

DEU LEFT DEU LEFT

DEU CTR DEU CTR
DEU RIGHT DEU RIGHT
737 737
747 747
757 757
767 767
PARITY (ODD) PARITY (ODD)
DEU 1 DEU 2
A A A A A
B B B B B
C C C C C
D D D D D
E E E E E
LOB DU LIB DU UC DU RIB DU ROB DU
A
B
C
31-62-00-101.002
D
E
LC DU
CDS - PROGRAM PINS INTERFACE
31-62-00
- 251 -
CDS -- DISPLAY ELECTRONICS UNIT INTERFACES
Display Electronics Unit Outputs
Each display electronics unit (DEU) has two graphics

generator circuit card assemblies (GG CCA). Each GG CCA
does a format of the display data and then transmits it
to one of four coax couplers. Each GG CCA can make
three formats so it can supply three displays at the
same time.
The coax coupler is a one-to-six splitter. The six

outputs of each coax coupler connect to each of the six
display units (DU). This gives each DU an input from
each GG CCA. The DUs monitor each input from the GG
CCAs but only show the data from one at a time.
Each DU has an address set by program pins to show DU

location. When a DU receives image data from a DEU with
an address that relates to the DU program pin
discretes, the DU shows that image data (format) from
the DEU GG CCA.
ARINC 429 Status Bus
Each DU sends configuration and status data back to the

DEUs on ARINC 429 status buses. This ARINC 429 status
bus has this data:
- DU health data
- DU installation program pin data
- Remote light sensor (RLS) data
31-62-00-102.002
- Bezel light sensor (BLS) data
- Coax connection data.
31-62-00
- 252 -

FROM L
OUTBD DU ARINC TO DEU 1
COAX OUTPUT 1 429
FROM L GRAPHICS STATUS TO DEU 2
INBD DU GENERATOR A
L OUTBOARD DU
FROM COAX COUPLER 1
UPR C DU ARINC 429 ARINC TO DEU 1
STATUS BUS 429
FROM STATUS TO DEU 2
LWR C DU
COAX OUTPUT 2 L INBOARD DU
FROM R
INBD DU GRAPHICS
GENERATOR B ARINC TO DEU 1
FROM R 429
OUTBD DU COAX COUPLER 2 STATUS TO DEU 2
DEU 1 UPPER C DU
FROM L ARINC TO DEU 1

OUTBD DU 429
STATUS TO DEU 2
COAX OUTPUT 2
FROM L GRAPHICS
INBD DU GENERATOR B LOWER C DU
COAX COUPLER 3 ARINC
FROM TO DEU 1
UPR C DU ARINC 429 429
STATUS TO DEU 2
STATUS BUS
FROM
LWR C DU R INBOARD DU
COAX OUTPUT 1
FROM R GRAPHICS
GENERATOR A ARINC TO DEU 1
INBD DU 429
31-62-00-102.002
COAX COUPLER 4 STATUS TO DEU 2
FROM R
OUTBD DU
R OUTBOARD DU
DEU 2
CDS - DISPLAY ELECTRONICS UNIT INTERFACES
31-62-00
- 253 -
CDS -- BRIGHTNESS INTERFACES
31-62-00-122.002
31-62-00
- 254 -

General The remote light sensors also send an output to the
DFCS mode control panel (MCP). The MCP uses this data
The DUs get brightness control from the DEUs. These are for its own brightness control function.
the brightness inputs to the DEUs:
The power for the RLS is +/- 15v dc from the onside
- Brightness control panel outboard DU. The DUs also send bezel light sensor
- Remote light sensors values to the DEUs on this ARINC 429 bus.
- Bezel light sensors.
The DEUs divide the DUs into these pairs for the
Manual Brightness Control brightness control function:
The flight crew use the brightness controls to control - Left outboard and inboard DUs
the brightness of each display unit (DU). The left and - Upper and lower center DUs
right inboard DUs and the lower center DU also have a - Right outboard and inboard DUs.
brightness control for the weather radar or terrain
display from the ground proximity warning system The DEUs use the brightest value of the remote light
display. sensor inputs and the brightest value from the bezel
light sensor pairs to set the brightness of the DU
Each DU receives a three-wire input from a dedicated pairs.
control potentiometer in the brightness control panel.
These brightness control inputs change to a digital When the remote or bezel light sensors find a fast
signal in the DUs and go to the DEUs on the ARINC 429 change to bright light in the flight compartment, the
status bus so that the DEUs can set the manual DEUs quickly increase the DU brightness. If the ambient
brightness for each DU separately. light decreases, the DEUs decrease the DU brightness
slowly. This is similar to the way the human eye
Automatic Brightness Control operates.
The automatic brightness control function uses inputs NOTE: When the DUs are very bright, the manual
from the remote light sensors (RLS) on the glareshield brightness controls do not affect the displays or
and the bezel light sensors (BLS) on each DU. have a limited effect.
31-62-00-122.002
The remote light sensors send outputs to the outboard
DUs and then on the ARINC 429 status bus to the DEUs.
31-62-00
- 255 -
The DEUs monitor the remote light sensors and store

faults in BITE.
31-62-00-122.002
31-62-00
- 256 -

3
2 +/-15VDC
BRIGHTNESS 6
OVERALL BLS
L RLS
L OUTBOARD DU 6 COAXIAL
3 COUPLER 1
OUTBD DU
OVERALL 6
3
INBD DU WXR BLS
COAXIAL
3 L INBOARD DU COUPLER 2
INBD DU
DEU 1
3
UPPER DU
3 OVERALL
LOWER DU BLS
3 UPPER C DU
LOWER DU
DFCS MCP CAPT BRIGHTNESS OVERALL

CONTROL PANEL
WXR BLS
3
INBD DU LOWER C DU
3
INBD DU
3 OVERALL 6
OUTBD DU
WXR BLS
F/O BRIGHTNESS 6 COAXIAL
CONTROL PANEL R INBOARD DU COUPLER 3
OVERALL 6
2
31-62-00-122.002
BRIGHTNESS
3 COAXIAL
+/-15VDC BLS COUPLER 4
R RLS R OUTBOARD DU DEU 2
CDS - BRIGHTNESS INTERFACES
31-62-00
- 257 -
CDS -- CONTROLS INTERFACES
Control Panels The EFIS control panel busses have this general data:
These are the six control panels: - Minimums data

- FPV and MTRS switch status
- Captain's display select panel - Baro correction data
- First officer's display select panel - VOR 1/ADF 1 switch status
- Engine display control panel - Mode selection data
- Captain's EFIS control panel - Selected range data
- First officer's EFIS control panel - TFC switch status
- Instrument switching module. - VOR 2/ADF 2 switch status
- Weather on/off switch status
Display Select Panels - Map switches status
- Terrain on/off switch status
The display select panels send 8 ground discretes to - Display select panel switch data
each EFIS control panel. These discretes show the - Engine display control panel switch data.
positions of the main panel DU selector switch and the
lower DU selector switch. Instrument Switching Module
Engine Display Control Panel These are two switches in this panel:
The engine display control panel sends 16 ground - Display source select switch
discretes to each EFIS control panel. These discretes - EFIS control panel select switch.
show the N1 SET, SPD REF, fuel used/reset switch and
the ENG/SYSTEM switch selection status. The displays source select switch controls which DEU is
supplying data to the DUs. It sends 3 ground discretes
EFIS Control Panels to each DEU to show switch position.
The EFIS control panels have inputs from the display The EFIS control panel select switch determines which
select panels and the engine display control panel. The EFIS control panel is controlling the left and right
EFIS control panels convert these ground discretes to PFD/ND displays. It sends 2 ground discretes to each
31-62-00-103.fm
an ARINC 429 format. This discrete data and the EFIS DEU to show switch position.
control panel selection data is then sent to the
display electronic units (DEU).
31-62-00
- 258 -

8
EFCP BUS
DU SELECT
8
CAPT DISPLAY
SELECT PANEL
CAPT EFIS
CONTROL PANEL DEU 1
SPEED REF SLEW
SPEED REF BUGS 1/AUTO/2 3

16
N1 SET SLEW DISPLAY SOURCE
SELECTOR
N1 SET BUG
16 1/NORM/2 2
FUEL USED/RESET
CONTROL PANEL
ENGINE/SYSTEM SELECT SWITCH
ENGINE DISPLAY
CONTROL PANEL
8
DU SELECT
8
EFCP BUS
31-62-00-103.fm
F/O DISPLAY F/O EFIS DEU 2
SELECT PANEL CONTROL PANEL
CDS - CONTROLS INTERFACES
31-62-00
- 259 -
CDS -- CROSS CHANNEL INTERFACES
31-62-00-104.fm
31-62-00
- 260 -

Cross Talk Bus - Inertial data source selected
- Comparator enable
Each display electronic unit (DEU) sends data on two - ILS selected
ARINC 429 high speed cross talk buses to the other DEU. - Flight path management enable
The DEUs use two buses because there is too much data - Map source selected
to update on one bus. Usually, the two buses have - WXR source selected
different data, but some data can be transmitted on - VOR selected
both buses. - FMC selected
- MCDU selected
The cross talk buses have this data: - Navigation source
- Air/ground status.
- DEU hardware part number
- OPS software part number The DEU discrete word 1 has this data:
- OPC software part number
- Brake temperatures 1 - 4 - Comparator fault
- N1 bug drive data (engine 1 and 2) - Roll comparator alert
- SWDL status - Pitch comparator alert.
- CDS intra system maintenance data (BITE)
- DEU analog discrete status The DEU maintenance word has this data:
- DEU discrete 1
- DEU maintenance word - IOP I
- CP and DU maintenance word - IOP A
- Sensor status maintenance word - Main processor 2
- Mode discrete word 1 - Program pin parity
- Display data - NV memory
- DEU output bus data. - RAM memeory
- I/O processor 1 - 3
The DEU analog discrete status word has this data: - Digital output
- Controller
- Air data source selected - Display sequencer
31-62-00-104.fm
- SMYD selected - Display drive
- DME selected - PROM memeory
- Mag/True status - Main processor 1
31-62-00
- 261 -
- Overtemperature. - RIB DU fault
- LIB DU fault
The CP and DU maintenance word has this data: - L-EFIS CP fault
- R-EFIS CP fault
- TCAS RA health - CU DU fault
- TCAS system status. - CL DU fault.
The sensor status maintenance word has this data: The DEUs compare critical input signals that are
received by both DEUs on the same ARINC 429 input bus.
- WXR fault The onside values are compared with the offside values.
- ILS fault If the critical comparison data is not the same, CDS
- RA fault shows CDS FAULT on the CDS displays.
- DME fault
- VOR fault This is the critical comparison data:
- Air data fault
- Inertial reference data fault - Engine fan speed (N1)
- A/T fault - Engine core speed (N2)
- FMC fault - Engine exhaust gas temperature (EGT)
- FCC fault. - FMC bus 08 data
- FMC bus 09 data.
The modes discrete word 1 has this data:
NOTE: This comparison test is done when the SSM of the
- L-WXR data fault data is normal or test. The test is not done if
- R-WXR data fault the SSM is invalid or NCD.
- L-ILS data fault
- R-ILS data fault
- LOB DU fault
- ROB DU fault
- L-MCDU fault
- R-MCDU fault
31-62-00-104.fm
- L-SMYD fault
- R-SMYD fault
- DEU fault
31-62-00
- 262 -

X-TALK CH 2
X-TALK CH 1
DEU 1
X-TALK CH 1
X-TALK CH 2
DEU 2
31-62-00-104.fm
CDS - CROSS CHANNEL INTERFACES
31-62-00
- 263 -
CDS -- EXTERNAL INTERFACE INTRODUCTION
31-62-00-105.fm
31-62-00
- 264 -

General - Stabilizer position
- Control column position
The display electronic units (DEU) receive ARINC 429 - Control wheel position
digital data and analog discretes from various airplane - Rudder pedal position
systems. The DEUs use this data to make the displays - Left and right elevator position
for the display units (DU). - Left and right aileron position
- Speed brake handle position
The DEUs also send data to other airplane systems. Each - Rudder position
DEU sends ARINC 429 data and analog discretes. These - Main engine indication data
are the ARINC 429 output buses: - Main engine internal data
- Main landing gear brake temperatures
- CDS general purpose bus - Main hydraulic system pressures
- Control panel feedthru buses (2) - Main hydraulic system quantities
- Data loader bus - Pitch attitude
- DEU - FMC bus - Roll attitude
- ACARS datalink bus - Heading data
- EEC/APU bus. - Groundspeed
- Radio altitude
CDS General Purpose (GP) Bus - Radio minimums data
- Minimum decision altitude data
The DEUs send data on the GP bus to these airplane - Localizer and glideslope deviation
systems: - Main fuel tank quantities
- Aux. fuel quantity
- Flight control computer (FCC) A and B - Main engine EEC status words
- Stall management yaw damper (SMYD) 1 and 2 - DEU status words 1 and 2
- Flight data acquisition unit (FDAU). - CDS EFIS CP modes 1 and 2 discrete words
- Display discrete words 1 and 2
The GP bus also sends data to the CDS test connector in - Captain EFIS CP discrete word 1 and 2
the E4 rack in the EE compartment. This is used for - F/Os EFIS CP discrete word 1 and 2
functional test. - CDS discrete words
31-62-00-105.fm
- CDS DEU discrete word 3.
The GP bus has this general data:
31-62-00
- 265 -
The main engine EEC status words have this general - Center display format
data: - Baro minimums aural enabled
- VOR left selected
- EEC data - VOR right selected
- Manufacturer and option data - ADF left selected
- Thrust rating/airplane model data - ADF right selected
- Exceedance data - Heading up map format
- Internal protection status - Airports selected
- TRA data - Route data selected
- Thrust reverser status data - Waypoints selected
- Engine air systems status data - Navaid data selected
- ADIRU input data status. - Position data selected
- PFD/ND display format
The DEU status word 1 has this data: - Plan mode selected
- Approach mode selected
- Thrust reverser position data - VOR mode selected
- Engine fault dispatch level data - Map mode selected.
- Engine starter enable data
- EEC backup power control data The CDS EFIS CP modes 2 discrete word has this data:
- Engine running status
- Generator enable data. - Baro minimums selected
- RA health
The DEU status word 2 has this data: - GPWC V1 callout enabled
- FPV selected
- Main engine N1 exceedance data - Meters selected
- Main engine N2 exceedance data - STD selected
- Main engine EGT exceedance data - HPA selected
- Main engine oil system caution/warning data - HG selected
- Fuel filter impending bypass data. - Terrain selected
- WXR selected.
31-62-00-105.fm
The CDS EFIS CP modes 1 discrete word has this data:
The displays discrete word 1 has this data:
- TFC selected
31-62-00
- 266 -

- LOB display unit status data - DSM CAPT NORM
- LIB display unit status data - DSM CAPT OUTBD PFD
- CU display unit status data
- CL display unit status data The captains EFIS CP discrete word 2 has this data:
- RIB display unit status data
- ROB display unit status data. - Systems page
- DSM F/O LOWER ND
The displays discrete word 2 has this data: - DSM F/O LOWER NORM
- DSM F/O LOWER ENG
- Fuel configuration alert status - DSM F/O INBD PFD
- Fuel imbalance alert status - DSM F/O INBD ENG
- Fuel low quantity alert status - DSM F/O INBD MFD
- Mag/true status - DSM F/O NORM
- Autothrottle limit message status - DSM F/O OUTBD PFD
- Engine fail message status
- Start valve open message status The F/O EFIS CP discrete word 1 has this data:
- Low oil pressure message status
- Oil filter bypass message status - Fuel used
- Display source message status - Fuel used reset
- CDS maint message status - Secondary engine
- CDS fault message status. - DSM CAPT LOWER ND
- DSM CAPT LOWER NORM
The captains EFIS CP discrete word 1 has this data: - DSM CAPT LOWER ENG
- DSM CAPT INBD PFD
- Fuel used - DSM CAPT INBD ENG
- Fuel used reset - DSM CAPT INBD MFD
- Secondary engine - DSM CAPT NORM
- DSM CAPT LOWER ND - DSM CAPT OUTBD PFD
- DSM CAPT LOWER ENG The F/O EFIS CP discrete word 2 has this data:
31-62-00-105.fm
- DSM CAPT INBD PFD
- DSM CAPT INBD ENG - Systems page
- DSM CAPT INBD MFD - DSM F/O LOWER ND
31-62-00
- 267 -
- DSM F/O LOWER NORM - ECS pack flow switch positions
- DSM F/O LOWER ENG - ECS pack switch positions
- DSM F/O INBD PFD - Engine bleed switch positions
- DSM F/O INBD ENG - T/E flap position (>13)
- DSM F/O INBD MFD - Air/ground system 2 status.
- DSM F/O NORM
- DSM F/O OUTBD PFD Control Panel Feedthru Bus
The CDS discrete words have this general data: The DEUs send data on two CP Feedthru buses to these
airplane systems:
- DEU source select status
- EFIS CP source select status - Air data inertial reference units (ADIRUs)
- Fuel pump low pressure data - Ground proximity warning computer (GPWC)
- Fuel cutoff switch position status - Weather radar (WXR) transceiver.
- Engine ignition switch status
- PWS caution/warning/fail status Two buses are used to isolate the barometric correction
- IRS source select status data that goes to the individual air data inertial
- Navigation source select status reference units.
- FMC source select status
- Fire switch status The CP Feedthru buses have this data:
- TAI valve status
- Engine alternate mode select status - V speeds (V1, Vr, and Vref)
- Engine start switch status - Selected speed bug
- Engine bleed air status - Selected gross weight
- ECS status - Set landing altitude
- ILS/VOR tune status - Barometric correction
- Air/ground status. - Selected range
- Selected baro minimums
The CDS DEU discrete word 3 has this data: - Selected radio minimums
- CDS EFIS CP modes 1 discrete word
31-62-00-105.fm
- ECS isolation valve position - CDS EFIS CP modes 2 discrete word
- WTAI switch position - Ground proximity discrete word 2
- Engine cowl antice switch positions - Captain EFIS CP discrete word 2.
31-62-00
- 268 -

The CDS EFIS CP modes 1 discrete word has this data: The GPWC discrete word 2 has this data:
- TFC selected - Terrain unavailable (position)

- Center display format - Terrain status fail
- Baro minimums aural enabled - Terrain caution
- VOR left selected - Terrain warning
- VOR right selected - Windshear caution
- ADF left selected - Windshear warning
- ADF right selected - Ground proximity warning.
- Heading up map format
- Airports selected The EFIS CP discrete word 2 has this data:
- Route data selected
- Waypoints selected - Systems page
- Navaid data selected - DSM F/O LOWER ND
- Position data selected - DSM F/O LOWER NORM
- PFD/ND display format - DSM F/O lower ENG
- Plan mode selected - DSM F/O INBD PFD
- Approach mode selected - DSM F/O INBD ENG
- VOR mode selected - DSM F/O INBD MFD
- Map mode selected. - DSM F/O NORM
- DSM F/O OUTBD PFD.
Data Loader Bus
- Baro minimums selected
- RA health The DEUs send CDS BITE fault history data on the data
- GPWC V1 callout enable loader bus.
- FPV selected
- Meters selected DEU-FMC Bus
- STD selected
- HPA selected The DEUs send this data to the flight management
31-62-00-105.fm
- HG selected computer system (FMCS) on the DEU-FMC bus:
- Terrain selected
- WXR selected. - CDS EFIS CP modes 1 discrete word
31-62-00
- 269 -
- CDS EFIS CP modes 2 discrete word - STD selected
- TCAS RA status - HPA selected
- TCAS system status - HG selected
- BITE response data. - Terrain selected
- WXR selected.
The FMCS uses this data:
- TFC selected
- Center display format - CDS EFIS CP 1 discrete word data
- Baro minimums aural enable - CDS EFIS CP 2 discrete word data
- VOR left selected - BITE response data.
- VOR right selected
- ADF left selected The BITE response data is for these LRUs:
- ADF right selected
- Heading up map format - DEUs
- Airports selected - EECs
- Route data selected - APU.
- Waypoints selected
- Navaid data selected EEC/APU Bus
- Position data selected
- PFD/ND display format The DEUs send data to the main engine electronic engine
- Plan mode selected control (EEC) and APU electronic control unit (ECU) on
- Approach mode selected the EEC/APU bus. Only DEU 1 sends data to the APU ECU.
- VOR mode selected
- Map mode selected. The EEC/APU bus has this data:
The CDS EFIS CP modes 2 discrete word has this data: - Flight number
- Baro corrected altitude
- Baro minimums selected - Mach number
- RA health - Total air temperature
31-62-00-105.fm
- GPWC V1 callout enable - Total pressure
- FPV selected - Static pressure
- Meters selected - Time/date
31-62-00
- 270 -

- Target N1 - ECS pack status
- ADR discrete word - ECS pack flow status
- CDS DEU discrete word 1 - Antice status
- CDS DEU discrete word 2 - Engine bleed switch status
- CDS DEU discrete word 3 - Flap position data
- BITE test word. - Air/ground system status.
The ADR discrete word has this data: Engine EEC Bus
- Angle of attack data The DEUs send EEC data on the engine EEC buses. The
- SSEC data DEUs send all the labels received from the four EEC
- VMO/MMO data buses to the main engine test connectors in the EE
- Overspeed warning status compartment. EEC channel A data comes from DEU 1 and
- Antice system status EEC channel B data comes from DEU 2.
- ADR fail status.
The engine EEC bus has this general data:
The CDS DEU discrete word 1 has this data:
- EEC data
- Engine running status - Manufacturer and configuration data
- Engine start valve status - Thrust rating/airplane model data
- Main landing gear position status - Exceedance data
- Flaps position data. - Internal protection status
- Engine internal sensing data
The CDS DEU discrete word 2 has this data: - Fuel system status
- Oil system status
- Engine alternate mode select status - Engine air systems status data
- Engine start lever position status - Maintenance data
- Engine ignition switch status - TRA data
- Engine start switch position status. - Thrust reverser status data
- ADIRU input data status.
31-62-00-105.fm
- ECS isolation valve status
31-62-00
- 271 -
ACARS Datalink Bus
The DEUs send data on the ACARS datalink bus to the

ACARS system. This is a customer configured system.
Analog Discrete Outputs
These are the discrete outputs from the DEUs:
- TCAS display status to the TCAS computer

- Weather radar (WXR) on/off signal to the WXR
control panel
- Generator control unit (GCU) enable discrete
- Fuel filter bypass annunciator discretes to the
fuel system panel
- BITE power up discrete to the APU ECU
- Engine start switch hold discretes to the engine
start switches
- Engine control annunciator discretes to the engine
control module
- Discretes to the engine alternate (ALT) power
(PWR) relays
- Discretes to the engine running relays when the
engine is running or the start levers are in idle
for longer than 5 minutes.
31-62-00-105.fm
31-62-00
- 272 -

FLIGHT CONTROL COMPUTERS A, B

FLIGHT DATA ACQUISITION UNIT
GENERAL PURPOSE BUS STALL MANAGEMENT YAW DAMPER 1, 2
CDS TEST CONNECTOR (E4 RACK)
AIR DATA INERTIAL REFERENCE UNIT 1

CP FEEDTHRU BUS 1 GROUND PROXIMITY WARNING COMPUTER
WEATHER RADAR TRANSCEIVER
AIRPLANE SYSTEMS
NAVIGATION SYSTEMS CP FEEDTHRU BUS 2 AIR DATA INERTIAL REFERENCE UNIT 2
INDICATING AND RECORDING SYSTEMS
AUTOPILOT SYSTEMS DATA LOADER BUS DATA LOADER CONTROL PANEL
FLIGHT CONTROLS SYSTEMS
HYDRAULIC SYSTEMS DEU-FMC BUS FLIGHT MANAGEMENT COMPUTER SYSTEM
LANDING GEAR SYSTEMS
AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEMS ELECTRONIC ENGINE CONTROLLER 1, 2
EEC/APU BUS APU ELECTRONIC CONTROL UNIT (DEU 1 ONLY)
PNEUMATIC SYSTEMS
FUEL SYSTEMS
ENGINE 1 EEC BUS
ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS MAIN ENGINE TEST CONNECTORS
ICE AND RAIN PROTECTION SYSTEM ENGINE 2 EEC BUS
ENGINE SYSTEMS
ACARS DATALINK BUS ACARS MANAGEMENT UNIT
APU SYSTEMS
COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS
TCAS COMPUTER
WXR CONTROL PANEL
GENERATOR CONTROL UNIT
FUEL SYSTEM MODULE
DISCRETES APU ECU
ENGINE START SWITCH
ENGINE MODULE
31-62-00-105.fm
ENGINE ALT PWR RELAYS
ENGINE RUNNING RELAYS
DEU (2)
CDS - EXTERNAL INTERFACE INTRODUCTION
31-62-00
- 273 -
CDS -- NAVIGATION INTERFACES - 1
31-62-00-106.fm
31-62-00
- 274 -

Air Data Inertial Reference Unit - Magnetic track angle
- True track angle
The air data inertial reference units (ADIRUs) send - Magnetic heading
data to and receive data from the display electronic - True heading
units (DEU) on ARINC 429 buses. - Present position
- Groundspeed
The ADIRUs send this air data to the DEUs: - Wind speed and direction
- Drift angle
- Uncorrected altitude - Flight path angle
- Baro corrected altitude - Flight path acceleration
- Mach number - Pitch angle
- Computed airspeed - Roll angle
- VMO/MMO - Body pitch rate
- True airspeed - Body roll rate
- Total air temperature - Body yaw rate
- Indicated angle of attack (AOA) - Body longitudinal acceleration
- Total pressure - Body lateral acceleration
- Static pressure - Track angle rate
- ADR discrete word 1. - Pitch attitude rate
- Roll attitude rate
The ADR discrete word 1 has this data: - Inertial altitude
- Along track horizontal acceleration
- AOA fail warning - Cross track horizontal acceleration
- Overspeed warning - Vertical acceleration
- Primary AOA heat - Inertial vertical speed
- Secondary AOA heat - N-S velocity
- TAT heat - E-W velocity.
- Pitot static heat
- Air data system fault. The DEUs use this data for the CDS display function and
also send it to other user systems in the airplane.
31-62-00-106.fm
The ADIRUs send this inertial reference data to the
DEUs: The DEUs send data to the ADIRUs on the CP Feedthru
busses. The ADIRUs only use barometric correction from
31-62-00
- 275 -
these buses. The left ADIRU uses the barometric
correction set on the captain EFIS control panel and
the right ADIRU uses the barometric correction set on
the first officer EFIS control panel.
Two CP feedthru buses are used to isolate the

barometric correction data that goes to the ADIRUs.
Instrument Switching Module
The instrument switching module has a three-position

switch for the IRS source select function. The switch
positions are:
- BOTH ON L
- NORMAL
- BOTH ON R.
The instrument switching module sends ground discretes

to the DEUs to show data selection for the captain and
F/O displays.
In the NORMAL position, the captain displays show

inertial reference (IR) data from the L ADIRU and the
F/O displays show IR data from the R ADIRU.
When BOTH ON L or BOTH ON R is selected, the captain and

the F/O displays show IR data from the same source.
31-62-00-106.fm
31-62-00
- 276 -

INPUTS OUTPUTS
IR 1
CONTROL PANEL
ADR 2 FEEDTHRU BUS 1
IR 3
ADR 4
CONTROL PANEL
FEEDTHRU BUS 2
L ADIRU BOTH ON L IRS-L SELECT L ADIRU

IRS-R SELECT
NORMAL DEU 1
IRS-L SELECT
BOTH ON R IRS-R SELECT
INST SWITCHING CONTROL PANEL
MODULE FEEDTHRU BUS 2
IR 3
ADR 4
IR 1
CONTROL PANEL
FEEDTHRU BUS 1
31-62-00-106.fm
ADR 2
R ADIRU DEU 2 R ADIRU
CDS - NAVIGATION INTERFACES - 1
31-62-00
- 277 -
31-62-00-107.fm
31-62-00
- 278 -

Weather Radar Transceiver Weather Radar Control Panel
The DEUs send range data to the weather radar When the weather radar is selected on the EFIS control
transceiver on the ARINC 429 CP feedthru buses. panel and a correct display mode is selected, the DEUs
send an analog discrete to the weather radar control
The weather radar transceiver sends this data to the panel. The weather radar control panel then sends the
DEUs through the terrain/weather relays on two ARINC discrete to the weather radar transceiver. This ground
453 buses: discrete turns the weather radar transceiver on.
- Reflectivity data Ground Proximity Warning Computer

- Scan angle
- Range data The DEUs send data to the GPWC on ARINC 429 CP feedthru
- Gain status buses.
- Antenna tilt
- Operating mode The GPWC uses this data from the CP feedthru bus:
- Transceiver fault
- Control panel fault - Range data
- Attitude input fault - CDS EFIS CP modes 1 discrete word
- Gain calibration fault - CDS EFIS CP modes 2 discrete word
- Display fault - Selected baro minimums data
- Cooling fault - Selected radio minimums data.
- Antenna stabilization limits
- Alert data. The CDS EFIS CP modes 1 discrete word has this data:
The weather radar transceiver also sends three analog - TFC selected
discretes to the DEUs. These ground discretes show - Center display format
these warnings on the DUs: - Baro minimums aural enable
- VOR left selected
- PWS caution - VOR right selected
- PWS warning - ADF left selected
31-62-00-107.fm
- PWS fail. - ADF right selected
- Heading up map format
- Airports selected
31-62-00
- 279 -
- Route data selected The ground proximity discrete word 2 has this data:
- Waypoints selected
- Navaid data selected - Terrain unavailable (position)
- Position data selected - Terrain status fail
- PFD/ND display format - Terrain caution
- Plan mode selected - Terrain warning
- Approach mode selected - Windshear caution
- VOR mode selected - Windshear warning
- Map mode selected. - Ground proximity warning.
The CDS EFIS CP modes 2 discrete word has this data: The fault summary word 2 has this data:
- Baro minimums selected - Terrain relay 1 fail

- RA health - Terrain relay 2 fail.
- GPWC V1 callout enable
- FPV selected The input discrete word 2 has terrain override data.
- Meters selected
- STD selected The GPWC also sends terrain display data on ARINC 453
- HPA selected data buses to the DEUs through the terrain/weather
- HG selected relays. These relays are controlled by the TERR select
- Terrain selected switches on the EFIS control panels or the pop up
- WXR selected. function within the GPWC.
The GPWC sends system status, caution and warning data

on an ARINC 429 GPWC data bus to the DEUs. The DEUs show
the system status, caution or warnings on the DUs.
The GPWC bus has this data:
- Ground proximity discrete word 2
31-62-00-107.fm
- Fault summary word 2
- Input discrete word 2.
31-62-00
- 280 -

CP FEEDTHRU BUS 1
GPWC
TERR 1
TERR 2 TERR/WXR PWS CAUTION

RLY R745 PWS WARNING
GPWC PWS FAIL
WXR ON/OFF
WXRT 1
DEU 1
WXRT 2
TERR/WXR PWS CAUTION

3 RLY R746
PWS ALERTS PWS WARNING
PWS FAIL
WXR XCVR
WXR ON/OFF
WXR CP
31-62-00-107.fm
CP FEEDTHRU BUS 1
DEU 2
31-62-00
- 281 -
Flight Management Computer System - Plan mode selected
The flight management computer system (FMCS) sends data - VOR mode selected
to and receives data from the display electronic units - Map mode selected.
(DEU) on ARINC 429 buses. FMC output buses 01 and 02 go
through FMC transfer relay 1. FMC output buses 08 and The CDS EFIS CP modes 2 discrete word has this data:
09 go directly to both DEUs.
- Baro minimums selected
The DEUs send data to the flight management computers - RA health
(FMC) on the DEU-FMC bus. The DEU-FMC bus has this - GPWC V1 callout enable
data: - FPV selected
- Meters selected
- CDS EFIS CP modes 1 discrete word - STD selected
- CDS EFIS CP modes 2 discrete word - HPA selected
- CP and DU maint word - HG selected
- BITE response data. - Terrain selected
- WXR selected.
The CP and DU maint word has this data:
- TFC selected
- Center display format - TCAS RA status
- Baro minimums aural enable - TCAS system status.
- VOR left selected
- VOR right selected The FMCS uses this data to format the MAP and PLAN
- ADF left selected display data that will be transmitted to the DEUs.
- ADF right selected
- Heading up map format The BITE response data is for these other airplane
- Airports selected systems:
- Route data selected
- Waypoints selected - DEUs
31-62-00-108.fm
- Navaid data selected - Main engine electronic controls (EEC)
- Position data selected - APU electronic control unit (ECU).
31-62-00
- 282 -

The FMCS sends data to the DEUs on four ARINC 429 data FMC discrete word 3 has takeoff derate data.
buses. These buses are:
The DEUs use this data to show the thrust modes on the
- FMC 01 center upper DU. Target N1 shows on the engine display
- FMC 02 and gross weight is used by DEUs to calculate the flap
- FMC 08 maneuver speeds that are shown on the PFD speed tape.
- FMC 09. GMT and date are used in BITE for fault data storage.
FMC 01 and FMC 02 data goes through the FMC transfer FMC 08 and FMC 09 data is sent directly to both DEUs.
relay 1 so that the primary FMC is supplying the data These buses have this data:
to the DEUs. These buses have this data:
- Distance to go (waypoint)
- Gross weight - Estimated time of arrival (ETA)
- Greenwich mean time (GMT) - V speeds
- Selected temperature (takeoff derate) - GPS latitude and longitude
- Flight number - Range to altitude
- Date - Vertical deviation
- Target N1 - Set landing altitude
- N1 bug drive - DME elevation
- FMC discrete word 1 - Transition altitude
- FMC discrete word 3 - FMC position
- BITE test word. - Groundspeed
- Track angle (magnetic and true)
FMC discrete word 1 has this data: - Wind speed and direction
- Dynamic data
- Takeoff bump - Map background data
- EEC on status - Message text
- Isolation valve position status - FMC discrete word 2.
- Wing antice status
- Engine cowl antice status FMC discrete word 2 has this data:
31-62-00-108.fm
- ECS pack on status
- ECS pack flow status - VNAV ALT
- Engine bleed status. - Display IRS position difference.
31-62-00
- 283 -
The DEUs use this data to make the MAP and PLAN
displays on the navigation displays (ND).
FMC Transfer Relays
The transfer relays are controlled from the FMC source

select switch in the flight deck. This switch position
determines which FMC is the primary.
The transfer relays send analog discretes to the DEUs

depending on the position of the FMC source select
switch. These ground/open discretes show the DEUs which
FMC is the primary.
31-62-00-108.fm
31-62-00
- 284 -

DEU - FMC
FMC-L SELECT
FMC-R SELECT
FMC 01
FMC 02
FMC 08
FMC 09 FMC XFER

RELAY 1
FMC 1 DEU 1
FMC 01 FMC-L SELECT

FMC-R SELECT
FMC 02
FMC XFER
FMC 08 RELAY 2
FMC 09
FMC 2
31-62-00-108.fm
DEU - FMC
DEU 2
31-62-00
- 285 -
31-62-00-109.fm
31-62-00
- 286 -

Multi-Mode Receiver - DME frequency
- Station identifier
The ILS receivers in the multi-mode receivers (MMRs) - Slant range distance.
send this data to both DEUs on ARINC 429 buses:
Navigation Control Panel
- ILS frequency
- Station identifier The navigation control panels send a ground discrete to
- Localizer deviation the DEUs to show that an ILS frequency was tuned on the
- Glideslope deviation. navigation control panel (NCP).
The ILS inputs go to both input output controllers If a VOR frequency is tuned on the NCP and the approach
(IOCs) in each DEU to meet integrity requirements. A mode is selected on the EFIS control panel, the
comparison is done between these two ILS inputs in each message, EFIS MODE/NAV FREQ DISAGREE shows on the
DEU. navigation display. The same message also shows if an
ILS frequency is tuned on the NCP and the VOR mode is
VHF Omnidirectional Ranging (VOR) Receiver selected on the EFIS control panel.
The VOR receivers send this data to both DEUs on ARINC Instrument Switching Module
429 buses:
The instrument switching module has a three-position
- VOR frequency switch for the VHF NAV function. The switch positions
- Station identifier are:
- Bearing data
- Marker beacon discrete bits - BOTH ON 1
- Fault status. - NORMAL
- BOTH ON 2.
NOTE: Marker beacon data is only sent from VOR/MB
receiver 1. The instrument switching module sends ground discretes
to the DEUs to show data selection for the captain and
Distance Measuring Equipment Interrogator F/O displays.
31-62-00-109.fm
The DME interrogators send this data to both DEUs on In the NORMAL position, the captain displays show data
ARINC 429 buses: from MMR 1, VOR 1, and DME 1 systems and the F/O
31-62-00
- 287 -
displays show data from MMR 2, VOR 2, and DME 2
systems.
When BOTH ON 1 or BOTH ON 2 is selected, the captain and

the F/O displays show navigation data from the selected
source.
31-62-00-109.fm
31-62-00
- 288 -

MMR 2
VOR 2
MMR 1
VOR/MB 1
ILS TUNED-L
ILS TUNED-R
MMR 2
MMR 2 VOR 2
NAV SOURCE SEL-L
VOR NAV SOURCE SEL-R
VOR 2
ILS DEU 1
CAPT NAV CP
ILS TUNED-L
VOR ILS TUNED-R DME 1
ILS DME 1
F/O NAV CP
NAV SOURCE SEL-L
BOTH ON 2 NAV SOURCE SEL-R
NORMAL DME 1
31-62-00-109.fm
BOTH ON 1 DME 2
INST SWITCHING DEU 2
MODULE
31-62-00
- 289 -
Traffic Alert and Collision Avoidance System Automatic Direction Finder Receivers
The traffic alert and collision avoidance system (TCAS) The ADF receivers send this data to both DEUs on ARINC
computer sends data to and receives data from the 429 buses:
display electronic units (DEUs). The TCAS computer
sends this data on two ARINC 429 buses: - ADF frequency
- Station identifier
- Intruder range - Bearing data.
- Intruder altitude
- Intruder vertical sense The DEUs use this data to show the ADF bearing pointers
- Intruder bearing and source information on the NDs.
- Display matrix
- Baro corrected altitude
- Resolution advisories
- TCAS sensitivity level
- TCAS system status.
The DEUs use this data to show the TCAS traffic on the
navigation displays (NDs) and resolution advisories on
the attitude indicators (AIs). TCAS system messages
also show on the NDs.
The DEUs send resolution advisory (RA) display status

to TCAS as an analog discrete. A valid shows by a
ground on this discrete.
Radio Altimeter Receiver/Transmitter
The RA transceivers send radio altitude data to both

DEUs on ARINC 429 buses. The DEUs use this data to show
31-62-00-123.fm
radio altitude on the flight displays.
31-62-00
- 290 - Config #

RA STATUS RA 2
TCAS 1
RAD ALT 1
TCAS 2
RA 2
TCAS COMPUTER
RAD ALT 2
DEU 1
ADF 2
ADF 1
RA STATUS
ADF 2
31-62-00-123.fm
DEU 2 ADF 2
31-62-00
- 291 - Config #
CDS -- INDICATING AND RECORDING INTERFACES
31-62-00-110.fm
31-62-00
- 292 -

Data Loader Control Panel - Stabilizer position
- Control column position
The data loader control panel sends information to the - Control wheel position
display electronic units (DEU) from the airborne data - Rudder pedal position
loader (ADL). Software can be uploaded to the DEUs in - Left and right elevator position
this manner. - Left and right aileron position
- Speed brake handle position
The control panel also receives data from the DEUs on - Rudder position
the DFDAU bus. This function is used to download fault - Main engine indication data
history from the DEUs - Main engine internal data
- Main landing gear brake temperatures
A function discrete from the data loader is switched - Main hydraulic system pressures
through the data loader control panel to the DEUs. This - Main hydraulic system quantities
ground discrete is the load enable signal to the DEUs. - Pitch attitude
- Roll attitude
Flight Data Acquisition Unit - Heading data
- Groundspeed
The flight data acquisition unit (FDAU) sends data to - Radio altitude
and receives data from the display electronic units - Radio minimums data
(DEU) on ARINC 429 buses. The FDAU sends this surface - Minimum decision altitude data
position data to the DEUs: - Localizer and glideslope deviation
- Main fuel tank quantities
- Stabilizer position - Aux. fuel quantity
- Control column position - Main engine EEC status words
- Control wheel position - DEU status words 1 and 2
- Rudder pedal position - CDS EFIS CP modes 1 and 2 discrete words
- Elevator position (left and right) - Display discrete words 1 and 2
- Aileron position (left and right) - Captains EFIS CP discrete word 1 and 2
- Speedbrake handle position - F/Os EFIS CP discrete word 1 and 2
- Rudder position. - CDS discrete words
31-62-00-110.fm
- CDS DEU discrete word 3.
The DEUs send this data to the FDAU on the CDS general
purpose bus:
31-62-00
- 293 -
The main engine EEC status words have this general - Center display format
data: - Baro minimums aural enabled
- VOR left selected
- EEC data - VOR right selected
- Manufacturer and option data - ADF left selected
- Thrust rating/airplane model data - ADF right selected
- Exceedance data - Heading up map format
- Internal protection status - Airports selected
- TRA data - Route data selected
- Thrust reverser status data - Waypoints selected
- Engine air systems status data - Navaid data selected
- ADIRU input data status. - Position data selected
The DEU status word 1 has this data: - Plan mode selected
- Thrust reverser position data - VOR mode selected
- Engine fault dispatch level data - Map mode selected.
- Engine starter enable data
- EEC backup power control data The CDS EFIS CP modes 2 discrete word has this data:
- Engine running status
- Generator enable data. - Baro minimums selected
- RA health
The DEU status word 2 has this data: - GPWC V1 callout enabled
- FPV selected
- Main engine N1 exceedance data - Meters selected
- Main engine N2 exceedance data - STD selected
- Main engine EGT exceedance data - HPA selected
- Main engine oil system caution/warning data - HG selected
- Fuel filter impending bypass data. - Terrain selected
- WXR selected.
31-62-00-110.fm
The displays discrete word 1 has this data:
- TFC selected
31-62-00
- 294 -

- LOB display unit status data - DSM CAPT NORM
- LIB display unit status data - DSM CAPT OUTBD PFD.
- CU display unit status data
- CL display unit status data The captain EFIS CP discrete word 2 has this data:
- RIB display unit status data
- ROB display unit status data. - Systems page
- DSM F/O LOWER ND
The displays discrete word 2 has this data: - DSM F/O LOWER NORM
- DSM F/O LOWER ENG
- Fuel configuration alert status - DSM F/O INBD PFD
- Fuel imbalance alert status - DSM F/O INBD ENG
- Fuel low quantity alert status - DSM F/O INBD MFD
- Mag/true status - DSM F/O NORM
- Autothrottle limit message status - DSM F/O OUTBD PFD.
- Engine fail message status
- Start valve open message status The F/O EFIS CP discrete word 1 has this data:
- Low oil pressure message status
- Oil filter bypass message status - Fuel used
- Display source message status - Fuel used reset
- CDS maint message status - Secondary engine
- CDS fault message status. - DSM CAPT LOWER ND
The captain EFIS CP discrete word 1 has this data: - DSM CAPT LOWER ENG
- DSM CAPT INBD PFD
- Fuel used - DSM CAPT INBD ENG
- Fuel used reset - DSM CAPT INBD MFD
- Secondary engine - DSM CAPT NORM
- DSM CAPT LOWER ND - DSM CAPT OUTBD PFD.
- DSM CAPT LOWER ENG The F/O EFIS CP discrete word 2 has this data:
31-62-00-110.fm
- DSM CAPT INBD PFD
- DSM CAPT INBD ENG - Systems page
- DSM CAPT INBD MFD - DSM F/O LOWER ND
31-62-00
- 295 -
- DSM F/O LOWER NORM - ECS pack flow switch positions
- DSM F/O LOWER ENG - ECS pack switch positions
- DSM F/O INBD PFD - Engine bleed switch positions
- DSM F/O INBD ENG - T/E flap position (>13)
- DSM F/O INBD MFD - Air/ground system 2 status.
- DSM F/O NORM
- DSM F/O OUTBD PFD. The FDAU uses these parameters to record data for the
flight recorder and for the airplane condition
The CDS discrete words have this general data: monitoring system (ACMS).
- DEU source select status

- EFIS CP source select status
- Fuel pump low pressure data
- Fuel cutoff switch position status
- Engine ignition switch status
- PWS caution/warning/fail status
- IRS source select status
- Navigation source select status
- FMC source select status
- Fire switch status
- TAI valve status
- Engine alternate mode select status
- Engine start switch status
- Engine bleed air status
- ECS status
- ILS/VOR tune status
- Air/ground status.
31-62-00-110.fm
- ECS isolation valve position
- WTAI switch position
- Engine cowl antice switch positions
31-62-00
- 296 -

DL OUTPUT GENERAL PURPOSE
DL OUTPUT DFDAU 2
LOAD ENABLE
DATA LOADER CP FDAU
DEU 1
GENERAL PURPOSE
DEU 2
31-62-00-110.fm
CDS - INDICATING AND RECORDING INTERFACES
31-62-00
- 297 -
CDS -- AUTOFLIGHT INTERFACES
31-62-00-111.fm
31-62-00
- 298 -

Mode Control Panel - Flight director commands (pitch)
- Flight director commands (roll)
The mode control panel (MCP) sends data to the display - Airspeed bug drive
electronic units (DEUs) on ARINC 429 buses. The MCP 1 - Spoiler position (left and right)
bus has this data: - AFDS discrete word 2
- AFDS discrete word 3
- Selected course 1 - AFDS discrete word 4.
- Selected heading
- MCP selected altitude. The AFDS discrete word 2 has this data:
The MCP 2 bus has this data: - FLARE ARM

- CWS ROLL
- Selected course 2 - CWS PITCH
- Selected heading - SINGLE CH
- MCP selected altitude. - TO/GA
- V/S ENGAGE
The DEUs use this data to show on the flight and - ALT HOLD
navigation displays. - ALT ACQ
- HDG SEL
Flight Control Computers - VOR/LOC ENGAGE
- G/S ENGAGE
The flight control computers (FCCs) send data to and - FLARE ENGAGE.
receive data from the DEUs on ARINC 429 buses.
The AFDS discrete word 3 has this data:
The FCCs send this data to the DEUs:
- IAS/MACH select
- Target mach number - Altitude hold (MCP or VNAV)
- Local selected course - Altitude acquire (MCP or VNAV).
- Selected heading
- Selected altitude The AFDS discrete word 4 has this data:
31-62-00-111.fm
- Selected vertical speed
- Selected mach number - Altitude alert flash
- Flap position - Test display
31-62-00
- 299 -
- G/S deviation warn The DEUs use this data to show the active autothrottle
- LOC deviation warn mode in the flight mode annunciator on the primary
- CMD-A flight displays. The A/T LIMIT annunciation shows when
- CMD-B FMCS thrust mode annunciation data is not valid.
- F/D A ON
- F/D B ON
- VNAV SPD
- VNAV PTH.
The DEUs use this data from the FCCs to show flight
director commands and DFCS status on the displays.
The FCCs use engine N1 from the DEU general purpose bus
for the speed trim and the flight control neutral shift
functions. DEU discrete data also shows the FCCs which
DEU sends data to which display unit.
FCC Autothrottle Function
The autothrottle function in the FCC sends this data to

the DEUs as a discrete word on an ARINC 429 bus:
- ARM
- GA
- MCP SPD
- A/T LIMIT
- FMC SPD
- N1
- RETARD
- TEST.
31-62-00-111.fm
The autothrottle function sends a ground discrete to
the DEUs for the throttle hold mode.
31-62-00
- 300 -

GENERAL PURPOSE
FCC 1
MCP 1
A/T 1
MCP 2
THROTTLE
HOLD
MODE CONTROL
PANEL FCC A
DEU 1
FCC 1
GENERAL PURPOSE
31-62-00-111.fm DEU 2 FCC B
CDS - AUTOFLIGHT INTERFACES
31-62-00
- 301 -
CDS -- HYDRAULIC AND LANDING GEAR INTERFACES
Hydraulic System Pressure Proximity Switch Electronics Unit
Hydraulic system A pressure transmitter sends hydraulic The proximity swich electronics unit sends a total of
pressure as an analog signal to DEU 1. Hydraulic system four ground discretes to each DEU. They are air ground
B pressure transmitter sends an analog signal to DEU 2. signals from air/ground system 1 and air/ground system
2. These discretes are used for the display enable
The DEU sends an 8 vdc reference voltage to the function within the DEUs and also flight leg counting
transmitter and the resultant current flow represents within BITE.
the hydraulic pressure. The DEU then converts this
current into a pressure value for display. Nominal Landing Gear Brake Temperature Sensors
current is 16 mA at a hydraulic pressure of 3000 psi.
The brake temperature monitor unit (BTMU) receives
The hydraulic system pressure data goes on the DEU inputs from the temperature sensors on each main
cross channel bus so that both DEUs receive hydraulic landing gear brake. Individual brake temperature is
system pressure from both system A and system B. sent as a dc voltage to the DEUs. These voltages
represent the temperature of the brakes.
Hydraulic Fluid Quantity
CDS shows the brake temperature condition on the system
The hydraulic fluid quantity transmitter/indicators for status page in units of 0.0 to 9.9.
hydraulic system A and B send hydraulic fluid quantity
as an analog signal to both DEUs. The DEUs will also illuminate a brake over temperature
annunciator in the flight compartment when the brake
The DEU sends an 8 vdc reference voltage to the temperature exceeds 9.9 units (1200 degrees F).
quantity transmitter and the resultant output voltage
from the potentiometer in the transmitter is
proportional to the hydraulic quantity. The DEU then
converts this voltage into a hydraulic quantity value
for display. Nominal voltage is 0.8147 V/Vref for a
FULL reservoir indication.
31-62-00-112.fm
31-62-00
- 302 -

HYD SYSTEM A BRAKE

PRESSURE TX OVERTEMP LT
3
SYSTEM A
HYD SYSTEM A HYDRAULIC
FLUID QUANTITY PRESSURE
TRANSMITTER/
INDICATOR
DEU 1
SYSTEM B
3 HYDRAULIC
PRESSURE 2
SYS 1
2
HYD SYSTEM B SYS 2
2
FLUID QUANTITY 2
TRANSMITTER/ SYS 1
INDICATOR 2
HYD SYSTEM B SYS 2
PRESSURE TX
4 PSEU
BRAKE TEMP
31-62-00-112.fm
DEU 2
MONITOR UNIT
CDS - HYDRAULIC AND LANDING GEAR INTERFACES
31-62-00
- 303 -
CDS -- AIR CONDITIONING AND PNEUMATIC INTERFACES
General Bleed Air Isolation Valve
The display electronic units (DEU) receive discretes The bleed air isolation valve sends a ground discrete
from these air conditioning and pneumatic systems: to both DEUs. The DEUs use these discretes to determine
the position of the isolation valve.
- Air conditioning relays
- Pack flow control and shutoff valves Air Conditioning Module
- Bleed air isolation valve
- Air conditioning module. The air conditioning (AC) module sends two discretes to
both DEUs. The DEUs use these discretes to determine
The DEUs send the data out on the general purpose buses the position of the main engine bleed air switches on
and the EEC/APU buses. This data is used by these the P5 panel.
airplane systems:
- Digital flight data acquisition unit

- Main engine electronic controls
- APU electronic control unit.
Air Conditioning Relays
The air conditioning relays send ground discretes to

both DEUs. The DEUs use these discretes to determine
the position of the left and right pack valve normal
relays.
Flow Control and Shutoff Valves
The left and right pack flow control and shutoff valves
send ground discretes to both DEUs. The DEUs use these
discretes to determine the position of the flow control
31-62-00-113.fm
and shutoff valves.
31-62-00
- 304 -

OFF/HIGH OFF
AUTO ON
LEFT PACK ENG 1 BLEED AIR
OFF/HIGH OFF
AUTO ON
RIGHT PACK DEU 1 ENG 2 BLEED AIR
A/C RELAYS A/C MODULE
OPEN
CLOSED
L PACK FLOW
CONTROL AND
SHUTOFF VALVE
CLSD
OPEN
CLOSED
OPEN
R PACK FLOW
31-62-00-113.fm
CONTROL AND
SHUTOFF VALVE DEU 2 BLEED AIR
ISOLATION
VALVE
CDS - AIR CONDITIONING AND PNEUMATIC INTERFACES
31-62-00
- 305 -
CDS -- ICE AND RAIN PROTECTION INTERFACES
General The DEUs use engine cowl anti-ice valve position to
show the TAI message on the engine display. This
The display electronic units (DEU) receive discretes message is green.
from these ice and rain protection components:
The DEUs also use engine cowl anti-ice switch and valve
- Engine and wing anti-ice module position data to determine if the valve is not in the
- Engine cowl anti-ice valves. commanded position. If it is not, the TAI message is
amber.
Engine and Wing Antice Module
The engine and wing anti-ice module sends three ground

discretes to both DEUs. The discretes show the position
of these switches:
- Wing anti-ice switch

- Engine 1 anti-ice switch
- Engine 2 anti-ice switch.
The DEUs send the anti-ice switch position data out on

the general purpose buses and the EEC/APU buses. The
data is used by these airplane systems:
- Digital flight data acquisition unit

- Main engine electronic controls
- APU electronic control unit.
Engine Cowl Thermal Anti-Ice Valve.
The engine cowl thermal anti-ice (TAI) valves send two

ground discretes to both DEUs. These discretes indicate
31-62-00-114.fm
the position of the valves.
31-62-00
- 306 -

CLOSE
OFF
OPEN
OPEN SW
ON CLOSE
WING ANTI-ICE RLY OPEN

CLOSED SW
OFF ENGINE 1 COWL
ANTI-ICE VALVE
DEU 1
ON
ENG 1 ANTI-ICE SW
CLOSE
OFF
OPEN
ON OPEN SW
CLOSE
ENG 2 ANTI-ICE SW
OPEN
CLOSED SW
ENGINE AND WING ANTI-ICE
MODULE ENGINE 2 COWL
DEU 2
31-62-00-114.fm
ANTI-ICE VALVE
CDS - ICE AND RAIN PROTECTION INTERFACES
31-62-00
- 307 -
CDS -- FUEL AND ELECTRICAL INTERFACES
Fuel Quantity Processor Unit The GCUs use this 28v dc discrete to close the
generator contactor breaker.
The fuel quantity processor unit (FQPU) sends fuel
quantity data for the left, right, and center tank
systems to the display electronic units (DEU) on ARINC
429 buses.
Center Tank Fuel Boost Pumps
The center tank left and right boost pumps send a low
pressure signal to the DEUs. The DEUs use this ground
discrete to show a fuel configuration alert.
The CONFIG message shows when these conditions are

true:
- Output pressure from both center tank boost pumps

is low
- 1,600 lb (725 kg) or more fuel in the center tank
- Either main engine operating.
Fuel System Module
Each DEU sends two ground discretes to the fuel system

module, one for each of the fuel filter bypass lights.
The DEU is the interface for the electronic engine
controllers (EEC) to turn on these annunciators when
the EECs detect a fuel filter bypass condition.
Generator Control Units
31-62-00-115.fm
The DEUs send a GCU enable discrete to the generator
control units (GCUs) when the engine is at idle speed.
31-62-00
- 308 -

ENGINE 1 FUEL
FILTER BYPASS
FQIS 1
A A
FQIS 2 GCU 1 ENABLE

ENGINE 1 FUEL
FILTER BYPASS LT
FQIS 3
ENGINE 2 FUEL
FILTER BYPASS
A A
FQPU
GCU 2 ENABLE
ENGINE 2 FUEL
FILTER BYPASS LT
DEU 1
FUEL SYSTEM MODULE
CENTER TANK LEFT GCU 1 ENABLE

BOOST PUMP LOW
PRESSURE SWITCH ENGINE 1 FUEL
FILTER BYPASS
GCU 1
ENGINE 2 FUEL
FILTER BYPASS
GCU 2 ENABLE
31-62-00-115.fm
CENTER TANK RIGHT
BOOST PUMP LOW GCU 2
PRESSURE SWITCH DEU 2
CDS - FUEL AND ELECTRICAL INTERFACES
31-62-00
- 309 -
CDS -- APU INTERFACES
31-62-00-125.fm
31-62-00
- 310 - Config #

APU Electronic Control Unit - Engine running status
- Engine start valve status
The APU electronic control unit (ECU) sends data to and - Main landing gear position status
receives data from the display electronic units (DEUs) - Flaps position data.
on ARINC 429 data buses.
DEU 1 sends data to the APU ECU on the EEC/APU bus. The
EEC/APU bus has this data: - Engine alternate mode select status
- Engine start lever position status
- Flight number - Engine ignition switch status
- Baro corrected altitude - Engine start switch position status.
- Mach number
- Total air temperature The CDS DEU discrete word 3 has this data:
- Total pressure
- Static pressure - ECS isolation valve status
- Time/date - ECS pack status
- Target N1 - ECS pack flow status
- ADR discrete word - Antice status
- CDS DEU discrete word 3 - Air/ground system status.
- BITE test word.
The APU ECU uses this data in the APU control function.
The ADR discrete word has this data:
The DEUs also send a 28v dc discrete to the APU ECU to
- Angle of attack data enable BITE power up.
- SSEC data
- VMO/MMO data The APU ECU sends BITE data to both DEUs on the APU bus.
- Overspeed warning status The APU bus has this data:
- Antice system status
31-62-00-125.fm
- ADR fail status. - APU and ECU part numbers
- APU and ECU serial numbers
The CDS DEU discrete word 1 has this data: - APU fault data
31-62-00
- 311 - Config #
- APU maintenance data
- APU internal operating data.
31-62-00-125.fm
31-62-00
- 312 - Config #

EEC/APU BUS
DATA LOADER
ENABLE RELAY
APU
BITE POWER UP
APU ELECTRONIC
CONTROL UNIT
DEU 1
BITE POWER UP
EEC/APU BUS
31-62-00-125.fm
DEU 2
CDS - APU INTERFACES
31-62-00
- 313 - Config #
CDS -- FLIGHT CONTROL INTERFACES
Stall Management Yaw Damper - Radio altitude
- Engine anti-ice switch position
The stall management yaw dampers (SMYDs) send data to - Wing anti-ice switch position.
and receive data from the DEUs on ARINC 429 buses. The - Engine N1 and N2.
SMYDs send this data to the DEUs:
Radio altitude data and antice system data are used in
- Maximum operating speed the stall management function in the SMYDs.
- Engine out speed
- Angle of attack The SMYDs send the N1 and N2 data to the cabin pressure
- Stick shaker angle of attack controllers (CPCs).
- Stick shaker speed
- Flap retraction minimum airspeed Flap Slat Electronics Unit (FSEU)
- Minimum operating airspeed
- High speed buffet/next flap placard speed The FSEU sends flap lever detent position data to the
- Pitch limit indication DEUs on an ARINC 429 bus. This is the primary source of
- SMYD discrete. flap position for the DEUs. If the data from the FSEU
is invalid, the DEUs use flap position from the onside
The SMYD discrete word has this data: FCC.
- NLG air/ground discrete validity

- MLG down and locked discrete validity
- VMO/MMO warning
- Airplane model number
- SMYD position
- Autoslat command
- Autoslat valid
- Flap up signal validity.
The DEUs use this data to show placard airspeed

indications and pitch limit data data on the displays.
31-62-00-124.fm
This is the data that the SMYDs use from the DEU
general purpose buses:
31-62-00
- 314 - Config #

GENERAL PURPOSE
SMC 1
SMYD 1
DEU 1
SMC 1
GENERAL PURPOSE
SMYD 2
FSEU 1
31-62-00-124.fm
FSEU DEU 2
CDS - FLIGHT CONTROL INTERFACES
31-62-00
- 315 - Config #
CDS -- ENGINE INTERFACES - 1
31-62-00-116.fm
31-62-00
- 316 -

Electronic Engine Controllers - Engine running status
- Engine start valve status
The main engine electronic control units (EECs) send - Main landing gear position status
data to and receive data from the display electronic - Flaps position data.
units (DEU) on ARINC 429 data buses.
The DEUs send data to the main engine EECs on the
EEC/APU buses. The EEC/APU buses have this data: - Engine alternate mode select status
- Engine start lever position status
- Flight number - Engine ignition switch status
- Baro corrected altitude - Engine start switch position status.
- Mach number
- Total air temperature The CDS DEU discrete word 3 has this data:
- Total pressure
- Static pressure - ECS isolation valve status
- Time/date - ECS pack status
- Target N1 - ECS pack flow status
- ADR discrete word - Antice status
- CDS DEU discrete word 3 - Air/ground system status.
- BITE test word.
The EECs use this data in the engine control function.
The ADR discrete word has this data:
The EECs send data to the DEUs on two seperate EEC
- Angle of attack data buses. One bus has EEC channel A data and the other has
- SSEC data EEC channel B data. The EEC buses have this data:
- VMO/MMO data
- Overspeed warning status - BITE data
- Antice system status - Engine start mode
31-62-00-116.fm
- ADR fail status. - Engine starting status
- Ignition system status
The CDS DEU discrete word 1 has this data: - Engine running status
31-62-00
- 317 -
- Control mode switch position - Internal EEC fault status.
- Minimum idle
- Idle selected The DEUs use this data for the engine display function
- N1 speed data and the BITE/monitoring function via the CDUs.
- N2 speed data
- Overspeed governor status
- Engine starter cutout
- Exhaust gas temperature (EGT) data
- Fuel flow data
- Fuel filter status
- Oil pressure data
- Oil temperature data
- Oil filter status
- Thrust resolver angle (TRA) data
- Thrust reverser status
- Engine thrust
- Engine sensor data
- EEC software version
- Engine serial number
- Engine actuator positions
- Combustor fuel air ratio
- EEC channel in control
- Start lever position
- Airplane on ground selection status
- Engine thrust rating and airplane model
compatibility
- Airplane model
- Engine rating
- Engine options
- EEC alternator status
31-62-00-116.fm
- Engine position
- Engine bleed load
- Air data status from ADIRUs
31-62-00
- 318 -

EEC CH A
EEC CH B
EEC/APU BUS
ENGINE 1 EEC
DEU 1
EEC/APU BUS
EEC CH A
EEC CH B
31-62-00-116.fm
ENGINE 2 EEC
DEU 2
CDS - ENGINE INTERFACES - 1
31-62-00
- 319 -
Engine Start Switch
The engine start switches send two ground discretes to

the display electronic units (DEUs). One discrete gives
a signal that the engine start switch is in the flight
position. The other discrete gives a signal that the
engine start switch is in the ground or continuous
position.
The DEUs also send a ground discrete to the engine

start switches when N2 is less than 55%. This holdup
discrete energizes the engine start switch solenoid to
hold the switch in the GRD position. When engine N2 is
more than 55%, the ground is removed and the start
switch returns to the OFF position.
Engine Start Lever Relay
The engine start lever relays send ground discretes to

the DEUs to indicate the engine start lever position
(idle or cutoff).
31-62-00-117.fm
31-62-00
- 320 -

ENG 1 START SW HOLDUP
ENG 1 I/P 1 IDLE

28V DC ENG 1 START
SW-FLT ENG 1 I/P 2
ENG 2 I/P 1 CUTOFF

ENG 1 START
SW-GND/CONT ENG 2 I/P 2 ENGINE 1
START LEVER RELAY
ENGINE 1
START SWITCH ENG 2 START
SW-FLT
ENG 2 START
SW-GND/CONT
DEU 1
ENG 1 START
SW-FLT
ENG 1 START
SW-GND/CONT
28V DC ENG 1 I/P 1

ENG 2 START
SW-FLT ENG 1 I/P 2 IDLE
ENG 2 I/P 1
ENG 2 START
SW-GND/CONT ENG 2 I/P 2 CUTOFF
31-62-00-117.fm
ENGINE 2
ENG 1 START SW HOLDUP START LEVER RELAY
ENGINE 2 DEU 2
START SWITCH
31-62-00
- 321 -
Engine Oil Quantity Transmitter
The engine oil quantity transmitters send an analog

signal to both display electronic units (DEUs).
The DEUs send an 8v dc reference voltage to the

transmitters and the oil quantity output signal is
proportional to the oil quantity level. The transmitter
uses a floating magnet and reed switches.
Engine Module
The engine module sends two ground discretes to both

DEUs. These discretes show the position of the EEC
ON/ALTN switch. This data is sent to the EECs.
When an EEC detects an engine control fault, the DEUs

send two ground discretes to the engine module. This
turns on the engine control annunciator for that
particular engine.
31-62-00-118.fm
31-62-00
- 322 -

FULL DC REF
ENG 1 OIL QTY
GND
A A
ENG 1 FAULT
ENGINE 1 CONTROL
DC REF ENG 2 FAULT ANNUNCIATOR
ENG 2 OIL QTY

ALTN
GND ENG 1 ALTN
ENG 2 ALTN ON
EMPTY
ENG 1 EEC ON/ALTN
ENGINE 1 OIL QTY TX DEU 1 SWITCH
FULL ENG 1 ALTN ALTN

DC REF
ENG 2 ALTN
ENG 2 OIL QTY ON
GND ENG 2 EEC ON/ALTN
SWITCH
ENG 1 FAULT
DC REF A A
ENG 2 FAULT
ENG 1 OIL QTY
ENGINE 2 CONTROL
GND ANNUNCIATOR
31-62-00-118.fm
EMPTY
ENGINE MODULE
ENGINE 2 OIL QTY TX DEU 2
31-62-00
- 323 -
N1 and N2 Speed Sensor
The engine speed sensors send analog frequency signals

to both display electronic units (DEUs). N1 is low
pressure rotor speed and N2 is high pressure rotor
speed.
Usually, the DEUs use the N1 and N2 data from the

engine electronic controls (EECs) for display on the
center display units (DUs). When the EECs do not have
power, the DEUs use the analog inputs from the engine
speed sensors.
The DEUs also send N1 and N2 data to other airplane

systems on the general purpose bus and the engine EEC
buses.
Airborne Vibration Monitor
The airborne vibration signal conditioner sends

vibration data for engine 1 and 2 to the DEUs on an
ARINC 429 bus. This data shows in scalar units on the
center DUs.
31-62-00-119.fm
31-62-00
- 324 -

N1 SPEED
SENSOR (ENG 1) AVM BUS
2
AIRBORNE VIBRATION
SIGNAL CONDITIONER
N1 SPEED
SENSOR (ENG 2) DEU 1
N2 SPEED
SENSOR (ENG 1)
31-62-00-119.fm
N2 SPEED DEU 2
SENSOR (ENG 2)
31-62-00
- 325 -
Engine Ignition Selector
The engine ignition switch sends two ground discretes

to the display electronic units (DEUs). These discretes
show the position of the engine ignition switch (L IGN,
BOTH, or R IGN). The DEUs send this data to the engine
electronic controls (EEC) on the EEC/APU buses.
Engine Start Valve
The engine start valves send a ground discrete to the

DEUs when the valve is in the open position. The DEUs
use this data for the START VALVE OPEN indication on
the center display units (DUs). This data also goes to
the EECs on the EEC/APU buses.
31-62-00-120.fm
31-62-00
- 326 -

CLOSE
ENG 1 START VALVE

OPEN
ENG 2 START VALVE ENGINE 1

START VALVE
IGN SW - LEFT
IGN SW - RIGHT
L IGN
BOTH DEU 1
R IGN
IGN SW - LEFT
IGN SW - RIGHT
ENGINE IGNITION
SWITCH ENG 1 START VALVE
CLOSE
ENG 2 START VALVE

OPEN
DEU 2 ENGINE 2
31-62-00-120.fm
START VALVE
31-62-00
- 327 -
Engine Alternate Power Relay
The display electronic units (DEUs) send ground

discretes to the engine alternate power relays. The
relays supply electrical power from the transfer buses
to the engine electronic controls (EECc).
The DEUs send the engine alternate power discretes when

one of these is true:
- Engine start lever is set to idle

- Engine start switch is set to GRD
- Engine start switch is set to CONT
- Control display unit (CDU) set to engine BITE.
Engine Running Relay
The DEUs send the ground discretes to the engine

running relays. These relays supply engine running
status to other airplane systems.
The DEUs send the engine running discretes when one of

these is true:
- EEC digital discrete is set to run

- N2 is í50% RPM
- Engine start lever is set to idle for 5 minutes.
31-62-00-121.fm
31-62-00
- 328 -

ENG 2 RUNNING
ENG 1 RUNNING
ENG 1 ALTN ENGINE 1
PWR CONTROL RUNNING RELAY 1
ENG 2 ALTN
ENGINE 1 ALTN PWR CONTROL
POWER RELAY
DEU 1 ENGINE 1
RUNNING RELAY 2
ENG 1 RUNNING
ENG 2 RUNNING
ENG 1 ALTN ENGINE 2
PWR CONTROL RUNNING RELAY 1
ENG 2 ALTN
PWR CONTROL
31-62-00-121.fm
ENGINE 2 ALTN
POWER RELAY ENGINE 2
DEU 2 RUNNING RELAY 2
31-62-00
- 329 -
CDS -- COAX COUPLER
General
There are four coaxial (coax) couplers. Each display

electronic units (DEU) graphics generator circuit card
assembly (GG CCA) transmits image data to one of the
coax couplers. Each DEU has two GG CCAs.
Each coax coupler is a one-to-six splitter. The six

outputs of a coax coupler connect to the six display
units.
31-62-00-201.002
31-62-00
- 330 -

COAX COUPLER
(FRONT VIEW)
31-62-00-201.002 COAX COUPLER

(REAR VIEW)
CDS - COAX COUPLER
31-62-00
- 331 -
CDS -- REMOTE LIGHT SENSOR
General
Two remote light sensors (RLSs) are on the top forward

part of the glareshield. The sensors point forward. The
RLSs measure ambient light with a photodiode sensor.
The output voltage (0 - 8v) is proportional to the
ambient light. Power for the RLSs comes from the
related onside outboard display units (DU).
The left RLS sends the output signal to the left

outboard DU. The right RLS sends the output signal to
the right outboard DU. The DUs change these signals
into ARINC 429 format and send them to the display
electronic units (DEU).
The DEU uses these inputs with other manual and

automatic inputs to calculate the brightness value for
all the DUs.
Each sensor weighs less that 1/2 pound. The RLS has a
field of view of 70 degrees left, 70 degrees right, 40
degrees up and 15 degrees down.
31-62-00-202.002
31-62-00
- 332 -

FWD
31-62-00-202.002
CDS - REMOTE LIGHT SENSOR
31-62-00
- 333 -
CDS -- DISPLAY UNIT
General outboard, right inboard, and upper center display units
use draw-through cooling.
The common display system uses six flat panel, liquid
crystal display (LCD) units that are the same. The CAUTION: DO NOT USE COMPRESSED AIR TO CLEAN THE SCREEN
display units (DUs) show this type of information: IN THE COOLING AIR INLET. COMPRESSED AIR WILL
PUSH CONTAMINATION INTO THE DISPLAY UNIT AND
- Primary flight information CAUSE EQUIPMENT FAILURE.
- Navigation information
- Engine information. Training Information Point
Physical Description The six DUs are interchangeable. Because of the view
angle limitations of LCD technology, the lower DU is
The DUs are on a rack. The DUs are 8 inches (20.3 cm) by 180 degrees from the other DUs. The lower center DU
8 inches and are 9.75 inches (24.8 cm) deep. Each DU handle is at the top.
weighs approximately 18 pounds (8.2 kg).
There is a bezel light sensor (BLS) at the bottom edge
of the face plate. CAUTION: DO NOT USE ABRASIVE MATERIALS WHEN YOU CLEAN
THE DISPLAY SURFACE. DO NOT TOUCH THE DISPLAY
Internal Temperature Detectors SURFACE WITH YOUR SKIN. THERE IS AN OPTICAL
COATING ON THE DISPLAY SURFACE. YOUR SKIN OR
Each DU has internal temperature detectors. If the ABRASIVE MATERIALS WILL CAUSE SCRATCHES IN THE
internal temperatures get too hot, the DU shuts down. OPTICAL COATING.
There are two temperature detectors.
NOTE: Remove the conductive plastic covers from the
If the temperature in the DU power supply is 110C or connectors before you install a DU.
greater, the DU shuts down. If the temperature at the
backlight assembly is 95C or greater, the DU shuts
down. When the DU temperature decreases, the DU comes
back on again.
31-62-00-203.002
The left outboard, left inboard, and lower center
display units use blow-through cooling. The right
31-62-00
- 334 -

DRAW THRU COOLING
BEZEL LIGHT
SENSOR
BLOW THRU COOLING LATCH

MECHANISM
COOLING AIR
HOLES
COOLING PIPE
CONNECTION
31-62-00-203.002
CONDUCTIVE COVERS
ON CONNECTORS
REMOVAL
CDS - DISPLAY UNIT
31-62-00
- 335 -
CDS -- DU - FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION
31-62-00-204.002
31-62-00
- 336 -

Display Unit Power Supply
The display unit (DU) is a flat panel liquid crystal The power supply supplies all the DU internal voltages.
display (LCD) unit. The LCD makes a high resolution This does not include the LCD and heater voltages. The
color image of the flight and engine data. power supply changes +28v dc from the EMI filter into
+5v, +/-15v, +30v, and +375v.
DU Rear Connector
Input/Output Controller
All electrical interfaces go through one rear connector
on the DU. The connector also has HIRF protection. The input/output controller (IOC) controls all digital
data in and out of the DU. This includes the graphics
These are the inputs and outputs to the DU: image data from the DEU, the discrete data input for
display unit identification, and the ARINC 429 status
- 28v dc power supply bus outputs.
- Coax inputs from coax couplers
- ARINC 429 status bus outputs to DEUs The IOC also does the BITE monitoring functions for the
- Program pins DU.
- Power to and feedback from the remote light
sensors (outboard DUs only) Beamformer
- Power to and feedback from the manual brightness
controls (all DUs). The beamformer does a decompression of the graphics
image data from the DEU to graphics image data for the
Interconnect Board LCD interface.
The interconnect board applies all power, grounds, and LCD Interface
signals necessary for transmission between functions.
The LCD interface changes image data to digital
EMI Filter voltages and puts them in the LCD source drivers.
The +28v dc input power goes through the EMI filter Voltage Reference
31-62-00-204.002
before it goes to the interconnect board.
The voltage reference changes the digital voltage
values from the LCD interface to analog voltage
31-62-00
- 337 -
reference (VREF) voltages. The VREF voltage is a
voltage that the LCD drivers use to control the image
element on the LCD for different intensities.
LCD Drivers
The LCD drivers control the 1152 X 1152 color dots that
make up the display.
Backlight Driver Assembly
The backlight driver assembly controls a fluorescent

lamp. It also controls the lamp and LCD heater
circuits. The backlight driver assembly keeps the lamp
temperature at 60C. And the backlight driver assembly
keeps the temperature for the LCD above 25C.
Lamp Assembly
The lamp assembly has a back surface that causes a

reflection of the fluorescent lamp to increase the
light output. It also has temperature sensors. When the
lamp and LCD temperature are out of range, the
backlight driver assembly adjusts the temperature.
Bezel Light Sensor
The bezel light sensor (BLS) senses incident light. The

interconnect board changes the BLS signal to a digital
value. This value goes on the ARINC 429 status buses
31-62-00-204.002
back to the DEU for light intensity control.
31-62-00
- 338 -

28V DC
DEU INPUT/
COAX POWER BEAM- LCD VOLTAGE
OUTPUT
INPUTS SUPPLY FORMER INTERFACE REFERENCE
CONTROLLER
DEU 1 ARINC 429

STATUS INTERCONNECT BOARD
BUSES
DEU 2
EMI LAMP LCD AND LIGHT

POSITION 28V DC BACKLIGHT
FILTER ASSEMBLY LCD OUT
PINS DRIVER
DRIVERS
REMOTE
LIGHT
SENSOR
BEZEL LIGHT
LIGHT
SENSOR IN
MANUAL
BRIGHTNESS
31-62-00-204.002
CONTROLS
REAR CONNECTOR
DISPLAY UNIT (TYP)
CDS - DU - FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION
31-62-00
- 339 -
CDS -- BRIGHTNESS CONTROLS
General
Two brightness control panels are below the captain and

first officer displays. The panels set the manual
brightness of the displays.
The controls for the inboard DUs and the lower center
DU are dual controls. The larger knob controls the
brightness of the DU. The small knob controls the
weather radar (WXR) or the terrain display related
brightness when the WXR or enhanced ground proximity
warning system terrain display is on.
31-62-00-207.002
31-62-00
- 340 -

MAIN PANEL MAIN PANEL

UPPER DU
UPPER
BRT CENTER
CONTROL
OFF OFF
OUTBD DU INBD DU LOWER DU LOWER INBD DU OUTBD DU
BRT BRT BRT CENTER BRT BRT
CONTROL
OVERALL
LOWER
CENTER
CONTROL
CAPTAIN BRIGHTNESS WXR/TERR FIRST OFFICER BRIGHTNESS
CONTROL PANEL OVERALL CONTROL PANEL OVERALL
WXR/TERR
WXR/TERR
31-62-00-207.002
CDS - BRIGHTNESS CONTROLS
31-62-00
- 341 -
CDS -- DISPLAY ELECTRONICS UNIT
General
The common display system has two display electronics

units (DEUs). The DEUs do these functions:
- Collect data from airplane systems

- Change the data to a display signal to show on the
display units
- Send data to other airplane systems.
Each DEU does a check that inputs are received and

monitors the status and correctness of inputs. Each DEU
also compares inputs with the other DEU.
The DEU is an 8-MCU enclosure. The DEU is approximately

10 inches (25.4 cm) wide, 7.5 inches (19 cm) tall, and
15 inches (38 cm) deep.
The DEU weighs approximately 25 pounds (11.3 kg).
Rear Connector
On the rear of the DEU there are six electrical

connectors. There are letters next to each connector.
You can get access to discrete input status at these
connectors through CDS BITE using the INPUT MONITORING
selection.
31-62-00-205.002
31-62-00
- 342 -

CDS DEU X MAIN T/BITE CDS DEU X MAINT/B ITE

D I S C R E T E S T A T U S M E N U 1 / 1 D I S C R E T E S T A T U S 1 / 2
<I NSER T A I NSERT D > IN S E R T D
A B C D E F G H J K
<I NSER T B I NSERT E > 1 - - - - - - - - - -
2 G G - - - - G O - -
I NSER T C I NSERT F > 3 - - - - - - - - - -
D I S C R E T E S T A T E S A R E 4 G - G - - - G - - -
D E F I N E D A S : 5 - - - - - - - - - -
G = G R O U N D V = 2 8 V D C 6 - - O O - - G G G G
O = O P E N X = I N V A L I D 7 G O - - G G G O G G
8 G V O G G G G V G G
<I NDEX <I N D E X
CDS BITE DISCRETE STATUS
A D
B E
C F
31-62-00-205.002
CONNECTORS REAR VIEW
DISPLAY ELECTRONICS UNIT
CDS - DISPLAY ELECTRONICS UNIT
31-62-00
- 343 -
CDS -- DEU - FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION
General bus. The ARINC 429 input/output function controls 39
receivers and 12 transmitters for the ARINC 429 buses.
The display electronics units (DEU) receive data from
other airplane systems. It changes the data to a Some digital inputs to the DEUs go to the two IOMs for
display signal that goes to the display units (DU). The integrity requirements. A comparison is done between
DEUs also route some data between different airplane the IOMs to make sure the data is correct.
systems.
Analog Discrete I/O CCA
Each DEU has nine circuit card assemblies (CCA). The
CCAs are not line replaceable units. These are the CCAs There are two analog discrete I/Os. Each discrete I/O
in each DEU: supplies an interface for 108 discrete inputs and 24
discrete outputs. One hundred inputs connect to ground
- Two input/output controller (IOC) - ARINC 429 I/O or are open, and eight connect to 28v dc or are open.
- Two analog discrete input/output (I/O) Twenty outputs connect to ground or are open, and four
- One analog signal input/output (I/O) connect to 28v dc or are open. The IOC is the interface
- One processor between the analog discrete CCAs and the processor.
- Two graphics generators
- One power supply. Analog Signal I/O CCA
Input/Output Modules There is one analog signal I/O. The analog signal I/O
supplies an interface for 21 analog inputs and 4 analog
There are two I/O modules (IOM) per DEU. One IOM has outputs. The inputs are:
three CCAs, and the other has two CCAs. The primary CCA
in each IOM is the I/O controller - ARINC 429 I/O. - Tachometer signals
There is one analog discrete I/O CCA in each IOM. Only - DC voltage signals
one of the two IOMs has an analog signal I/O CCA. - DC current signals
- AC voltage signals.
Input/Output Controller - ARINC 429 I/O
The outputs are dc voltage signals. The IOC is the
The IOC controls the inputs and outputs to the DEU and interface between the analog signal I/O CCA and the
31-62-00-206.002
it also provides the ARINC 429 I/O function. The IOC processor.
function provides the interface between the I/O CCAs
through the input/output (I/O) bus and the backplane
31-62-00
- 344 -

Processor art data and the ARINC 453 data goes out on a coax cable
to the display units.
The processor receives data from and sends data to the
IOC function over the backplane bus. Power Supply
Each processor contains two microprocessors. The The power supply supplies all the cards with power. The
microprocessors do the same operation and use the same power supply changes 28v dc input power to the
software from the memory. The outputs from these two necessary voltages.
microprocessors are compared, if the data is not the
same, there is a failure in the processor. Maintenance Messages
The processor also compares critical data that comes Failures in specific CCAs in the DEUs can cause these
from the two IOC modules. If this data is not the same, maintenance messages to be displayed on the CDS display
there is a failure in one of the IOCs. units. These are the maintenance messages:
The processor sends data to the graphics generator over - CDS MAINT
the core processor (CP) bus. - CDS FAULT.
Graphics Generator The CDS MAINT message be displayed for a partial

failure of a DEU. It is only displayed when the
There are two graphics generators (GG) that are the airplane is on the ground and at least one main engine
same. The GGs receive data from the processor over the is off. The message is displayed when ONE of these CCAs
CP bus. The primary purpose of the GG is to make the has failed in a DEU:
image data for all the display units (DUs). The GG uses
the data from the processor to make all the vector art. - Graphic generator
Each GG can make three formats at the same time so that - Analog discrete I/O CCA
one GG can supply three different displays. - Analog signal I/O CCA.
The GG also has the ARINC 453 receivers to receive The CDS FAULT message is displayed when there is a
weather radar (WXR) data and enhanced ground proximity total DEU failure. It is only displayed when the
31-62-00-206.002
warning system (EGPWS) data. WXR and EGPWS data are not airplane is on the ground and at least one main engine
displayed at the same time. A compression of the vector is off. A total DEU failure is when any ONE of the
following CCAs has failed:
31-62-00
- 345 -
- I/O controller (IOC) - ARINC 429 I/O
- Power supply
- Processor.
The message CDS FAULT is also displayed if TWO or more

of these CCAs has failed in a single DEU or ONE CCA has
failed in each DEU:
- Graphic generator
- Analog discrete I/O CCA
- Analog signal I/O CCA.
For example, if a graphics generator has failed in DEU

1, and the analog discrete I/O CCA has failed in DEU 2,
the message CDS FAULT will be displayed.
31-62-00-206.002
31-62-00
- 346 -

39 ARINC 429
INPUTS I/O CONTROLLER
- ARINC 429 I/O PROCESSOR
12 ARINC 429
OUTPUTS
108 DISCRETE ARINC 453

INPUTS ANALOG GRAPHICS WXR OR TERR INPUT
24 DISCRETE DISCRETE I/O I/O CP GENERATOR COAX
OUTPUTS BUS BUS COUPLER
B TO DU(S)
A
21 ANALOG C ARINC 453
INPUTS K GRAPHICS WXR OR TERR INPUT
ANALOG SIGNAL I/O P
4 ANALOG GENERATOR COAX
L COUPLER
OUTPUTS A TO DU(S)
N
INPUT OUTPUT MODULE E
B
U
S +5 VDC
39 ARINC 429 28 VDC
INPUTS +2.1 VDC
I/O CONTROLLER
- ARINC 429 I/O POWER +
_15 VDC
12 ARINC 429
OUTPUTS SUPPLY +12 VDC
28 VDC +3.3 VDC
I/O BATTERY
108 DISCRETE BUS VBAT
INPUTS ANALOG
24 DISCRETE DISCRETE I/O
OUTPUTS
31-62-00-206.002
INPUT OUTPUT MODULE
DEU (TYP)
CDS - DEU - FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION
31-62-00
- 347 -
CDS -- EFIS CONTROL PANEL
General - Minimums reset switch.
The EFIS control panels control the information that is The outer control is the minimums reference selector.
displayed on the inboard and outboard display units. It is used to select either radio or barometric (baro)
These are the controls on the panel: as the reference for the minimum altitude.
- Minimums controls The middle control is the minimums selector and it is

- Flight path vector switch used to set the minimum altitude value.
- Meters switch
- Barometric controls The inner control is the minimums reset (RST) switch.
- VOR/ADF switches This switch resets the radio altitude alert from amber
- Mode controls to white when the minimums reference selector is in the
- Range selector radio position.
- Traffic switch
- Weather radar switch When the minimums reference selector is in the baro
- Terrain switch position, the reset switch resets the baro altitude
- Map switches. alert from amber to white or blanks the readout if the
alert was not active.
NOTE: Some switches may be inactive and will be marked
INOP. Flight Path Vector Switch
The EFIS control panel is 4.6 inches (11.7 cm.) by 2.5 The flight path vector (FPV) switch is a momentary
inches (6.3 cm.) and 6.5 inches (16.5 cm.) deep. The action pushbutton switch. Pressing the switch will
panel weighs approximately 2.7 pounds (1.2 kg). cause the FPV symbol and the horizon line heading scale
to be displayed on the attitude display. Pressing the
Minimums Controls switch again will remove both the FPV symbol and the
heading scale.
The minimum controls are used to set the radio and
barometric minimum altitudes. These are the minimums Meters Switch
controls:
31-62-00-200.005
The meters switch (MTRS) is an momentary action
- Minimums reference selector pushbutton switch. When you select MTRS, these
- Minimums selector indications show in meters and feet:
31-62-00
- 348 -

- Altitude Mode Controls
- MCP select altitude.
The mode controls is used to select the mode that shows
Pressing the switch again will remove the metric on the ND. The mode controls consist of the mode
displays. selector and the center (CTR) switch. The mode selector
is a four position switch. These are the four
Barometric Controls positions:
The barometric controls select and set the barometric - APP

reference. These are the barometric controls: - VOR
- MAP
- Barometric reference selector - PLN.
- Barometric selector
- Barometric standard switch. The CTR switch is a momentary action pushbutton switch.
In the APP and VOR modes, the switch acts as a toggle
The outer control is the barometric reference selector. switch to change between expanded and centered
It selects either inches of mercury (IN) or displays.
hectopascals (hPa) as the barometric reference. The
middle control is the barometric selector and it sets In the MAP mode with the display in the expanded
the barometric correction value. The inner control is format, the first selection of the CTR pushbutton will
the barometric standard switch. It selects the standard cause the display to switch to the centered MAP mode.
baro setting of 29.92 inches Hg or 1013 hPa. The second push will cause the VSD display to appear
and the third push returns the display to the expanded
VOR/ADF Switches MAP mode.
The VOR/ADF switches are three position toggle type Range Selector
switches. The switch lets you show the VOR or ADF
bearing pointers on the navigation display. The bearing The range selector is an eight position selector. The
pointers will be displayed in all modes except PLAN. selector controls the range that shows in the MAP and
PLAN modes. This selector also controls the weather
31-62-00-200.005
radar range, EGPWS terrain range and TCAS range in all
modes.
31-62-00
- 349 -
Traffic Switch - ARPT, for airports not in the active route
- DATA, for altitude and ETA of route waypoints
The traffic (TFC) switch enables the onside navigation - POS, for position comparison data.
display (ND) so that TCAS traffic is displayed.
Control Panel Failure
Weather Radar Switch
If a control panel fails, the onside navigation display
The WXR switch turns on the weather radar and allows changes to a default display. These are the changes on
the weather radar data to be displayed in these modes: the default display:
- Expanded approach - The VOR and ADF selections stay the same
- Expanded VOR - All map switches are off and do not operate
- Expanded map - The expanded map mode shows
- Centered map. - A range of 40 miles shows
- The weather radar turns on (in the air only).
Terrain Switch
Also, the DISPLAYS CONTROL PANEL message will be
The TERR switch enables the enhanced ground proximity displayed on the bottom right of the onside primary
warning function and terrain data is displayed on the flight display (PFD).
ND. Terrain data will be displayed in these modes:
- Expanded approach
- Expanded VOR
- Expanded map
- Centered map.
Map Switches
The map switches let you show additional map data in

the MAP mode. These are the map switches:
31-62-00-200.005
- STA, for navigation aids not in the active route
- WPT, for waypoints not in the active route
31-62-00
- 350 -

FLIGHT PATH METERS

VECTOR SWITCH SWITCH
MINIMUMS MINS FPV MTRS BARO BAROMETRIC

CONTROLS RADIO BARO IN HPA CONTROLS
RST STD RANGE

MODE SELECTOR
CONTROLS
MAP
VOR 1 VOR PLN 20 40 80 VOR 2
APP 10 160
OFF OFF VOR/ADF
CTR 5 TFC 320
SWITCH (2)
WEATHER RADAR 640 TRAFFIC
SWITCH ADF 1 ADF 2
SWITCH
TERRAIN SWITCH
MAP SWITCHES
31-62-00-200.005
NOTE: SOME SWITCHES MAY BE MARKED INOP
CDS - EFIS CONTROL PANEL
31-62-00
- 351 -
CDS -- EFIS - ENGINE DISPLAY CONTROL PANEL
31-62-00-208.fm
31-62-00
- 352 -

General - Auto - the FMCS supplies the reference airspeeds
and gross weight automatically
The engine display control panel has: - V1 - shows the takeoff decision speed
- VR - shows the takeoff rotation speed
- N1 set - WT - the pilot can set the gross weight manually
- Speed reference set and CDS calculates flap maneuver speeds
- Fuel flow/fuel used selector - VREF - shows the landing reference speed
- Multi-function display pushbuttons. - Triangle symbol - shows an airspeed bug the pilot
can set as necessary
N1 Set Control - SET - the FMCS and the inner control can not move
the airspeed bugs.
The N1 set control sets the N1 reference bug on the
primary engine display. It has two controls. The inner control sets the airspeed value.
The outer control has these functions: Fuel Flow Switch
- AUTO - the FMCS supplies the N1 reference The fuel flow switch is a three position toggle type
automatically switch spring-loaded to the center position.
- Both - sets the N1 reference for the two engines
manually The RESET position does a reset of the fuel used
- 1 or 2 - sets the N1 reference for number 1 or displays to zero. It is enabled in the air and on the
number 2 engine manually. ground.
The inner control sets the N1 reference value. The RATE position shows the current fuel flow for each
engine.
Speed Reference Control
The USED position shows the fuel used for each engine
The speed reference selector sets the takeoff or since the last reset.
landing reference speeds on the airspeed indication. It
has two controls. The fuel used display stays in view for ten seconds
31-62-00-208.fm
after you release the switch. At that time the display
The outer control has these functions: changes to fuel flow. If you hold the switch in the
fuel used position for more than thirty seconds, CDS
31-62-00
- 353 -
assumes this as a stuck switch condition and the
display changes back to fuel flow.
Multi-function Display Controls
These are the multi-function pushbuttons:
- ENG (engine)
- SYS (system)
The ENG switch can be used to select and deselect the

compacted engine display on the upper display unit
(DU).
The SYS pushbutton can be used to select and deselect

the system page on the lower DU.
31-62-00-208.fm
31-62-00
- 354 -

SPEED REF CONTROL
N1 SET CONTROL SPD REF AUTO BRAKE

N1 SET
1 BOTH V1 DISARM a
2
2 SET VR 1 3
WT
FUEL FLOW SWITCH V REF OFF MAX
FUEL FLOW
RESET
MFD RTO
RATE ANTI SKID
ENG SYS
ANTI SKID
USED INOP a
MULTI-FUNCTION DISPLAY
31-62-00-208.fm
CONTROL SWITCHES
CDS - EFIS - ENGINE DISPLAY CONTROL PANEL
31-62-00
- 355 -
CDS -- PRIMARY FLIGHT DISPLAY OVERVIEW
General
The primary flight display (PFD) shows these

indications:
- Airspeed
- Attitude
- Altitude
- Heading
- Vertical speed
- Autoflight mode annunciations
- Flight director commands
- Landing indications
- Radio altitude
- Time critical annunciations.
31-62-00-300.003
31-62-00
- 356 -

FMC SPD LNAV VNAV PTH

VOR/LOC G/S
138 CWS R CWS P 1500
IBFI/131o
200 DME 8.1
2 200
ILS CMD
180 OM 6
2 000 2
160 10 1
3
14 20
1800
2
REF
1
120
1 600 2
1760 6
100
1000
30/132
WINDSHEAR RADIO
200 1 600
1011 HPA
186 H MAG
31-62-00-300.003
CDS - PRIMARY FLIGHT DISPLAY OVERVIEW
31-62-00
- 357 -
CDS -- PFD - AIRSPEED INDICATIONS
31-62-00-301.004
31-62-00
- 358 -

Airspeed Indication Mach Number
The airspeed indication on the primary flight display Mach number shows as a digital readout below the
(PFD) shows computed airspeed and other airspeed airspeed tape when the Mach number is more than 0.4.
related data from other airplane systems. The display does not show when the Mach number is less
than 0.38 or if the Mach number display has a failure.
Speed Tape and Current Airspeed Mach number shows in white.
The speed tape shows the computed airspeed from the air Ground Speed
data reference section of the ADIRU on a scale that
moves. The total range that shows is 121 knots with Ground speed shows as a digital readout below the
indices each ten knots and numerical readouts each 20 airspeed tape when Mach number does not show. During
knots. the change between Mach number and ground speed, a
highlight box shows for ten seconds. Ground speed shows
Current airspeed shows as a digital readout in the in white.
center of the speed tape. The lowest value the digital
readout can show is 45 knots. Speed Trend Vector
If the current airspeed is equal to or less than the The speed trend vector shows the value of the predicted
minimum operating speed from the stall management yaw airspeed in 10 seconds in relation to airplane current
dampers (SMYD), then the highlight box around the airspeed and inertial flight path acceleration. This
digital readout is amber. It goes on and off for ten vector shows when the speed trend is more than 4.5
seconds and then stays on steady until the underspeed knots. The trend vector shows in green.
condition goes away.
Selected Speed/Selected Mach Number
Airspeed Disagree Message
There is a selected speed bug and a digital readout.
If the left and right airspeed indications disagree by The value of the selected speed or Mach number is the
5 knots or more, the IAS DISAGREE message shows at the value the pilot selects on the DFCS mode control panel
bottom of the speed tape on the captain and first (MCP) or the value the FMCS calculates. The bug points
31-62-00-301.004
officer displays. The messages are amber. to the selected speed on the speed tape. The digital
readout above the speed tape shows the selected speed
31-62-00
- 359 -
or the selected Mach number. The selected speed bug and With the speed reference knob on the engine display
readout show in magenta. control panel in the AUTO position, the FMCS calculates
V1 (decision speed) and VR (rotation speed) and sends
When the selected speed or Mach number is off the them to the CDS for display.
scale, only half of the bug shows at the top or the
bottom of the speed tape. You can also set V1 and VR manually with the speed
reference knob on the engine control display panel. The
VNAV Speed Bands V1 and VR tick marks and readouts show in green.
The VNAV speed band display on the airspeed tape gives The pilot sets V2 on the DFCS mode control panel. The
the flight crew an indication of the permitted airspeed DEU then calculates V2+15 and shows it on the speed
range for the airplane during VNAV PATH descents with tape. V2+15 shows as a white bug on the speed tape.
flaps up. They are magenta in color.
The pilot can manually set a white bug with the engine
The upper limit of the speed band is the airspeed at display control panel speed reference selector. The
which VNAV disengages, and the lower limit is the pilot can set this white bug at values more than 60
autothrottle wake-up airspeed. knots. The bug shows on the speed tape, and the numeric
value shows on the bottom right of the speed tape.
Takeoff Reference Speeds
The NO VSPD message shows when V1 or VR is not valid or
The speed tape shows these reference speed bugs for the performance initialization is not in the flight
takeoff: management computer system. The NO VSPD message shows
in amber.
- Reminder for airspeed callout at 80 knots
- V1 - takeoff decision speed Landing Reference Speeds
- VR - takeoff rotation speed
- V2 - single engine climb speed The landing reference indications are landing reference
- V2 plus 15 knots (V2+15). speed (VREF), the flap/VREF indication, and VREF+20.
The landing reference speed (VREF) shows as a tick mark
The DEUs set the reminder bug at the 80 knot mark. This with the word REF to the right of the tick mark. The
31-62-00-301.004
indication is a blank after takeoff when the pilot tick mark and REF are green in color.
first retracts the flaps or when the pilot puts VREF in
the CDU.
31-62-00
- 360 -

The REF indication shows above the flap/VREF indication - Mach number
until the airspeed decreases and the reference speed is - Altitude
in the display limits. At this point, it moves up the - VMO/MMO
airspeed tape. - Flap position
- Landing gear position.
The flap/VREF indication shows at the bottom right of
the airspeed tape. It shows the flap/VREF selection Maximum maneuver speed shows the highest speed before
selected on the APPROACH REF page before landing. The the start of high speed buffet. It is a hollow amber
flap indication is only available for flap positions bar. It starts at the maximum maneuver speed and
15, 30, and 40. Other flap selections show dashes. This extends up to the maximum operating speed barber pole.
display only shows with the speed reference knob in the The FMCS uses these to calculate maximum maneuver speed
AUTO position. data:
With the speed reference knob in the AUTO position, the - Airplane gross weight
FMCS calculates VREF and sends it to the CDS for - Altitude
display. - Center of gravity
- Approved G margin.
You can also set VREF manually with the speed reference
knob on the engine control display panel. This VREF The FMCS sends the maximum maneuver speed data to the
tick mark and readout also show in green. DEUs by the SMYDs.
The DEU also calculates VREF+20 and shows it on the Minimum operating speed (stick shaker speed) shows the
speed tape. VREF +20 shows as a white bug. speed at which the stick shakers operate. It shows as a
red and black barber pole (squares of one color then
Limit Speeds the other) at the bottom of the speed tape. The minimum
speed display shows from the actual minimum speed to
Maximum operating speed shows the lesser of the VMO/MMO the bottom of the tape. The SMYDs use these to
or the landing gear or trailing edge flap placard calculate minimum operating speed:
speeds as a red and black barber pole (squares of one
color then the other) at the top of the speed tape. The - Airspeed
31-62-00-301.004
maximum speed display shows from the actual maximum - Angle of attack data
speed value to the top of the speed tape. The SMYDs use - Flap position
these to calculate maximum operating speeds: - Mach number.
31-62-00
- 361 -
Minimum operating speed does not show on the ground. You can also put in airplane weight manually on the
engine display control panel. The CDS uses this weight
Minimum maneuver speed shows the lowest speed before to calculate flap maneuver speeds. The weight shows in
the start of low speed buffet. It is a hollow amber kilograms adjacent to the speed tape and is green.
bar. It starts at the minimum maneuver speed and
extends down to the minimum operating speed barber
pole. The FMCS uses these to calculate minimum maneuver
speed data:
- Airplane gross weight

- Altitude
- Center of gravity
- Approved G margin.
The FMCS sends the minimum maneuver speed data to the

DEUs by the SMYDs. This data does not show on the
ground.
Flap Maneuver Speeds
Flap maneuver speed bugs for flap retraction or

extension show as tick marks with the flap setting on
the speed tape.
The speed bugs show for flap positions UP, 1, 2, 5, 10,

15, and 25 units. There are no flap speed bugs for flap
positions 30 and 40 units. The CDS uses FMCS gross
weight and flap lever position from the flap slat
electronic unit (FSEU) to calculate flap maneuver
speeds. Flap maneuver speed bugs and readouts show in
31-62-00-301.004
green.
31-62-00
- 362 -

SELECTED
SPEED SELECTED
MACH NUMBER
148 V2+15 .78 198 138 MANUALLY
180 SELECTED 300 SELECTED SPEED 260 220 SET BUG
SPEED BUG BUG (OFFSCALE)
160 REFERENCE 280 240 200 FLAP
TAKEOFF MAXIMUM MANEUVER
SPEEDS SPEED 180 SPEED
140 VR 260 220
V1
135
SPEED 3 MAXIMUM 15 VREF+20

122 24 MANEUVER 202 VNAV SPEED 162
TREND 2 BANDS LANDING
VECTOR SPEED
140 REFERENCE
100 220 180
CURRENT REF
SPEED
AIRSPEED 160 LANDING
80 200 AIRSPEED REFERENCE 120 MINIMUM
WT LB REMINDER BUG IAS DISAGREE SPEED MANEUVER
104000 DISAGREE
MESSAGE
REF
30/130 30/130 SPEED
MANUAL .595
GS134 GS208 GS167 MINIMUM
AIRSPEEDS LANDING
OR WEIGHT SPEED
MACH NUMBER FLAP REF
GROUNDSPEED
DISPLAY
TAKEOFF CRUISE OR CLIMB DESCENT LANDING
31-62-00-301.004
CDS - PFD - AIRSPEED INDICATIONS
31-62-00
- 363 -
CDS -- PFD - ATTITUDE INDICATIONS
31-62-00-306.003
31-62-00
- 364 -

General - Flight path vector (FPV) selected on the EFIS
control panel
The attitude indication shows in the center of the - Airplane pitch angle less than 20 degrees
primary flight display (PFD) area. This indication - Airplane bank angle less that 50 degrees.
shows the pitch and the roll attitude of the airplane.
Pitch and roll data comes from the on-side air data The heading indices have graduations in 5-degree
inertial reference system (ADIRS). These are the other increments with numerical readouts each 10 degrees.
indications that can show in the attitude area:
A selected heading bug also shows in magenta as a
- Flight director commands indication of the DFCS mode control panel (MCP)
- Traffic alert and collision avoidance system selected heading. If the selected heading is off of the
(TCAS) resolution advisories scale, the bug shows at the edge of the attitude
- Slip/skid indication.
- Pitch limit
- Flight path vector. Flight Director Commands
Pitch and Roll Indications The flight director command bars show in magenta when
the flight director is on. The DFCS flight control
Pitch attitude shows as a white horizon line with pitch computers make the calculations for the command bars.
indices and graduations in 2.5 degree increments.
TCAS Resolution Advisories
Roll attitude shows as a roll pointer on a white set
scale at the top of the attitude indication. When roll When there is a traffic conflict, CDS shows TCAS
attitude is more than 35 degrees, the roll pointer is resolution advisories (RAs) from the TCAS computer on
amber with a fill. The indication changes back to the attitude indication. The RA symbology gives visual
normal when the roll attitude is less than 32 degrees. cues and guidance to the flight crew. RAs are red.
Horizon Heading Line Indication Slip/Skid Indication
Airplane heading data shows as a heading scale aligned The slip/skid indication shows the lateral acceleration
31-62-00-306.003
with the horizon line. This indication shows for these of the airplane. The indication shows as a white
conditions: rectangular box below the roll pointer. If there is no
lateral acceleration, the roll pointer and slip/skid
31-62-00
- 365 -
indication align. The ADIRUs calculate the lateral there are no F/Ds or TCAS RAs, the FPV symbol is bright
acceleration. white.
The slip/skid indication has a white fill when the Comparator Function Annunciations
lateral acceleration is more than approximately 0.1g.
If the roll attitude is more than 35 degrees, and the The comparator function annunciations are PITCH and
lateral acceleration is more than 0.1g, the slip/skid ROLL. These annunciations show in amber if the CDS
indication changes to an amber fill. calculates a difference of more than 5 degrees between
the captain and first officer pitch or roll display
Pitch Limit Indication values.
The pitch limit indication (PLI) shows the maximum When the PITCH or ROLL annunciations first show, the
pitch-up limit before the stick shakers start. PLI is annunciation flashes for the first 10 seconds and then
amber and shows as an eyebrow symbol. The stall stays on steady.
management yaw dampers (SMYD) calculate PLI.
The pitch limit indication shows when the flaps are not
up.
When the flaps are up, the pitch limit indication shows
if the airspeed goes near the minimum operation speed
(stall speed).
Flight Path Vector Indication
The flight path vector (FPV) indication shows in white

when you select FPV on the EFIS control panel. The
indication shows the movement of the airplane in
relation to the horizon and the airplane heading. The
ADIRUs calculate FPV.
31-62-00-306.003
The FPV shows as dim white when the flight directors
(F/D) or TCAS resolution advisories (RAs) show. If
31-62-00
- 366 -

ROLL POINTER
SLIP/SKID
PITCH LIMIT
TCAS RESOLUTION FLIGHT DIRECTOR

ADVISORY COMMANDS
HORIZON LINE
HEADING SCALE
AIRPLANE SYMBOL 150
HORIZON LINE
SELECTED HEADING 140
BUG
FLIGHT PATH 130
VECTOR TCAS RESOLUTION
ADVISORY
120
PITCH COMPARATOR ROLL COMPARATOR
ANNUNCIATION PITCH ROLL ANNUNCIATION
31-62-00-306.003
CDS - PFD - ATTITUDE INDICATIONS
31-62-00
- 367 -
CDS -- PFD - ALTITUDE INDICATIONS
Altitude Indication Selected Altitude and Altitude Alert
The altitude indication on the primary flight display The selected altitude is set on the DFCS mode control
(PFD) displays the barometric altitude and altitude panel (MCP) and is displayed as a bug on the altitude
related data from other airplane systems. tape and a digital readout above the tape. The bug and
the digital readout are magenta in color.
Altitude Tape and Current Altitude
When the selected altitude is offscale, only half of
The altitude tape displays the barometric altitude from the bug is displayed at the top or bottom of the
the air data reference section of the onside ADIRU on a altitude tape.
moving scale. It has a range of 806 feet with indices
every 100 feet and numerical readouts every 200 feet. Altitude alert occurs when the airplane is 900 feet
from the selected altitude. The white highlight box
Current altitude is displayed as a digital readout in around the current altitude digital readout increases
the center of the altitude tape. The total range of in brightness until the airplane is within 200 feet of
this display is -100 feet to 50000 feet. the selected altitude.
Altitude Disagree Message If the airplane deviates from the selected altitude by
more than 200 feet, the highlight box around the
If the captain and first officer altitudes are digital readout changes to amber. It flashes on and off
different by more than 200 feet, the amber ALT DISAGREE until the altitude is within 200 feet or the selected
message shows at the bottom of the two altitude tapes. altitude is reset on the DFCS MCP.
AOA Disagree Message Metric Altitude and Metric Selected Altitude
If the left and right angle of airflow (AOA) values are Barometric altitude can be displayed in both meters
different by more than 10 degrees for more than 10 andf feet by selecting MTRS on the EFIS control panel.
seconds, the amber AOA DISAGREE message shows below the The metric altitude is displayed as a digital value
selected baro minimums display. The message is above the current altitude digital readout box with the
inhibited when the airplane is below 400 feet radio letter M. The metric altitude is white and the letter M
31-62-00-302.002
altitude with the following exception. If the message is cyan.
is on when the airplane is above 400 feet, the inhibit
is changed to airspeed less than 60 knots.
31-62-00
- 368 -

The selected altitude in meters is also displayed above by more than 300 feet. As the airplane descends through
the altitude tape. The selected metric altitude is the transition altitude by more than 300 feet, the
magenta and the M is cyan. barometric correction is displayed in amber if standard
stays selected.
Landing Altitude Indications
Selected Barometric Minimums
The current landing altitude indication is displayed as
an amber hatched area on the altitude tape. It is Minimum descent altitudes are selected using the
calculated by the FMCS and is displayed when an active barometric minimums setting on the onside EFIS control
route has been entered by the flight crew. panel. The triangular bug and the line point to the
selected barometric minimum value on the altitude tape.
The landing altitude reference bar is displayed from The BARO legend and digital readout show below the
the current landing altitude up to 1000 feet. It is attitude indication display. They are green in color.
amber from the current landing altitude to 500 feet, Barometric minimums can be set from -100 feet to a
and white from 500 feet to 1000 feet. maximum of 15000 feet in 1 foot increments.
Barometric Reference When the airplane descends to the barometric minimums

altitude, the following flash on and off in amber for
Barometric correction for the ADIRUs is selected from three seconds and then stay on steady amber until a
the onside EFIS control panel and is displayed below reset is done:
the altitude tape. It can be selected in inches of
mercury (in Hg) or hecto Pascals (HPa). The reference - BARO legend
display IN or HPA shows to indicate which reference is - Digital readout
selected. The barometric correction readouts are green. - Minimums bug
- Line.
The STD button on the EFIS control panel is used to
select standard barometric correction. When you select The following can do a reset of the barometric minimums
it, STD replaces the numerical correction readout. It alert:
shows in green.
- The airplane climbs above the minimums
31-62-00-302.002
The barometric correction annunciation shows in amber - The reset (RST) button on the EFIS control panel is
if standard is not selected on the EFIS control panel selected.
and the airplane climbs above the transition altitude - The airplane lands.
31-62-00
- 369 -
The barometric minimums display can go blank for any of
these:
- The (RST) button on the EFIS control panel is

selected while the switch is set to BARO minimums
- Radio minimums is selected on the EFIS control
panel to make the BARO minimums digital value
blank; the BARO minimums bug stays in view
- BARO minimums of -100 feet or more is selected.
31-62-00-302.002
31-62-00
- 370 -

SELECTED ALTITUDE
1676M 152M IN METERS
5500 500
SELECTED ALTITUDE
IN FEET
SELECTED ALTITUDE 5200
600
BUG (SHOWN OFFSCALE)
SELECTED
ALTITUDE BUG
6
2
5000 400
1
ALTITUDE
61 M IN METERS
0240
ALTITUDE
SELECTED BARO 1
MINIMUMS BUG
AND LINE
2
LANDING ALTITUDE 000 6

ALTITUDE
REFERENCE BAR DISAGREE
LANDING MESSAGE
BARO ALT
ALTITUDE DISAGREE
100AOA BAROMETRIC REFERENCE
SELECTED BARO INCHES (IN) OR
MINIMUMS
DISAGREE 29.96 IN HECTOPASCALS (HPA)
AOA
31-62-00-302.002
DISAGREE BAROMETRIC
MESSAGE REFERENCE VALUE
CDS - PFD - ALTITUDE INDICATIONS
31-62-00
- 371 -
CDS -- PFD - VERTICAL SPEED INDICATIONS
Vertical Speed Indications
The vertical speed indication shows vertical speed from

the inertial reference section of the on-side air data
inertial reference system (ADIRS). Vertical speed shows
as a white pointer against the vertical speed scale.
The total display range is +/-6000 feet.
If the vertical speed is more than 400 ft/min, then

vertical speed also shows as a digital value. This
digital value is to the nearest 50 feet. The digital
value shows above the vertical speed scale if it is a
positive vertical speed. The digital value shows below
the vertical speed scale if it is a negative vertical
speed.
You can select target vertical speed from the DFCS mode
control panel. This speed shows as a magenta bug on the
left of the vertical speed display. The bug is 2 lines
with a center reference point.
31-62-00-303.002
31-62-00
- 372 -

6
2
1
VERTICAL SPEED
POINTER
SELECTED VERTICAL
SPEED BUG
1
2
VERTICAL SPEED 6
(DIGITAL VALUE)
500
31-62-00-303.002
CDS - PFD - VERTICAL SPEED INDICATIONS
31-62-00
- 373 -
CDS -- PFD - HEADING INDICATION
Heading Indications selected heading bug and the digital readout are
magenta.
The heading indication on the primary flight display
(PFD) shows heading/track data on a partial compass
rose.
Heading Indication
Current heading from the inertial reference section of

the on-side air data inertial reference system (ADIRS)
shows as a triangular pointer at the top of the compass
rose. There are indices each 5 degrees and numerical
readouts each 10 degrees.
The heading reference (MAG or TRU) shows to the right

of the heading indication. MAG or TRU show in green.
When TRU shows, a white status box shows around the TRU
annunciation. When you change from TRU to MAG, a green
highlight box shows around the MAG annunciation for 10
seconds.
Track Indication
Current track from the flight management computer

system (FMCS) shows as a white line that extends to the
compass rose.
Selected Heading
The pilot uses the DFCS mode control panel to set the
31-62-00-304.002
selected heading that shows by a heading bug on the
compass rose. A digital readout of the selected heading
also shows to the left of the heading indication. The
31-62-00
- 374 -

SELECTED
TRACK LINE HEADING HEADING BUG
135 H MAG
SELECTED HEADING HEADING REFERENCE

(DIGITAL READOUT) AND HIGHLIGHT BOX
31-62-00-304.002
CDS - PFD - HEADING INDICATION
31-62-00
- 375 -
CDS -- PFD - FLIGHT MODE ANNUNCIATIONS
Flight Mode Annunciations The first line shows the active roll mode. The second
line shows the armed roll mode.
These are the types of flight mode annunciations (FMA):
These are the active roll modes that can be displayed:
- Autothrottle
- Roll - HDG SEL
- Pitch - FAC (Final approach course)
- Autopilot status. - B/CRS
- VOR/LOC
Autothrottle Mode Annunciation - LNAV.
The autothrottle mode annunciation is displayed in All active roll modes are displayed in green. A green
column one of the FMA. These are the autothrottle modes highlight box shows around the roll mode for ten
that can be displayed: seconds when the mode changes.
- N1 These are the armed roll modes that can be displayed:

- GA
- RETARD - VOR/LOC
- FMC SPD - FAC (Final approach course)
- MCP SPD - B/CRS
- THR HLD - LNAV
- TEST - LNAV VOR/LOC
- ARM. - LNAV FAC
- LNAV BCRS.
All autothrottle modes but the ARM mode are displayed
in green. The ARM mode is displayed in white. A green Armed roll modes are displayed in white.
highlight box shows around the autothrottle mode for
ten seconds when the mode changes. Pitch Mode Annunciations
Roll Mode Annunciations The pitch mode annunciation is displayed in column
31-62-00-305.004
three of the FMA. Two lines of annunciation are
The roll mode annunciation is displayed in column two available. The first line shows the active pitch mode.
of the FMA. Two lines of annunciation are available. The second line shows the armed pitch mode.
31-62-00
- 376 -

These are the active pitch modes that can be displayed: Autopilot and Flight Director Status
- TO/GA The autopilot and flight director status show in the

- V/S center above the attitude indication. These are the
- ALT ACQ indications that can be displayed:
- ALT HOLD
- VNAV SPD - CMD (command)
- VNAV PTH - FD (flight director)
- VNAV ALT - TEST
- MCP SPD - SINGLE CH (single channel)
- G/S - AUTOPILOT
- G/P - CWS R (control wheel steering roll)
- FLARE. - CWS P (control wheel steering pitch).
All active pitch modes are displayed in green. A green CMD is displayed when one of the DFCS flight control
highlight box shows around the pitch mode for ten computers are engaged in command. It is green in color.
seconds when the mode changes. A green highlight box shows for ten seconds when the
DFCS status changes.
These are the armed pitch modes that can be displayed:
FD is displayed when the DFCS flight directors on the
- G/S DFCS mode control panel are selected on. It is green in
- G/P color. A green highlight box shows for ten seconds when
- V/S the DFCS status changes.
- G/S V/S
- G/P V/S TEST is displayed when the DFCS is in test mode. It is
- FLARE. green in color and can only be displayed on the ground.
Armed pitch modes are displayed in white. SINGLE CH is displayed during an autoland approach
before DFCS dual channel engagement. It is displayed in
amber. An amber highlight box shows for ten seconds
31-62-00-305.004
when SINGLE CH first shows.
31-62-00
- 377 -
AUTOPILOT is displayed when the DFCS is in CMD, an FMC
or LOC G/P approach is being made and the airplane is
below 100 feet radio altitude. It is displayed in amber
and flashes for 10 seconds.
CWS R and CWS P show when the DFCS is engaged in the

control wheel steering (CWS) mode or changes back to
CWS. They are displayed in amber. An amber highlight
box shows for ten seconds when CWS becomes active.
31-62-00-305.004
31-62-00
- 378 -

AUTOTHROTTLE ROLL MODE PITCH MODE

MODE ANNUNCIATION ANNUNCIATONS ANNUNCIATIONS
FMC SPD LNAV VNAV PTH

VOR/LOC G/S
100 CWS R CWS P 10 000
110.90/123o
DME 12.2
80 ILS FD
6
AUTOPILOT
AND FLIGHT
DIRECTOR STATUS
SINGLE
CMD CH
AUTOPILOT TEST
31-62-00-305.004
CDS - PFD - FLIGHT MODE ANNUNCIATIONS
31-62-00
- 379 -
CDS -- PFD - LANDING INDICATIONS
Landing Indication of deviation. The expanded scale shows for these
conditions:
These are the landing indications:
- LOC deviation is less than 5/8 dot
- Localizer and glideslope indications - LOC or APP mode is engaged
- Scale identifier annunciation - ILS course and the airplane track are less than 5
- Approach reference data degrees of each other
- Rising runway indications - An autopilot is in CMD, or flight director is on.
- Marker beacon indications.
The glideslope scale is a standard four-dot scale. One
Localizer and Glideslope Indications dot is 0.35 degrees of deviation. The pointer gives
fly-to commands to make an intercept with the
Localizer and glideslope deviation are displayed below glideslope beam.
and to the right of the attitude indication. The
localizer and glideslope scales appear when you select There is no expanded scale for glideslope deviation.
a valid ILS frequency on the on-side navigation control
panel. The pointers appear when the multi mode receiver ILS Deviation Warnings
(MMR) receives valid localizer and glideslope signals.
The scales are white and the pointers are magenta. The scales change to steady amber and the pointers
flash in response to a discrete from the DFCS flight
When the localizer and glideslope deviation is more control computers if excessive deviation occurs during
than 2.5 dots, the localizer and glideslope pointers an approach. The deviation threshold for the localizer
are unfilled. When the deviation decreases to less than is a value of more than 0.293 degrees. For glideslope,
2.5 dots, the pointers are filled. the threshold is 0.35 degrees.
The localizer scale can show the standard display or The FCCs also send a test discrete to the DEUs when the
the expanded scale. For the standard four dot scale one autopilot is engaged in command, and the altitude is
dot is equal to 1 degree of deviation. The indication less than 1500 feet. This causes the localizer and
shows deviation to the left or right of the runway glideslope scales to turn amber for six seconds. At the
centerline. same time the pointers will remain in view for two
31-62-00-307.004
seconds, go out of view for two seconds and come back
A two-dot expanded scale can replace the four-dot into view again. If the test is successful the displays
scale. For the expanded scale, each dot is 0.5 degrees will go back to normal.
31-62-00
- 380 -

Integrated Approach Navigation NOTE: The default indication is ILS.
Integrated approach navigation (IAN) allows the flight ILS Approach Reference Data
crew to select both the usual ILS approaches and FMC
based approaches. The FMCS calculates IAN final The localizer frequency or identifier and the DFCS mode
approach course (FAC) and glidepath (G/P) deviations control panel selected runway heading are displayed
for these approaches. This data goes to the enhanced above and to the left of the attitude indication (AI)
digital flight control system (EDFCS), common display when a valid ILS frequency has been tuned. The
system (CDS), and enhanced ground proximity warning localizer identifier is normally displayed but the
system (EGPWS) for the guidance, display, and alert localizer frequency is displayed if the identifier is
functions. not available. They are white in color.
The landing indications for IAN are displayed almost Below the localizer identifier/frequency, the DME
identically to the current indications for an ILS distance to the colocated DME station if available is
approach. displayed. They are white in color.
Scale Identifier Annunciations All the above indications are white in color.
The scale identifier annunciation shows above and to IAN Reference Data
the left of the attitude indication. They are white in
color. The IAN approach identifier and the DFCS mode control
panel selected runway heading are displayed above and
These are the IAN scale identifier annunciations: to the left of the AI when a valid approach identifier
has been selected with the FMCS MCDU. They are white in
- ILS - Istrument landing system color.
- FMC - FMCS IR NAV approach
- LOC/ G/P - localizer/glidepath approach Below the approach identifier, the missed approach
- LOC/VNAV - localizer/VNAV approach waypoint and the distance to it are displayed. They are
- LNAV/ G/S - LNAV/glideslope approach white in color.
- FAC/VNAV - final approach course/VNAV
31-62-00-307.004
- LNAV/ G/P - LNAV/glidepath approach
- LNAV/VNAV - LNAV/VNAV approach.
31-62-00
- 381 -
ILS Frequency or Runway Heading Disagree radio altitude, the rising runway moves up on the
attitude indication. This gives the flight crew a
If there is a localizer frequency disagreement between visual indication of radio altitude during final
the captain and first officer for more than 60 seconds, approach and flare.
the frequency display changes to amber and an amber
horizontal line shows through the frequency. Marker Beacon Indications
If the same frequencies were selected, then the The marker beacon indication is displayed when the
selected runway headings are compared. If the runway airplane is above an inner, middle, or outer marker
headings do not agree for more than 60 seconds, the beacon. The indication flashes on and off at the rate
runway heading value changes to amber and an amber of the marker beacon identifier.
horizontal line shows through the runway heading.
IAN/GLS Identifier or Runway Heading Disagree
If there is an approach identifier disagreement between

the captain and first officer for more than 60 seconds,
the identifier display changes to amber and an amber
horizontal line shows through the identifier on both
PFDs.
If the same approach identifiers are selected, the

selected runway headings are compared. If the runway
headings do not agree for more than 60 seconds, the
runway heading value changes to amber and an amber
horizontal line shows through the runway heading.
Rising Runway Indication
The rising runway shows below 2500 feet radio altitude
31-62-00-307.004
with the localizer pointer in view. The rising runway
remains at the bottom of the PFD display until the
radio altitude is less than 200 feet. Below 200 feet
31-62-00
- 382 -

LOCALIZER
IDENTIFIER
OR FREQUENCY RUNWAY HEADING
DME DISTANCE
IBFI/130o
1 SCALE ID ANNUNCIATION
DME 3.4
ILS MARKER BEACON
INDICATION
MM
IBFI/130o
DME 3.4 10 10
FREQUENCY DISAGREE GLIDESLOPE
INDICATIONS
IBFI/130o
DME 3.4 10 10
HEADING DISAGREE
20 1200 20
EXPANDED SCALE
RISING RUNWAY LOCALIZER

(PARKED) INDICATIONS
31-62-00-307.004 1 IRAV 13R/310o IAN APPROACH IDENTIFIER/RUNWAY HEADING

RE13L 18.0 DISTANCE TO MISSED APPROACH WAYPOINT
CDS - PFD - LANDING INDICATIONS
31-62-00
- 383 -
CDS -- PFD - RADIO ALTITUDE AND RADIO MINIMUMS INDICATIONS
General - Airplane increases altitude above the radio
minimums value
The radio altitude indication on the primary flight - Airplane does a landing.
display (PFD) shows radio altitude (RA) and radio
minimums data. The total range of the radio altimeter The radio minimums indication goes blank for one of
is -20 feet to 2500 feet. these conditions:
Radio Altitude - Radio minimums value of less than zero

- Selection of the RST (reset) button on the EFIS
The radio altitude shows in white as a digital value in control panel while there is no radio minimums
the bottom center of the attitude indication. When RA alert
first shows, a white highlight box shows for 10 - Selection of BARO minimums on the EFIS control
seconds. Below 100 feet, RA changes in 2-foot panel.
increments. From 100 feet to 500 feet, RA changes in
10-foot increments. Above 500 feet, the increments If the radio minimums display is blank, the radio
become 20 feet. minimums alert display does not occur.
Radio Minimums
You select the radio minimums altitude on the on-side

EFIS control panel. This altitude shows in green below
and to the right of the radio altitude.
When the airplane does a descent through the radio

minimums altitude, the radio minimums indication
changes to amber and flashes for 3 seconds. The radio
altitude indication changes to steady amber.
A radio minimums alert reset occurs for one of these

conditions:
31-62-00-308.002
- RST (reset) button pushed on the EFIS control
panel
31-62-00
- 384 -

RADIO ALTITUDE RADIO MINIMUM
600
RADIO
200
31-62-00-308.002
CDS - PFD - RADIO ALTITUDE AND RADIO MINIMUMS INDICATIONS
31-62-00
- 385 -
CDS -- PFD - TIME CRITICAL ANNUNCIATIONS
31-62-00-309.002
31-62-00
- 386 -

General - Mode 2 - closure rate too much
- Mode 3 - sink rate after T/O or G/A
These annunciations are the time critical - Mode 4 - terrain clearance not sufficient.
annunciations:
Instrument Switch Annunciation
- WINDSHEAR
- PULL UP The INSTR SWITCH (instrument switch) annunciation shows
- INSTR SWITCH in amber below the altitude tape. The message shows
- DSPLY SOURCE when the captain and first officer displays use the
- CDS FAULT same source for inertial reference data. For this
- CDS MAINT. condition, the IRS source select switch is in the BOTH
ON L or BOTH ON R position.
Ground Proximity Warning System Time Critical
Annunciations Display Source and Maintenance Annunciations
The ground proximity warning system (GPWS) time The display source and maintenance time critical
critical annunciations show in red below the attitude annunciations show in the bottom left corner of the
indication. Only 1 GPWS annunciation shows at a time. display units (DU). Only 1 annunciation shows at a
time. These are the annunciations:
These are the GPWS annunciations:
- DSPLY SOURCE
- WINDSHEAR - CDS FAULT
- PULL UP. - CDS MAINT.
WINDSHEAR shows for a GPWS mode 7 alert (reactive DSPLY Source

windshear) only.
The DSPLY SOURCE annunciation shows in amber for a CDS
PULL UP shows for these GPWS modes: FAULT if the airplane is in the air or is on the ground
with the main engines in operation.
- Terrain awareness (TA)
31-62-00-309.002
- Terrain clearance floor (TCF) The annunciation also shows on the ground or in the air
- Runway field clearance floor (RFCF) if the source select switch is in the ALL ON 1 or ALL ON
- Mode 1 - descent rate too much 2 position.
31-62-00
- 387 -
CDS Fault
The CDS FAULT annunciation shows in amber for a failure

of the CDS. For CDS FAULT to show, the airplane must be
on the ground and at least one main engine not in
operation.
CDS Maint
The CDS MAINT annunciation shows in white on the ground

for a partial failure of the DEU. For CDS MAINT to
show, the airplane must be on the ground and at least
one main engine not in operation.
31-62-00-309.002
31-62-00
- 388 -

GPWS ANNUNCIATION
WINDSHEAR BARO
-200
100
1011 HPA
CDS
FAULT 135 H MAG INSTR SWITCH
DISPLAY SOURCE INSTRUMENT SWITCH

AND MAINTENANCE ANNUNCIATION
ANNUNCIATIONS
31-62-00-309.002
CDS - PFD - TIME CRITICAL ANNUNCIATIONS
31-62-00
- 389 -
CDS -- PFD - SYMBOLOGY - 1
Primary Flight Display Symbology
The primary flight display (PFD) shows different

symbols and data. These symbols and data show in the
table.
These are the colors for the symbols and data that show
on the PFD:
- Green (G) - dynamic conditions

- White (W) - present status and scales
- Magenta (M) - command data and symbols
- Cyan (C) - non-active or background data
- Amber (A) - cautions, faults, and flags
- Red (R) - warnings.
31-62-00-335.002
31-62-00
- 390 -

SYMBOL NAME REMARKS
AIRPLANE SYMBOL (W) SHOWS AGAINST PITCH AND ROLL DISPLAYS THAT MOVE
SOURCE: DEU
SHOWS WITH FLIGHT DIRECTOR SWITCH ON AND VALID STEERING

FLIGHT DIRECTOR (M) COMMANDS
SOURCE: FCC
BOTTOM EDGE SHOWS PITCH LIMIT; SHOWS IF T/E
FLAPS NOT UP OR POP UP IF AIRPLANE GETS NEAR A STALL
PITCH LIMIT (A) CONDITION
SOURCE: SMYD
20 20
10 10
PITCH SCALE (W) SCALE THAT MOVES SHOWS PITCH; CENTER LINE IS HORIZON
SOURCE: ADIRS
10 10
20 20
ROLL SCALE (W) FIXED SCALE SHOWS ROLL VALUE; ROLL POINTER MOVES AGAINST
ROLL POINTER (W) SCALE; WHEN ROLL >35 DEGREES, ROLL POINTER
ROLL POINTER ALERT (A) IS AMBER; SLIP SKID INDICATOR HAS FILL (W) WHEN LATERAL
SLIP/SKID (W) ACCN >0.1G; SLIP/SKID HAS FILL (A) WHEN ROLL >35 DEGREES
SLIP/SKID ALERT (FILLED A) AND LATERAL ACCN >0.1G
SOURCES: ROLL-ADIRS, ALERTS-DEU
SHOWS PATH THROUGH AIR;
FLIGHT PATH VECTOR (W) EFIS CONTROL PANEL CONTROLS DISPLAY
SOURCE: ADIRS
SHOWS WHEN ADIRU PITCH AND/OR ROLL DIFFERENCE IS 5 DEGREES
31-62-00-335.002
PITCH ROLL PITCH/ROLL FLAGS (A) OR MORE;
AS AN OPTION, DISPLAY FLASHES FOR FIRST 10 SECONDS
SOURCE: DEU
CDS - PFD - SYMBOLOGY - 1
31-62-00
- 391 -

table.
on the PFD:

31-62-00-336.002
31-62-00
- 392 -

SYMBOL NAME REMARKS

OM IS OUTER MARKER; MM IS MIDDLE MARKER; IM IS INNER MARKER,
MARKER BEACON DISPLAYS
OM MM IM FT BACKCOURSE MARKER, OR AIRWAYS MARKER; FT IS FUNCTIONAL
OM (C) MM (A) IM (W) FT (W)
TEST; SOURCE: VOR/MB1
POINTER SHOWS LOCALIZER DEVIATION; WHEN POINTER IS LESS
LOC SCALE (W) THAN 2.5 DOTS DEVIATION, THE POINTER HAS A FILL; IF CDS
LOC SCALE WARNING (A) FINDS A BACKCOURSE APPROACH, THE SENSE OF DEVIATION
LOC POINTER (M) CHANGES; FOR DEVIATION WARNING, SCALE CHANGES COLOR (A),
LOC POINTER WARNING (A) AND POINTER FLASHES; SOURCES: LOC-ILS RECEIVER OR MMR;
BACKCOURSE-DEU; DEVIATION WARNING-FCC
EXPANDED LOCALIZER POINTER SHOWS LOCALIZER DEVIATION WHEN POINTER IS LESS THAN
DEVIATION SCALE (W) 5/8 DOT, AND THE AUTOPILOT IS IN COMMAND; SOURCE: DEU
POINTER SHOWS GLIDESLOPE DEVIATION; WHEN POINTER IS LESS

G/S SCALE (W) THAN 2.5 DOTS DEVIATION, THE POINTER HAS A FILL; IF CDS
G/S SCALE WARNING (A) FINDS A BACKCOURSE APPROACH, POINTER IS REMOVED;
G/S POINTER (M) FOR DEVIATION WARNING, SCALE CHANGES COLOR (A), AND POINTER
G/S POINTER WARNING (A) FLASHES
SOURCES: GLIDE SLOPE-ILS RECEIVER OR MMR; BACKCOURSE-DEU
DEVIATION WARNING-FCC
SHOWS LOC FREQUENCY UNTIL RECEIVER SENDS STATION IDENTIFIER;

IF CAPT AND F/O FREQUENCIES DISAGREE; FREQUENCY SHOWS
LOC FREQ/IDENT (W) AMBER WITH AMBER LINE THROUGH IT;
IBFI/130o LOC FREQ/IDENT WARNING (A) SHOWS SELECTED RUNWAY HEADING; IF CAPT AND F/O SELECTIONS
DME 3.4 SEL RNWY HDG (W) DISAGREE, HEADING SHOWS AMBER WITH AMBER LINE THROUGH IT;
SEL RNWY HDG WARNING (A) SHOWS DME DISTANCE
DME DISPLAY (W) SOURCES: FREQ/IDENT-LOC RECEIVER OR MMR, SELECTED RUNWAY
HEADING-DFCS MCP, DME DISTANCE-DME, DISAGREEE LOGIC-DEU
SHOWS AFTER LOCALIZER CAPTURE WITH RA <2500 FEET; SET
31-62-00-336.002
RISING RUNWAY (G) AT BOTTOM OF ATTITUDE INDICATION UNTIL RA <200 FEET WHEN
STEM (M) IT GOES UP TO AIRPLANE SYMBOL ON LANDING
SOURCE: RA
31-62-00
- 393 -
The primary flight display (PFD) displays different

symbols and data. These symbols and data show in these
tables.
on the PFD:
- Green (G) - Dynamic conditions

- White (W) - Present status, scales
- Magenta (M) - Command information, symbols
- Cyan (C) - Non-active or background information
- Amber (A) - Cautions, faults, flags
- Red (R) - Warnings.
31-62-00-337.002
31-62-00
- 394 -

SYMBOL NAME REMARKS
DIGITAL DISPLAY SHOWS RADIO ALITITUDE. RADIO VALUE SHOWS

RADIO ALTITUDE (W) RADIO MINIMUMS. ALERT SHOWS ON DESCENT IF VISIBLE. TO
RADIO 200 RADIO ALTITUDE ALERT (A) RESET RADIO MINS ALERT PUSH RST ON EFIS CONTROL PANEL. TO
-4 RADIO MINIMUMS READOUT (G) MAKE RADIO MINS BLANK, SELECT RADIO MINS BELOW ZERO OR
PUSH RST WHILE NOT IN ALERT CONDITION.
RADIO MINIMUMS ALERT (A)
SOURCES: ALTITUDE-RA; MINIMUMS-EFIS CP
5200
DIGITAL ALTITUDE READOUT ON MOVING TAPE WITH INDICES AND

5000 NUMBERS. NUMBERS SHOW EVERY 200 FEET UNLESS COVERED BY
ALT TAPE QNH (GRAY) CURSOR. LEADING NUMBER IN DIGITAL READOUT IS MASKED BELOW
1474 M ALT TAPE QFE (GREEN)
4 8 40
10000 FEET.
ALT READOUT (W) DIGITAL READOUT BORDER IS HIGHLIGHTED DURING THE ALTITUDE
ALT READOUT BORDER (W) ALERT FUNCTION. IT ALSO TURNS AMBER DURING THE ALTITUDE
ALT READOUT BORDER ALERT (A) ALERT WARNING FUNCTION.
4600 SOURCE: ADIRU; ALTITUDE ALERT-FCC
1550M SHOWS SELECTED ALTITUDE IN FEET FROM THE DFCS MCP. WILL
SELECTED ALTITUDE (M) ALSO SHOW SELECTED ALTITUDE IN METERS WHEN MTRS SELECTED
5100 SELECTED ALTITUDE BUG (M) ON EFIS C/P. SELECTED ALTITUDE BUG SHOWS AT SIDE OF TAPE.
SELECTED ALTITUDE IN IF IT IS OFFSCALE, ONLY HALF THE BUG SHOWS.
METERS (M) SOURCES: SELECTED ALTITUDE-FCC; SELECTED ALTITUDE IN
M DISPLAY (C) METERS-DEU; SELECTED ALTITUDE BUG-DEU
BARO 1400 BARO MINIMUMS (G) ALERT (A) WORD BARO AND VALUE SHOW WHEN BARO MINS SELECTED. BLANK
BARO MINIMUMS ALERT (A) WHEN RADIO MINS SELECTED. BUG WITH BAR SHOWS WHEN
BARO MINS BUG (G) ALERT (A) BARO MINS SELECTED. BUG ONLY SHOWS WHEN RADIO
31-62-00-337.002
BARO MINS BUG ALERT (A) MINS SELECTED. ALERT SHOWS ON DESCENT ONLY. PUSH RST ON
BARO MINS BUG (G) (RADIO EFIS CP TO RESET. PUSH RST WHILE NOT IN ALERT OR SELECT
MINS ACTIVE) -100 FT TO BLANK. SOURCES: VALUE-EFIS CP; ALERT-DEU
31-62-00
- 395 -

table.
on the PFD:

31-62-00-338.002
31-62-00
- 396 -

SYMBOL NAME REMARKS
LANDING BAR SHOWS ALTITUDE ABOVE TOUCHDOWN; THE TOP AREA

ALTITUDE TAPE WITH LANDING IS FROM 500 FEET TO 1000 FEET ABOVE TOUCHDOWN; THE BOTTOM
ALTITUDE ALERT/CAUTION BAR AREA IS FROM TOUCHDOWN TO 500 FEET
UPPER ALERT BAR (W) SOURCE: DEU
LOWER CAUTION BAR (A) LANDING ALTITUDE REFERENCE SHOWS FMC ROUTE DESTINATION
LANDING ALTITUDE REF (A) AIRPORT LANDING ALTITUDE
SOURCE: FMCS
1
VERTICAL SPEED SHOWS FROM +/-6000 FPM; VERTICAL SPEED BUG
VERTICAL SPEED TAPE (W) SHOWS SELECTED VERTICAL SPEED; DIGITAL READOUT SHOWS WHEN
VERTICAL SPEED BUG (M) VERTICAL SPEED >400 FPM. READOUT SHOWS ABOVE
DIGITAL READOUT (W) FOR + VERTICAL SPEED AND BELOW FOR - VERTICAL SPEED;
VERT SPEED POINTER (W) SOURCES: RA-TCAS; BUG-FCC; VERTICAL SPEED-ADIRU;
1
READOUT LOGIC-DEU
2
6
1200
29.96 IN BAROMETRIC REFERENCE SHOWS IN INCHES OR HECTOPASCALS;

1011 HPA BARO REFERENCE (G) ABOVE TRANSITION ALTITUDE, STANDARD IS USUALLY SELECTED;
BARO REF ALERT (A) IF STD NOT SELECTED ABOVE TRANSITION ALT, ALERT SHOWS;
STD STANDARD BARO REF (G)
STD BARO REF ALERT (A)
IF BARO SELECT NOT SELECTED BELOW TRANSITION ALTITUDE,
ALERT SHOWS; SOURCES: TRANSITION ALTITUDE-FMC; BARO
STD CORRECTION-EFIS CP
WINDSHEAR OR PULL UP SHOWS AS APPLICABLE

WINDSHEAR WINDSHEAR ANNUNCIATION (R) SOURCE: GPWS
31-62-00-338.002
PULL UP ANNUNCIATION (R) RED WINDSHEAR ALERT (PWS)
PULL UP SOURCE: WXR
31-62-00
- 397 -
The primary flight display (PFD) displays different

tables.
on the PFD:

31-62-00-339.002
31-62-00
- 398 -

SYMBOL NAME REMARKS

180
160
DIGITAL AIRSPEED READOUT ON MOVING TAPE WITH INDICES AND
140
SPEED TAPE (GRAY) NUMBERS. NUMBERS SHOW EVERY 20 KNOTS. DIGITAL READOUT BORDER
SPEED READOUT (W) IS HIGHLIGHTED AND FLASHED FOR 10 SECONDS WHEN AIRSPEED IS
122 SPEED READOUT BORDER (W) LESS THAN THE MIN OPERATING SPEED.
SPEED READOUT BORDER ALERT (A) SPEED TREND VECTOR SHOWS PREDICTED AIRSPEED IN 10 SECONDS.
100 SPEED TREND VECTOR (G) SOURCES: AIRSPEED-ADIRU; SPEED TREND VECTOR-DEU
80
MACH SHOWS BELOW TAPE WHEN MACH IS > 0.4M. GROUNDSPEED SHOWS
.455 MACH (W) WHEN MACH DOES NOT SHOW. HIGHLIGHT SHOWS FOR 10 SECONDS
GROUNDSPEED (W) WHEN DISPLAY CHANGES TO GROUNDSPEED. SOURCES: MACH-ADIRU;
GS100 GROUNDSPEED-FMC/ADIRU; HIGHLIGHT-DEU.
290 SELECTED AIRSPEED (M) SELECTED AIRSPEED OR MACH SHOWS ABOVE THE SPEED TAPE.
SELECTED MACH (M) SELECTED AIRSPEED BUG SHOWS AT SIDE OF TAPE. IF IT IS
.39 OFFSCALE, ONLY HALF THE BUG SHOWS.
SELECTED AIRSPEED BUG (M)
SOURCE: DFCS MCP OR FMCS
MAX OPERATING SPEED (R/BLACK)

MAX MANEUVER SPEED (A) SPEEDS SHOW AT TOP AND BOTTOM OF AIRSPEED TAPE.
MIN MANEUVER SPEED (A) SOURCE: MAX OP SPD-SMYD; STICK SHAKER SPD-SMYD; MIN AND MAX
STICK SHAKER SPEED (R/BLACK) MANEUVER SPEEDS-FMCS.
UP, -1, -2, -5, FLAP MANEUVER SPEEDS (G) FLAP MANEUVER SPEEDS SHOW AT SIDE OF AIRSPEED TAPE.
-10, -15, -25 SOURCES: AUTOMATICALLY: FMCS AND FSEU; MANUALLY: DEU.
V1, VR, V2, DECISION SPEED V1 (G)

ROTATION SPEED VR (G) REFERENCE SPEEDS SHOW AT SIDE OF AIRSPEED TAPE.
V2+15
31-62-00-339.002
CLIMB SPEED V2 (G) SOURCE: V1 AND VR-FMCS/DEU; V2-DFCS MCP; V2+15-DEU;
Vref, LANDING REF SPEED VREF (G) VREF-FMCS/DEU; VREF+20-DEU; SPEED BUGS-DEU.
Vref+20 SPEED BUG REF (W)
31-62-00
- 399 -

table.
on the PFD:

31-62-00-340.002
31-62-00
- 400 -

SYMBOL NAME REMARKS

COMPASS (W)
HEADING INDEX (W)
MAG/TRU ANNUNCIATION (G) PFD HEADING/TRACK INDICATION; SOURCES: HEADING-ADIRU;
135 H MAG SEL HDG (M) MAG/TRU-ADIRU; SEL HDG-MCP; TRACK-FMC/ADIRU
SEL HDG READOUT (M)
TRACK LINE (W)
FMC SPD, N1, GA,
AUTHROTTLE MODES (G) ACTIVE AUTOTHROTTLE MODE SHOWS ON LEFT SIDE OF FMA
RETARD, MCP SPD, ARM MODE (W) SOURCE: A/T COMPUTER
THR HLD, TEST, ARM
HDG SEL, FAC, ROLL MODES (G) ACTIVE AND ARMED ROLL MODES SHOW IN CENTER OF FMA
VOR/LOC, B/CRS, ARMED MODE (W) SOURCE: FCC
LNAV
TO/GA, V/S,
ALT ACQ, ALT HOLD, PITCH MODES (G)
VNAV SPD, VNAV PTH, ACTIVE AND ARMED PITCH MODES SHOW ON RIGHT OF FMA
ARMED MODE (W) SOURCE: FCC
MCP SPD, G/S, G/P,
FLARE, VNAV ALT
RESOLUTION ADVISORY SHOWS VISUAL CUES AND GUIDANCE

TCAS RESOLUTION ADVISORY (R) INDICATIONS
SOURCES: TCAS COMPUTER/DEU
31-62-00-340.002
31-62-00
- 401 -

symbols and data. These symbols and data show in this
table.
on the PFD:

- Cyan (C) - not active or background data
31-62-00-344.fm
31-62-00
- 402 -

SYMBOL NAME REMARKS
FLAP/LANDING REF SPEED (G) LANDING FLAP SETTING AND LANDING REF SPEED WHEN YOU
REF REF SPEED BUG (G) SELECT IT ON THE APPROACH REF PAGE OF THE CDU
SOURCE: FMC
30/130
CMD, FD, TEST, A/P STATUS (G) AUTOPILOT AND FLIGHT DIRECTOR STATUS SHOWS IN THE
CWS P, CWS R, CWS ANNUNCIATION (A) CENTER AND ABOVE THE ATTITUDE INDICATION
SINGLE CH, SINGLE CH ANNUNCIATION (A) SOURCE: FCC
AUTOPILOT AUTOPILOT ANNUNCIATION (A)
31-62-00-344.fm
31-62-00
- 403 -
The primary flight display (PFD) display different

tables.
on the PFD:

31-62-00-350.fm
31-62-00
- 404 -

SYMBOL NAME REMARKS

SHOWS LOC FREQUENCY UNTIL RECEIVER SENDS STATION IDENTIFIER.
IBFI/130o SCALE IDENTIFIER (W) IF CAPT AND F/O FREQUENCIES DISAGREE, IT WILL SHOW AMBER
DME 18.4 LOC FREQ/IDENT (W) WITH AN AMBER LINE THROUGH IT.
LOC FREQ/IDENT WARNING (A) SHOWS SELECTED RUNWAY HEADING. IF CAPT AND F/O SELECTIONS
ILS SEL RNWY HDG (W) DISAGREE, IT WILL SHOW AMBER WITH AMBER LINE THROUGH.
SEL RNWY HDG WARNING (A) SHOWS DME DISTANCE.
DME DISPLAY (W) SOURCES: FREQ/IDENT-LOC RECEIVER OR MMR, SELECTED RUNWAY
HEADING-DFCS MCP, DME DISTANCE-DME, DISAGREE LOGIC-DEU.
RNAV 13R
RN13L 18.0 SHOWS SCALE ID (SOURCE OF DEVIATION). SHOWS FMC
SCALE IDENTIFIER (W)
APPROACH IDENTIFIER AND DISTANCE TO MISSED APPROACH POINT
FMC APPROACH ID (W) (W).
LNAV/VNAV DISTANCE TO MISSED APPROACH SOURCES: FMC APPROACH ID-FMC, DISTANCE TO MISSED APPROACH
POINT (W) POINT-FMC.
HEADING SCALE IS SHOWN ON HORIZON LINE WHEN FPV IS

140 HORIZON LINE HDG SCALE (W) SELECTED ON EFIS CP.
130
SOURCES: ADIRU
31-62-00-350.fm
31-62-00
- 405 -
The primary flight display (PFD) shows many different

tables.
on the PFD. This is what the colors usually show:

31-62-00-351.fm
31-62-00
- 406 -

SYMBOL NAME REMARKS
220
SHOWS PERMITTED SPEED RANGE DURING VNAV PATH DESCENTS.
VNAV SPEED BANDS (M) VNAV DISENGAGES AT UPPER LIMIT WHILE LOWER LIMIT IS
202 AUTOTHROTTLE "WAKE UP" SPEED.
SOURCE: FMC
180
31-62-00-351.fm
31-62-00
- 407 -
CDS -- PFD - FAULT INDICATIONS
General NOTE: The G/S and G/P failure flags are displayed in
the same location on the display depending on
The primary flight dispay (PFD) will display failure which approach mode has been selected. Similarly,
flags and non-normal messages to indicate various the LOC and FAC failure flags are displayed in
system failures. These are the PFD flags and messages: the same location.
- ALT - altitude failure from ADIRS

- ATT - attitude failure from ADIRS
- DISPLAYS CONTROL PANEL - failure of the onside
EFIS control panel
- DME - distance measuring equipment failure
- FAC - final approach course failure from FMCS
- FD - failure of the onside DFCS flight control
computer
- FPV - flight path vector failure from ADIRS
- G/P - glide path failure from the FMCS
- G/S - glideslope failure from multi mode receiver
(MMR)
- HDG - heading failure from ADIRS
- LDG ALT - landing altitude failure from FMCS or
active route data not entered in CDU
- NO VSPD - decision or rotate speeds failure from
FMCS, performance initialization data not entered
in FMC CDU or manual V speeds not selected on
engine display control panel
- RA - radio altitude failure from radio altimeter
- SEL SPD - selected speed failure from MCP or FMCS
- SPD - speed failure from ADIRS
- SPD LIM - speed limit failure from SMYD
- VERT - vertical speed failure from ADIRS.
31-62-00-310.003
31-62-00
- 408 -

SEL SPD
DME
SPD
LIM
NO
V
S
P
FPV FD
ATT
D
S G A V
P / L E
D S T R
T
RA
LOC
LDG
ALT
DISPLAYS
CONTROL PANEL
HDG
31-62-00-310.003
CDS - PFD - FAULT INDICATIONS
31-62-00
- 409 -
CDS -- NAVIGATION DISPLAY OVERVIEW
Navigation Display Overview
These are the seven navigation display (ND) modes:
- Expanded and centered APP (approach) modes

- Expanded and centered VOR (VHF omnidirectional
ranging) modes
- Expanded and centered map modes
- Plan mode.
These are some of the indications that show on the ND:
- Heading
- Track
- Ground speed
- True airspeed
- Wind
- Route
- Weather radar
- TCAS data
- Enhanced GPWS data
- VOR/ADF pointers
- VOR deviation
- LOC and G/S deviations.
The most common indications show for each mode.
A description of all symbols are in the symbology pages

of this section.
31-62-00-331.004
31-62-00
- 410 -

GS 351 TAS 338 IAN01

336o/15 HDG 140 MAG 0838.4z
32.5 NM
T/D
DOTTY
40
IAN01
21000
VOR 1 VOR 2
116.00 ELN
31-62-00-331.004
DME 35.1 FMC L DME 28.5
CDS - NAVIGATION DISPLAY OVERVIEW
31-62-00
- 411 -
CDS -- ND - EXPANDED APPROACH
General The selected runway heading vector is a magenta line
that extends from the selected runway heading pointer
The expanded approach display is selected using the to the compass rose.
mode selector on the EFIS control panel. The CTR button
on the EFIS control panel can be used to toggle between Lateral Deviation Scale
expanded and centered modes.
The lateral deviation scale is displayed as four
The approach display shows localizer and glideslope unfilled white dots. The scale rotates 360 degrees
deviation to a tuned ILS station or lateral and around the center of the airplane symbol and is always
vertical deviations for a specific FMC or GLS approach. perpendicular to the selected runway heading pointer.
Airplane Symbol When a localizer approach is being flown, each dot

represents a deviation of 1 degree from the center of
The airplane symbol appears at the lower center of the the localizer.
expanded approach mode. The airplane symbol is a white
unfilled triangle and it does not move. Other pointers Lateral Deviation Bar
and displays move with respect to the airplane symbol.
When a localizer approach is being flown, the lateral
Selected Runway Heading, Pointer and Vector deviation bar shows airplane deviation from the center
of the localizer. The deviation bar shows as a filled
When an ILS approach has been selected, the selected magenta bar if deviation is less than 2.5 dots. If
runway heading is displayed in the upper right of the deviation is more than 2.5 dots the bar shows as an
display. The numerical value represents degrees of the unfilled magenta bar.
compass rose. The selected runway heading value comes
from the onside selected course value on the DFCS mode When a FMC or GLS approach is being flown, the lateral
control panel. deviation bar shows deviation from the computed lateral
flight path.
The selected runway heading pointer is displayed as a
white unfilled bar centered around the airplane symbol. The lateral deviation bar is always positioned
The bar has a pointed end in the direction of the perpendicular to the scale.
31-62-00-311.004
selected runway heading.
31-62-00
- 412 -

Vertical Deviation Scale - ILS source annunciation (G)
- ILS identifier or frequency (W)
The vertical deviation scale is displayed on the right - Selected runway heading (W)
side of the ND. A centerline and four unfilled white - DME distance (W).
dots displayed vertically represent degrees of
deviation from the desired flight path. This is the data shown for a FMC approach:
When a localizer approach is being flown, each white - FMC source annunciation (G)
dot represents .35 degrees of deviation. - FMC approach identifier (W)
- Selected runway heading (W)
Vertical Deviation Pointer - Distance to the missed approach waypoint (W).
The vertical deviation pointer is a magenta diamond This is the data shown for a combined ILS/FMC (IAN)
symbol that moves vertically along the vertical approach:
deviation scale.
- ILS/FMC source annunciation (G)
When a localizer approach is being flown, the magenta - ILS identifier/frequency (W)
diamond symbol is filled when deviation is 2.5 dots or - Selected runway heading (W)
less. If deviation is more than 2.5 dots, the magenta - DME distance (W).
diamond is unfilled.
Additional Approach Mode Display Data
When a FMC or GLS approach is being flown, the vertical
deviation pointer shows deviation from the computed Groundspeed, true airspeed, heading, track, selected
flight path. heading and the compass rose arch are full time
displays in the approach mode.
The vertical deviation pointer is removed when the
airplane performs a back course approach. Wind data shows on the approach mode when airplane
groundspeed is more than 100 knots.
Approach Reference Data
Bearing pointers to tuned VOR or ADF stations are
31-62-00-311.004
The approach reference data is displayed in the top displayed on the compass rose arch when selected to
right corner of the ND. This is the data shown for an show on the EFIS control panel. Bearing pointer
ILS approach:
31-62-00
- 413 -
identification and DME distance will be displayed in
the lower right and left of the ND.
These systems can display both data and warning

messages on the expanded approach display:
- Traffic Alert and Collision Avoidance System

(TCAS)
- Enhanced Ground Proximity Warning System (EGPWS)
- Weather Radar and Predictive Windshear.
31-62-00-311.004
31-62-00
- 414 -

TRUE AIRSPEED HEADING
GROUNDSPEED
APPROACH REFERENCE
GS 315 TAS 312 ILS 1 110.10 DATA 1
WIND DATA 190`/15 HDG 090 MAG CRS 055
DME 13.5
SELECTED HEADING
HEADING POINTER
VOR 2 BEARING
POINTER
SELECTED RUNWAY
HEADING VECTOR
TRACK LINE
SELECTED RUNWAY
HEADING POINTER VERTICAL DEVIATION
POINTER
VERTICAL DEVIATION
LATERAL DEVIATION SCALE
SCALE
LATERAL DEVIATION BAR

VOR 2
ELN
DME 28.5 VOR 2 FREQUENCY/IDENT
DME DISTANCE
1 FMC L RNAV13R
31-62-00-311.004
CRS131
RW13R 18.0
LOC 1 110.90
G/P L CRS131
DME 18.0
CDS - ND - EXPANDED APPROACH
31-62-00
- 415 -
CDS -- ND - CENTERED APPROACH
31-62-00-312.004
31-62-00
- 416 -

General Lateral Deviation Scale
The centered approach display is selected using the The lateral deviation scale is displayed as four
mode selector on the EFIS control panel. The CTR button unfilled white dots. The scale rotates 360 degrees
on the EFIS control panel can be used to toggle between around the center of the airplane symbol and is always
centered and expanded modes. perpendicular to the selected runway heading pointer.
The approach display shows localizer and glideslope When a localizer approach is being flown, each dot
deviation to a tuned ILS station or lateral and represents a deviation of 1 degree from the center of
vertical deviations for a specific FMC or GLS approach. the localizer.
Airplane Symbol Lateral Deviation Bar
The airplane symbol appears at the center of the When a localizer approach is being flown, the lateral
centered approach mode. The airplane symbol is white. deviation bar shows airplane deviation from the center
The airplane symbol does not move. Other pointers and of the localizer. The deviation bar shows as a filled
displays move with respect to the airplane symbol. magenta bar if deviation is less than 2.5 dots. If
deviation is more than 2.5 dots the bar shows as an
Selected Runway Heading and Pointer unfilled magenta bar.
When an ILS approach has been selected, the selected When a FMC or GLS approach is being flown, the lateral
runway heading is displayed in the upper right hand of deviation bar shows deviation from the computed lateral
the display. The numerical value represents degrees of flight path.
the compass rose. The selected runway heading value
comes from the onside selected course value on the DFCS The lateral deviation bar is always positioned
mode control panel. perpendicular to the scale.
The selected runway heading pointer is displayed as two Vertical Deviation Scale
white bars with pointed ends centered around the
airplane symbol. The bar pointing to the selected The vertical deviation scale is displayed on the right
31-62-00-312.004
runway heading shows a cross bar near its base for side of the ND. A centerline and four unfilled white
identification. dots displayed vertically represent degrees of
deviation from the desired flight path.
31-62-00
- 417 -
When a localizer approach is being flown, each white - FMC source annunciation (G)
dot represents .35 degrees of deviation. - FMC approach identifier (W)
- Selected runway heading (W)
Vertical Deviation Pointer - Distance to the missed approach waypoint (W).
The vertical deviation pointer is a magenta diamond This is the data shown for a combined ILS/FMC (IAN)
symbol that moves vertically along the vertical approach:
deviation scale.
- ILS/FMC source annunciation (G)
When a localizer approach is being flown, the magenta - ILS identifier/frequency (W)
diamond symbol is filled when deviation is 2.5 dots or - Selected runway heading (W)
less. If deviation is more than 2.5 dots, the magenta - DME distance (W).
diamond is unfilled.
Additional Approach Mode Display Data
When a FMC or GLS approach is being flown, the vertical
deviation pointer shows deviation from the computed Groundspeed, true airspeed, heading, track, selected
flight path. heading and the compass rose are full time displays in
the approach mode.
The vertical deviation pointer is removed when the
airplane performs a back course approach. Wind data shows on the approach mode when airplane
groundspeed is more than 100 knots.
Approach Reference Data
Bearing pointers to tuned VOR or ADF stations show on
The approach reference data is displayed in the top the compass rose when selected to show on the EFIS
right corner of the ND. This is the data shown for an control panel. Bearing pointer identification and DME
ILS approach: distance will show in the lower right and left of the
display.
- ILS source annunciation (G)
- ILS identifier or frequency (W) The traffic alert and collision avoidance system (TCAS)
- Selected runway heading (W) shows mode and warning annunciations on the centered
31-62-00-312.004
- DME distance (W). approach mode.
This is the data shown for a FMC approach:
31-62-00
- 418 -

TRUE AIRSPEED HEADING
GROUNDSPEED APPROACH REFERENCE

GS 315 TAS 312 ILS 1 110.10 DATA 1
190`/15 CRS 055
WIND DATA DME 13.5
SELECTED HEADING
HDG 090 MAG
HEADING POINTER VOR 2 BEARING

POINTER
SELECTED RUNWAY
HEADING POINTER
VERTICAL DEVIATION
POINTER
LATERAL DEVIATION
SCALE VERTICAL DEVIATION
SCALE
TRACK LINE
LATERAL DEVIATION
VOR 2 BEARING BAR
RECIPROCAL
POINTER
AIRPLANE SYMBOL
VOR 2
ELN VOR 2 IDENTIFIER/
DME 28.5 DME DISTANCE
1 FMC L RNAV13R
31-62-00-312.004
CRS131
RW13R 18.0
LOC 1 110.90
G/P L CRS131
DME 18.0
CDS - ND - CENTERED APPROACH
31-62-00
- 419 -
CDS -- ND - EXPANDED VOR
31-62-00-313.002
31-62-00
- 420 -

General The selected course vector is a magenta line that
extends from the selected course pointer to the compass
To show the expanded VOR display, select the VOR mode rose.
on the EFIS control panel. Push the CTR button on the
EFIS control panel if the centered VOR display shows. VOR Course Deviation Scale
This changes the display to the expanded VOR display.
The VOR course deviation scale shows as four white dots
The expanded VOR display shows airplane deviation from with no fill. Each dot shows a deviation of 5 degrees
the selected course of a tuned VOR station. The display from the selected course. The full range of the scale
also shows if the airplane selected course is to or is +/- 11.6 degrees.
from the tuned VOR station.
The scale turns 360 degrees around the center of the
Airplane Symbol airplane symbol and is always perpendicular to the
selected course pointer.
The airplane symbol shows at the lower center of the
expanded VOR mode. The airplane symbol is a white VOR Course Deviation Bar
triangle with no fill. The airplane symbol does not
move. Other pointers and displays move in relation to The VOR course deviation bar shows airplane deviation
the airplane symbol. from the selected course. The deviation bar shows as a
magenta bar with no fill.
Selected Course, Pointer and Vector
The VOR course deviation bar is always perpendicular to
Selected Course shows in the upper right hand side of the course deviation scale.
the display. The numerical value shows degrees of the
compass rose. The selected course value comes from the VOR Source
onside selected course value on the mode control panel.
VOR source shows which VOR receiver supplies data to
The selected course pointer shows as a white bar with the ND. This is usually VOR 1 for the captain ND and VOR
no fill around the airplane symbol. The bar has a point 2 for the first officer ND.
on the end in the direction of the selected course.
31-62-00-313.002
31-62-00
- 421 -
VOR Frequency These systems show data and warning messages on the
expanded VOR display:
The VOR frequency or station identifier shows in the
upper left corner of the ND display. - Traffic Alert and Collision Avoidance System
(TCAS)
TO/FROM Indication - Enhanced Ground Proximity Warning System (EGPWS)
TO or FROM shows on the lower right of the display. TO
shows when the airplane selected course causes the
airplane to move in the direction to the tuned VOR
station. FROM shows when the airplane selected course
causes the airplane to move in the direction away from
the tuned VOR station.
Additional VOR Mode Display Data
These show full time in the VOR mode:
- Ground speed
- true airspeed
- heading
- track
- selected heading
- compass rose arch.
Wind Data shows on the VOR mode when airplane ground

speed is more than 100 knots.

the compass rose arc when selected on the EFIS control
31-62-00-313.002
panel. Bearing pointer identification and DME distance
show in the lower right and left of the display.
31-62-00
- 422 -

TRUE
GROUND SPEED AIRSPEED HEADING VOR SOURCE
VOR FREQUENCY/
GS 315 TAS 312 VOR 2 ELN IDENTIFIER
o
190 /15 HDG 090 MAG CRS 055 SELECTED COURSE
WIND DATA DME 28.5
DME DISTANCE
SELECTED HEADING
VOR 2 BEARING
POINTER RECIPROCAL VOR 1 BEARING
POINTER
TRACK LINE
SELECTED COURSE
VECTOR
VOR COURSE DEVIATION

SCALE
SELECTED COURSE
POINTER
VOR COURSE DEVIATION
BAR
AIRPLANE SYMBOL
TO/FROM
FROM ANNUNCIATION
VOR 1 VOR 2
VOR 1 FREQUENCY/ 116.00 ELN VOR 2 IDENTIFIER/
DME DISTANCE DME 121 DME 28.5 DME DISTANCE
31-62-00-313.002
CDS - ND - EXPANDED VOR
31-62-00
- 423 -
CDS -- ND - CENTERED VOR
31-62-00-314.002
31-62-00
- 424 -

General VOR Course Deviation Scale
To show the centered VOR display, select the VOR mode The VOR course deviation scale shows as four white dots
on the EFIS control panel. Push the CTR button on the with no fill. Each dot shows a deviation of 5 degrees
EFIS control panel if the expanded VOR display shows. from the selected course. The full range of the scale
This changes the display to the centered VOR display. is +/- 11.6 degrees.
The centered VOR display shows airplane deviation from The scale turns 360 degrees about the center of the
the selected course of a tuned VOR station. The display airplane symbol and is always perpendicular to the
also shows if the airplane selected course is to or selected course pointer.
from the tuned VOR station.
VOR Course Deviation Bar
Airplane Symbol
The VOR course deviation bar shows airplane deviation
The airplane symbol shows at the center of the centered from the selected course. The deviation bar shows as a
VOR mode. The airplane symbol is white. The airplane magenta bar with no fill.
symbol does not move. Other pointers and displays move
in relation to the airplane symbol. The VOR course deviation bar is always perpendicular to
the course deviation scale.
Selected Course and Pointer
VOR Source
Selected course shows in the upper right hand side of
the display. The numerical value shows degrees of the VOR source shows which VOR receiver supplies data to
compass rose. The selected course value comes from the the ND. This is usually VOR 1 for the captain ND and VOR
onside selected course value on the mode control panel. 2 for the first officer ND.
The selected course pointer shows as a white bar with VOR Frequency
no fill around the airplane symbol. The bar has a point
in the direction of the selected course. The VOR frequency or four letter station identifier
shows in the upper left corner of the ND display.
31-62-00-314.002
31-62-00
- 425 -
TO/FROM Annunciation panel. Bearing pointer identification and DME distance
TO or FROM shows on the lower right of the display. TO
shows when the airplane selected course causes the The Traffic Alert and Collision Avoidance System (TCAS)
airplane to move in the direction to the tuned VOR shows mode and status and warning annunciations on the
station to go across the selected course. FROM shows centered VOR mode.
when the airplane selected course causes the airplane
to move away from the tuned VOR station.
TO/FROM Pointer
The TO/FROM pointer shows between the airplane symbol

and the selected course pointer. It is a white triangle
with no fill. The triangle points to or from the
selected course.
Additional VOR Mode Display Data
These show full time in the VOR mode:
- Ground speed
- True airspeed
- Heading
- Track
- Selected heading
- Compass rose arch.
Wind Data shows on the VOR mode when airplane ground

speed is more than 100 knots.
31-62-00-314.002
the compass rose arch when selected on the EFIS control
31-62-00
- 426 -

TRUE
GROUND SPEED AIRSPEED HEADING VOR SOURCE
VOR FREQUENCY/
IDENTIFIER
GS 315 TAS 312 VOR 2 116.80
o SELECTED COURSE
190 /15 CRS 055
WIND DATA DME 28.5
DME DISTANCE
HDG 090 MAG
SELECTED
HEADING
HEADING POINTER
VOR 1 BEARING
POINTER
VOR 2 BEARING
POINTER
TRACK
SELECTED COURSE
POINTER VOR COURSE DEVIATION
BAR
TO/FROM POINTER
SELECTED COURSE
POINTER
VOR 1 BEARING
POINTER RECIPROCAL
VOR 2 BEARING
TO POINTER RECIPROCAL
VOR 1 VOR 2
VOR 1 FREQUENCY/ 116.00 116.80
DME DISTANCE DME 121 DME 28.5 VOR 2 FREQUENCY/
DME DISTANCE
31-62-00-314.002
TO/FROM
ANNUNCIATION
CDS - ND - CENTERED VOR
31-62-00
- 427 -
CDS -- ND - EXPANDED MAP MODE
General pointer. The heading pointer is in a set position. To
the left of the heading box is the green HDG
The expanded map display is selected using the mode annunciation.
selector on the EFIS control panel. The CTR button on
the EFIS control panel can be used to toggle between Track Line
expanded and centered modes.
The white track line appears above the airplane symbol
The map display shows the FMC flight plan and other and extends to the compass rose arc. The track line
navigation data. You use the map switches on the EFIS shows the current track of the airplane.
control panel to show other map data.
Airplane Present Track
Airplane Symbol
The track extends from the airplane symbol to the
The airplane symbol shows at the lower center of the compass rose and turns along the compass rose to
expanded map mode. The airplane symbol is a white accurately show the present track.
triangle with no fill. The airplane symbol does not
move. Other pointers and displays move in relation to MAG/TRU Annunciation
the airplane symbol.
The MAG/TRU annunciation is to the right of the
Compass Rose airplane heading value. MAG shows if the heading value
has a reference to magnetic North. TRU shows if the
A part of the compass rose shows near the top of the reference is to true North. MAG and TRU are green in
expanded map display. Approximately 90 degrees of the color.
compass rose arc is in view forward of the airplane
heading. The compass rose has index marks at 5 degree MAG/TRU Highlight Annunciation
intervals. The compass rose arc position also shows the
maximum range of the extended map display. The MAG/TRU highlight annunciation gives an alert to
the crew when they change from TRU to MAG or from MAG to
Airplane Present Heading TRU. It also gives an alert to the crew during landing
if the reference is TRU.
31-62-00-315.004
Airplane present heading shows as a white numerical
value in the center above the compass rose in a box. When there is a change from TRU to MAG, a green
Directly below the heading box is the white heading highlight shows around the MAG annunciation for ten
31-62-00
- 428 -

seconds. A white highlight box always shows around the nm, the middle mark is 40 nm, and the far mark is 60 nm.
TRU annunciation when TRU is the reference. The compass rose arc is 80 nm.
When TRU is the reference, and the airplane is in a Range Arcs

descent at a rate more than 800 feet/minute with a
total altitude loss of 2000 feet, the highlight box Three range arcs replace the range marks when you
shows in amber and goes on and off for ten seconds select weather radar to show or when you push the TFC
before it stays on steady. button on the EFIS control panel. The arcs are white.
Each arc shows 1/4 of the selected range. For example,
There is a reset of the amber highlight box to white if if you select 80 nm, the mark near the airplane symbol
the airplane goes up 200 feet at a rate more than 500 is 20 nm, the middle mark is 40 nm, and the far mark is
feet/minute. 60 nm. The compass rose arc is 80 nm.
Map Display Range Curved Trend Vector
You can select the range of the expanded map display on The white curved trend vector shows at the nose of the
the EFIS control panel. The ranges are 5, 10, 20 40, airplane symbol and extends to the base of the track
80, 160, 320, and 640 nautical miles (nm). line. The curved trend vector shows the airplane curved
path directional trend in relation to ground speed and
The range of the display is from the nose of the cross track acceleration in relation to the map
airplane symbol to the compass rose arc. display. The end point of each vector segment shows the
airplane predicted position at 30, 60, and 90 seconds
The range value shows white adjacent to the track line in the future.
at the midpoint between the airplane symbol and the
compass rose arc. The value is one-half of the selected The curved trend vector has 3 segments that show 30,
range. 60, and 90 second position estimates of the airplane
because of a roll. One segment shows when the selected
Range Marks range is 10 nm or less. Two segments show when the
selected range is 20 nm. Three segments show when the
Three range marks show on the track line of the selected range is 40 nm or more.
31-62-00-315.004
expanded map display. The marks are white. Each mark
shows 1/4 of the selected range. For example, if you
select 80 nm, the mark near the airplane symbol is 20
31-62-00
- 429 -
Selected Heading panel. Bearing pointer identification and DME distance
The selected heading bug and vector show the current
selected heading value from the DFCS mode control These systems show data and warning messages on the
panel. expanded VOR display:
The magenta selected heading bug goes with the selected - Traffic alert and collision avoidance system
heading along the outer edge of the compass rose arc. (TCAS)
- Enhanced ground proximity warning system (EGPWS)
The magenta, large space, short dash selected heading - Weather radar and predictive windshear.
vector starts at the point of the airplane symbol and
extends to the compass rose directly below the selected Flight Plan Path
heading bug.
The route shows as a sequence of straight lines between
When the selected heading is different enough from different flight legs. Flight legs are the path between
present heading that the heading bug can not show on two points, usually waypoints.
the expanded map compass rose, the DEU continues to
show the vector. The vector shows an angular indication The route shows magenta if it is active. If the route
in relation to the selected heading value. is not active, it shows as a dashed cyan line.
When the flight control computer is in lateral Changes to a flight plan path show white until you push
navigation (LNAV) or VOR/LOC mode, the selected heading the EXEC key on the control display unit (CDU) to make
vector shows when the selected heading value changes, them active.
and for 10 seconds after the selected heading changes.
The vector is blank at all other times. The bug Active Route Waypoints
continues to show if it is in the range of the compass
rose arc display. Active route waypoints show selected navigation points
or positions along the FMC route.
Bearing Pointers
Waypoints show as a four point star symbol on the map
31-62-00-315.004
Bearing pointers to tuned VOR or ADF stations show on display. Adjacent to the waypoint is an identifier that
the compass rose arc when selected on the EFIS control shows the name of the waypoint. Waypoints and
31-62-00
- 430 -

identifiers show white if they are not active and Ground Speed
magenta if they are active.
Ground speed shows full time in the upper left corner
The active waypoint is the subsequent one on the flight of the expanded map display. Ground speed shows in 2-
path. The altitude constraint at the active waypoint digit format at speeds less than 29.5 kt and 3-digit
always shows. All other visible waypoints are not format at speeds more than 29.5 kt.
active and show white.
Ground speed is white and shows in whole numbers only.
The active waypoint name, estimated time of arrival,
and active waypoint distance show in the upper right True Airspeed
corner of the expanded map display. The active waypoint
name is magenta. Estimated time of arrival and distance True airspeed shows full time in the upper left of the
to go are white in color. expanded map display. True airspeed shows in 3 digits
for airspeeds more than 101 kt. True airspeed less than
Altitude Profile Points 101 kt shows as 3 dashes.
The green altitude profile points are indicators sent Map Source Annunciation
by the FMC to identify these active flight plan steps:
The map source annunciation shows which FMC is the
- Top-of-climb (T/C) source of the expanded map display. FMC L or FMC R
- Top-of-descent (T/D) shows at the bottom of the display.
- End-of-descent (E/D)
- Step climb (S/C). Range To Altitude Arc
Altitude profile points are on the active route line at Range to altitude shows as a green arc on the center
the predicted point of occurrence. If the FMC finds and across the heading vector. The arc shows the
that the predicted point of occurrence is not on the position where the airplane symbol will get to the
active route, or if the altitude profile point is on reference altitude if the present track angle and
the active route but behind the airplane, the altitude present flight path angle are held.
profile point does not show.
31-62-00-315.004
31-62-00
- 431 -
Wind Speed and Angle deviation exceeds the maximum scale range, a numeric
readout of deviation shows above or below the scale.
Wind speed and angle show in the upper left of the The maximum numeric readout is 9999.
expanded map display. The display is white.
Wind angle shows as a 3-digit value in degrees. Wind

speed shows as a 1-, 2-, or 3-digit value to the right
of the wind angle.
Wind angle is corrected for true or magnetic heading.
A wind pointer shows below wind angle. The wind pointer

turns around itself as a function of wind direction.
Wind speed and angle do not show if true airspeed is

less than 101 kt. The digital readout shows dashes and
the wind pointer goes blank.
Vertical Deviation
Vertical deviation shows at the top of descent and

during descent only.
The vertical deviation feature has a magenta pointer

with a diamond shape that moves against a white set
scale. The vertical deviation pointer shows the
airplane vertical path, and the center of the scale
shows the airplane.
The vertical track deviation scale shows +/-400 feet
31-62-00-315.004
from the center mark to the outer marks. Maximum
pointer movement extends to more than the scale outer
marks to a limit of +/-430 feet. When vertical
31-62-00
- 432 -

TRUE AIR HEADING PRESENT MAG/TRU MAG/TRU HIGHLIGHT

SPEED POINTER HEADING ANNUNCIATION ANNUNCIATION
ACTIVE WAYPOINT
GROUND SPEED
ESTIMATED TIME
WIND SPEED AND ANGLE OF ARRIVAL
GS 351 TAS 338 MARKY
WIND POINTER o
336 /15 HDG 140 MAG 0838.4z ACTIVE WAYPOINT
VOR 2 BEARING 32.5 NM DISTANCE
POINTER RECIPROCAL
T/D COMPASS ROSE ARC
SELECTED
HEADING BUG VOR 1 BEARING POINTER
SELECTED ALTITUDE PROFILE POINT
HEADING VECTOR DOT01 ACTIVE ROUTE
RANGE TO ALTITUDE ARC
40 ACTIVE WAYPOINT
ALTITUDE CONSTRAINT
MAP RANGE DISPLAY
VERTICAL DEVIATION
TRACK LINE 860 NUMERIC
MARKY
21000
RANGE ARC VERTICAL DEVIATION
POINTER
CURVED TREND VECTOR
VERTICAL DEVIATION
AIRPLANE SYMBOL SCALE
VOR 1 VOR 2
116.00 ELN
VOR 1 FREQUENCY/ DME 35.1 FMC L DME 28.5 VOR 2 IDENTIFIER/
DME DISTANCE DME DISTANCE
31-62-00-315.004 MAP SOURCE
CDS - ND - EXPANDED MAP MODE
31-62-00
- 433 -
CDS -- ND - CENTERED MAP MODE
General Track Line
The centered map display is selected using the mode The white track line is displayed above the airplane
selector on the EFIS control panel. The CTR button on symbol and extends to the compass rose arc. The track
the EFIS control panel can be used to toggle between line shows the current track of the airplane.
centered and expanded modes.
Airplane Present Track
The map display shows the FMC flight plan and other
navigation data. Additional map data can be displayed The track extends from the airplane symbol to the
using the map switches on the EFIS control panel. compass rose and turns along the compass rose to
accurately indicate present airplane track.
Airplane Symbol
MAG/TRU Annunciation
The airplane symbol shows at the center of the centered
map mode. The airplane symbol is a white triangle with The MAG/TRU annunciation is displayed to the right of
no fill and does not move. Other pointers and displays the airplane heading value. MAG is displayed if the
move in relation to the airplane symbol. heading value has a reference to magnetic North. TRU
shows if the reference is to true North.
Compass Rose
MAG/TRU Highlight Annunciation
A compass rose shows on the centered map display. The
compass rose has index marks at 5 degree intervals and The MAG/TRU highlight annunciation alerts the crew when
numerics at 30 degree intervals. The compass rose turns switching from TRU to MAG or from MAG to TRU. It also
around the airplane symbol. alerts the crew during landing if the reference is TRU.
Airplane Present Heading When transitioning from TRU to MAG, a green highlight
is displayed around the MAG annunciation for ten
Airplane present heading is displayed as a white seconds. A white highlight box is always displayed
numerical value in the center above the compass rose in around the TRU annunciation whenever TRU is the
a box. Directly below the heading box is the white reference.
31-62-00-316.004
heading pointer. The heading pointer does not move. To
the left of the heading box is the HDG annunciation. It Also, when TRU is the reference and and the airplane is
is green in color. descending at a rate greater than 800 feet/minute with
31-62-00
- 434 -

a total altitude loss of 2000 feet, the highlight box Curved Trend Vector
will be dislyed in amber and will flash for ten seconds
before remaining on steady. The white curved trend vector shows at the nose of the
airplane symbol and extends to the base of the track
The amber highlight box will reset to white if the line. The curved trend vector shows the airplane's
airplane gains 200 feet of altitude at a rate greater curved path directional trend, based on ground speed
than 500 feet/minute. and cross track acceleration, relative to the map
display. The end point of each vector segment
Map Display Range represents the airplane's predicted position at 30, 60,
and 90 seconds in the future.
The range of the expanded map display is selectable on
the EFIS control panel. The selectable ranges are 5, The curved trend vector has 3 segments representing 30,
10, 20 40, 80, 160, 320, and 640 nautical miles (NM). 60, and 90 second position estimates of the airplane
due to roll. One segment shows when the selected range
The range of the display is measured from the nose of is 10 NM or less. Two segments show when the selected
the airplane symbol to the compass rose arc. range is 20 NM. Three segments show when the selected
range is 40 NM or greater.
The range value is shown in white next to the track
line at the mid point between the airplane symbol and Selected Heading
the compass rose arc. The range value is shown forward
of and behind the airplane symbol. Each value is equal The selected heading bug and vector show the current
to one quarter of the selected range. selected heading value from the DFCS mode control
panel.
Range Marks
The magenta selected heading bug follows the selected
Two range marks are shown on the track line of the heading along the outer edge of the compass rose arc.
centered map display. One is forward of the airplane
position, and one is behind the airplane position. The The magenta, large space, short dash selected heading
marks are white in color. Each mark shows 1/4 of the vector starts at the point of the airplane symbol and
selected range. For example, if 80 NM range is extends to the compass rose directly under the selected
31-62-00-316.004
selected, each mark shows 20 NM. heading bug.
31-62-00
- 435 -
When the flight control computer is in lateral Changes to a flight plan path show white until they
navigation (LNAV) or VORLOC mode, the selected heading become active by pushing the EXEC key on the control
vector shows when the selected heading value changes display unit (CDU).
and for 10 seconds after the selected heading change.
The vector is blank at all other times. The heading bug Active Route Waypoints
will continue to show.
Active route waypoints represent specific selected
Bearing Pointers navigation points or positions along the FMC entered
route.
the compass rose arc when selected on the EFIS control Waypoints show as a four point star symbol on the map
panel. Bearing pointer identification and DME distance display. Next to the waypoint is an identifier showing
show in the lower right and left of the display. the name of the waypoint. Waypoints and identifiers
show white if they are inactive and magenta if they are
These systems show data and warning messages on the active.
centered map display:
The active waypoint is the one to which the airplane is
- Traffic Alert and Collision Avoidance System currently navigating. The altitude constraint at the
(TCAS) active waypoint is always displayed. All other visable
- Enhanced Ground Proximity Warning System (EGPWS) waypoints are inactive, and therefore, white.
The active waypoint name, estimated time of arrival,
Flight Plan Path and active waypoint distance show in the upper right
corner of the expanded map display. The active waypoint
The route shows as a sequence of straight lines between name is magenta. Estimated time of arrival and distance
various flight legs. Flight legs are the path between to go are white in color.
two points, usually waypoints.
Altitude Profile Points
The route shows magenta if it is active. If the route
is inactive, it shows as a dashed cyan line. The green altitude profile points are indicators sent
31-62-00-316.004
by the FMC to identify these active flight plan steps:
- Top-of-climb (T/C)
31-62-00
- 436 -

- Top-of-descent (T/D) Range To Altitude Arc
- End-of-descent (E/D)
- Step climb (S/C). Range to altitude shows as a green arc that is centered
at and transverse to the heading vector. The arc
Altitude profile points are positioned on the active represents the distance from the airplane symbol where
route line at the predicted point of occurance. If the the airplane will reach the reference altitude if
FMC determines that the predicted point of occurance present track angle and present flight path angle are
does not occur on the active route, or, if the altitude maintained.
profile point has been passed, the altitude profile
point will not show. Wind Speed and Angle
Groundspeed Wind speed and angle show in the upper left of the
expanded map display. The display is white.
Groundspeed is displayed full time in the upper left
corner of the centered map display. Groundspeed is Wind angle shows as a 3 digit value in degrees. Wind
displayed in 2-digit format at speeds below 29.5 kts speed shows as a 1,2 or 3 digit value to the right of
and 3-digit format above 29.5 kts. the wind angle.
Groundspeed is white and is shown in whole numbers Wind angle is corrected for true or magnetic heading.
only.
A wind pointer shows below wind angle. The wind pointer
True Airspeed rotates around itself as a function of wind direction
to depict wind angle.
True airspeed is displayed full time in the upper left
of the centered map display. True airspeed is displayed Wind speed and angle do not show if true airspeed is
in 3 digits for air speeds greater than 101 kts. True less than 101 knots. The digital readout shows dashes
airspeed less than 101 knots shows as 3 dashes. and the wind pointer goes blank.
Map Source Annunciation Vertical Deviation
31-62-00-316.004
The map source annunciation shows which FMC is the Vertical deviation shows at the top of descent and
source of the expanded map display. FMC L or FMC R during descent only.
shows at the bottom of the display.
31-62-00
- 437 -
The vertical deviation feature consists of a magenta
diamond shaped pointer moving against a white fixed
scale. The vertical deviation pointer represents the
airplane vertical path and the center of the scale
represents the airplane.
The vertical track deviation scale indicates +/- 400

feet from the center mark to the outer marks. Maximum
pointer movement extends beyond the scale outer marks
to a limit of +/- 430 feet. When vertical deviation
exceeds the maximum scale range, a numeric readout of
deviation shows above or below the scale. The maximum
numeric readout is 9999.
31-62-00-316.004
31-62-00
- 438 -

TRUE AIR HEADING PRESENT TRACK MAG/TRUE MAG/TRUE HIGHLIGHT

GROUND SPEED SPEED POINTER ANNUNCIATION ANNUNCIATION
ACTIVE WAYPOINT
WIND SPEED AND ANGLE ESTIMATED TIME
GS 340 TAS 351 SOTON OF ARRIVAL
WIND POINTER o
300 /15 2459.8z ACTIVE WAYPOINT
7.3 NM DISTANCE
TRACK LINE HDG 340 MAG
BOFER ALTITUDE PROFILE
RANGE TO ALTITUDE ARC POINT
T/C
NO. 1 BEARING
SELECTED TOPPS POINTER
HEADING BUG 10
860 RANGE MARK
FLIGHT PLAN SOTON VERTICAL DEVIATION
WAYPOINT NUMERIC
SELECTED VERTICAL DEVIATION

HEADING VECTOR POINTER
VERTICAL DEVIATION
NO.2 BEARING SCALE
POINTER RECIPROCAL 10
CURVED TREND VECTOR
MAP RANGE DISPLAY AIRPLANE SYMBOL

VOR 1 11L VOR 2 FLIGHT PLAN PATH
COMPASS ROSE ELN AST
BEARING POINTER 2
NO.1 POINTER IDENTIFIER/
IDENTIFIER/
31-62-00-316.004
DME DISTANCE DME DISTANCE
MAP SOURCE
CDS - ND - CENTERED MAP MODE
31-62-00
- 439 -
CDS -- ND - SUPPLEMENTAL MAP MODE DATA
31-62-00-341.fm
31-62-00
- 440 -

General - STA
- WPT
Supplemental data can be displayed on the expanded and - ARPT.
centered map mode display. This is the supplemental
data that can show on the map mode display: Map Switch - STA
- Navigation aids When the STA switch is selected, navigation aids that
- Off-route waypoints are not being manually tuned are displayed. They are
- Airports cyan in color. If the map range is in the 5, 10, 20, or
- Waypoint altitude constraints and estimated time 40 NM ranges, high and low altitude navigation aids
of arrival (ETA) show. Above 40 NM range, only high altitude navigation
- VOR relative bearing radials aids show. A high altitude navigation aid is one that
- GPS position is regulatory agency designated as being reliable at
- ADIRU position. cruise altitudes.
EFIS Control Panel Map Switches Three type of navigation aids can show:
The EFIS control panel has five single-function, - VOR stations

momentary action push button switches that select - VORTAC stations
supplemental navigation data to show on the map mode - DME/TACAN stations.
display. All of the map switches can be on at the same
time. These are the five map switches: Map Switch - WPT
- STA When the WPT switch is selected, the off-route

- WPT waypoints are displayed. They are cyan in color. The
- ARPT off route waypoints are only displayed in 5, 10, 20,
- DATA and 40 NM range.
- POS.
Map Switch - ARPT
When you select these switches, one of these cyan
31-62-00-341.fm
annunciation shows on the left side of the display to When the ARPT switch is selected, the airports that are
show that the function is selected: not part of the flight plan are displayed. They are
cyan in color.
31-62-00
- 441 -
Map Switch - DATA An ADIRU position symbol shows for each ADIRU that is
aligned. These symbols make an overlap when the
When the DATA switch is selected, the altitude position of each ADIRU is nearly identical.
constraints and estimated time of arrival (ETA) of the
active route waypoints beyond the active waypoint are Two GPS symbols show each GPS position unless the two
displayed. positions are less than or equal to the diameter of the
GPS symbol circle. In this case, only the symbol for
Altitude constraints show in feet. An altitude the onside GPS shows.
constraint shows the altitude where the airplane is to
be as it goes across the waypoint. Some altitude
constraint values have the letter A or B after the
numerical value. A shows that the airplane is to be at
or above the altitude constraint value as the airplane
goes across the waypoint. B shows that the airplane is
to be at or below the altitude constraint value as the
airplane goes across the waypoint.
Altitude constraint and ETA data for the active

waypoint are magenta. Altitude constraint and ETA data
for all inactive waypoints are white.
Map Switch - POS
When the POS switch is selected, the ADIRS and GPS

position data is displayed. This is the position data
that shows on the display:
- A white symbol that shows the position of each

ADIRU in relation to the FMS airplane position
- One or two white symbols that show each GPS
31-62-00-341.fm
position in relation to the FMS airplane position
- Green radials that show the relative bearing from
tuned VOR stations to the FMS airplane position.
31-62-00
- 442 -

APP 10
OFF OFF
CTR 5 TFC 320
640
ADF 1 ADF 2
VOR STATION
EFIS CONTROL PANEL

MAP SWITCHES
GS 351 TAS 338 DUCKY
336`/15 HDG 140 MAG 0838.4z
OFF ROUTE 18.5 NM
WAYPOINT
AIRPORT T/D
DME/TACAN CTN
STATION LEFRO
TATER
TUNED VORTAC KTTN 24000
STATION 20 0841Z
WAL
VOR RELATIVE
BEARING RADIAL
DUCKY
YKM 10000 WAYPOINT
EFIS CONTROL 0838Z DATA
APRT
PANEL MAP SWITCH WPT R-
ANNUNCIATION STA 26
0 20 ELN
R-0
ADIRU POSITION
GPS POSITION
VOR 1 VOR 2
116.00 ELN
31-62-00-341.fm
CDS - ND - SUPPLEMENTAL MAP MODE DATA
31-62-00
- 443 -
CDS -- ND - VSD INDICATIONS
General
The vertical situation display (VSD) shows a side view

of the airplane and the ground below the airplane
track. The VSD increases the flight crew situational
awareness. The VSD is not to be a control display.
The bottom 35% of the MAP display is for the VSD, and
the top display area shows the centered MAP display.
You select VSD first by selection of the MAP as the
display mode and then by selection of the DATA push-
button on the EFIS control panel.
This is the data that can show on the VSD:
- Airplane altitude
- Vertical flight path vector
- Selected vertical speed
- Selected altitude
- Waypoints
- Waypoint altitude constraints
- Destination runway
- VNAV final descent angle
- Terrain data.
31-62-00-346.fm
31-62-00
- 444 -

GS 237 TAS 237 CF13R

058 o /24 HDG 130 MAG Z
1.0 NM
13R
NOLLA
10
DECEL
CF13R
PAE
10
1100
2000 CF13R NOLLA RW13R
2200 50
8000
4000
0
0 10 20
FMC
31-62-00-346.fm
CDS - ND - VSD INDICATIONS
31-62-00
- 445 -
CDS -- ND - VSD DISPLAY - MAP
General 3000 feet above field elevation and is within 6
nautical miles of the runway.
The upper part of the MAP/vertical situation display
(VSD) shows some special symbols and data. These
symbols and data show this data:
- Runway symbol
- Runway identifier
- Missed approach waypoint
- Active route
- Active waypoint
- Approach swath.
Display Data
The runway display shows the lateral position and the

runway identifier. The runway symbol and identifier are
white in color.
The missed approach waypoint shows by a dot on the

airplane track line. It is white in color.
The active route shows with a magenta line. The active

waypoint and the active waypoint identifier in the top
right corner of the display are magenta in color.
The approach swath shows the area of the ground below

the airplane on the lower VSD display. They show as
dashed lines that are cyan in color. The distance
between the two lines is the current required
31-62-00-347.002
navigation performance (RNP). The swath lines are
removed from the display when the airplane is below
31-62-00
- 446 -

GS 237 TAS 237 CF13R

058o /24 HDG 130 MAG Z
1.0 NM
13R RUNWAY IDENTIFIER
RUNWAY
APPROACH SWATH
MISSED APPROACH NOLLA

WAYPOINT 10
DECEL
ACTIVE WAYPOINT
ACTIVE ROUTE CF13R
PAE
1100
10
2000 CF13R NOLLA
2200
RW13R
50
31-62-00-347.002
CDS - ND - VSD DISPLAY - MAP
31-62-00
- 447 -
CDS -- ND - VSD DISPLAY - VSD
31-62-00-348.002
31-62-00
- 448 -

General is 4000 feet and above a range of 80NM, the interval is
8000 feet.
The lower portion of the combined MAP/vertical
situation display (VSD) shows many different symbols MCP Selected Altitude Displays
and data. These are the symbols and data that is shown:
The pilot uses the DFCS mode control panel to set the
- Altitude reference tape selected altitude which will be represented by a bug on
- MCP selected altitude displays the VSD altitude reference tape and a digital readout
- Minimum descent altitude displays of the selected altitude above the tape. The MCP
- Horizontal reference scale selected altitude line represents the MCP selected
- Airplane symbol altitude across the VSD display. Both the bug, the
- Vertical flight path vector digital readout and the dashed line are magenta in
- MCP selected vertical speed line color.
- Range to target speed display
- Terrain profile display When the selected altitude is offscale, only half the
- Waypoint display bug shows at the top or bottom of the altitude tape.
- Runway display With the bug "parked", the dashed line is not
- Reference approach angle display displayed.
- Decision gate display.
Minimum Descent Altitude Display
Altitude Reference Tape
The barometric minimums (minimum descent altitude)
The altitude reference tape shows the barometric setting is selected from the onside EFIS control panel.
altitude from the air data reference secton of the The bug and the line point to the selected barometric
onside ADIRU on a moving scale. The scale has major and minimum value on the altitude reference tape. They are
minor tick marks with numerics being placed at the green in color. Barometric minimums can be set from -
major tick marks. 100 feet to a maximum of 15000 feet in 1 foot
increments.
The altitude range will be dependent on the display
selected on the EFIS control panel. With a range set to When the airplane descends to the barometric minimums
31-62-00-348.002
10NM or less, the altitude interval is 1000 feet. At altitude, the minimums bug and line will flash amber in
20NM, the interval is 2000 feet. At 40NM, the interval color for three seconds and then remain on steady amber
until reset.
31-62-00
- 449 -
The barometric minimums alert can be reset by one of Airplane Symbol
the following:
The airplane symbol is represented by a right angled
- The airplane climbing above the minimums value triangle as viewed from the right side. The top side of
- Selecting the reset (RST) button on the EFIS the triangle represents a 3 degree glide path angle for
control panel EFIS control panel ranges of 5 - 40NM. The point
- The airplane landing. represents the actual airplane position and the bottom
represents the actual altitude. It is white in color.
The barometric minimums display can be blanked by one
of the following: The symbol moves vertically but not horizontally and it
will park at the limits of the display.
- Selecting the (RST) button on the EFIS control
panel while the switch is set to BARO minimums Vertical Flight Path Vector
- Selecting radio minimums on the EFIS control panel
to make the BARO minimums digital value blank. The The vertical flight path vector represents the vertical
BARO minimums bug stays in view. path of the airplane. It is a fixed length, straight
- Selecting BARO minimums of -100 feet or greater. line and rotates about the point of the airplane
symbol. It is white in color.
NOTE: The line dashes for both MCP selected altitude
and minimum descent altitude are staggered so MCP Selected Vertical Speed Line
that when theyt are set to the same altitude,
they form a line of alternating magenta and green The MCP selected vertical speed line represents the
dashes. selected speed as a target angle when V/S mode is
engaged on the MCP. It is a dashed line and is magenta
Horizontal Reference Scale in color.
The range displayed on the VSD is half of the range Range to Target Speed Display
selected on the EFIS control panel. The scale has major
and minor tick marks with numerics being placed at the The range to target speed dot represents the point at
major tick marks. which the airplane will reach the FMC or MCP target
31-62-00-348.002
airspeed. The dot is green in color and may be filled
or unfilled.
31-62-00
- 450 -

If the airspeed is within 5 knots of the target Magenta is used for the active waypoint and white is
airspeed the dot is not shown on the display. If the used for subsequent waypoints.
airspeed is 10 knots or greater than the target
airspeed the dot will be filled and is displayed along Runway Display
the flight path vector line.
The runway symbol represents the lateral position,
If the target airspeed will not be achieved within the altitude and length of the selected runway on the VSD.
length of the flight path vector line, it will be The runway identifier and altitude are displayed at the
displayed at the end of the flight path vector line and top of the VSD with a dashed vertical line drawn to the
will be unfilled. runway threshold. The identifier, altitude, dashed line
and runway symbol are white in color.
Terrain Profile
Reference Approach Angle
The terrain profile represents a side view of the
terrain below and forward of the airplane's flight The reference approach angle is provided to give the
path. The terrain profile line is colored in green, flight crew addtional situation awareness during the
amber and red to match the color coding used for the final approach.
terrain display on the MAP display.
When an FMCS generated glide path angle is available,
Waypoint Display this is represented by a solid magenta line and will
extend 10NM. It terminates at the missed approach
Waypoints that fall within the limits of the VSD are waypoint (50 feet above the landing threshold).
displayed along the airplane flight path. A maximum of
5 waypoints can be displayed at one time. The waypoint When an FMCS generated flight path angle is not
identifier is displayed at the top of the VSD with a available, a default 3 degree angle path is displayed.
dashed vertical line to represent the lateral position It terminates 1040 feet from the runway threshold. It
of the waypoint. is a dashed line and is cyan in color.
Altitude constraints for the waypoint will be Glideslope Intercept Waypoint

represented by small triangles on the dashed line with
31-62-00-348.002
the constraint numerics positioned below the waypoint The glideslope intercept waypoint represents the
identifier. The dashed lines, altitude constraints and precise point at which the airplane will intercept the
identifiers are displayed in either magenta or white.
31-62-00
- 451 -
glideslope. It is magenta or white in color depending
whether it is active or inactive.
Decision Gates
The decision gates represent points along the FMCS

final approach glide path or the reference 3 degree
line that correspond to 500 feet and 1000 feet above
runway elevation. The 1000 feet decision gate is white
in color and the 500 feet decision gate is amber in
color.
31-62-00-348.002
31-62-00
- 452 -

RANGE TO TARGET WAYPOINT IDENTIFIER

SPEED AND ALTITUDE CONSTRAINT
VERTICAL FLIGHT
PATH VECTOR RUNWAY IDENTIFIER
AND ALTITUDE
MCP SELECTED MINIMUM DESCENT
ALTITUDE ALTITUDE LINE
2000 CF13R NOLLA RW13R G/S INTERCEPT POINT
2200 50 MCP SELECTED
MINIMUM DESCENT GS VERTICAL SPEED
ALTITUDE BUG
WAYPOINT ALTITUDE
8000 CONSTRAINT
REFERENCE APPROACH
AIRPLANE SYMBOL ANGLE
4000 MCP SELECTED

ALTITUDE LINE
MCP SELECTED RUNWAY SYMBOL
ALTITUDE BUG
0 TERRAIN PROFILE
ALTITUDE REFERENCE
0 10 20
HORIZONTAL RANGE
SCALE SCALE
1000 FEET DECISION 500 FEET DECISION

GATE GATE
31-62-00-348.002
CDS - ND - VSD DISPLAY - VSD
31-62-00
- 453 -
CDS -- ND - VSD FAILURE FLAGS
General
These are the flags that can be displayed on the

vertical situation display (VSD):
- VSD
- VSD TERR
- RWY DATA
- MOD RTE.
The VSD flag is displayed when the data necessary to

format the VSD is not available. It is amber in color.
The VSD TERR flag is displayed when EGPWS data is not

being received by CDS. It is amber in color. The flag
will also appear for these conditions:
- EGPWS geometric altitude failure

- If the indications TERR FAIL or TERR POS are set.
The VSD TERR INHIBIT flag is displayed when the Terrain

Inhibit switch on the GPWS module is set to INHIBIT.
The RWY DATA flag is displayed when the runway/approach

data is not received from the FMCS. It will also appear
if the origin/destination runway has not been selected.
It is amber in color.
The MOD RTE flag is displayed when the FMCS active

route is being modified. It is white in color. Only the
31-62-00-349.002
first waypoint is displayed during the modification.
31-62-00
- 454 -

2000
8000
VSD
4000
0 VSD TERR
0 10 20
VSD FAILURE VSD TERRAIN FAILURE
2000
8000
4000
0 VSD TERR INHIBIT

0 10 20
VSD TERRAIN INHIBIT
2000 2000 CF13R MOD RTE
8000 8000
4000 4000
31-62-00-349.002
0 RWY DATA 0
0 10 20 0 10 20
RUNWAY DATA FAILURE MOD RTE FLAG
CDS - ND - VSD FAILURE FLAGS
31-62-00
- 455 -
CDS -- ND - PLAN MODE
31-62-00-317.002
31-62-00
- 456 -

General Two range rings show on the plan display. The diameter
of the inner ring is 1/2 of the range set on the EFIS
To show the plan mode display, you select the PLAN control panel. The diameter of the outer ring is the
position on the EFIS control panel. range set on the EFIS control panel.
The plan mode display shows the FMC flight plan and Numerical range values show at the top and bottom of
other navigation data. To see other data, you use the each range ring. The numerical values on the inner
map switches on the EFIS control panel. range ring is 1/4 of the range. The numerical value of
the outer range ring is 1/2 of the range.
The flight crew uses the plan mode primarily to enter,
do a check of, or change a flight plan. The plan mode Flight Plan Path
display always shows in relation to true North up.
The flight plan path shows as a sequence of straight
Plan Mode Compass Points and True North Up Pointer lines between flight legs. Flight legs are the path
between 2 points, usually waypoints.
The letters N, E, W, and S show at the top, right, left,
and bottom of the plan display. These show the compass The flight plan path shows in magenta if it is active.
point orientation of the plan display. A pointer If the flight plan path is not active, it shows as a
adjacent to the N shows the North up orientation of the dashed cyan line.
display.
Changes to a flight plan path show in white until they
Airplane Symbol become active when you push the EXEC key on the control
display unit (CDU).
The airplane symbol is a white outline of an airplane
with no fill. The airplane symbol shows the position of Flight Plan Waypoints
the airplane in relation to the flight plan display.
Flight plan waypoints show selected navigation points
Map Display Range or positions along the FMC flight plan path.
You set the range of the plan display on the EFIS Waypoints show as a 4-point star symbol on the map
31-62-00-317.002
control panel. The ranges are 5, 10, 20, 40, 80, 160, display. Adjacent to the waypoint is an identifier that
320, and 640 nautical miles (nm). shows the name of the waypoint. Waypoints and
identifiers show in white if they are not active and in
31-62-00
- 457 -
magenta if they are active. The active waypoint is the - Altitude profile point is on the flight plan path
subsequent one on the airplane path. All other line but behind the airplane.
waypoints are not active.
Ground Speed
You can use the control display unit (CDU) from one
waypoint of a flight plan to a different waypoint. As Ground speed shows full time in the top left corner of
you select each flight plan waypoint, the waypoint the centered map display. Ground speed shows in a 2-
shows at the center of the plan display. digit format at speeds below 29.5 kt and in a 3-digit
format above 29.5 kt. Ground speed is in white and
The active waypoint name, estimated time of arrival, shows in whole numbers only.
and active waypoint distance show in the top left
corner of the expanded map display. The active waypoint True Airspeed
name is in magenta. Estimated time of arrival and
distance to go show in white. True airspeed shows full time in the top left of the
centered map display. True airspeed shows in 3 digits
Altitude Profile Points for airspeeds of more than 101 kt. True airspeed of
less than 101 kt shows as 3 dashes.
The green altitude profile points are indicators sent
by the FMC to identify these active flight plan steps: Map Source Annunciation
- Top-of-climb (T/C) The map source annunciation shows which FMC is the
- Top-of-descent (T/D) source of the map data. FMC L or FMC R shows at the
- End-of-descent (E/D) bottom of the display.
- Step climb (S/C).
Wind Speed and Angle
Altitude profile points are in positions on the active
flight plan path line at the predicted point of Wind speed and angle show in white at the top left of
occurrence. The altitude profile point does not show the expanded map display.
for these conditions:
Wind angle shows as a 3-digit value in degrees. Wind
31-62-00-317.002
- FMC finds that the predicted point of occurrence speed shows as a 1-, 2-, or 3-digit value to the right
is not on the flight plan path line of the wind angle.
31-62-00
- 458 -

GROUND SPEED TRUE TRUE NORTH UP

AIRSPEED POINTER
GS 338 TAS 351 DUCKY

WIND SPEED N ACTIVE WAYPOINT,
350o/15 1230 Z
AND DIRECTION ESTIMATED TIME
320 30 NM
OF ARRIVAL, AND
DISTANCE
RANGE VALUE
TATER
160
RANGE CIRCLES
W E
COMPASS POINT DUCKY
CENTER WAYPOINT
160 AIRPLANE SYMBOL
GOFUR
320
FMC L S
FMC SOURCE
31-62-00-317.002
CDS - ND - PLAN MODE
31-62-00
- 459 -
CDS -- ND - NON NORMAL DISPLAYS
General message is amber in color. The map data is not blank in
this condition.
These non-normal messages can show:
The EFIS MODE/NAV FREQ DISAGREE message shows when you
- UNABLE REQD NAV PERF-RNP select EFIS modes and VHF navigation frequencies that
- FMC DISAGREE are not compatible. The message is amber in color. If
- MAP RANGE DISAGREE you tune a VOR frequency on the navigation control
- EXCESS DATA panel and select the approach mode on the EFIS control
- EFIS MODE/NAV FREQ DISAGREE panel, the message shows on the navigation display. The
- FMC INTERFACE OK. same message also shows if you tune an ILS frequency on
the navigation control panel and select the VOR mode on
The UNABLE REQD NAV PERF - RNP message shows when the the EFIS control panel.
actual navigation performance (ANP) is more than the
required navigation performance (RNP) for the current The FMC INTERFACE OK message shows during FMCS BITE in
flight environment. The message is amber in color. The the fixed outputs test. This message is green in color.
map data is not blank in this condition.
The FMC DISAGREE message shows when there is a data

miscompare between the two FMCs in approach or on the
ground. The message is amber in color.
NOTE: If both the UNABLE REQD NAV PERF - RNP and FMC
DISAGREE messages are active at the same time,
they will show on two independent lines on the
display.
The MAP RANGE DISAGREE message shows when you select a

new range on the EFIS control panel, and there is no
new map data from the FMCS. The message is amber in
color. All map data is blank in this condition.
31-62-00-342.fm
The EXCESS DATA message shows when CDS is not able to
show all the map background data from the FMCS. The
31-62-00
- 460 -

GS 351 TAS 338 DUCKY GS 315 TAS 312

o
336 /15 TRK 140 MAG 0838.4z 190 o/15 CRS 055
32.5 NM DME 13.5
15
HDG 090 MAG
12
T/D
FMC DISAGREE
1 18
UNABLE REQD NAV PERF-RNP
TATER
EXCESS DATA EFIS MODE/NAV FREQ DISAGREE
40
MAP RANGE DISAGREE
860
DUCKY
FMC INTERFACE OK
VOR 1 VOR 2 VOR 2

116.00 ELN ELN
DME 35.1 FMC L DME 28.5 DME 28.5
EXPANDED DISPLAY CENTERED DISPLAY
31-62-00-342.fm 1 IF BOTH MESSAGES ARE ACTIVE AT THE SAME TIME, THEY WILL APPEAR ON TWO LINES AS SHOWN.
CDS - ND - NON NORMAL DISPLAYS
31-62-00
- 461 -
CDS -- ND - SYMBOLOGY - 1
Navigation Display Symbology
The navigation display (ND) modes show different

tables.
on the ND:

- White (W) - Present status, range scales
- Magenta (M) - Command information, pointers, and
symbols
- Amber (A) - Cautions, faults, and flags
31-62-00-318.002
31-62-00
- 462 -

SYMBOL NAME MODE(S) REMARKS
GROUND SPEED INDICATION GROUND SPEED

GS 310 (W)
ALL
SOURCE: FMC/ADIRU
TRUE AIRSPEED SHOWS ABOVE 100 KTS. NUMERICS

TRUE AIRSPEED INDICATION
TAS 312 (W)
ALL REPLACED WITH THREE DASHES (- - -) BELOW 100 KTS.
SOURCE: ADIRU(ONSIDE)
350o/15 WIND DIRECTION/SPEED (W)

VOR, VOR CTR, DIGITAL WIND DIRECTION AND SPEED SHOWS ABOVE AN
APP, APP CTR, ANALOG WIND DIRECTION ARROW. ARROW DOES NOT SHOW
DIRECTION ARROW (W) MAP, MAP CTR, IN THE PLAN MODE.
PLAN SOURCE: FMC
VOR 1,2 RECEIVER REFERENCE (G)

VOR, VOR CTR, SHOWS RECEIVER REFERENCE FOR THE DISPLAY.
ILS 1,2 APP, APP CTR SOURCE: DEU/VOR/MMR
VOR 1,2 RECEIVER REFERENCE

VOR, VOR CTR, SHOWS RECEIVER REFERENCE FOR THE
APP, APP CTR, DISPLAY POINTERS.
ADF 1,2 VOR (G), ADF (C)
MAP, MAP CTR SOURCE: DEU/VOR/ADF RECEIVER
116.80 VOR, VOR CTR, FREQUENCY SHOWS WHILE NCD OR UNTIL THE IDENTIFIER
ILS (G)/VOR (G) FREQUENCY APP, APP CTR, IS DECODED. IDENTIFIER REPLACES THE FREQUENCY.
OR OR STATION IDENTIFIER MAP, MAP CTR SOURCE: MMR/VOR
SEA
520 VOR, VOR CTR, FREQUENCY SHOWS WHILE NCD OR UNTIL THE IDENTIFIER
ADF (C) FREQUENCY OR
OR STATION IDENTIFIER APP, APP CTR, IS DECODED. IDENTIFIER REPLACES THE FREQUENCY.
MAP, MAP CTR SOURCE: ADF RECEIVER
BF
WINDSHEAR ANNUNCIATION (R) VOR, APP, RED WINDSHEAR ALERT OR AMBER WINDSHEAR CAUTION
WINDSHEAR (A) MAP, MAP CTR SOURCE: WXR
31-62-00-318.002
TERRAIN ANNUNCIATION (R) VOR, APP, RED TERRAIN ALERT OR AMBER TERRAIN CAUTION
TERRAIN (A) MAP, MAP CTR SOURCE: GPWS
CDS - ND - SYMBOLOGY - 1
31-62-00
- 463 -
The navigation display (ND) shows many different

tables.
on the ND This is what the colors usually show:

31-62-00-326.002
31-62-00
- 464 -


VOR, VOR CTR, SHOWS DME SLANT RANGE DISTANCE
DME 24.6 DME DISTANCE DISPLAY (G) APP, APP CTR, TO THE REFERENCE NAVAID.
MAP, MAP CTR SOURCE: DME
MAP, MAP CTR, DISTANCE TO GO TO THE ACTIVE WAYPOINT

124NM WAYPOINT DISTANCE (W) PLAN SOURCE: FMC
SHOWS MAP BACKGROUND IS ORIENTED AND
N NORTH POINTER (G) PLAN REFERENCED TO TRUE NORTH.
SOURCE: FMC
ESTIMATED TIME OF MAP, MAP CTR, SHOWS FMCS CALCULATED ETA FOR THE ACTIVE WAYPOINT.
0835.4 Z ARRIVAL (ETA) DISPLAY (W) PLAN SOURCE: FMC
FMC L MAP, MAP CTR, SHOWS ND MAP SOURCE.

MAP SOURCE ANNUNCIATION (G) PLAN SOURCE: FMC, FMC SELECT SWITCH
FMC R
MAP, APP, VOR 60 DEGREES SHOW IN THE EXPANDED MODE.
COMPASS (W)
MAP CTR, VOR 360 DEGREES SHOW IN THE CENTERED MODE.
CTR, APP CTR SOURCE: ADIRU
31-62-00-326.002
31-62-00
- 465 -

tables.
on the ND:

symbols
31-62-00-319.002
31-62-00
- 466 -

HEADING:
REFERENCE (G) BOX SHOWS HEADING. POINTER SHOWS HEADING ON
HDG 263 MAG READOUT (W) VOR, VOR CTR, THE COMPASS ROSE.
ORIENTATION (G) APP, APP CTR SOURCE: ADIRU
POINTER (W)
HEADING:
REFERENCE (G) BOX SHOWS HEADING.
HDG 259 MAG READOUT (W) MAP, MAP CTR SOURCE: FMC
ORIENTATION (G)
HEADING POINTER (W) MAP, MAP CTR POINTER SHOWS HEADING ON THE COMPASS ROSE.
SOURCE: ADIRU
SHOWS HEADING/TRACK TO MAGNETIC NORTH OR

MAG or VOR, VOR CTR, TRUE NORTH. IF THE ADIRU SWITCHES FROM TRU TO
HEADING/TRACK REFERENCE APP, APP CTR, MAG A BOX SHOWS AROUND MAG FOR TEN SECONDS
TRU (G) BOX (W/A/G) MAP, MAP CTR SOURCE: ADIRU/DEU
40 VOR, VOR CTR, SHOWS AIRPLANE TRACK AND LOCATION ON THE

TRACK POINTER WITH APP, APP CTR, COMPASS ROSE. RANGE SHOWS NEXT TO THE MIDDLE
RANGE (W) MAP RANGE ARCS IN MILES.
SOURCE: FMC/ADIRU
20 SHOWS AIRPLANE TRACK AND LOCATION ON THE

TRACK POINTER WITH COMPASS ROSE. RANGE SHOWS NEXT TO THE
RANGE (W) MAP CTR
RANGE MARKS IN MILES.
20 SOURCE: FMC/ADIRU
31-62-00-319.002
SHOWS THE HEADING SET ON THE MCP. A DASH LINE
VOR, VOR CTR,
SELECTED HEADING CURSOR (M) APP, APP CTR, (M) EXTENDS FROM THE CURSOR TO THE AIRPLANE
AND VECTOR (M) SYMBOL IN THE EXPANDED AND MAP CTR MODES.
MAP, MAP CTR SOURCE: FCC/MCP
31-62-00
- 467 -

tables.
on the ND:

symbols
31-62-00-320.002
31-62-00
- 468 -

RUNWAY (W) AND SHOWS IF THE RANGE IS >/=80 AND YOU SELECT A
KABC MAP, MAP CTR, RUNWAY ON THE FMC CDU.
22L AIRPORT IDENTIFIER PLAN
SOURCE: FMC
RUNWAY (W) AND MAP, MAP CTR, SHOWS IF THE RANGE </=40 NM AND YOU SELECT A
AIRPORT IDENTIFIER PLAN RUNWAY ON THE FMC CDU.
22L SOURCE: FMC
AIRPORTS WITHIN THE MAP AREA SHOW WITH
AIRPORT (C) MAP, MAP CTR SELECTION OF THE ARPT SWITCH ON THE EFIS
KTEB CONTROL PANEL.
SOURCE: FMC
ROUTE WAYPOINT: MAP, MAP CTR, ACTIVE - THE NEXT GO TO WAYPOINT.
ACTIVE (M) PLAN INACTIVE - OTHER WAYPOINTS ON THE ACTIVE ROUTE.
INACTIVE (W) SOURCE: FMC
SHOWS WITH SELECTION OF THE WPT SWITCH ON
OFF ROUTE WAYPOINT (C) MAP, MAP CTR, THE EFIS CONTROL PANEL.
BUFER PLAN
SOURCE: FMC
ACTIVE - THE ACTIVE ROUTE SHOWS MAGENTA WITH
AMBOY FLIGHT PLAN ROUTE: A CONTINUOUS LINE BETWEEN WAYPOINTS.
ACTIVE (M) MAP, MAP CTR, MODIFIED - ACTIVE ROUTE MODIFICATIONS SHOW WITH
DUCKY MODIFIED (W) PLAN SHORT DASHES (W) BETWEEN WAYPOINTS.
INACTIVE (C) INACTIVE - INACTIVE ROUTES SHOW WITH LONG DASHES
TATER (C) BETWEEN WAYPOINTS.
SOURCE: FMC
THE ENTERED OR PROCEDURAL ALTITUDE AND ETA FOR
DUCKY ROUTE DATA:
ROUTE WAYPOINTS SHOW WHEN YOU SELECT THE DATA
12000 ACTIVE WPT (M) MAP, MAP CTR SWITCH ON THE EFIS CONTROL PANEL.
0835Z INACTIVE WPT (W)
SOURCE: FMC
HOLDING PATTERN:
ACTIVE ROUTE (M) MAP, MAP CTR, A HOLDING PATTERN SHOWS WHEN IN THE FLIGHT PLAN.
MODIFIED ROUTE (W) PLAN SOURCE: FMC
INACTIVE ROUTE (C)
31-62-00-320.002
PROCEDURE TURN:
ACTIVE ROUTE (M) MAP, MAP CTR, A PROCEDURE TURN SHOWS WHEN IN THE FLIGHT PLAN.
MODIFIED ROUTE (W) PLAN SOURCE: FMC
INACTIVE ROUTE (C)
31-62-00
- 469 -

tables.
on the ND:

symbols
31-62-00-321.002
31-62-00
- 470 -

A PARALLEL OFFSET LINE WITH DASHES SHOWS FROM THE

OFFSET PATH AND IDENTIFIER: MAP, MAP CTR, ACTIVE OR MODIFIED ROUTE. THIS OCCURS WHEN AN
ACTIVE ROUTE (M) PLAN ENTRY IS MADE FROM THE FMCS-CDU ROUTE PAGE AND THE
MODIFIED ROUTE (W) AIRPLANE IS IN THE AIR.
SOURCE: FMC
SHOWS THE LOCATION ON THE FLIGHT WHEN THE

AIRPLANE REACHES THE MCP ALTITUDE. THE CAPTURE
ALTITUDE RANGE ARC (G) MAP, MAP CTR POINT IS BASED ON VERTICAL SPEED AND GROUND SPEED.
SOURCE: FMC
SHOWS THE FMC CALCULATED T/C (TOP OF CLIMB), T/D
ALTITUDE PROFILE POINT (TOP OF DESCENT), S/C (STEP CLIMB), AND E/D
MAP, MAP CTR
AND IDENTIFIER (G) (END OF DESCENT).
T/D SOURCE: FMC
VOR (C)
NAVAIDS THAT RELATE TO STATIONS SHOW WHEN YOU
DME/TACAN (C) MAP, MAP CTR SELECT THE STA SWITCH ON THE EFIS CONTROL PANEL.
SOURCE: FMC
VORTAC (C)
SELECTED REFERENCE POINT SHOWS THE REFERENCE POINT SELECTED ON THE

AND BEARING DISTANCE MAP, MAP CTR, FMCS-CDU FIX PAGE. BEARING AND/OR DISTANCE FROM
PLAN THE FIX SHOW WITH GREEN DASHES.
ABC INFORMATION (G)
SOURCE: FMC
ARPT SWITCH SELECTED ON THE EFIS CONTROL PANEL

ARPT SOURCE: DEU
MAP, MAP CTR, WPT SWITCH SELECTED ON THE EFIS CONTROL PANEL
WPT MAP OPTION SELECTIONS(C)
31-62-00-321.002
PLAN SOURCE: DEU
STA SWITCH SELECTED ON THE EFIS CONTROL PANEL

STA
SOURCE: DEU
31-62-00
- 471 -

tables.
on the ND:

symbols
31-62-00-322.002
31-62-00
- 472 -


AIRPLANE POSITION IS AT THE POINT OF THE
MAP, MAP CTR, AIRPLANE SYMBOL.
AIRPLANE SYMBOL (W) VOR, APP SOURCE: DEU
VOR CTR, AIRPLANE POSITION IS AT THE TOP CENTER

AIRPLANE SYMBOL (W) OF THE AIRPLANE SYMBOL.
APP CTR
SOURCE: DEU
SHOWS AIRPLANE POSITION AND TRACK ALONG ROUTE IN

AIRPLANE SYMBOL (W) PLAN THE PLAN MODE ONLY.
SOURCE: DEU
SHOWS AIRPLANE PREDICTED POSITION AT THE END OF

30, 60, AND 90 SECOND INTERVALS. EACH SEGMENT
TREND VECTOR (W), DASH(S) MAP, MAP CTR SHOWS 30 SECONDS AND IS BASED ON BANK ANGLE AND
GROUND SPEED.
SOURCE: FMC
SHOWS VOR DEVIATION. DEVIATION POINTER

COURSE DEVIATION POINTER (M) SHOWS THE COURSE DEVIATION ERROR.
VOR, VOR CTR
AND SCALE (W) SOURCE: VOR
SELECTED COURSE POINTER (W) VOR, APP

AND LINE (M) SHOWS VOR OR LOC SELECTED COURSE.
SOURCE: FCC/MCP
SELECTED COURSE POINTER (W) VOR, APP CTR
31-62-00-322.002
31-62-00
- 473 -

tables.

31-62-00-323.002
31-62-00
- 474 -


SHOWS A POINT THAT MARKS THE BEGINNING OF A
DECEL DECELERATION DISPLAY (G) MAP, MAP CTR DECELERATION PART OF A ROUTE OF FLIGHT.
SOURCE: FMC
SHOWS NEAR AIRPLANE SYMBOL. SHOWS VOR TO/FROM
TO/FROM INDICATOR (W) VOR CTR INDICATION.
SOURCE: DEU
TO SHOWS VOR TO/FROM INDICATION.
FROM TO/FROM DISPLAY (W) VOR, VOR CTR SOURCE: DEU
#1: VOR (G) OR ADF (C)

BEARING
SHOWS BEARING TO (HEAD) OR FROM (TAIL) A TUNED
VOR, VOR CTR STATION, IF A RADIO IS SELECTED ON THE EFIS
APP, APP CTR
MAP, MAP CTR CONTROL PANEL.
#2: VOR (G) OR ADF (C) SOURCE: VOR OR ADF
BEARING
R- VOR STATION AND RADIAL(G)

02 WHEN YOU SELECT POS ON THE EFIS CONTROL PANEL,
0
RADIALS TO VOR STATIONS SHOW, THE IRS POSITIONS
IRS POSITION (W) MAP, MAP CTR SHOW AND THE GPS POSITIONS SHOW. IF THE GPS
POSITIONS ARE THE SAME, ONLY ONE SYMBOL SHOWS.
SOURCE: FMC
GPS POSITION (W)
31-62-00-323.002
31-62-00
- 475 -

table.
on the ND, and this is what the colors usually show:

- White (W) - present status, scales
- Magenta (M) - command data, and symbols
31-62-00-324.002
31-62-00
- 476 -


WEATHER RADAR RETURNS AND WINDSHEAR SHOW WHEN
WEATHER RADAR RETURNS
THE WXR SWITCH IS ON; RETURNS SHOW AS
(M, R, A, AND G)
MAP, TURBULENCE (M), INTENSE RETURNS (R), MEDIUM
WEATHER RADAR WINDSHEAR
MAP CTR, INTENSITY (A), AND LOW INTENSITY (G);
MESSAGES (R,A) VOR, APP WINDSHEAR SHOWS FOR CAUTION (A), WARNING (R)
WINDSHEAR SYMBOL(B, R,
WINDSHEAR SYMBOL SHOWS WINDSHEAR EVENT WITH RED
WINDSHEAR AND A)
AND BLACK ARCS; AMBER LINES EXTEND FROM ARCS
TERRAIN DISPLAYS SHOW WHEN THE TERR SWITCH IS
TERRAIN DISPLAY (R, A, G, MAP, ON; DISPLAYS ALSO SHOW WHEN GPWS CAUSES POP UP;
TERR MAP CTR,
AND M) TERR ANNUNCIATION TERR ANNUNCIATION SHOWS WHEN TERR PUSHED OR
VOR, APP
DURING POP UP
TERRAIN CAUTION (A) VOR, APP,
TERRAIN TERRAIN WARNING (R) MAP, MAP CTR GPWS TERRAIN MESSAGES; CAN POP UP
VAR/WX+T VOR, APP, WEATHER RADAR RECEIVER GAIN, OPERATION
WEATHER RADAR ANNUNCIATION MAP, MAP CTR MODE, AND ANTENNA TILT
+15
TCAS RESOLUTION ADVISORY

(RA) (R)
-03
THE TCAS SYMBOL SHOWS THE RELATIVE POSITION
+02 TCAS TRAFFIC ADVISORY OF THE INTRUDER AIRPLANE; THE VERTICAL SPEED
TA (A) ARROW SHOWS IF THE AIRPLANE IS IN ASCENT
OR DESCENT AT A SPEED OF MORE THAN 500 FT/MIN;
THE NUMERIC ALTITUDE SHOWS
TCAS PROXIMATE TRAFFIC (W) AS RELATIVE ALTITUDE TO YOUR AIRPLANE WITH
-05 RELATIVE ALTITUDE A PLUS OR MINUS SIGN TO SHOW IF THE INTRUDER
MAP, MAP CTR, AIRPLANE IS ABOVE OR BELOW YOUR AIRPLANE;
APP, VOR
+09 TCAS OTHER TRAFFIC (W)
IF THERE IS NO SIGN BEFORE THE NUMERIC
ALTITUDE, THE ALTITUDE IS THE ALTITUDE OF THE
RELATIVE ALTITUDE
INTRUDER AIRPLANE
TCAS TA ABSOLUTE ALTITUDE
31-62-00-324.002
128
TCAS NO BEARING MESSAGE MESSAGE SHOWS TRAFFIC TYPE, RANGE IN NMS,
TA 8.9 -12 (RA-R, TA-A) ALTITUDE, AND VERTICAL DIRECTION
31-62-00
- 477 -

tables.

tables.

31-62-00-325.002
31-62-00
- 478 -


A 3NM RANGE RING SHOWS WHEN YOU SELECT TCAS AND A
MAP, MAP CTR, RANGE OF 10,20,40,80.
TCAS RANGE RING (W) APP, VOR
SOURCE: DEU
SHOWS THERE IS A TCAS RA OR TA WITH OR WITHOUT
TCAS TRAFFIC ALERT MESSAGE
TRAFFIC ALL THE TFC SWITCH SELECTED.
(RA-R, TA-A)
SOURCE: TCAS
SHOWS RA OR TA TRAFFIC IS OUTSIDE THE TRAFFIC
TCAS OFFSCALE MESSAGE MAP, MAP CTR,
OFFSCALE AREA OF THE ND RANGE. TFC SWITCH MUST BE ON.
(RA-R, TA-A) APP, VOR
SOURCE: TCAS
SHOWS THAT THE CDS WILL SHOW TRAFFIC ON THE ND.
MAP, MAP CTR,
TFC TCAS MODE (C) TFC SWITCH IS ON.
APP, VOR
SOURCE: DEU
SHOWS WHEN TRAFFIC ADVISORIES ONLY SELECTED ON
TA ONLY TCAS MODE (C) ALL ATC TCAS CONTROL PANEL.
SOURCE: TCAS
TCAS COMPUTER IS IN THE TEST MODE.
TCAS TEST TCAS MODE (C) ALL SOURCE: TCAS
TCAS TCAS IS SELECTED OFF.

OFF TCAS MODE (A) ALL SOURCE: TCAS
SHOWS THERE IS A FAULT IN TCAS DATA OR THE CDS

CANNOT SHOW TCAS. THE DISPLAY SHOWS WITH OR
TCAS
TCAS MODE (A) ALL WITHOUT THE TFC SWITCH ON. THE TFC SWITCH CONTROLS
FAIL
THE DISPLAY AFTER IT SHOWS.
SOURCE: TCAS
31-62-00-325.002
31-62-00
- 479 -
The navigation display (ND) displays different symbols

and data. These symbols and data show in these tables.
on the ND:

31-62-00-345.fm
31-62-00
- 480 -

VERTICAL DEVIATION FROM THE CALCULATED VERTICAL

PROFILE (POINTER) SHOWS AT THE TOP OF DESCENT
VERTICAL DEVIATION POINTER (T/D) AND DURING DESCENT ONLY. SCALE SHOWS
MAP, MAP CTR
(M) AND SCALE (W) +/- 400 FEET DEVIATION. A DIGITAL READOUT SHOWS
WHEN THE POINTER IS OVER +/- 400 FEET.
SOURCE: FMC
31-62-00-345.fm
31-62-00
- 481 -
The primary flight display (PFD) shows many different

tables.
on the PFD. This is what the colors usually show:

31-62-00-352.fm
31-62-00
- 482 -

SHOWS LATERAL DEVIATION FOR ILS/FMC/IAN.

LOCALIZER DEVIATION DEVIATION POINTER SHOWS THE DEVIATION ERROR.
APP, APP CTR THE POINTER IS FILLED FOR DEVIATION OF LESS THAN
POINTER (M) AND SCALE (W) 2.5 DOTS.
SOURCE: MMR/DEU
SHOWS VERTICAL DEVIATION FOR ILS/FMC/IAN.

GLIDESLOPE DEVIATION DEVIATION POINTER SHOWS THE DEVIATION ERROR.
APP, APP CTR THE POINTER IS FILLED FOR DEVIATION OF LESS THAN
POINTER (M) AND SCALE (W) 2.5 DOTS.
SOURCE: MMR/DEU
ILS 1 110.90 ILS SOURCE ANNUNCIATION (G) APP, APP CTR SHOWS SOURCE OF ILS DATA AND SELECTED FREQUENCY
FREQUENCY/IDENTIFIER (W) OR IDENTIFIER. SOURCE: MMR
CRS131 SELECTED RUNWAY HEADING (W) APP, APP CTR SHOWS SELECTED RUNWAY HEADING.
SOURCE: DFCS MCP
DME 18.0 DME DISTANCE (W) APP, APP CTR SHOWS DME DISTANCE TO LOCALIZER.
SOURCE: DME
FMC SOURCE ANNUNCIATION (G) SHOWS SOURCE OF FMC APPROACH DATA AND SELECTED
FMC L RNAV13R APP, APP CTR APPROACH IDENTIFIER. SOURCE: FMCS
APPROACH IDENTIFIER (W)
LOC 1 110.90 IAN SOURCE ANNUNCIATION (G) SHOWS SOURCE OF IAN DATA AND SELECTED FREQUENCY
APP, APP CTR
G/P L FREQUENCY/IDENTIFIER (W) OR IDENTIFIER. SOURCE: FMCS/MMR
APP, APP CTR SHOWS DISTANCE TO MISSED APPROACH POINT.

RW13R 18.0 APPROACH DISTANCE (W)
SOURCE: FMCS
31-62-00-352.fm
31-62-00
- 483 -
CDS -- ND - APPROACH MODE FAILURE FLAGS
General
Failures of input data causes the display indications

to be blank and failure flags to show. Failure flags
are amber in color.
Failure Flags
These flags can show in the approach modes:
- ADF 1/2 - ADF receiver failure; shows only when ADF

is selected on the EFIS control panel
- DME - DME interrogator failure
- FAC - final approach course failure from FMC
- HDG - ADIRU heading data is not valid
- G/P - glide path failure from FMCS
- G/S - MMR receiver glideslope function failure
- LOC - MMR receiver localizer function failure
- PWS FAIL - weather radar R/T predictive windshear
failure
- TCAS FAIL - TCAS system failure
- TERR FAIL - EGPWS terrain function failure
- WXR FAIL - weather radar system failure.
31-62-00-327.003
31-62-00
- 484 -

HDG
DME 1 DME 1
DME 2 DME 2
HDG
PWS FAIL PWS FAIL

TERR FAIL TERR FAIL
FAC
LOC
G G G G
WXR / / / /
FAIL P S P S
ADF 1 ADF 2 ADF 1 ADF 2

VOR 1 FAC VOR 2 VOR 1 VOR 2
DME 1 LOC DME 2 DME 1 DME 2
EXPANDED CENTERED
31-62-00-327.003
CDS - ND - APPROACH MODE FAILURE FLAGS
31-62-00
- 485 -
CDS -- ND - VOR MODE FAILURE FLAGS
General
Failures of input data cause blank indications. Failure

of input data from some systems cause failure flags to
show. All failure flags are amber.
Failure Flags
These flags show in the expanded and centered VOR

modes:
- HDG - ADIRU heading data is gone

- VOR 1/2 - VOR receiver failure; shows only when you
select VOR on the EFIS control panel
- DME 1/2 - DME interrogator failure
- WXR FAIL - weather radar system failure
function failure
- TERR FAIL - GPWS terrain function failure
- ADF 1/2 - ADF receiver failure; shows only when you
select ADF on the EFIS control panel
- VOR 1/2 - VOR receiver failure; shows only when you
select VOR on the EFIS control panel.
31-62-00-328.002
31-62-00
- 486 -

HDG
DME 1 DME 1
DME 2 DME 2
HDG
PWS PWS
FAIL FAIL
TERR TERR
FAIL FAIL VOR 1
VOR 2
WXR
FAIL
ADF 1 VOR 1 ADF 2 ADF 1 ADF 2

VOR 1 VOR 2 VOR 2 VOR 1 VOR 2
DME 1 DME 2 DME 1 DME 2
31-62-00-328.002
VOR CENTER VOR
CDS - ND - VOR MODE FAILURE FLAGS
31-62-00
- 487 -
CDS -- ND - MAP MODE FAILURE FLAGS
General
Failures of input data cause blank indications.

Failures of input data from some systems cause failure
flags to show.
All failure flags are amber.
Failure Flags
These failure flags show in the expanded and centered

map modes:
- HDG - ADIRU heading data is gone

- MAP - map data from FMC is gone
- VTK - vertical track (vertical deviation) data
from FMC is gone
- WXR FAIL - weather radar system failure
function failure
- TERR FAIL - GPWS terrain function failure
- DME 1/2 - DME interrogator failure
- ADF 1/2 - ADF receiver failure (shows only when you
select ADF on the EFIS control panel)
- VOR 1/2 - VOR receiver failure (shows only when you
select VOR on the EFIS control panel).
31-62-00-329.002
31-62-00
- 488 -

HDG
HDG
PWS FAIL PWS FAIL

TERR FAIL TERR FAIL
WXR
FAIL V
T
K
WXR MAP
FAIL
MAP
V
T
K
ADF 1 ADF 2 ADF 1 ADF 2

VOR 1 VOR 2 VOR 1 VOR 2
DME 1 DME 2 DME 1 DME 2
MAP MAP CENTER
31-62-00-329.002
CDS - ND - MAP MODE FAILURE FLAGS
31-62-00
- 489 -
CDS -- ND - PLAN MODE FAILURE FLAGS
General
Failures of input data cause blank indications.
Failure Flag
The MAP flag can show in the plan mode. It shows a

failure of the map from the FMCS.
31-62-00-330.002
31-62-00
- 490 -

W MAP E
31-62-00-330.002
S
CDS - ND - PLAN MODE FAILURE FLAGS
31-62-00
- 491 -
CDS -- ENGINE DISPLAY - INTRODUCTION
Engine Display
The engine indications show on the upper center and

lower center display units.
These are the indications that show on the upper DU:
- TAT, thrust mode and autothrottle limit message

- N1
- EGT
- Fuel flow
- Crew alert messages
- Limited ATC COMM messages
- Fuel quantity.
These are the indications that show on the lower DU:
- N2
- Fuel flow/fuel used
- Oil pressure, temperature, and quantity
- Engine vibration.
31-62-00-500.004
31-62-00
- 492 -

TAT +19c TO +22c ENG 1 ENG 2 X-BLD X-BLD
TAI REV TAI 75.0

START VALVE
OPEN
START VALVE
OPEN 55.0 55.0
10 21.0 10 65.0 OIL FILTER
BYPASS
OIL FILTER
BYPASS
0 0
8 8 LOW OIL LOW OIL N2
2 2 PRESSURE PRESSURE
6 4 6 4
N1
0.15 FF
1.51
100 500
ENG FAIL
OIL
EGT 2 PRESS 36
0.15 FF 1.51
ATC OIL
129 TEMP 130
LO 4 OIL QTY 20
FUEL QTY KGS X 1000

1.6 VIB 4.5
3.89 10.89 3.87
TOTAL 18.65
PRIMARY ENGINE DISPLAY SECONDARY ENGINE DISPLAY
31-62-00-500.004
CDS - ENGINE DISPLAY - INTRODUCTION
31-62-00
- 493 -
CDS -- ENGINE DISPLAY - MISCELLANEOUS INDICATIONS
Total Air Temperature - ---
- GA
The total air temperature (TAT) is displayed as a - MAN.
digital indication in the top left corner of the upper
DU. The legend is cyan in color and the temperature is Autothrottle Limit Message
white. TAT is always measured in degrees celsius.
The autothrottle limit (A/T LIMIT) message will be
TAT data is supplied from the left air data inertial displayed when the N1 thrust mode data from the FMCS is
reference system (ADIRS). If the left ADIRS data is invalid. It is displayed at the top of the upper
invalid, TAT from the right ADIRS will be displayed. display unit (DU) and is white in color.
There is no fail flag for TAT.
Selected Temperature
Thrust Modes
The selected temperature is displayed in the top center
The FMCS calculates thrust modes and sends them to the of the upper DU. It is always measured in degrees
display electronic units (DEU). They are displayed at celsius and is green in color. It is only displayed
the top of the upper display unit and are green in when a selected temperature derated takeoff or climb
color. If the N1 data is NCD, three dashes will be has been selected by the flight crew. The selected
displayed. temperature is set by the flight crew on the FMCS N1
LIMIT page.
These are the thrust modes that can show:
- TO
- TO 1
- TO 2
- D-TO
- D-TO 1
- D-TO 2
- CLB
- CLB 1
31-62-00-501.003
- CLB 2
- CON
- CRZ
31-62-00
- 494 -

THRUST MODE
-OR-
AUTOTHROTTLE
LIMIT MESSAGE SELECTED TEMPERATURE
TOTAL AIR
TEMPERATURE
TAT +19c A/T LIM +22c
31-62-00-501.003
CDS - ENGINE DISPLAY - MISCELLANEOUS INDICATIONS
31-62-00
- 495 -
CDS -- ENGINE DISPLAY - CREW ALERT MESSAGES
31-62-00-506.004
31-62-00
- 496 -

Crew Alert Messages units (DEUs) inhibit the message during takeoff and
landing.
These are the crew alert messages:
The LOW OIL PRESSURE message comes on if main engine
- Engine alert messages. oil pressure decreases below the redline limit. All
- ATC communication messages three alert messages flash on and off for the first ten
seconds and then the LOW OIL PRESSURE message remains
Engine Alert Messages on continuously. The DEUs inhibit the message during
takeoff and landing.
These are the three crew alert messages for each
engine: The takeoff alert inhibit is enabled when the ground
speed is more than 80 knots. The inhibit is disabled
- START VALVE OPEN when one of these conditions is true:
- OIL FILTER BYPASS
- LOW OIL PRESSURE. - Ground speed is less than 75 knots
- Radio altitude is more than 400 feet
All three messages are displayed in reverse video with - 30 seconds after the takeoff alert inhibit sets.
black letters on an amber background. The captions ENG
1 and ENG 2 are in cyan. The landing alert inhibit is enabled when the radio
altitude is less than 200 feet. The inhibit is disabled
The START VALVE OPEN message comes on continuously when one of these conditions is true:
during a main engine start. If at starter cutout (55%
N2) the start valve does not go to the closed position, - 30 seconds after touchdown
the START VALVE OPEN message flashes on and off for the - Radio altitude increases to more than 400 feet
first ten seconds. After ten seconds the message - 30 seconds after the landing alert inhibit sets.
remains on steady.
ATC Communication Messages
The OIL FILTER BYPASS message comes on if the main
engine scavenge oil filter starts to bypass due to The ATC communication message is displayed in white as
clogging. All three alert messages flash on and off for *ATC above and to the left of the fuel quantity
31-62-00-506.004
the first ten seconds and then the OIL FILTER BYPASS indication. The ATC message is displayed when the
message remains on continuously. The display electronic flight management computer system (FMCS) receives an
31-62-00
- 497 -
ATC uplink. Only one ATC message is displayed at a
time. An aural chime comes on with the ATC message.
Communication Message Inhibits
The communication messages are inhibited during takeoff

and landing.
The communication message takeoff inhibit is enabled

when the ground speed is more than 80 knots. The
inhibit is disabled when one of these conditions is
true:
- Ground speed is less than 75 knots

- Takeoff thrust is not set
- 30 seconds after the airplane goes from ground to
air.
The communication message landing inhibit is enabled

when the radio altitude is less than 800 feet. The
inhibit is disabled when one of these conditions is
true:

- Ground speed is less than 75 knots.
31-62-00-506.004
31-62-00
- 498 -

ENG 1 ENG 2
START VALVE START VALVE
OPEN OPEN
MAIN ENGINE OIL FILTER OIL FILTER
ALERT MESSAGES BYPASS BYPASS
LOW OIL LOW OIL
PRESSURE PRESSURE
COMMUNICATION
ATC
MESSAGE
FUEL QTY KGS X 1000

3.89 10.89 3.87
31-62-00-506.004
TOTAL 18.65
CDS - ENGINE DISPLAY - CREW ALERT MESSAGES
31-62-00
- 499 -
CDS -- ENGINE DISPLAY - N1 INDICATION
31-62-00-502.003
31-62-00
- 500 -

N1 Indication Reference N1 Bug
The N1 indications for the main engines show at the top The N1 reference bug shows on the outer edge of the N1
left of the upper display unit (DU). The N1 value shows scale and is green in color. It shows the thrust target
as a digital and an analog indication. set automatically by the FMCS or manually by the flight
crew.
In the normal operation range these indications are
white in color: N1 Maximum Bug
- Digital readout The N1 maximum bug shows on the inner edge of the N1
- Highlight box around the digital readout scale and is amber in color. The N1 maximum bug shows
- Analog scale the rated thrust of the engine. The EEC calculates the
- Analog pointer. position of the bug. The bug does not show during
reverse thrust operation.
The area behind the analog pointer has a gray fill.
N1 Command Sector
If N1 gets to the redline limit, these show in red:
The N1 command sector shows on the outer edge of the
- Digital readout analog scale. The N1 command sector shows the
- Highlight box difference between the commanded thrust (thrust lever
- Analog scale position) and the actual thrust.
- Analog pointer.
N1 Reference Readout
If there was an N1 exceedance, the highlight box around
the digital readout shows in red when the airplane is The reference N1 readout shows above the N1 digital
on the ground, and the two engines are off. It stays readout and is green in color. The reference N1 readout
red until maintenance personnel do a reset. does not show during reverse thrust operation.
Normally the display electronic units (DEU) use the N1 If the N1 target data from the FMCS is NCD or not valid,
data from the electronic engine controls (EEC) for the the reference readout shows as dashes.
31-62-00-502.003
N1 display. The DEUs use direct inputs from the N1
speed sensors if the EECs do not have electrical power.
31-62-00
- 501 -
Thrust Reverser Message
The REV message shows when the thrust reverser (T/R)

operates. The REV message is amber in color when the
T/R extends more than 10%. The REV message changes to
green when the T/R extends more than 90%. When the REV
message shows, it replaces the reference N1 readout for
that engine.
Thermal Anti-Ice Indication
The TAI message shows when you put on the engine-cowl

thermal anti-ice. In normal operation the message is
green in color. If the cowl anti-ice valve does not go
to the commanded position in eight seconds, the message
changes to amber.
31-62-00-502.003
31-62-00
- 502 -

N1 SET
AUTO
1 BOTH
ENGINE DISPLAY CONTROL PANEL
UPPER DU THRUST THERMAL ANTI-ICE

REVERSER INDICATION
MESSAGE
N1 REFERENCE
READOUT
TAI REV TAI 75.0
N1 REDLINE LIMIT 10 21.0 10 65.0 N1 DIGITAL
0 0 INDICATION
N1 MAXIMUM BUG 8 8
2 2
6 6
4 4
N1
N1 ANALOG
REFERENCE N1 BUG INDICATION
31-62-00-502.003
N1 COMMAND SECTOR
CDS - ENGINE DISPLAY - N1 INDICATION
31-62-00
- 503 -
CDS -- ENGINE DISPLAY - EGT INDICATION
Engine Exhaust Gas Temperature Indication as a red tick mark on the EGT scale when these
conditions exist:
The exhaust gas temperature (EGT) indications for both
main engines are displayed below the N1 indications on - Airplane is on the ground
the upper display unit (DU). The EGT value shows both - Engines are off
as a digital and analog indication. - Fire handle in the normal position.
In the normal operational range, the digital readout, During a main engine start on the ground, if the
the highlight box around the digital readout, the electronic engine control (EEC) senses a possible hot
analog scale and the analog pointer are white in color. start, the highlight box around the EGT digital display
The area behind the analog pointer is shaded gray. will start to flash on and off. It will continue to
flash until the engine start lever is moved to the
NOTE: On the ground and with both engines shut down, cutoff position.
the EGT indication will be blank due to the EEC
not being powered. Engine Fail Message
If EGT reaches the amber band limit, the digital The engine failure message is displayed when there is
readout and highlight box, analog scale and analog an engine malfunction. It is displayed on the EGT
pointer are displayed in amber. During takeoff, the indication and is amber in color.
amber band color change is inhibited for five minutes
or until completion of takeoff whichever comes first. The ENG FAIL message will be displayed if the following
conditions are met:
If the EGT reaches the redline limit, the entire
indication changes from amber to red. - Both engines at idle or above
- Both start levers at the idle position
If there has been an EGT exceedance, the highlight box - N2 speed decreases below idle.
around the digital readout will be displayed in red
with the airplane on the ground and both engines shut
down. It will remain red until reset by maintenance
personnel.
31-62-00-503.003
The EGT start limit is the maximum temperature limit
during an engine start on the ground. It is displayed
31-62-00
- 504 -

EGT AMBER BAND EGT REDLINE
EGT DIGITAL
EGT HOT INDICATION
START LIMIT 100 500
ENG FAIL
EGT EGT ANALOG
INDICATION
ENGINE FAILURE
MESSAGE
31-62-00-503.003
CDS - ENGINE DISPLAY - EGT INDICATION
31-62-00
- 505 -
CDS -- ENGINE DISPLAY - FUEL QUANTITY INDICATIONS
Fuel Quantity Indication boost pumps outputs are low pressure (< 18 PSIG), and
at least one main engine is on.
The fuel quantity indications for the wing and center
tanks are displayed as digital indications in the lower If fuel quantity data from the fuel quantity processor
right of the center upper display unit (DU). They are unit (FQPU) is not valid, the indication is blank.
white in color for normal operation. The captions FUEL
QTY - KGS X 1000, TOTAL and the fuel quantity outline
box are cyan in color.
The TOTAL fuel quantity is displayed below the

individual tank quantities and is white in color.
The fuel quantity indication system gives alerts for

these non-normal conditions:
- Low fuel quantity

- Fuel imbalance
- Fuel configuration.
For non-normal conditions in a specific fuel tank, the

tank display is displayed in amber with the specific
message below the digital readout.
The LOW message is displayed when there is less than

907 kgs in one of the main tanks.
The IMBAL message is displayed when there is a

difference of more than 453.5 kgs between main tank 1
and main tank 2. It is only displayed under the lower
tank quantity readout.
31-62-00-515.003
The CONFIG message is displayed if there is more than
725 kgs of fuel in the center tank, the two center tank
31-62-00
- 506 -

FUEL QTY KGS X 1000

3.89 10.89 2.67
CONFIG IMBAL
TOTAL 17.45
FUEL QTY KGS X 1000
3.89 5.89 3.89
TOTAL 13.67 NORMAL, CONFIG AND IMBAL INDICATIONS
FUEL QTY KGS X 1000

5.89 0.82
LOW
TOTAL 6.71
31-62-00-515.003
INVALID, NORMAL AND LOW INDICATIONS
CDS - ENGINE DISPLAY - FUEL QUANTITY INDICATIONS
31-62-00
- 507 -
N2 Indication engine starter to start the engine. It is displayed
when these conditions exist:
The N2 indications for both main engines are displayed
at the top left of the lower display unit (DU). The N2 - Airplane is in the air
value shows both as a digital and analog indication. - Engine start switches in the cutoff position
- Engine fire handle not pulled
In normal operational range, the digital readout, the - Airplane not in the in-flight restart envelope.
highlight box around the digital readout, the analog
scale and the analog pointer are white in color. The
area behind the analog pointer is shaded gray.
If N2 reaches the redline limit, the digital readout

and highlight box, analog scale and analog pointer are
displayed in red.
If there has been an N2 exceedance, the highlight box

around the digital readout will be displayed in red
with the airplane on the ground and both engines shut
personnel.
Normally the display electronic units (DEU) use the N2

data from the electronic engine controls (EEC) for the
N2 display. However, the DEUs will use direct inputs
from the N2 speed sensors if the EECs do not have
electrical power.
Cross Bleed Start Message
The cross bleed start (X-BLD) message is displayed
31-62-00-504.003
above the N2 digital indication and is magenta in
color. It is displayed if the flight crew must use the
31-62-00
- 508 -

LOWER DU CROSS BLEED N2 REDLINE

START MESSAGE LIMIT
N2 DIGITAL
INDICATION
X-BLD X-BLD
55.0 55.0
N2 N2 ANALOG
INDICATION
31-62-00-504.003
CDS - ENGINE DISPLAY - N2 INDICATION
31-62-00
- 509 -
CDS -- ENGINE DISPLAY - OIL INDICATIONS
Oil Indications If the oil temperature data is not valid, the display
is blank. This does not include the readout box.
These are the oil indications:
Oil Quantity
- Oil pressure
- Oil temperature The oil quantity is displayed as a digital indication
- Oil quantity. in quarts. The display and box are white.
Oil Pressure If the oil quantity goes below 4 quarts for more than
35 seconds, the readout changes to a black on white
The oil pressure shows as a digital and an analog reverse video with a LO message next to the readout.
indication. In the normal operation range, the scale,
the pointer, and the digital display are white. When If the oil quantity data is not valid, the display is
the oil pressure is in the low amber band limit, the blank. This does not include the highlight box.
scale, the pointer, and the digital display are amber.
When the oil pressure is in the low redline limit, the
scale, the pointer, and the digital display are red.
If the oil pressure data is not valid, the display is

blank. This does not include the readout box.
Oil Temperature
The oil temperature shows as a digital and an analog

indication. In the normal operation range, the scale,
the pointer, and the digital display are white. When
the oil temperature is in the high amber band limit,
the scale, the pointer, and the digital display are
amber. When the oil temperature is in the high redline
limit, the scale, the pointer, and the digital display
31-62-00-507.003
are red.
31-62-00
- 510 -

LOW AMBER
BAND LIMIT OIL
OIL
2 PRESS 36 PRESSURE
LOW
REDLINE
LIMIT HIGH REDLINE
LIMIT
HIGH AMBER OIL
OIL
BAND LIMIT 129 TEMP 130 TEMPERATURE
31-62-00-507.003
OIL
LO 4 OIL QTY 20 QUANTITY
CDS - ENGINE DISPLAY - OIL INDICATIONS
31-62-00
- 511 -
CDS -- ENGINE DISPLAY - ENGINE VIBRATION INDICATIONS
Engine Vibration Indications
Engine vibration is displayed as a digital and analog

indication. These indications are white in color:
- Scale
- Pointer
- Digital readout
- Highlight box.
If vibration is equal to or greater than 4.0 units, the

digital readout changes to a black on white reverse
video.
If engine vibration data is not valid, the display is

blank. The highlight box stays white.
31-62-00-508.003
31-62-00
- 512 -

ENGINE DISPLAY
ENGINE
VIBRATION
1.5 VIB 4.5
31-62-00-508.003
CDS - ENGINE DISPLAY - ENGINE VIBRATION INDICATIONS
31-62-00
- 513 -
CDS -- ENGINE DISPLAY - COMPACTED ENGINE DISPLAY
General The compacted engine display may also be selected by
the flight crew using the ENG pushbutton on the engine
The common display system will automatically switch to display control panel.
the compacted engine display if one of the center
display units (DU) fails. When the compacted engine display has been manually
selected, any secondary engine exceedance will cause
In the compacted mode, the primary engine display the exceedance box to appear around the secondary
remains the same as the normal upper display but the engine data.
secondary engine indications are located just below the
exhaust gas temperature indication and are digital The color of the exceedance box will be the same color
readouts only. as the highest priority exceedance (red, amber or
white). The box will flash for ten seconds when the
If primary and secondary engine data are being exceedance first becomes active and then remain on
displayed on both of the center DUs and the upper steady.
center DU fails, then the lower center DU will display
the compacted engine display. These are the indications on the compacted engine
display:
If primary and secondary engine data are being
displayed on both of the center DUs and the lower - TAT and thrust mode
center DU fails, then the upper center DU will display - Crew alert messages
the compacted engine display. - N1
- EGT
If only primary engine data is being displayed on the - N2
upper center DU and the lower DU fails, then any - Fuel flow/fuel used
exceedance for a secondary engine parameter will cause - Oil pressure, temperature and quantity
the upper center DU to show the compacted engine - Engine vibration
display. - Fuel quantity.
If only primary engine data is being displayed on the The compacted engine indications are white in color
upper center DU and it fails, then the lower DU will under normal conditions.
31-62-00-514.003
only show primary engine data. Selection of the ENG
pushbutton would result in the copmpacted engine The cross bleed start (XB) message is displayed by the
display being shown on the lower center DU. side of the the N2 digital indication and is magenta in
31-62-00
- 514 -

color. It is displayed if the flight need to restart an If the fuel flow data is invalid, the digital readout
engine and the airplane is not within the inflight is blank but the highlight box remains in view. If the
restart envelope. FUEL USED switch on the engine display control panel is
selected, the last value of fuel used is displayed.
If the N1 gets to the redline limit, the digital
readout and highlight box, analog scale and pointer are If the oil pressure is in the low amber band limit, the
displayed in red. digital readout and highlight box are displayed in
amber. When the oil pressure is in the low redline
If there was an N1 exceedance, the highlight box around limit, the digital readout and highlight box are
the digital readout shows in red when the airplane is displayed in red.
on the ground and the two engines are shut down. It
will remain red until reset by maintenance personnel. If the oil pressure data is invalid, the digital
readout is blank but the highlight box remains in view.
If EGT reaches the amber band limit, the digital
readout and highlight box, analog scale and analog If the oil temperature is in the high amber band limit,
pointer are displayed in amber. If the EGT reaches the the scale digital readout and highlight box are
redline limit, the entire indication changes from amber displayed in amber. When the oil temperature is in the
to red. high redline limit, the digital readout and highlight
box are displayed in red.
If there was an EGT exceedance, the highlight box
around the digital readout is displayed in red when the If the oil temperature data is invalid, the digital
airplane is on the ground and the two engines are shut readout is blank but the highlight box remains in view.
personnel. If the oil quantity goes below the low oil quantity
limit for more than 35 seconds, the digital readout
If the N2 gets to the redline limit, the digital changes to a black on white reverse video indication
readout and highlight box are displayed in red. with a LO message next to the readout.
If there was an N2 exceedance, the highlight box around If the oil quantity data is invalid, the digital
the digital readout is displayed in red when the readout is blank but the highlight box remains in view.
31-62-00-514.003
airplane is on the ground and the two engines are shut
personnel.
31-62-00
- 515 -
If vibration is equal to or greater than 4.0 units, the
digital readout changes to a black on white reverse
video indication.
If engine vibration data is invalid, the digital

readout is blank but the highlight box remains in view.
31-62-00-514.003
31-62-00
- 516 -

TAT +19c CRZ ENG 1 ENG 2

TAI TAI OPEN OPEN
MFD
10 71.0 10 65.0 OIL FILTER
BYPASS
OIL FILTER
BYPASS
ENG SYS 0 0
8 8 LOW OIL LOW OIL
2 2
4 4
N1
558 545
EGT
XB 89.3 N2 87.4
3.08 FF 3.32
47 OIL PRESS 45
83 OIL TEMP 86
LO 3 OIL QTY 19
0.8 VIB 4.5
FUEL QTY KGS X 1000

3.89 10.89 3.87
7
TOTAL 18.65
31-62-00-514.003
CDS - ENGINE DISPLAY - COMPACTED ENGINE DISPLAY
31-62-00
- 517 -
CDS -- SYSTEMS DISPLAY - INTRODUCTION
General
The systems status data shows on the lower display unit

(DU). You use the SYS switch on the engine display
control panel to select it.
These indications show on the systems display:
- Hydraulic quantity
- Hydraulic pressure
- Brake temperature
- Flight control surface positions.
31-62-00-510.002
31-62-00
- 518 -

HYDRAULIC
A B
QTY % 100 76 RF
PRESS 3000 2800
L BRAKE TEMP R
1.5 3.2 2.8 5.6

N1 SET SPD REF AUTO BRAKE
1 DISARM
BOTH V1
2
2 VR 1 3
WT
VREF OFF MAX
FUEL FLOW
RESET FLT FLT
MFD RTO
SPLR SPLR
RATE ANTI SKID
ENG SYS
USED ANTI SKID AIL ELEV AIL
INOP

RUDDER
31-62-00-510.002
LOWER DU
CDS - SYSTEMS DISPLAY - INTRODUCTION
31-62-00
- 519 -
CDS -- SYSTEMS DISPLAY - HYDRAULIC INDICATIONS
General
The hydraulic indications show at the top of the lower

display unit (DU). Hydraulic quantity and pressure show
digitally for main hydraulic systems A and B and are
white in color.
Hydraulic quantity shows as a percentage with a range

from 0% to 106%. The normal FULL indication is 100%.
When the quantity in the A or B hydraulic reservoir is

less than or equal to 76%, a white RF (refill) message
shows on the display adjacent to the quantity
indication. The RF message can show only when the
airplane is on the ground with one of the trailing edge
flaps retracted or the two engines off.
Hydraulic pressure shows in units of pounds per square

inch (psi).
If hydraulic quantity or pressure data is not valid,

the related displays are blank.
31-62-00-511.002
31-62-00
- 520 -

HYDRAULIC REFILL
QUANTITY MESSAGE
HYDRAULIC
A B
QTY % 100 76 RF
PRESS 3000 2800
HYDRAULIC
PRESSURE
31-62-00-511.002
CDS - SYSTEMS DISPLAY - HYDRAULIC INDICATIONS
31-62-00
- 521 -
CDS -- SYSTEMS DISPLAY - BRAKE TEMPERATURE INDICATIONS
General
The brake temperature indications show the brake

temperature in normalized units and are white in color.
The scale is linear, and the total range is 0.0 to 9.9.
0.0 units shows approximately 38C (100F), and 9.9 shows

approximately 650C (1200F).
There are three conditions for the brake temperatures:
- Normal (0.0 - 2.4 units)

- Warm (2.5 - 4.9 units)
- Hot (5.0 - 9.9 units).
The WARM condition occurs when the brake temperature is

more than 2.5 units. For this condition the brake
symbol for the related brake shows a white fill. If the
two brakes on the same landing gear are in the WARM
condition, only the brake with the highest temperature
has the white fill.
The HOT condition occurs when the brake temperature is

more than 5 units. For this condition the brake symbol
for the related brake shows an amber fill, and the
digital readout is amber. If there are more than two
brakes in the HOT condition, all HOT brakes show.
31-62-00-512.002
31-62-00
- 522 -

BRAKE TEMPERATURE BRAKE TEMPERATURE

(WARM CONDITION) (HOT CONDITION)
L BRAKE TEMP R
1.5 3.2 2.8 5.6
31-62-00-512.002
CDS - SYSTEMS DISPLAY - BRAKE TEMPERATURE INDICATIONS
31-62-00
- 523 -
CDS -- SYSTEMS DISPLAY - FLIGHT CONTROL SURFACE POSITIONS INDICATIONS
General
The flight control surface position indications show

the position of these control surfaces:
- Ailerons
- Elevators
- Rudder
- Flight spoilers.
The indications show as an analog indication with a

pointer on a vertical or horizontal scale. The
indications are white in color.
For the ailerons, elevators, and rudder indications the

center tick mark shows the flight control neutral
position. The tick marks at the ends of the scales show
full scale deflections of the flight controls.
For the flight spoilers, the tick marks show fully

retracted and fully extended.
31-62-00-513.002
31-62-00
- 524 -

FLIGHT SPOILER
AILERON NEUTRAL RETRACTED ELEVATOR NEUTRAL
POSITION POSITION POSITION
FLT FLT
SPLR SPLR
RUDDER NEUTRAL
POSITION
AIL ELEV AIL
RUDDER
31-62-00-513.002
CDS - SYSTEMS DISPLAY - FLIGHT CONTROL SURFACE POSITIONS INDICATIONS
31-62-00
- 525 -
CDS -- OPERATION - SWITCHING - NORM POSITION
NORM
When you select NORM, the normal displays show on all

the display units. These are the normal displays:
- Left outboard: captain's primary flight display

- Left inboard: captain's navigation display
- Upper center: engine primary display
- Lower center: engine secondary display
- Right inboard: FO's navigation display
- Right outboard: FO's primary flight display.
At power-up, each display unit reads its position pins

and calculates its position. The position latches into
the DU memory. If a DU fails to read the position pins,
the DU is blank.
At power-up, the lower center display unit shows the

secondary engine display. After power-up, with the
display select panel lower DU selector in the NORM
position, you can use the ENG switch or the SYS switch
to control the format that shows on the lower center
display unit.
31-62-00-700.fm
31-62-00
- 526 -

MAIN PANEL DUs LOWER DU LOWER DU MAIN PANEL DUs

NORM NORM NORM NORM
ENG MFD ND ENG ENG OUTBD
OUTBD ENG ND
PFD PRI PRI PRI PRI PFD
ENG SYS
PFD PFD
INBD INBD
MFD MFD
CAPTAIN DISPLAY SELECT PANEL F/O DISPLAY SELECT PANEL
PRIMARY PRIMARY PRIMARY

FLIGHT DISPLAY NAVIGATION DISPLAY ENGINE DISPLAY NAVIGATION DISPLAY FLIGHT DISPLAY
LEFT OUTBOARD DU LEFT INBOARD DU UPPER CENTER DU RIGHT INBOARD DU RIGHT OUTBOARD DU
SECONDARY ENGINE DISPLAY
31-62-00-700.fm
LOWER CENTER DU
CDS - OPERATION - SWITCHING - NORM POSITION
31-62-00
- 527 -
CDS -- OPERATION - SWITCHING - OUTBD PFD POSITION
OUTBD PFD
When you select OUTBD PFD, the primary flight display

shows on the outboard display unit. The inboard display
unit does not show data.
31-62-00-701.fm
31-62-00
- 528 -


NORM NORM NORM NORM
OUTBD ENG ENG ND MFD ND ENG ENG OUTBD
ENG SYS
PFD PFD
INBD INBD
MFD MFD

FLIGHT DISPLAY ENGINE DISPLAY FLIGHT DISPLAY
31-62-00-701.fm
LOWER CENTER DU
CDS - OPERATION - SWITCHING - OUTBD PFD POSITION
31-62-00
- 529 -
CDS -- OPERATION - SWITCHING - INBD ENG PRI POSITION
INBD ENGINE PRI
When you select INBD ENGINE PRI, the primary engine

display shows on the inboard display unit. The
navigation display does not show. The upper center
display unit does not show display data.
31-62-00-702.fm
31-62-00
- 530 -


NORM NORM NORM NORM
ENG SYS
PFD PFD
INBD INBD
MFD MFD
PRIMARY PRIMARY PRIMARY PRIMARY

FLIGHT DISPLAY ENGINE DISPLAY ENGINE DISPLAY FLIGHT DISPLAY
31-62-00-702.fm
LOWER CENTER DU
CDS - OPERATION - SWITCHING - INBD ENG PRI POSITION
31-62-00
- 531 -
CDS -- OPERATION - SWITCHING - INBD PFD POSITION
INBD PFD
When you select INBD PFD, the primary flight display

shows on the inboard display unit. The outboard display
unit does not show display data.
31-62-00-703.fm
31-62-00
- 532 -


NORM NORM NORM NORM
OUTBD ENG ENG ND MFD
ND ENG ENG OUTBD
ENG SYS
PFD PFD
INBD INBD
MFD MFD

FLIGHT DISPLAY ENGINE DISPLAY FLIGHT DISPLAY
31-62-00-703.fm
LOWER CENTER DU
CDS - OPERATION - SWITCHING - INBD PFD POSITION
31-62-00
- 533 -
CDS -- OPERATION - SWITCHING - INBD MFD POSITION
INBD MFD
When you select INBD MFD, you can use the two switches
on the engine display control panel to select the multi
function display (MFD) format. If you select ENG the
engine secondary display shows on the inboard display
unit. If you select SYS the systems display shows on
the inboard display unit.
31-62-00-712.fm
31-62-00
- 534 -


NORM NORM NORM NORM
OUTBD ENG ENG ND MFD
ND ENG ENG OUTBD
ENG SYS
PFD PFD
INBD INBD
MFD MFD
PRIMARY SECONDARY PRIMARY SECONDARY PRIMARY

FLIGHT DISPLAY ENGINE DISPLAY ENGINE DISPLAY ENGINE DISPLAY FLIGHT DISPLAY
31-62-00-712.fm
LOWER CENTER DU
CDS - OPERATION - SWITCHING - INBD MFD POSITION
31-62-00
- 535 -
CDS -- OPERATION - SWITCHING - LOWER ENG POSITION
LOWER ENG
When you select LOWER ENG PRI, the primary engine

display shows on the lower center display unit. The
upper center display unit does not show data.
31-62-00-705.fm
31-62-00
- 536 -


NORM NORM NORM NORM
ENG SYS
PFD PFD
INBD INBD
MFD MFD
PRIMARY PRIMARY
FLIGHT DISPLAY NAVIGATION DISPLAY NAVIGATION DISPLAY FLIGHT DISPLAY
PRIMARY ENGINE DISPLAY
31-62-00-705.fm
LOWER CENTER DU
CDS - OPERATION - SWITCHING - LOWER ENG POSITION
31-62-00
- 537 -
CDS -- OPERATION - SWITCHING - LOWER ND POSITION
LOWER ND
If you select LOWER ND, the lower center display unit

shows the navigation display.
If both the captain and the first officer select LOWER

ND on their display select panels then the captain's
navigation display shows on the lower center display
unit.
31-62-00-708.fm
31-62-00
- 538 -


NORM NORM NORM NORM
OUTBD ENG MFD ND ENG ENG OUTBD
ENG ND
ENG SYS
PFD PFD
INBD INBD
MFD MFD

FLIGHT DISPLAY NAVIGATION DISPLAY ENGINE DISPLAY NAVIGATION DISPLAY FLIGHT DISPLAY
NAVIGATION DISPLAY
31-62-00-708.fm
LOWER CENTER DU
CDS - OPERATION - SWITCHING - LOWER ND POSITION
31-62-00
- 539 -
CDS -- OPERATION - SWITCHING - AUTOMATIC
Outboard Display Unit
If the outboard display unit has a failure, the inboard

display unit shows the primary flight display.
Inboard Display Unit
If the inboard display unit has a failure, the

navigation display does not show.
Upper Center Display Unit
If the upper center display unit has a failure, the

lower center display unit shows the primary engine
display. If the secondary engine display already shows
on the lower center display unit, the compacted engine
display shows.
31-62-00-707.fm
31-62-00
- 540 -


NORM NORM NORM NORM
ENG MFD ND ENG ENG OUTBD
OUTBD ENG ND
ENG SYS
PFD PFD
INBD INBD
MFD MFD
ENGINE DISPLAY
CAPTAIN DISPLAY SELECT PANEL CONTROL PANEL F/O DISPLAY SELECT PANEL
PRIMARY PRIMARY
FLIGHT DISPLAY FLIGHT DISPLAY
PRIMARY ENGINE DISPLAY
31-62-00-707.fm
LOWER CENTER DU
CDS - OPERATION - SWITCHING - AUTOMATIC
31-62-00
- 541 -
CDS -- OPERATION - SWITCHING - ENGINE SWITCH
Engine Display Switching
The ENG switch on the engine display control panel

(EDCP) can be used to select the compacted engine
display on the upper display unit (DU). Below is a
table detailing the DU formats and the formats that
will appear when a secondary engine exceedance occurs.
FORMATS AFTER FORMATS WHEN AN

INITIAL FORMATS
ENGINE KEY IS EXCEEDANCE
ON DISPLAY UNITS
PUSHED OCCURS
PRIMARY
COMPACTED COMPACTED
ENGINE/SECONDARY
ENGINE/BLANK ENGINE/BLANK.
ENGINE
PRIMARY PRIMARY
PRIMARY
ENGINE/SECONDARY ENGINE/SECONDARY
ENGINE/BLANK
ENGINE ENGINE.
PRIMARY
COMPACTED PRIMARY
ENGINE/SECONDARY
ENGINE/BLANK ENGINE/BLANK
ENGINE.
PRIMARY PRIMARY
PRIMARY
ENGINE/SECONDARY ENGINE/SECONDARY
ENGINE/SYSTEM
ENGINE ENGINE.
COMPACTED PRIMARY COMPACTED
ENGINE/SYSTEM ENGINE/SYSTEM ENGINE/SYSTEM.
PRIMARY COMPACTED COMPACTED
ENGINE/ND ENGINE/ND ENGINE/ND.
31-62-00-713.fm
COMPACTED PRIMARY COMPACTED
ENGINE/ND ENGINE/ND ENGINE/ND.
31-62-00
- 542 -

TAT+19c R-TO +22c ENG 1 ENG 2

REV 75.0
MFD
TAI TAI OPEN OPEN
10 65.0 10 65.0 OIL FILTER OIL FILTER
BYPASS BYPASS
0 0
8 8 LOW OIL LOW OIL
6 4 6 4
N1
497 500
ENG SYS EGT
X.XX FF X.XX
CTR
XXXX
FUEL
1 XX 2
X XX X XXX
X-BLD X-BLD
55.0 55.0
N2
0.35 FF 3.32
OIL
2 PRESS 36
OIL
129 TEMP 130
LO 4 OILQTY 20
1.6 VIB 4.5
ENG ENG
TAT+19c R-TO +22c ENG 1 ENG 2 TAT+19c CRZ ENG 1 ENG 2

START VALVE START VALVE START VALVESTART VALVE
TAI REV TAI 75.0 OPEN OPEN TAI TAI OPEN OPEN
10 65.0 10 65.0 OIL FILTER OIL FILTER
BYPASS BYPASS 10 71.0 10 65.0 OIL FILTER OIL FILTER
BYPASS BYPASS
0 0 0 0
8 8 LOW OIL LOW OIL 8 2 8 2 LOW OIL LOW OIL
2 2 PRESSURE PRESSURE 6 4 6 4 PRESSURE PRESSURE
6 4 6 4
N1 N1
497 500 509 558
EGT EGT
X.XX X.XX XB89.3 N2 87.4

FF
3.08 FF 3.32
47 OIL PRESS 45
83 OIL TEMP 86
18 OIL QTY 19
0.8 VIB 0.6
CTR CTR
XXXX 23 890
FUEL FUEL
1 XX 2 1 LB 2
X XX X XXX 7190 7290
ENG
31-62-00-713.fm
CDS - OPERATION - SWITCHING - ENGINE SWITCH
31-62-00
- 543 -
CDS -- OPERATION - DISPLAY SOURCE SELECTOR
Display Source Selector
The display source selector lets you select the DEU

that controls the displays. For maintenance, use the
switch to quickly find if there is a DEU failure or
partial failure.
When the selector is in the AUTO position with no

system failures, DEU 1 controls the left outboard, left
inboard, and center upper display units. In this
condition, DEU 2 controls the right outboard, right
inboard, and center lower display units.
If any of the graphics generators (GG) fail in either

DEU, the DEUs automatically change the routing of
displays to the display units from the servicable GGs.
When the selector is in the ALL ON 1 position, DEU 1

controls all six display units. When the selector is in
the ALL ON 2 position, DEU 2 controls all six display
units.
31-62-00-710.fm
31-62-00
- 544 -

DU LOB LIB UPPER C LOWER C RIB ROB

SELECTOR
POSITION
FAILURES DEU 1 DEU 1 DEU 1 DEU 2 DEU 2 DEU 2
NONE GG A GG A GG B GG A GG B GG B
DISPLAYS DEU 1 DEU 1 DEU 1 DEU 2 DEU 2 DEU 2 DEU 2

GG A GG B GG B GG A GG A GG B GG B
SOURCE CONTROL PANEL
AUTO BOTH BOTH DEU 1 DEU 1 DEU 1 DEU 2 DEU 2 DEU 2 DEU 2
ALL ALL ON 1 ON 2
ON 1 ON 2 GG B GG A GG A GG A GG A GG B GG B
NORMAL
DEU 2 DEU 1 DEU 1 DEU 1 DEU 1 DEU 2 DEU 2
GG A GG A GG A GG B GG B GG B GG B
GG B GG A GG A GG B GG B GG A GG A
AUTO DEU 1 DEU 2 DEU 2 DEU 2 DEU 2 DEU 2 DEU 2
GG A & B GG A GG A GG A GG B GG B GG B
GG A & B GG A GG A GG A GG B GG B GG B
DEU 1 GG A DEU 1 DEU 1 DEU 1 DEU 2 DEU 2 DEU 2
DEU 2 GG A GG B GG B GG B GG B GG B GG B
DEU 1 GG A DEU 1 DEU 1 DEU 1 DEU 2 DEU 2 DEU 2
DEU 2 GG B GG B GG B GG B GG A GG A GG A
DEU 1 GG B DEU 1 DEU 1 DEU 1 DEU 2 DEU 2 DEU 2
DEU 2 GG A GG A GG A GG A GG B GG B GG B
DEU 1 GG B DEU 1 DEU 1 DEU 1 DEU 2 DEU 2 DEU 2
DEU 2 GG B GG A GG A GG A GG A GG A GG A
DEU 1 DEU 1 DEU 1 DEU 1 DEU 1 DEU 1
ALL ON 1 GG A
31-62-00-710.fm
GG A GG A GG B GG B GG B
DEU 2 DEU 2 DEU 2 DEU 2 DEU 2 DEU 2
1 COAX OUTPUT 1 = GG A ALL ON 2 GG A
COAX OUTPUT 2 = GG B GG A GG A GG B GG B GG B
CDS - OPERATION - DISPLAY SOURCE SELECTOR
31-62-00
- 545 -
CDS -- OPERATION - CONTROL PANEL SELECT SWITCH
Control Panel Select Switch
The control panel select switch lets you select which

EFIS control panel controls the PFD and ND displays.
The control panel select switch is a three position
toggle switch.
When the switch is in the NORMAL position, the captain

EFIS control panel controls the captain PFD and ND
displays and the first officer EFIS control panel
controls the first officer PFD and ND displays.
When the switch is in the BOTH ON 1 position, the

captain EFIS control panel controls the captain and the
first officer PFD and ND displays.
When the switch is in the BOTH ON 2 position, the first

officer EFIS control panel controls the captain and the
first officer PFD and ND displays.
31-62-00-711.fm
31-62-00
- 546 -

CONTROL PANEL
SELECT SWITCH
DISPLAYS
CAPTAIN F/O
SWITCH DISPLAYS DISPLAYS
POSITION
DISPLAYS
CAPT F/O
SOURCE CONTROL PANEL NORMAL EFIS CP EFIS CP
AUTO BOTH BOTH
ALL ALL ON 1 ON 2
ON 1 ON 2
NORMAL CAPT CAPT
BOTH ON 1 EFIS CP EFIS CP
NAVIGATION/DISPLAYS SOURCE F/O F/O

SELECT PANEL (P5) BOTH ON 2
EFIS CP EFIS CP
31-62-00-711.fm
CDS - OPERATION - CONTROL PANEL SELECT SWITCH
31-62-00
- 547 -
CDS -- TRAINING INFORMATION POINT - STATUS MESSAGES
31-62-00-800.fm
31-62-00
- 548 -

Status Messages The CDS FAULT message is also displayed if two or more
of these circuit cards fail in a DEU or both DEUs have
These are the status messages that can be displayed: one of these circuit cards fail (partial failures):
- INSTR SWITCH (instrument switch) - Graphics generator

- DSPLY SOURCE (display source) - Discrete input/output
- CDS FAULT (common display system fault) - Analog input/output.
- CDS MAINT (common display system maintenance).
The CDS FAULT message is also displayed if a DEU
INSTR SWITCH Message initializes and detects a miscompare between DEU 1 and
DEU 2 for any of the following:
The INSTR SWITCH message is displayed when the captain
and first officer displays use the same source for - Critical data (N1, N2, EGT, or FMC Bus 08/09)
inertial reference data. This condition occurs when the - DEU program pins
IRS source select switch is in the BOTH ON L (left) or - DEU hardware part number
BOTH ON R (right) position. This message is amber and - Operational program software (OPS)
is displayed on the captain and the first officer - Operational program configuration (OPC).
primary flight display (PFD).
NOTE: The CDS FAULT message is not displayed for a
CDS FAULT Message display unit data base (DUDB) miscompare.
The CDS FAULT message is displayed only when the The CDS FAULT message is also displayed when hot
airplane is on the ground and at least one engine is battery bus power is not available to one or both DEUs
off. or when the data loader control panel is set up to load
software into DEU 1 or DEU 2. For these two conditions,
The CDS FAULT message is displayed when there is a the CDS FAULT message is removed from view without a
total DEU failure. A total DEU failure occurs when any replacement message when both engines are running or
one of these circuit cards fails in a DEU: when the airplane is in the air.
- Input/output controller and ARINC 429 input/output For all other causes of the CDS FAULT message, the
31-62-00-800.fm
- Power supply message is replaced by the DSPLY SOURCE message when
- Processor. both engines are running or the airplane is in the air.
31-62-00
- 549 -
The CDS FAULT message is displayed on the captain and The DSPLY SOURCE message also replaces the CDS FAULT
first officer PFD. message when both engines are running or when the
airplane is in the air. The DSPLY SOURCE message
The CDS FAULT message is displayed in amber. replaces the CDS FAULT message for the following
conditions:
CDS MAINT Message
- A DEU failure
The CDS MAINT message is displayed when one of these - A partial failure in both DEUs
circuit cards fails in either DEU: - Miscomparison faults.
- Graphics generator The DSPLY SOURCE message does not replace the CDS FAULT
- Discrete input/output message when the hot battery bus power is not available
- Analog input/output. or when the data loader control panel is set up to load
software into DEU 1 or DEU 2. For these two conditions,
The CDS MAINT message is also displayed when a coaxial there is no message when both engines are running or
coupler fails or when a coaxial cable fails between a when the airplane is in the air.
DEU and a coaxial coupler.
The DSPLY SOURCE message is amber and is displayed on
The CDS MAINT message is white and is displayed on the the captain and first officer PFD.
captain and first officer PFD.
The CDS MAINT message is displayed only when the

airplane is on the ground and at least one engine is
off.
DSPLY SOURCE Message
The DSPLY SOURCE message is displayed when all the

display units (DU) get display data from one display
electronics unit (DEU). This condition occurs when the
31-62-00-800.fm
DISPLAYS-SOURCE selector is in the ALL ON 1 or the ALL
ON 2 position.
31-62-00
- 550 -

-200
CDS
FAULT 135 M MAG INSTR SWITCH
INSTR SWITCH ONE SOURCE OF INERTIAL REFERENCE DATA
CDS MAINT PARTIAL DEU FAILURE, COAXIAL CABLE FAILURE, OR COAXIAL COUPLER FAILURE
DEU FAILURE OR EACH DEU HAS A PARTIAL FAILURE, INCOMPATIBILITY FAULT,

MISCOMPARE OF CRITICAL DATA, HOT BATTERY BUS NOT AVAILABLE, OR DATA LOADER CONTROL PANEL SET
CDS FAULT UP TO LOAD SOFTWARE INTO DEU 1 OR DEU 2 (FOR HOT BATTERY BUS OR DATA LOADER CONTROL PANEL,
CDS FAULT IS REMOVED WHEN BOTH ENGINES ARE RUNNING OR WHEN AIRPLANE IS IN THE AIR)
DSPLY SOURCE DISPLAYS-SOURCE SWITCH SELECTED TO ALL ON 1(2) OR
31-62-00-800.fm
CDS FAULT CONDITION (DEU FAILURE, PARTIAL FAILURE IN EACH DEU, INCOMPATIBILITY FAULT,
CRITICAL DATA MISCOMPARE) WITH BOTH ENGINES RUNNING OR WITH AIRPLANE IN THE AIR
CDS - TRAINING INFORMATION POINT - STATUS MESSAGES
31-62-00
- 551 -
CDS -- TRAINING INFORMATION POINT - SOFTWARE LOADING
31-62-00-801.002
31-62-00
- 552 -

DEU Software DEU must have data about the drive signals for each
type of DU. The DU data base has the data about the
You can do a DEU software load or do a download of DEU drive signals.
BITE data.
You can do a load of the DUDB into the DEU.
These are the types of software you can put in the Approximately 5 minutes are necessary to do a load of
DEUs: the DUDB into each DEU.
- Operational software Operation to Load Software

- Operational program configuration
- Display unit data base. To do a software load into the DEU, use the data loader
control panel. The engines must be off.
Operational Software (OPS)
Select the DEU position on the lower switch on the data
The operation software is the software that operates loader control panel. Select the left or right position
the DEU. on the upper switch on the data loader control panel.
A maximum of 90 minutes is necessary to do a load of the Put the diskette in the airborne data loader.
OPS into each DEU.
When the data load is complete, you can do a check that
Operational Program Configuration (OPC) the new software part number shows on the CDS
IDENT/CONFIG page. This page shows this data:
The OPCs replace most of the hardware program pins used
in other airplanes. The OPCs set the customer - OPS part number
configuration options. - OPC part number
- DUDB part number
Approximately 5 minutes is necessary to do a load of - DEU H/W part number
the OPC into each DEU. - Program pins.
Display Unit Data Base (DUDB) Compatibility Checks
31-62-00-801.002
There are different types of display units for the The DEU finds if these are not compatible:
common display system. The DUs are interchangeable. The
31-62-00
- 553 -
- OPS and DEU hardware
- Program pins in DEU 1 and DEU 2
- OPS to airplane type
- OPS to OPC
- DEU 1 to DEU 2 software.
If the OPS is not compatible with the DEU, the OPS does
not do a load into the DEU. The other compatibility
checks are done at initialization. If the DEU finds
something that is not compatible, you see a CDS FAULT
maintenance message.
Operation to Download BITE Data
The DEU can do a download of BITE data to a diskette.

The diskette must have a format that accepts the
download of the data.
To do a download of BITE data, put the diskette in the

airborne data loader. Select the DEU position on the
lower switch on the data loader control panel. Select
the L or R position on the upper switch on the data
loader control panel. The DEU automatically does a
download of the data to the diskette. The airborne data
loader shows that the load is done.
When you set the two switches to select a DEU on the

data Loader control panel, that DEU does not operate
31-62-00-801.002
the display units. The other DEU supplies the data for
all 6 DUs, and CDS FAULT shows.
31-62-00
- 554 -

DATA LOAD SELECTOR

C CDS DEU X MAINT/BITE
SINGLE SYS
L R ID E N T / C O N F I G 1 / 1
CAPT F/O
UPR LWR
OP S P/N ####-HNP-###-##
SYSTEM SELECT
OP C P/N ####-BCG-###-##
NORMAL
ACMS
DFDAU
FMC
CDU DU D B P/ N ####-HNP-###-##
PFIDS ACARS/CMU
INOP INOP
DE U HW P / N #######-###
INOP INOP
APU DEU
INOP INOP
PR O G RAM P I N S ####
INOP
INOP FCC
SATCOM
1
<IN D EX
INOP
DATA LOADER CONTROL PANEL
CDS IDENT/CONFIGURATION PAGE
31-62-00-801.002 1 OPTIONAL SYSTEMS NOT ACTIVE

ARE LABELED INOP.
CDS - TRAINING INFORMATION POINT - SOFTWARE LOADING
31-62-00
- 555 -
CDS -- TRAINING INFORMATION POINT - CDU CDS BITE PAGES - CDS BITE MAIN MENU
General effect what shows on the DUs. When the engines are on,
it is important to see engine data on the DUs.
The CDS has maintenance data that you can see on the
flight management systems control display unit (CDU). To do a check of the identification and configuration
information, select LSK 4L.
To get access to the maintenance data, select CDS on
line select key (LSK) 5L from the MAINT BITE INDEX. To do a check of the input monitoring discrete status,
This shows the CDS BITE page. select LSK 5L.
On the CDS BITE INDEX page, select DEU 1 on LSK 1L or

DEU 2 on LSK 2L. This shows the CDS MAINT/BITE main
menu for the DEU 1 or DEU 2.
CDS BITE Main Menu
There are five maintenance procedures that you do

through the CDS MAINT/BITE main menu. These are the
procedures:
- Check of the current status

- Check of the inflight faults
- Ground tests
- Check of the identification and configuration data
- Check of the input monitoring discrete status.
To do a check of the current status, select LSK 1L.
To do a check of the inflight faults, select LSK 2L.
To operate a ground test, select LSK 3L. You can not
31-62-00-802.002
operate a ground test if the engines are on because
there is no carrot for LSK 3L. The ground tests have an
31-62-00
- 556 -

MAINT BITE INDEX 1 / 1 CDS BITE INDEX 1 / 1
<FMC ENGINES> <DEU 1

<DFCS APU> <DEU 2
<A/T FQIS>
<ADIRS
<CDS
<INDEX <INDEX
NO GROUND TEST YES

INHIBITED?
CDS DEU 1 MAINT/BITE C D S D E U 1 M A I NT / B I T E

M A I N M E N U 1 / 1 M A IN ME N U 1 / 1
<CURRENT STATUS <CURRENT STA TUS
<INFLIGHT FAULTS <INFLIGHT FAULTS
<GROUND TESTS GROUND TEST S
<IDENT/CONFIG <IDENT/CONFI G
<INPUT MONITORING < I N P U T M O N I T O R I NG
D I SC R E TE ST A T U S D I S C R E TE ST A TU S
31-62-00-802.002
<INDEX <INDEX
CDS - TRAINING INFORMATION POINT - CDU CDS BITE PAGES - CDS BITE MAIN MENU
31-62-00
- 557 -
CDS -- TRAINING INFORMATION POINT - CDU CDS BITE PAGES - CURRENT STATUS
General The suspected LRUs are in the order of most likely to
least likely LRUs that made the fault occur. You should
To do a check of the current status, select CURRENT use this information with the fault isolation manual to
STATUS on line select key (LSK) 1L from the CDS MAIN fix the fault.
MENU. This shows the CURRENT STATUS page.
If a fault goes inactive while the page shows, the
Any active faults detected by the DEU shows. message NOT ACTIVE shows instead of the suspected LRUs.
CURRENT STATUS Page
A single fault shows on a page. The number of current

status pages show on the top right. The number of pages
is the number of current status faults. To show the
next current status fault, select the NEXT PAGE key on
the FMC CDU keypad.
The faults show in the order that the DEU detects the
faults. If the DEU detects a new fault while current
faults show, the new fault page shows as the last page.
This information shows for a single fault:
- Maintenance message number

- Fault description
- Suspected LRUs.
The maintenance message number is a number assigned to

this fault. You can use the maintenance message number
index in the fault isolation manual (FIM) to find the
correct fault isolation procedure to fix the fault.
31-62-00-803.fm
The fault description is a short description of the
fault.
31-62-00
- 558 -

CDS DEU 1 MA INT /BITE

M A IN M E N U 1 / 1
<CURRENT ST ATUS
<INFLIGHT F AULT S
<GROUND TES TS
<IDENT/CONF IG
<INPUT MONI TORI NG
D I S C R E TE S T A T U S
<INDEX
MAINTENANCE TOTAL NUMBER OF

MESSAGE NUMBER CURRENT STATUS
MESSAGES
FAULT
DESCRIPTION
CDS DEU 1 MAINT/BITE C D S D EU 1 M A I NT / B I T E
C U R R E N T ST A T U S 1 / 1 C U R R E N T S T AT U S 1 / 1 2
3 1 - 6 1 0 5 7
NO DME-1 DATA
* S U S P E C T E D L R U( S )*
NO FAULTS D M E 1
OR W I R I N G SUSPECTED
LRU(S)
<INDEX <INDEX
31-62-00-803.fm
CDS - TRAINING INFORMATION POINT - CDU CDS BITE PAGES - CURRENT STATUS
31-62-00
- 559 -
CDS -- TRAINING INFORMATION POINT - CDU CDS BITE PAGES - INFLIGHT FAULTS
31-62-00-804.fm
31-62-00
- 560 -

General page. The number of pages is the number of inflight
faults for this flight leg.
To do a check of the inflight faults, select INFLIGHT
FAULTS on line select key (LSK) 2L from the CDS MAIN This information shows for a single fault:
MENU. This shows the INFLIGHT FAULTS Leg Menu page.
- Maintenance message number
The DEU stores faults for 64 flight legs. The DEU can - If the fault was intermittent
store up to 32 faults for each flight leg. - Fault description
- Suspected LRUs
A new flight leg starts when the airplane has an - Date of fault
airspeed of more than 80 knots. The flight leg ends - Time of fault
when the airspeed is less than 75 knots. If a fault - Altitude the fault occurred
occurs on the ground with engines off, the DEU shows - Airspeed the fault occurred.
the fault as a current fault in CURRENT STATUS. If the
fault exists when a new flight leg starts, the DEU The maintenance message number is a number assigned to
stores the fault in the new flight leg. this fault. You can use the maintenance message number
index in the fault isolation manual (FIM) to find the
INFLIGHT FAULTS Leg Menu Page correct fault isolation procedure to fix the fault.
The INFLIGHT FAULTS leg menu page shows a list of the If the fault occurs more than once during the flight
flight legs that have faults in the DEU memory. The leg, you see the word INTERMITTENT near the top of the
number of inflight faults for the flight leg shows next CDU page.
to the flight leg number. The time the flight leg
started shows under the flight leg. The fault description is a short description of the
fault.
To show the faults for a flight leg, select the LSK
next to the flight leg. This shows the first fault in The suspected LRUs are in the order of most likely to
that flight leg. Leg 01 is the most current flight leg. least likely LRUs that made the fault occur. You should
use this information with the fault isolation manual to
INFLIGHT FAULTS Fault Page fix the fault.
31-62-00-804.fm
A single fault shows on a page. The number of inflight
faults for this flight leg shows on the top of the
31-62-00
- 561 -
The time of the fault is when the fault occurred. If
the fault was intermittent in the flight leg, the time
is the first time the fault occurred.
31-62-00-804.fm
31-62-00
- 562 -

CDS DEU X MAINT/BITE CDS DEU X MAINT/BITE

M A I N M E N U 1 / 1 I N F L I G H T F A U L T S 1 / 1
<CURRENT STATUS
<INFLIGHT FAULTS
<GROUND TESTS NO FAULTS
<IDENT/CONFIG
<INPUT MONITORING
D I SC R E TE ST A T U S
<INDEX <INDEX
NO FAULTS
FAULTS NUMBER OF
FAULTS IN LEG FAULT OCCURRED
MAINTENANCE MORE THAN ONE TIME
LEG START MESSAGE NUMBER
DATE AND TIME
FAULT
DESCRIPTION
CDS DEU X MAINT/BITE CDS DEU X MAIN T /BITE
I N F L I G H T F A U L T S I I / J J I N F L I GH T F A U L T S 1 / 4
<LEG 01 0 4 F A U L T S L E G 0 1 I N T E R M I T T E NT
2 6 A P R 9 8 1 1 : 3 9 Z SUSPECTED 3 1 - 6 8 0 8 2
<LEG 02 0 8 F A U L T S LRU(S) NO DEU-1 DATA ON
2 6 A P R 9 8 0 9 : 0 1 Z CHANNEL 1 CROSST A LK BUS
<LEG 03 0 2 F A U L T S * S U S P E C T ED LR U ( S ) *
2 6 A P R 9 8 0 6 : 3 4 Z D E U - 1
<LEG 06 0 2 F A U L T S D E U - 2
2 5 A P R 9 8 2 2 : 0 8 Z
<LEG 08 0 5 F A U L T S 2 6 A P R 98 12 : 3 4Z
2 5 A P R 9 8 1 9 : 1 5 Z A L T 3 0 4 50 A/ S 23 6
<INDEX BULK ERASE> <INDEX
TIME
31-62-00-804.fm
OF FAULT
ALTITUDE AIRSPEED
CDS - TRAINING INFORMATION POINT - CDU CDS BITE PAGES - INFLIGHT FAULTS
31-62-00
- 563 -
CDS -- TRAINING INFORMATION POINT - CDU CDS BITE PAGES - INFLIGHT FAULTS BULK ERASE
General
You can do a bulk erase of all of the inflight faults

from the INFLIGHT FAULTS Leg menu page. Select INFLIGHT
FAULTS on LSK 2L from the CDS MAIN MENU. This shows the
INFLIGHT FAULTS leg menu page. Then push LSK 6R, BULK
ERASE.
ERASE FAULTS Page
The ERASE FAULTS page shows a caution message that this

action erases all faults that are in the DEU memory. To
erase all faults, push LSK 6L, YES. If it is not
necessary to erase all faults, push LSK 6R, NO.
There is no effect on faults in the other DEU memory.
Do not remove power during the erase procedure. If you

remove power at this time, some faults can stay in
memory.
31-62-00-805.002
31-62-00
- 564 -

CDS DEU X M A I N T /B I T E CDS DEU X MAINT/BITE

M A I N M E N U 1 / 1 I N F L I G H T F A U L T S 1 / 1
<CURRENT STATUS
<INFLIGHT FAULTS
<GROUND TESTS NO FAULTS

<IDENT/CONFIG
<INPUT MONITORIN G
D I S C R E T E S T A T US
<INDEX <I NDEX
CDS DEU X MAINT/BITE CDS DEU X MAINT/BITE CDS DEU X MAINT/BITE

I NF L IG H T F A U L T S 1 / 4 E R A S E F A U L T S M E N U 1 / 1
<LEG XX Y Y F A U L T S
DD MM M Y Y H H : M M Z * ** CAUTION *** *ERASE IN PROGRESS*
DD MM M Y Y H H : M M Z E R A S E C A N T A K E U P T O 3 D O N O T R E M O V E P O W E R
<LEG XX Y Y F A U L T S M I N U T E S A N D W I L L E R A S E W H I L E ER A S I N G F A U L T S
DD MM M Y Y H H : M M Z A L L D E U - X L O G G E D F A U L T S .
<LEG XX Y Y F A U L T S D O N O T R E M O V E P O W E R E R A S E CA N T A K E U P T O
DD MM M Y Y H H : M M Z W H I L E E R A S I N G F A U L T S . 3 M I N U TE S
DD MM M Y Y H H : M M Z ERASE FAULTS?
<INDE X BULK ERA SE> <YES NO>
31-62-00-805.002
CDS - TRAINING INFORMATION POINT - CDU CDS BITE PAGES - INFLIGHT FAULTS BULK ERASE
31-62-00
- 565 -
CDS -- TRAINING INFORMATION POINT - CDU CDS BITE PAGES - GROUND TESTS MENU
General
To operate a ground test, select line select key (LSK)

3L, GROUND TESTS from the CDS MAIN MENU. This shows the
GROUND TESTS MENU page.
You can not do a ground test with an engine on.
GROUND TESTS MENU Page
The GROUND TESTS MENU page shows a list of the ground

tests you can do. These are the ground tests:
- DEU self test

- DU loop test
- DU optical test
- WXR/TERR display test.
To operate the DEU self test, select LSK 1L.
To operate the DU loop test, select LSK 2L.
To operate the DU optical test, select LSK 3L.
To operate the WXR/TERR display tests, select LSK 4L.
31-62-00-806.002
31-62-00
- 566 -

CDS DEU X M A INT / B I T E

MA IN ME NU 1 / 1
<CURRENT ST A TU S
< I N F L I G H T F A U L TS
< G R O U N D T ES T S
< I D E N T / CO NF I G
<INPUT M O NI T O R ING
D I S C RE TE ST ATU S
<INDEX
CDS DEU X MAINT/BITE

G R O U N D T E ST S M E N U 1 /1
<DEU S ELF- TE S T
<DU LOOP T ES T
<DU OPTICAL TEST
<WXR/TERR DI S P LA Y TEST
31-62-00-806.002
<INDEX
CDS - TRAINING INFORMATION POINT - CDU CDS BITE PAGES - GROUND TESTS MENU
31-62-00
- 567 -
CDS -- TRAINING INFORMATION POINT - CDU CDS BITE PAGES - DEU SELF-TEST 1
General of an internal DEU fault, the DEU SELF-TEST FAILED
screen shows. If the reset can be done, the DEU SELF-
To do the DEU self test, select line select key (LSK) TEST (3 MIN) page shows.
1L, DEU SELF TEST, from the GROUND TEST MENU PAGE. This
shows the SELF TEST MENU page. DEU SELF-TEST (3 MIN) Page
SELF TEST MENU Page The DEU SELF-TEST (3 MIN) page shows during the DEU
reset and power up. The time necessary is usually 90
The SELF TEST MENU page shows data about the self test. seconds, but can be 180 seconds if the first reset and
power up fails.
The SELF TEST MENU page does not show test data during
the self test. The SELF TEST MENU page shows test data Training Information Point
when the test is complete.
If the DEU SELF-TEST page shows longer than 180 seconds
The time necessary for the test is 105 seconds. The (3 minutes), select the INIT REF key on the CDU.
first 90 seconds of the test is a reset and power up of
the DEU. After power up, 15 seconds is necessary for SELF-TEST IN PROGRESS
the DEU to do the self test. The time necessary for the
reset and power up can be to 180 seconds because if it If the reset operates correctly, you see the SELF-TEST
fails the first time, the DEU operates the test a IN PROGRESS page.
second time.
To do the self test, select LSK 6R, RUN TEST.
To not do the self test, select LSK 6L, INDEX.
DEU SELF-TEST IN PROGRESS Page
When the you select RUN TEST on the SELF TEST MENU
page, 7 to 10 seconds are necessary for the core
31-62-00-807.002
software to find if a reset can be done. The control
screen shows DEU SELF-TEST IN PROGRESS during the DEU
software analysis. If the reset can not be done because
31-62-00
- 568 -


CDS DEU X MAINT/BITE S E L F - T E ST 1 / 1
G R O U N D T E ST S M E N U 1 / 1
DEU SELF-TEST (3 MIN)
<DEU SELF-TEST
DEU SELF-TEST OR DEU-X BITE INOP
<DU LOOP TEST
FAILED CHECK DEU OR INTERFACE
<DU OPTICAL TEST
U NA B L E T O P E R F O R M R E S E T
< W X R/TERR DISPLAY TEST D UE T O I N T E R N A L F A U L T S .
<INDEX
<INDEX
CAN
NO RESET YES
RESET
RUN? COMPLETE?
YES

SE L F - T E ST M E N U 1 / 1 S E L F - T E S T 1 / 1 S E L F - T E S T 1 / 1
T H I S T E ST I N T E R R U P T S
C D U - D E U C O M M U N I C A T I O N DEU SELF-TEST DEU SELF-TEST
W A I T U P T O 3 M I N U T E S I N P R OG R E S S I N P R OG R E S S
F O R T E S T R E S U L T S .
D I S R E G A R D D E U B I T E
I N O P M S G D U R I N G T E S T .
<INDEX RU N T E S T > <INDEX <INDEX
31-62-00-807.002
CDS - TRAINING INFORMATION POINT - CDU CDS BITE PAGES - DEU SELF-TEST 1
31-62-00
- 569 -
CDS -- TRAINING INFORMATION POINT - CDU CDS BITE PAGES - DEU SELF-TEST 2
DEU Self-Test Results
When the self-test is complete, the CDU shows the

results. If the DEU is good, the CDU shows DEU SELF-
TEST PASSED. The DEU puts the results of the self-test
in memory. The CDU shows the CAUTION display. You must
not remove power to the DEU during this time. When the
CDU shows the INDEX, the test results go to memory.
If the DEU senses faults during the self-test, the CDU

shows SELF-TEST FAILED. The DEU puts the results of the
self-test in memory. The CDU shows the CAUTION display.
You must not remove power to the DEU during this time.
When the DEU removes the CAUTION display, you can push
LSK 6R to see the faults. When you are done, you push
LSK 6L to go back to the index.
31-62-00-813.002
31-62-00
- 570 -


S E L F - T E S T 1/ 1 S E L F - T E S T 1 / 1 S E L F - T E S T 1 / 1
DEU SELF-TEST DEU SELF-TEST DEU SELF-TEST
IN PROGRESS PASSED PASSED

* * * C A U T I O N * * *
D O N O T R E M O V E P O W E R .
S T O R I N G R E S U L T S C A N
T A K E U P T O 3 M I N U T E S .
<INDEX <INDEX <INDEX
YES TEST RESULTS STORED

TEST PASS?
NO
C DS DEU X MAINT/BITE CDS DEU X MAINT/BITE CDS DEU X MAINT/BITE

S E L F - T E S T 1 / 1 S E L F - T E S T 1 / 1 S E L F - T E S T 1 / X
3 1 - 6 1 X X X
DEU S E L F - TE S T DEU SELF-TEST
R R Y Y Y - Y X X X X
FAILED FAILED * S U S P E C T E D L R U ( S ) *
* * * C A U T I O N * * * X X X Y
DO N O T R E M O V E P O W E R . B B B B B B
STO R I N G R E S U L T S C A N
TAK E U P T O 3 M I N U T E S .
< I N DEX FAULTS> <INDEX FAULTS> <INDEX
31-62-00-813.002
TEST RESULTS STORED
CDS - TRAINING INFORMATION POINT - CDU CDS BITE PAGES - DEU SELF-TEST 2
31-62-00
- 571 -
CDS -- TRAINING INFORMATION POINT - CDU CDS BITE PAGES - DU LOOP TEST
31-62-00-808.002
31-62-00
- 572 -

General - Unit brightness.
To do the DU loop test, select line select key (LSK) The DU location shows:
2L, DU LOOP TEST from the GROUND TEST MENUS page. This
shows the DU LOOP TEST MENU page. - LOB for left outboard
- LIB for left inboard
DU LOOP TEST MENU Page - CU for upper center
- CL for lower center
On the DU LOOP TEST MENU page you can select two tests. - RIB for right inboard
- ROB for right outboard.
To operate the first test, select LSK 2L. This makes
the graphics generator (GG) A (coax 1) transmit data to A DU location that is not valid shows as BAD.
the left DUs and the upper center DU, and the GG B (coax
2) transmit data to the right DUs and the lower center The ARINC 429 loop status shows the status of the ARINC
DU. 429 bus from the DU to the DEUs. A PASS or FAIL shows.
To operate the second test, select LSK 4L. This makes The remote light sensor brightness shows as a
the graphics generator (GG) B (coax 2) transmit data to percentage of maximum value. The range is 0 to 100. BAD
the left DUs and the upper center DU, and the GG A (coax shows if the input is bad.
1) transmit data to the right DUs and the lower center
DU. The coax output shows the GG that transmits data to the
display unit. The sources show as:
Display Unit Display
- 1 for GG A in DEU 1 or DEU 2
When you operate the DU loop test, the display units - 2 for GG B in DEU 1 or DEU 2.
show this data:
The coax cable input activity shows the status of the
- DU location four coax cable inputs to the DU. A Y for yes and a N
- ARINC 429 loop status for no shows. A white highlight box shows around the
- Remote light sensor brightness coax cable input that currently transmits to the DU.
31-62-00-808.002
- Coax output source From left to right the letters show these coaxial
- Coax cable input activity couplers:
- Bezel light sensor brightness
31-62-00
- 573 -
- First letter for coax coupler 1 from DEU 1, GG A
- Second letter for coax coupler 2 from DEU 1, GG B
- Third letter for coax coupler 4 from DEU 2, GG A
- Fourth letter for coax coupler 3 from DEU 2, GG B.
The bezel light sensor brightness shows as a percentage

of maximum value. The range is 0 to 100. BAD shows if
the input is bad.
The unit brightness shows as a percentage of maximum

value. The range is 0 to 100. BAD shows if the input is
bad. This value changes if you change the unit
brightness with the brightness controls.
The WXR brightness shows as a percentage of maximum

value. For the left inboard, right inboard, and lower
center display units, the range is 0 to 100. BAD shows
if the input is bad. This value changes if you change
the unit brightness with the brightness controls. For
the left outboard, right outboard, and upper center
display units, the value 0 shows.
31-62-00-808.002
31-62-00
- 574 -

CDS DEU X M AINT /BITE

G R O U N D T E S TS MEN U 1 /1
<DEU SELF-TEST
<DU LOOP TEST
<DU OPTICAL TEST

<WXR/TERR DIS PLAY TEST
REMOTE
DU ARINC 429 LIGHT
LOCATION LOOP SENSOR
<INDEX RIB PASS 50
BEZEL
COAX INPUT LIGHT
OUTPUT ACTIVITY SENSOR
2 YYYY 50
BRIGHTNESS CONTROLS
CDS DE U X M AIN T/ BIT E
UNIT WXR
D U L O O P T E ST M E N U 1 / 1
50 50
< C O A X 1 T O L T D I S P L AYS
C O A X 2 T O R T D I S P L AYS
< C O A X 2 T O L T D I S P L A YS
C O A X 1 T O R T D I S P L A YS DU - LOOP TEST
31-62-00-808.002
<INDEX
CDS - TRAINING INFORMATION POINT - CDU CDS BITE PAGES - DU LOOP TEST
31-62-00
- 575 -
CDS -- TRAINING INFORMATION POINT - CDU CDS BITE PAGES - DU LOOP TEST 2
General
The display electronics unit (DEU) has two graphic

generators (GG). The GGs send display data to the
display units (DU).
The GG display data goes to the DUs on coax cables.

Each GG has one coax cable output. The coax cable
output connects to a coax coupler.
The coax coupler receives the GG display data and

divides the signal into six outputs. Each coax cable
output sends the same display data to the six DUs.
31-62-00-816.fm
31-62-00
- 576 -

1 2 4 3 1 2 4 3 1 2 4 3 1 2 4 3 1 2 4 3
1 2 4 3
1 4
3 2
COAX COAX
COUPLERS COUPLERS
DEU 1 DEU 2
COAX 2
1 2 1
OUT
GG A B A B
31-62-00-816.fm
DU Y Y Y Y
DISPLAY
COAX 1 2 4 3
DEU 1 DEU 2 COUPLER
CDS - TRAINING INFORMATION POINT - CDU CDS BITE PAGES - DU LOOP TEST 2
31-62-00
- 577 -
CDS -- TRAINING INFORMATION POINT - CDU CDS BITE PAGES - DU OPTICAL TEST
General You do the STRIPE test the same as you do the RED test.
For the STRIPE test, the DUs show diagonal white and
To do the DU optical test, you select line select key black stripes. This test lets you easily see line
(LSK) 3L, DU OPTICAL TEST from the GROUND TEST MENU defects. The line defects can be less easy to see on a
PAGE. This shows the DU OPTICAL TEST MENU page. solid display.
You do these tests to examine the DU liquid crystal

display (LCD). The DU BITE circuits do not monitor the
LCD quality. The failures you look for are line defects
and element defects in the LCD.
DU OPTICAL TEST MENU Page
On the DU OPTICAL TEST MENU page, these are the 4 tests

that you can select:
- RED
- BLUE
- GREEN
- STRIPE.
To do the RED test, you select LSK 1L. This makes all
the DUs show red lines. From the bottom of the display,
each line shows less color intensity. The pattern shows
again until you get to the top of the display.
All of the DUs must look the same. A DU with a weak

backlight driver looks different than the other DUs.
The BLUE and GREEN tests are almost the same as the RED
31-62-00-809.002
test.
31-62-00
- 578 -

CDS DEU X MA INT/BITE

G R O U N D T E S T S M E N U 1 /1
<DEU SELF -TEST
<DU LOOP TEST
<DU OPTIC AL TE ST
<WXR/TERR DISP LAY TEST
<INDEX
DU COLOR TEST (TYP)
C DS DEU X MAINT/BITE
D U O P T I C A L T E ST 1 / 1
<RED
<BLUE
<GREEN
< S T R I PE
<INDEX
31-62-00-809.002
DU STRIPE TEST
CDS - TRAINING INFORMATION POINT - CDU CDS BITE PAGES - DU OPTICAL TEST
31-62-00
- 579 -
CDS -- TRAINING INFORMATION POINT - CDU CDS BITE PAGES - WXR/TERR DISPLAY TEST
General
To do the weather radar display test and the terrain

display test, you select line select key (LSK) 4L,
WXR/TERR DISPLAY TEST, from the GROUND TESTS MENU page.
This shows the WXR/TERR DISP TEST page.
You do these tests to do a check of the weather radar

and GPWS ARINC 453 interfaces to the DEUs.
WXR/TERR DISPLAY TEST Page
To do the WXR DISPLAY TEST, you use the directions on

the CDU page. You select the test mode on the weather
radar control panel, and then select the map mode and
the WXR switch on the EFIS control panels. The weather
radar pattern shows on the display units. If one of the
weather radar test patterns does not show when you do
the test, the ARINC 453 interface to the graphics
generator has a failure.
You push LSK 6R, CONTINUE, to do a test of the terrain

display.
31-62-00-810.002
31-62-00
- 580 -

CDS D EU X MA INT /BITE C D S D EU X MAINT /B I T E

G R O U N D T E S T S M E N U 1 /1 W X R/ T ERR D I S P T E S T 2 / 7
<DEU S E LF - T E ST
<DU LOOP TEST

S E L EC T M A P A ND W X R
<DU O P T IC A L TE ST O N LE F T A ND RI G H T
E F I S C ON T RO L P A N E L S
< W X R / T E RR DISP LAY TEST S E L EC T N O RM A L O N
D I S PL A YS
C O N TR O L P AN E L S W I T C H
<INDEX CONT I NU E>
C DS D E U X M A I N T / B IT E CDS DEU X MAINT/BITE CDS DEU X MAINT/BITE

W XR / T E R R D I S P T EST 1/7 W X R / T E R R D IS P T E S T 3 / 7 W X R / T ER R D I S P TE S T 4 / 7
S E LE C T T E S T M O D E O N THE W X R B U S 1 TO DU - L I B W X R B US 2 T O DU - L I B
W X RAD A R C O N T R O L P AN EL W X R B U S 2 TO DU - R I B W X R B US 1 T O DU - R I B
N O TE : S E T T I N G T H E
W X RAD A R C O N T R O L P AN EL VE R I FY T H E W X R T E S T V E R I F Y T H E W X R T E S T
T O TES T M O D E E N S U R ES PA T T ER N I S D I SP L A Y E D O N P A T T E R N I S D I SP L A Y E D O N
T H AT T H E W X R A D A R WI LL B O T H I N B O A RD D I S P L A Y S B O T H I NB O A R D DI S P L A Y S
B E OFF D U R I N G T H IS T EST
< I N DE X C O N T I NUE > CONTINUE> CONTINUE>
31-62-00-810.002
CDS - TRAINING INFORMATION POINT - CDU CDS BITE PAGES - WXR/TERR DISPLAY TEST
31-62-00
- 581 -
CDS -- TRAINING INFORMATION POINT - CDU CDS BITE PAGES - WXR/TERR DISPLAY TEST - TERR DISPLAY
General
You do this test to make sure the GPWS ARINC 453

interface to the DEUs is good.
WXR/TERR DISPLAY TEST Page 5
After the WXR display test is complete, you can do a

test of the GPWS display. You use the directions on the
CDU page and select TERR on the 2 EFIS control panels.
You must be in the correct mode on the navigation
displays.
If 1 of the terrain patterns does not show when you do

the test, the ARINC 453 interface to the graphics
generator is bad, or the WXR/TERR relay has a failure.
To go out of the test, you push LSK 6R, CONTINUE, and

then push LSK 6L, INDEX.
31-62-00-815.002
31-62-00
- 582 -


W X R / T E R R D I S P T E S T 4 / 7 W X R / T E RRD I S P T E S T 6 / 7
W X R B U S 2 T O D U - L I B T E R R B US1 T O D U - L I B
W X R B U S 1 T O D U - R I B T E R R B US2 T O D U - R I B
VE R I F Y T H E W X R T E S T VE R I F Y THE T E R R A I N
PA T T E R N I S D I S P L A Y E D O N PA T T E R N IS D I S P L A Y E D O N
BO T H I N B O A R D D I S P L A Y S BO T H I N BOA R D D I S P L A Y S
CONTINUE> CONTINUE>
CDS DEU X M AI N T / B I T E CDS DEU X MAINT/BITE CDS DEU X MAINT/BITE

W X R / T E R R D I S PT E S T 5 / 7 W X R / T E R R D I S P T E ST 7 / 7 G R O U N D T E S T S M E N U 1 / 1
<DEU X SELF-TEST
T E R R B U S 2 T O D U- LI B
T E R R B U S 1 T O D U- RI B <DU LOOP TEST
S E L E C T T E R R ON
L E F T A N D R I G HT <DU OPTICAL TEST
E F I S C O N T R O L P A N E L V E R I F Y T H E T E R R IA N
P A T T E R N I S D I S P LA YE D O N <WXR/TERR DISPLAY TEST
B O T H I N B O A R D D I SP LA Y S
CONTINUE> <INDEX <INDEX
31-62-00-815.002
CDS - TRAINING INFORMATION POINT - CDU CDS BITE PAGES - WXR/TERR DISPLAY TEST - TERR DISPLAY
31-62-00
- 583 -
CDS -- TRAINING INFORMATION POINT - CDU CDS BITE PAGES - IDENT/CONFIG
General
To do a check of the configuration data, you select

IDENT/CONFIG on line select key (LSK) 4L from the CDS
MAIN MENU. This shows the IDENT/CONFIG page.
IDENT/CONFIG Page
The IDENT/CONFIG page shows this data:
- Operational software (OPS) part number

- Operational program configuration (OPC) software
part number
- Display unit database (DUDB) software part number
- DEU hardware part number
- Program pins.
31-62-00-811.002
31-62-00
- 584 -

CDS DEU X MAINT/BITE

M A I N M E N U 1 / 1
<CURRENT STATUS
<INFLIGHT FAULTS
<GROUND TESTS
<IDENT/CONFIG
<INPUT MONITORING
D I S C R E T E S T A TU S
<INDEX
CD S D E U X MAINT/ BIT E
IDEN T/C ONFIG 1 /1
OPS P/N ### #-HNP- ### -##

OPC P/N ### #-BCG- ### -##
D UDB P/N ### #-HNP- ### -##
DEU HW P/N ##### ##- ###

PROGRAM P INS ####
31-62-00-811.002
< I ND E X
CDS - TRAINING INFORMATION POINT - CDU CDS BITE PAGES - IDENT/CONFIG
31-62-00
- 585 -
CDS -- TRAINING INFORMATION POINT - CDU CDS BITE PAGES - INPUT MONITORING
General
To do a check of the discrete status inputs, you select

INPUT MONITORING on line select key (LSK) 5L from the
CDS MAIN MENU. This shows the DISCRETE STATUS MENU
page. You can only monitor discrete input status with
this page. You cannot monitor ARINC 429 input status.
DISCRETE STATUS MENU Page
On the DISCRETE STATUS MENU page, you select one of the

5 connectors. The connectors are A, B, D, E, and F.
DISCRETE STATUS Page
The DISCRETE STATUS pages shows a matrix of all the

pins on the connector. This is what shows for the
status of each pin:
- G - a ground
- O - an open
- V - 28v dc
- X - not valid
- - - no discrete input on this pin.
You can make sure of the status of a discrete input for

fault isolation procedures.
31-62-00-812.002
31-62-00
- 586 -

CDS DEU X M AI N T/ B I T E
M A I N M EN U 1 / 1
<CURR ENT STATUS
<INFL IGHT FAULT S
<GROU ND TESTS
<IDEN T/CONFIG
<INPU T MONITORI NG
DI S C R E T E S TA T US
<INDE X
CDS DEU X MAI NT/BITE CD S D EU X M A I N T /B I T E CDS D EU X MAINT/BITE

D I SC R E T E S T A T U S M EN U 1 / 1 D I SC RE T E S T A T U S 1 / 2 D IS C RE T E ST A T U S 2 / 2
<INSERT A INSERT D> IN SE RT D INSERT D
A B C D E F G H J K A B C D E F G H J K
<INSERT B INSERT E> 1 - - - - - - - - - - 9 - - - - G G G - - -
2 G G - - - - G O - - 1 0 - - G G G O G G - -
INSERT C INSERT F> 3 - - - - - - - - - - 1 1 O O G G - - G G - -
DI S C R E TE ST A T E S A R E 4 G - G - - - G - - - 1 2 G V - - G - - - G G
DE F I N E D A S: 5 - - - - - - - - - - 1 3 - - - - - - - - - -
G = G R O UN D V = 28 V DC 6 - - O O - - G G G G 1 4 - - G G - - - - - -
O = O P E N X = IN V AL I D 7 G O - - G G G O G G 1 5 - - - - - - - - - -
8 G V O G G G G V G G
<INDEX <I ND EX <IND EX
31-62-00-812.002
CDS - TRAINING INFORMATION POINT - CDU CDS BITE PAGES - INPUT MONITORING
31-62-00
- 587 -
CDS -- SYSTEM SUMMARY - 1
General
This graphic is for reference purposes only.
31-62-00-901.fm
31-62-00
- 588 -

OUTBD DU
STDBY DC INBD DU
L RLS INBD DU
UPPER DU
DC BUS 2
LOWER DU
LOWER DU
L OUTBOARD DU
CAPT BRIGHTNESS C/P
8
DU SELECT
8
CAPT DISPLAY
SELECT PANEL GG CCA 1 L INBOARD DU
EFCP BUS
DEU SOURCE SELECT COAX CPLR 1

CAPT EFIS C/P
EFIS C/P SELECT GG CCA 2
UPPER C DU
EFCP BUS
SPEED REF SLEW
3 COAX CPLR 2
1/AUTO/2
SPEED REF BUGS
16
N1 SET SLEW DISPLAY SOURCE
SELECTOR GG CCA 2
N1 SET BUG 16
FUEL USED/RESET
2 EFCP BUS
1/NORM/2 COAX CPLR 3 LOWER C DU
ENGINE/SYSTEM
EFIS C/P SELECT

ENGINE DISPLAY C/P SWITCH
EFIS C/P SELECT GG CCA 1
DEU SOURCE SELECT

COAX CPLR 4
R INBOARD DU
EFCP BUS
F/O EFIS C/P

8
DU SELECT
8
INBD DU
R OUTBOARD DU
F/O DISPLAY CROSS CHANNEL
SELECT PANEL INTERFACES INBD DU
31-62-00-901.fm
OUTBD DU
R RLS
ARINC 429 F/O BRIGHTNESS C/P
STATUS BUS
DEU 2
DEU 1
CDS - SYSTEM SUMMARY - 1
31-62-00
- 589 -
General
This graphic is for reference only.
31-62-00-902.fm
31-62-00
- 590 -

CP FEEDTHRU BUS 1
AIR DATA
GPWC WXR/TERR ANNUNCIATIONS

BARO CORRECTION
TERR 1
WXR/TERR DATA INERTIAL DATA ADIRU (2) BOTH ON L
WXR/TERR DATA IRS-L SELECT

TERR/WXR NORMAL
TERR 2 PWS CAUTION IRS-R SELECT
RLY R745
PWS WARNING
GPWC PWS FAIL BOTH ON R
WXR ON/OFF ILS
WXRT 1 INST SWITCHING
MODULE
WXRT 2 VOR MMR (2)
TERR/WXR PWS CAUTION

3 RLY R746
PWS ALERTS PWS WARNING DME VOR (2)
PWS FAIL
WXR XCVR
WXR/TERR DATA BOTH ON 2
DME (2)
WXR/TERR DATA NAV SOURCE SEL-L NORMAL
WXR ON/OFF
NAV SOURCE SEL-R BOTH ON 1
VOR
WXR/TERR ANNUNCIATIONS ILS TUNED L & R INST SWITCHING
WXR CP MODULE
CP FEEDTHRU BUS 2 ILS
NAV CONTROL
RA PANELS
DEU - FMC
FMC-L SELECT
FMC-R SELECT ADF RA (2)
FMC 01
FMC 1 BUS 01
FMC 02 ADF (OPTION)

FMC 1 BUS 08 TCAS
FMC 08 FMC 1 BUS 09

MCP DATA TCAS COMPUTER
FMC 2 BUS 08
FMC XFER
FMC 09 RELAY 1
FMC 2 BUS 09
FMC 1 FCC DATA DFCS MCP
FMC 01 FMC-L SELECT

FMC-R SELECT A/T DATA
FMC 1 BUS 02 THROTTLE HOLD DFCS FCC A
FMC 02
FCC DATA
FMC 1 BUS 08
FMC XFER
FMC 08 RELAY 2
FMC 1 BUS 09
FLT CONTROL DATA DFCS FCC B
FMC 09 FMC 2 BUS 08
31-62-00-902.fm
FMC 2 BUS 09 DATA LOADER OUTPUT
FMC 2
FDAU
DEU - FMC
LOAD ENABLE
DATA LOADER C/P
31-62-00
- 591 -
General
31-62-00-903.fm
31-62-00
- 592 -

2
2
SYS 1
2
HYD SYSTEM A SYS 2
3 PRESSURE TX 2
SYS 1
3 2
HYD SYSTEM A SYS 2
FLUID QUANTITY
TRANSMITTER/ 2 PSEU
HYD SYSTEM B
INDICATOR FLUID QUANTITY
TRANSMITTER/
INDICATOR HYD SYSTEM B
OFF/HIGH PRESSURE TX CLSD
AUTO OFF
LEFT PACK OPEN
ON
BLEED AIR
OFF/HIGH ENG 1 BLEED ISOLATION
AIR VALVE
AUTO OPEN OFF
RIGHT PACK CLOSED
OPEN ON
A/C RELAYS L PACK FLOW
CONTROL AND ENG 2 BLEED
SHUTOFF VALVE CLOSED AIR
R PACK FLOW A/C MODULE
CONTROL AND CLOSE
OFF SHUTOFF VALVE
OPEN
OPEN SW
ON CLOSE
WING ANTICE
RLY OPEN
CLSD SW
OFF
CLOSE ENGINE 1 COWL
ANTICE VALVE
ON
OPEN
ENG 1 ANTICE OPEN SW
SW CLOSE
OFF OPEN
CLSD SW
ON ENGINE 2 COWL
ANTICE VALVE
ENG 2 ANTICE
SW
A A
ENGINE AND WING
ANTICE MODULE
ENGINE 1 FUEL
FILTER BYPS LT
CENTER TANK LEFT
31-62-00-903.fm
BOOST PUMP LOW
PRESSURE SWITCH A A
DEU 2 ENGINE 2 FUEL

CENTER TANK RIGHT FILTER BYPS LT
BOOST PUMP LOW
PRESSURE SWITCH DEU 1 FUEL SYSTEM MODULE
31-62-00
- 593 -
General
31-62-00-904.fm
31-62-00
- 594 -

FQIS 1
FQIS 2 AVM
IDLE
FQIS 3
CUTOFF
FQPU
DATA LOADER ENGINE 1
ENABLE RELAY START LEVER
APU RELAY IDLE
CUTOFF
APU ELECTRONIC
CONTROL UNIT ENGINE 2
START LEVER
28V DC RELAY
GCU 1
GCU 2
SMYD 1
ENGINE 1
SMYD 2 START SWITCH
FSEU
28V DC
CLOSE ENGINE 2
START SWITCH
ENGINE 1 EEC OPEN
ENGINE 1
START VALVE CLOSE
31-62-00-904.fm
OPEN
ENGINE 2
DEU 2 START VALVE
ENGINE 2 EEC DEU 1
31-62-00
- 595 -
General
31-62-00-905.fm
31-62-00
- 596 -

FULL
A A
ENGINE 1 CONTROL
ANNUNCIATOR
ALTN
ON
ENG 1 EEC ON/ALTN
EMPTY SWITCH
ENGINE 1 OIL QTY TX ALTN
FULL
ON
ENG 2 EEC ON/ALTN
SWITCH
A A
2 ENGINE 2 CONTROL
2 ANNUNCIATOR
EMPTY
ENGINE MODULE
ENGINE 2 OIL QTY TX
N1 SPEED N2 SPEED
SENSOR (ENG 1) SENSOR (ENG 1) 2
2
N2 SPEED
N1 SPEED SENSOR (ENG 2)
SENSOR (ENG 2)
ENGINE 1 ALTN ENGINE 1

POWER RELAY RUNNING RELAY 1
ENGINE 1
ENGINE 2 ALTN RUNNING RELAY 2
POWER RELAY
L IGN
BOTH
31-62-00-905.fm
R IGN
ENGINE 2
RUNNING RELAY 1
DEU 2
ENGINE IGNITION ENGINE 2
SWITCH DEU 1 RUNNING RELAY 2
31-62-00
- 597 -

Vol.1 (CH 00 - CH 31)

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Vol.1 (CH 00 - CH 31)

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

737-600/700/800/900 TRAINING MANUAL

ALTEON PROPRIETARY. Copyright. See title page for details

MAINTENANCE DOCUMENTS -- INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-00-00 . 146

COMPUTER BASE TRAINING (CBT) -- CHECKLIST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-01-00 . 222

COMMON DISPLAY SYSTEM -- INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31-62-00 . 229

ALTEON PROPRIETARY. Copyright. See title page for details

ALTEON PROPRIETARY. Copyright. See title page for details

ALTEON PROPRIETARY. Copyright. See title page for details

ALTEON PROPRIETARY. Copyright. See title page for details

ALTEON PROPRIETARY. Copyright. See title page for details

GENERAL INFORMATION TASK INTRODUCTION

- RANGE - ELECTRICAL POWER APPLICATION

737 GENERAL - INTRODUCTION

The 737-800 is a two-engine airplane. It is for short

There are many new features. These new features

The airplane has a design range of 2,900 nautical

ALTEON PROPRIETARY. Copyright. See title page for details

NEW YORK SINGAPORE

737 GENERAL - RANGE

These are the general dimensions of the airplane.

ALTEON PROPRIETARY. Copyright. See title page for details

117 FEET 5 INCHES

129 FEET 6 INCHES

737 GENERAL - STRUCTURE DIMENSIONS

Dimensions give locations on the fuselage. The scale

- Body station line

The body station line (STA) is a horizontal dimension.

The body buttock line (BL) is a lateral dimension. You

The water line (WL) is a height dimension. You measure

ALTEON PROPRIETARY. Copyright. See title page for details

737 GENERAL - FUSELAGE DIMENSIONS

The wing has two reference dimensions. These reference

You measure the wing station perpendicular to the wing

You measure the wing buttock line parallel to the

For more information, see the maintenance manual and

ALTEON PROPRIETARY. Copyright. See title page for details

737 GENERAL - WING REFERENCE DIMENSIONS

The vertical stabilizer has four reference dimensions.

- Vertical stabilizer station

Measure the vertical stabilizer station perpendicular

Measure the vertical stabilizer leading edge station

Measure the rudder station perpendicular to the rudder

Measure the vertical stabilizer waterline parallel to

For more information, refer to the maintenance manual

ALTEON PROPRIETARY. Copyright. See title page for details

LEADING EDGE RUDDER

737 GENERAL - VERTICAL STABILIZER REFERENCE DIMENSIONS

The horizontal stabilizer has three reference

Measure stabilizer stations perpendicular to the

Measure stabilizer leading edge stations perpendicular

Measure elevator stations perpendicular to the elevator

For more information, refer to the maintenance manual

ALTEON PROPRIETARY. Copyright. See title page for details

STABILIZER STATION 0.00

ELEVATOR STATION 0.00

- 100 - lower half of the fuselage

ALTEON PROPRIETARY. Copyright. See title page for details

300 200 300

700 100 700

200 - UPPER FUSELAGE

100 - LOWER FUSELAGE

737 GENERAL - ZONE DIAGRAM

Two CFM56-7B engines supply thrust for the airplane.